Category Archives: Economy

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Would you type quicker if you could trace your text on a virtual keyboard instead of type? You can test the theory yourself with a free, limited-time beta download from Swype.

Editorial Director / CNET Money, How-To & Performance Optimization

Jessica Dolcourt leads the CNET Money, How-To, and Performance teams. A California native who grew up in Silicon Valley, she’s passionate about connecting people with the highest standard of advice to help them reach their goals.

If you’re all thumbs on the virtual keyboard, try Swype. Swype

Like Shapewriter for the iPhone, Swype is a gestural alternative for the virtual keyboard that spells out words when you trace them with your fingertip. The software senses a finger press to mark the beginning of a word and a lift to denote the the end, then works out one or more possible combinations to make sense of the jumbled letters in between.

Most of the time Swype gets it right, and if you’re a slow touch-screen typist for whom the hunt-and-peck method isn’t going so hot, now’s your chance to try out Swype.

Swype hasn’t traditionally been open to the public (it is, however, preinstalled on some handsets,) so if you’re interested in sampling the beta, you’d better make your move. The very limited-time beta offer began on Wednesday and will last “probably a few days,” according to Swype’s beta site.

Swype beta will work on HVGA and WVGA Android phones in English, Spanish, and Italian (with more to come.) You may experience some limitations since Swype requires complete integration with the phone for all its features to work. However, skip this download if your phone already came with Swype, because you’ll find that it just won’t work. Light support will come from the forums.

Swype in action
As useful as it can be, Swype isn’t for everyone, particularly if you’re heavy into slang, technical terms, and personal names. Depending what you write and how disciplined you are about contractions (me: extremely,) some aspects of Swype’s previous version may have left you yearning for the built-in keyboard.

Over the time I’ve been beta-testing it, I’ve received errors about the words I wanted being “hidden” behind other words, words capitalizing in the middle of a sentence, and inconsistent acknowledgment of contractions, the latter two of which Swype’s team says this new beta has solved, though we find that it’s still flummoxed by some contractions. Double letters also present a challenge, but jogging twice over the letter of choice usually fills in both letters. You can’t double-tap the space bar to get a period, but you can swipe out a period and the space bar as a workaround; and the standalone version of Swype doesn’t make it immediately known that you’ve added new words to the dictionary (which it does after you type a word and hit Space.)

Stickler that I am with spelling and punctuation, distrusting Swype slows me down as I compulsively check each word before moving on to make sure the swipe worked. I’ve witnessed enough mistakes to carry on this editing practice, especially after one humorously ribald interpretation of a swipe involving an x-rated alternative to the word “gelato.”

Interestingly, using Swype has made me aware of some idiosyncrasies in the English language, such as how often we use contractions that double as complete words, and the abundance of words containing double letters.

There are daily aggravations, sure (why, oh why, can’t the consumer version tap into phone’s the dictionary? However, I knew that Swype had become my preferred method of text entry when I caught myself tracing out words on the iPhone’s standard touch-screen keyboard. Unsurprisingly, I didn’t get too far.

Swype’s latest beta is compatible with any Android-powered phone running OS 1.5 or up that also has an HVGA, WVGA, and FWVGA (480×320, 800×480, or 854×480) screen resolution–including (but not exhaustive to) the Droid family, Sprint EVO and Hero, and the Nexus One.

If you’re constantly tweeting and texting, then you probably swipe to type. While every Android device comes with an on-screen keyboard, it’s possible to install third-party swipe keyboards on Android to make typing a little easier.

These apps are available in the Google Play Store. Check the minimum system requirements to make sure an app is compatible with your version of Android.

The Official Google Android Keyboard: Gboard

Adjustable glide settings.

Built-in web search and GIF functionality.

Free with no ads.

Some settings and features are hidden.

Fewer features than paid versions of other keyboard apps.

Gboard includes built-in support for emoji, Google Search, and GIFs. It also gives you plenty of options in the settings menu. For example, you can tweak the theme to give the interface a personal touch, adjust the keyboard height, or enable one-handed mode. Gboard gives you a few options for glide typing as well, including gesture controls.

The best thing about Gboard is that it’s free. You are never asked to pay to unlock new features, and you never see ads on your keyboard to support the developers. You can also sync your dictionary to your Google account to personalize text correction.

Customized Typing on Android: Chrooma Keyboard

Extensive customization options.

Try all features for free before paying for the pro version.

Hides the best features behind a paywall.

The GIF keyboard takes forever to load.

You can fine-tune all aspects of Chrooma, from the background color to the way that the keys appear on the screen. You can also adjust the font, font size, and default language.

The pro version of Chrooma includes a grammar and spelling checker, which you launch by tapping the icon in the upper-right corner of the keyboard. From there, you can see the app's suggestions.

Best Premium Android Keyboard: Swiftkey Keyboard

Build your own themes.

Built-in language translator.

Predictive text could be better.

Often autocorrects with a capital letter, even in the middle of a sentence.

Swiftkey Keyboard is another fantastic swipe alternative to the default keyboard on your phone. It's reasonably accurate and learns quickly while giving you access to several features. To begin with, you can tweak the way the keyboard looks from the settings menu. You can adjust the theme, button layout, keyboard size, and where it appears on the screen.

You also get access to a clipboard for copied text, and you can build your own custom themes. However, to get access to every feature available, you must pay for the pro version of the app. Pro features include typing speed analysis along with other stats and more theme options.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

You might be able to type 80+ WPM on your PC’s keyboard, but typing on your Android device is a completely different experience. Typing on a touchscreen is quite different, and in most cases, you can only use two thumbs to type. This can lead to a slowdown in typing, and if you send 100+ messages each day, it can be a headache.

Fortunately, like solutions to many other user problems, the Android community has many solutions for this problem as well. In this article we will show you different ways to type faster on Android with the least amount of hiccups.

Change the Default Keyboard

Stock keyboards or your device manufacturer’s keyboard are good, offering reliable shortcuts and features like Auto-Correct, etc. However, there are so many other third-party keyboards with better typing features. I personally use/recommend Swiftkey, but there are many other good Android keyboards as well.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

These keyboards add different features, like ability to customize the look of the keyboard, better prediction, different language support and multiple ways to type. For example, Swiftkey is known for its amazing prediction and auto-correct feature. I literally type with my eyes closed in both English and my own language with hardly a single mistake. I even make mistakes that are almost impossible to pronounce, but it still manages to predict the right word. I can’t do the same with my default keyboard which I have used for a few months as well.

Take Advantage of the Prediction Feature

Now almost all Android keyboards come with the prediction feature which will guess the word halfway through typing it or guess the next word in a sentence. You can take advantage of this feature to type faster by tapping on the right predicted word instead of typing it all. However, you will need to practice a bit to get the hang of it and type faster without any confusions.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

For this as well I recommend to move on from the default keyboard and try third-party keyboards with better prediction. In my regular use, Swiftkey is capable of predicting whole sentences for me, not just one or two words. Many other third-party keyboards can do the same.

Swipe to Type

Swipe to type is another cool and arguably faster way to type. This feature is default on Android 4.2 and above phones, and most third-party keyboards support it. In swipe typing, you glide your finger from one word to another instead of tapping each character. Lifting your finger works as a “space,” so you can type words without any need to press space each time. Of course, swipe typing also requires some practice, and a good prediction and swipe typing app is always a plus.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

You can try Swiftkey or Swype (the creator of Swipe-To-Type); they both are quite accurate.

Voice Typing

Voice typing is an amazing way to type as fast as you can speak, and of course, pronounce properly. If you have an Android 2.3 or above phone, Google offers this feature built in. However, for offline voice typing, you will need to have an Android 4.2 or above phone. Some third-party keyboards also offer the voice typing feature, like Swype.

You can use the Google voice typing feature by going to “Language and Input” option in the “Settings” and selecting “Google Voice Typing.”

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

While typing, just select “Google Voice Typing” from the notification bar, and you will see a Mic in the middle prompting you to speak.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

You can just start speaking, and it will start typing. You should be as clear as possible while speaking and pronounce words properly. There might be a few mistakes in the text, but they can be easily corrected while still spending less time than typing everything. Furthermore, you can also speak and type in other languages apart from English. Just click on the “Gear” icon next to “Google Voice Typing” and select “Languages.”

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Note: voice typing requires an Internet connection. If you want to use the voice typing feature offline, you will have to download the required language pack from the “Google Voice Typing” settings.

Conclusion

There are many ways to type faster on Android, and above are some of the most reliable ones. You can also try using some touch typing apps/games like Type it! which will help you learn to type faster on a touchscreen. If you know other ways to type faster on Android, do let us all know in the comments below.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Nuance Communications Inc. has ventured out from third-party keyboard app business. Technology website, The Verge published on 21 st February 2018, that the tech giant has discontinued its Swype Keyboard app for Android and iOS.

This has been a hassle for loyal Swype users who lost all customizations on their Swype keyboard. If you are still looking for a keyboard app or a keypad app for your Android or iOS to replace Swype, we have reviewed different android and iOS keyboards, and have picked top 3 alternatives to Swype –

1. SwiftKey

SwiftKey is a well-equipped and cool keyboard app with SwiftKey Cloud, created by SwiftKey.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Key Features of SwiftKey

The SwiftKey keypad app stores learned a language that you can use across multiple devices. It can learn how you use language on various social platforms by linking it to your social media and email apps and build your language database.

All user data stored in the cloud is anonymous to ensure privacy.

If you’re still not convinced though, you don’t need to use Swift Cloud and the Android keypad app can still learn your language, and it will store that data on your phone only.

Pros

  • The keyboard app is the slickest among other third-party keyboards in Android with more than 2.5 million downloads.
  • The interface and flow works like no other Android keyboard app.
  • Though swipe keyboard app may take some time for your fingers to adjust, its precision helps when you are in a hurry or texting with just one hand.
  • SwiftKey for Android also has a feature of ‘keypress sounds’ which allows you to customize keypress sounds to different profiles. Mechanical keyboard lovers can use this feature to get the feel of traditional computer typing on their mobile device.
  • It is also easy to switch from uppercase to lowercase, which is quite troublesome in regular iOS keyboard app.

Cons

  • The keyboard app doesn’t automatically scroll to the latest message in the SMS section.
  • SwiftKey is not as good for iPad and iPhone 4s compared to other devices.

Its predictive feature makes SwiftKey Android keyboard one of the best alternatives to Swype Keyboard, and as Apple has allowed third-party keyboards in iOS, you can use it on your iPhone and iPad as well.

2. Gboard

Gboard is a virtual keyboard app created by Google Inc. It features Google search including web results and predictive answers. The keypad app enables easy searching and sharing of GIF and emoji.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Key Features of Gboard

A ‘predictive type engine’ that is easy to use and support for a variety of themes makes this keypad app fun to use. Gboard learns your language and suggests words depending on the context.

Google has also recently updated support recognition for hand-drawn emoticons and ability to predict whole phrases instead of just words.

Pros

    makes searching a lot faster.
  • The space bar also works as a Trackpad.
  • The keyboard app can quickly delete multiple words.
  • Multilingual typing supports a huge range of languages.
  • You can add a permanent number row in the keypad app.
  • It has a separate one hand mode, which is rare in other android keyboards.

Cons

  • Gboard lacks database functionality that is used in SwiftKey. For instance, if you’re chatting about MLB with someone it can’t predict the surname of the player like SwiftKey.
  • You need to add words manually to the dictionary as it cannot store the words itself.
  • The keyboard app crawls through a lot of personal data from your phone.

The smart user interphase and its smooth operation along with a cool emoji prediction features makes Gboard one of the best alternatives to Swype keyboard. Gboard is available for both Android and iOS.

3. GO Keyboard

GO Keyboard is a third party android keyboard app created by Gomo Dev Team. It offers multiple languages and keyboard layouts and can crawl through all your contacts. It learns your language style and predicts words while you are typing.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Key Features of GO Keyboard

The keypad app also changes the layout based on your typing language which can be handy. A standard dictionary for multiple languages, an emoji keyboard, and additional plugins provide a decent user experience.

Pros

This keypad app also supports fantasy text.

  • It has customizable skin and background.
  • It is comprised of a multi-point touch keyboard.
  • The Go keyboard has auto-memory which predictively corrects what you type.

Cons

  • The biggest letdown about this keyboard is security and privacy as it is reported to be allegedly crawling through a lot of user data and sending it to remote servers.
  • Keys are spaced too closely, making it difficult to type in a hurry.

Barring its privacy issues and minor anomalies, the keyboard app provides good user experience.

A personalized keypad app saves a lot of time on the phone and improves productivity overall. While there are a lot of keypad apps on the market today, SwiftKey, Gboard and Go Keyboard are most widely used due to the comprehensive features they offer.

Google has been updating Gboard very regularly and after you have used it for a few weeks giving it time to learn your writing style, the predictive text works like a charm. Most times, you only need to type first few letters of the word you want to use and predictive text does the rest for you.

About Guest Author

Brendon Wong is a blogger who writes for tech, SEO, and internet marketing blogs.

Cannot get a working version of swype. 🙁 Every time I try to install it, I get a notification as soon as I start sliding that says "Trial period has ended." Anyone know how to get a working version, or do I have to wait for beta/release?

This is a virus, download at your own risk.

Do you know how to get this to work on the Hero? Or a similar app I can use?

Unless you are in the beta program there's no way you can get Swype to work. Well, there are in fact some ripped apks, but I wouldn't trust them.

I've been in the beta. It has been very easy to use and my go-to keyboard for a few months now. [Moto Droid 2.1]

How does one get in the beta? Droid user as well. (2.1)

I've had swype for several weeks now on my Evo and i still haven't managed to get faster than normal typing. Part of it is probably that in portrait mode, double tapping a word doesn't bring up the word choice menu – which may be an issue with the beta, i'm not sure. As a result, i have to re-swype several words at the end instead of word-choice-window fixing them.

But on top of that, swyping out small words is tough- 2 and 3 letter words come out wrong 50% of the time, so i've started tapping those out, and only swyping the larger words.

This seems to speed things up a little, but i'm still not seeing how this is more efficient except for times when you only have one hand to type on the keyboard. In landscape mode, i can get out a message just as quickly on the standard keyboard.

This keyboard app is focused on social media and convenient messaging with GIFs, emojis, and stickers. It also provides numerous colorful theme options including dynamic themes and custom backgrounds. It also comes with a very large set of emojis and stickers, giving users the ability to save favorites to a custom emoji keyboard. Personalized layouts and speedy swipe typing are also on hand.

Unlike many keyboards, it includes an avatar creator and the option of using its “future face” technology, an artificial aging app letting you quickly edit a photo of yourself to present aged facial features. This option, however, like many of the fonts and template themes, is limited to premium subscribers. It also requires giving the keyboard app full access in permissions. You may also want to consider purchasing the best keyboard for editing that is billed as a gaming keyboard but is also a great video editing keyboard.

How We Decided

In order to pick the best keyboard for Android devices, we looked for useful and robust keyboard apps that provided both advanced functionality and convenience features, along with solid privacy protection and reliable performance. We looked for useful features like swipe typing or gesture control, searchable GIFs and Emojis, helpful text predictions, and customizable keys while remaining compatible with all your favorite Android keyboard settings.

We also took into consideration aesthetics as well as functionality. We looked for diverse themes along with custom fonts and layouts. The ability to personalize the keyboard and background with custom images was considered a cool extra feature. We gave bonus points to keyboard apps that offered improved typing speed and accuracy via swipe typing and resizable keys.

When it came to GIF and personalized emoji keyboards, we looked for apps that streamlined sharing and promised broad social media utility, looking for the best keyboard for Android Reddit, Twitter, and messaging posts. We gave extra credit to apps that offered a number row and extra features like a search function. Robust performance and a friendly, intuitive UI was a must, while great accessibility features like voice commands and a one-handed or floating keyboard layout were also considered.

Best Keyboards for Android Buyer’s Guide

The Most Important Features to Consider

  1. Customizable Autocorrect Suggestions
    Depending on your preferences, the best keyboard app for Android 2020 and 2021 devices might be one that allows you to customize grammar and spelling suggestions and add words and shortcuts to your own dictionary. Make sure any keyboard app works with all the languages you’re likely to use it for. Some offer more advanced context-specific predictions and grammar check as well.
  2. Swipe Typing
    Some users looking for the fastest keyboard app or the most convenient way to type on an Android device may want to look for Android keyboard apps with “Swype Typing” or gesture typing. This feature enables smoother, quicker input, though it can take some getting used to. The best-designed Android keyboards can help boost accuracy and typing speed this way.
  3. Customizable Settings
    If you’re looking for a keyboard option that gives you more control, consider features like customizable keyboard sizes and one-handed modes, as well as the availability of multiple themes and custom background options. Some android keyboard apps provide the ability to fine-tune security settings and permissions as well, worth keeping in mind if you’re looking for an app for privacy.

Keyboards for Android FAQs

What is the best keyboard for Android?

Depending on your particular needs, you may want a keyboard that upgrades the typing experience of your android phones or tablets with gesture control, swipe typing, and resizable letters. Or you might want a customizable keyboard with a larger array of themes available. Some users also might appreciate additional features like one-handed mode, different keyboard height options, voice typing, or a full, PC-style keyboard layout.

What is the best Android keyboard 2020?

In general, Android keyboard 2020 models may offer some special features not standard on the stock keyboard of Android devices. The newest versions of the most popular Android keyboards benefit from updated contextual predictions, a night mode, pre-installed gesture control for typing faster, and compatibility with more languages.

Is SwiftKey better than Gboard?

Depending on what type of keyboard you’re looking for, the SwiftKey and Gboard keyboards for Android devices each have much to recommend them, with SwiftKey being arguably more optimized for the typing experience, while Gboard provides search, email, maps, and settings integration. Both support hundreds of languages and offer advanced features. If you’re looking for more custom options like an alternative keyboard layout option, different themes, or fancy fonts, you might want to consider a third-party keyboard app.

What’s the best free keyboard for Android?

For productivity-enhancing features like keyboard resizing, voice commands, and glide typing, many Android keyboard apps have versions available as free downloads. Some open-source keyboards are available for Android OS as well. Extra features like custom themes often involve a separate paid download, however.

😎swipe fast keyboard is a brand new smart Swipe keyboard for FREE
😎swipe fast keyboard offers an authentic animated Swipe keyboard for swipe fast lovers
😎Download swipe fast keyboard and make your phone unique and enjoyable!

-About swipe fast keyboard
swipe fast keyboard is a smart and magical keyboard for Android phones. swipe fast keyboard provides you with unique, smooth and fun typing experience. With Swipe style design and Swipe elements, swipe fast keyboard can keep you up with trends among your fellas. If you are a Swipe lover, do not miss it!

-Why swipe fast keyboard?
😮 It is cool!
😊 swipe fast keyboard brings awesome functions beyond your imagination.
🤗 Once successfully applied, you can enjoy:

🤖Smart Reply🤖
swipe fast keyboard suggests replies according to the messages you received. Staying close to AI helps you type less and say more.

🤩Popular Emojis and Gifs🤩
Swipe keyboard comes with 1,000+ most popular emojis and stylish gifs. It provides precise auto prediction.
Just type a word and our smart keyboard will suggest emojis for you.

😄Theme Center😄
There are 3,000+ keyboard themes for you to explore! Including various categories of tech, animals, glitter, nature, cute ones, cartoons, flowers, love, luxury, cool style, business, simple type, sports, special for girls, etc. They are all FREE! Visit our theme center and you will be surprised!

🌟Special Effects 🌟
Amazing effects distinguish this swipe fast keyboard from other Swipe keyboards. All effects correspond to your typing and gestures perfectly:
Amazing 3D effects while tapping
Dynamic particle effects
Gesture input animation
Well-designed Swipe touch tones

✨DIY Themes✨
In our Theme Store, you can customize your own keyboard by choosing background from various wallpapers or even your own photos, button skins, fonts and touch tones! Come and create your own keyboard. Uniqueness is only a DIY theme away!

😉 Smart Typing😉
Triple your typing speed! Swipe keyboard is designed to offer faster and smoother experience. Enabled with AI tech, swipe fast keyboard helps you type faster and smarter via:
Personal Dictionary
Cloud Prediction
Gesture Typing
Voice Input

🔍Smart Search🔍
Tapping the Search feature will direct you to search. No need to switch to a browser app.

💪Strong Compatibility💪
Compatible with ALL types of Android phones:
Samsung, Sony, Xiaomi, Huawei, OPPO, Vivo, etc.

🌐Languages Supported🌐
Swipe keyboard theme supports 85 languages covering 138 countries.

💎 New Functions💎
Selector: select text easily with the help of arrow buttons for further editing.
Delete learned words: long press unwanted learned words in prediction bar will remove them.

💡 Note💡
To apply this awesome keyboard theme with all its cool functions, you need to download our smart keyboard app for your mobile device first.

🙏 If you like this Swipe keyboard theme, please do not forget to leave a 5-star rating and comment to help others identify this wonderful keyboard. Thank you!

Android has a lot of good features, and one among a million of them is the Swype Gesture typing. With this feature enabled, you can easily swipe through the letters of your keyboard, and get done writing a good long text message, or even an email. However, for all of you fast typists out there, you know the struggle when you type so fast that the keyboard application accidentally mistakes it for a swipe gesture, and totally messes up your conversation.

Well, we have a fix. While almost all of the third-party keyboards on Android devices have this option ready for enabling and disabling, we will be demonstrating this using the stock keyboard application, Google Keyboard. In order to disable this annoying feature, we insist you be running on the latest version of Google Keyboard, just to ensure that the layout of settings hasn’t changed all that much. Once you’re set to go, let’s get right into it.

Disable Swype Gesture Typing on Android

  1. First of all, you need to get into the Google Keyboard’s settings panel. This is accessible as an application from your app drawer, or even as a setting from your Settings application. If you cannot find this application in your app drawer, then navigate to Settings > Languages > Google Keyboard. How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android
  2. This will pop open the settings panel for Google Keyboard, which is stuffed with all kinds of tweaks and tips to improve your typing experience. Anyways, right now, you need to hop into the menu named ‘Gesture Typing‘. How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android
  3. Right here, you can further find a million options that you can toy with. We suggest you find the best settings for your gesture typing habits and save them. Although, if you completely want to disable it, then tap on the three options which read ‘Enable gesture typing‘, ‘Enable gesture delete‘, and ‘Enable gesture cursor control‘.How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android
  4. Save the settings, and restart your Android device if the settings don’t affect the keyboard by default.

Nice! The next time you try to type fast, you will not be annoyed by the constant swipe gestures anymore. If you have any issues whatsoever regarding this article, then definitely make sure you hit us down in the comments section.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

With iOS 13 and the new QuickPath feature, the iPhone finally has a native version of the “swipe” keyboards that have been popular on Android devices for almost a decade. You could previously use such keyboards on iOS if you installed a third-party keyboard such as Gboard, SwiftKey, or the discontinued Swype app, but now you no longer have to deal with the occasional hassle of switching keyboards. You can also use QuickPath on the iPad if you’re using the miniature floating keyboard.

The idea behind a swipe keyboard that, instead of typing out words with an individual tap for each letter, you hold down your finger and slide over to each letter. I especially find QuickPath helpful when I’m using the one-handed keyboard while standing during subway rides.

Once you’ve got the hang of the QuickPath keyboard, you should try incorporating some of Apple’s new gestures for cut, copy, paste, undo, and redo.

How to use the QuickPath keyboard

The QuickPath keyboard is available the second you upgrade to iOS 13. To use it, open any app that brings up the keyboard for text entry and make sure you’re using the native iOS keyboard.

When you start typing a word, swipe your finger to each different letter without lifting your finger. Be careful not to press too hard, as you might accidentally activate the digital trackpad. If you were typing “Macworld,” for instance, you’d start with your finger on the M and then swipe over to A, C, and so forth.

Once you’re done with the word, lift your finger and iOS will leave a space so you can start typing the next word. There’s no need to press the space bar. To start the next word, just repeat the process.

You won’t even have to worry about double letters in common English words as iOS will usually do the work for you. If you swipe-type “bal,” for instance, it will show up as “ball” when you lift your finger. You can see QuickPath in action below.

How to use QuickPath on an iPad

You can’t use QuickPath on a normal iPad keyboard, but you can use it with the miniature floating version that appears when you pinch inward on the default widescreen digital keyboard in iPadOS 13.

To stop using the floating keyboard, pinch outward on the keyboard interface. Head to this page for a more detailed walkthrough.

How to disable QuickPath

There’s a good chance you may not even realize QuickPath is active unless you actually try to use it. It doesn’t affect normal keyboard typing. Even so, if you find it’s getting in the way of your experience, here’s how to turn it off.

Open the Settings app.

Toward the bottom, you’ll see a toggle for Slide to Type. Turn it off, and you’ll be done.

Why bother to use unlicensed Swype on your phone? The most innovative soft keyboard, 2009 GSMA Mobile Innovation Champion – TouchPal Keyboard is coming!

Did you think TouchPal is just another keyboard? Take a look at the following video… and get SHOCKED!

Would you like to be the first to try it out for free? Just reply to this post with "Apply for beta testing", and we will PM you the build. Or you may follow us on Twitter or like us on Facebook, and send us message with "Apply for beta testing".

[NOTE 7/28]: Up to now, we have received thousands of applications for beta testing from you dear including here xda forum, facebook and Twitter. Thank you so much for your great enthusiasm, your attention, like and support of TouchPal! We will start to send out the beta version tomorrow in turn according to applying time. There are too many people in list so it will take quite some time for us to send to you all. We will be grateful for your being patient if you haven’t received our message. Thank you again!

TouchPal Keyboard Highlights:
** TouchPal Curve **
TouchPal Curve is the next generation of swiping technology. It brings prediction to sliding. In Swype, you have to slide the complete word, and you’ll easily get lost with long words. Using the Predictive Sliding technology in TouchPal Curve, you may pause in the middle of a word to get prediction. You can slide only a very small part to finish a long word.

** Blind Type **
With TouchPal’s patented mistyping correction technology, blind type is no longer a dream! You may type 50% faster with TouchPal Keyboard because you don’t need to worry about making mistakes.

** Smart Prediction **
TouchPal Keyboard predicts words in a smart way. The prediction is based on sophisticated language models and machine learning. It also learns your input pattern and optimize the prediction that works best for you ONLY! It may save up to 80% of keystrokes.

** Multilingual support **
We are releasing TouchPal Keyboard in English, Portuguese, Spanish, French, Russian, German, Chinese, and many more languages.

Note: This version is NOT available on Android Market yet. The current TouchPal keyboard in Android market only supports Chinese and Enligh, and doesn’t support sliding input or multi-languages. We will release this new version in the market after beta testing is finished.

It’s a weird sort of paradox: One of the most popular apps for Android is also one of the hardest to get.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

I’m talking about a little something called Swype. Swype replaces your Android phone’s on-screen keyboard with a slightly strange-sounding alternative: Rather than tapping keys individually, you slide your finger around your screen — without ever lifting it — to input the words you want. According to Swype’s creators, this unique method of typing allows you to input text 30 percent faster than you could with a standard smartphone keyboard.

Swype comes preinstalled on a handful of Android devices, but if you don’t have one of those phones, the app can be tough to get your fingers on. The reason: Swype is in a limited beta mode, and it welcomes new users only once in a while.

Well, call it a Festivus miracle: Swype is currently accepting new members into its beta world. You may not be able to get Android Gingerbread on your phone by New Year’s, by golly, but you can get this.

If you want to sign up for the Swype beta program and try the slide-to-type keyboard method for yourself, just head over to Swype’s beta site and click on the link to register. The app is free, but there’s no telling how long registration will remain open — so if you’re interested, you might want to sign up soon.

Of course, Swype isn’t the only alternative method of inputting text with Android. Personally, I like a third-party keyboard replacement called Swiftkey; it predicts text as you type and can save quite a bit of time. It’s also very easy to pick up, while a program like Swype has a learning curve and requires a certain amount of patience and adaptation.

Whatever your preference, there are plenty of options out there — and it never hurts to explore.*

*Unless you forcefully poke yourself in the eye while doing it.

JR Raphael is a PCWorld contributing editor and the author of the Android Power blog. You can find him on both Facebook and Twitter.

It’s hard to imagine that years ago people had to repeatedly tap their phone’s number buttons to get letters in order to form words for texting. Now, built-in keyboards on smartphones are the norm, with users tapping a virtual keyboard to text and the keyboard guessing several potential words, even as you type them like Google does when you’re searching keywords. Texting is even easier now with Swype keyboard, and the following tutorial will show you how to use this type of keyboard.

1. Setting up– Most Android phones have Swype installed by default. Some may have to download the keyboard. To enable Swype, go to your phone’s Language and Input under Settings. Change your input method to Swype if you have it already or have it installed.

2. Swyping words– To Swype a word when texting, place and hold your finger on the first letter of the word. Slide your finger to the subsequent letters, releasing when the word is finished.

3. For capitalized words– Manually tap the arrow icon to bring up capital letters. Tap the first letter, then slide your finger over the remaining letters.

4. Double letters– For words with double letters, such as the word letter, slide your finger through the word as normal, but make a circle around the t after you swipe through it the first time to duplicate it. It may take some time to get used to it, but once you master it, you’ll be texting faster than you ever thought possible.

How do you review an alternate software keyboard for Android efficiently? By taking it for a test drive of course. I`m typing this article on my Samsung Galaxy Note 2 phone right now. While it is certainly slower than t typing the article on the physical keyboard attached to my desktop PC, it works better than I thought it would.

Swype is a commercial app – available as a 30-day trial to test it out – for the Android operating system that improves your typing speed in the long run. That is, unless you happen to hack dozens of messages into your phone per day and have grown to become the Flash of phone keyboards in the process. If you are a regular phone user, like I’m, you may benefit highly from Swype.

The app introduces four different methods to enter text in to any app running on your phone or tablet.

  • Swype: you enter words by drawing with your finger across all letters. Just put your finger on the first letter of the word and move it in one swift action across all the letters the word is made up of.
  • Speak: you can speak to enter text this way (using Dragon dictation)
  • Write: use your fingers or a stylus to write on the phone’s screen.
  • Tap: the default way of entering text on Android devices.

You may need some getting used to time before you can use the Swype technology efficiently though as it feels kinda strange at first to move through all letters on the keyboard. You will notice that you are getting faster with every minute though, and several optimization features aid you here as well. Swype adds spaces automatically, and uses an auto-correct feature to automatically correct misspelled words for you so that you do not have to start over that often.

You do need to to memorize some of the commands that it makes available to make full use of the functionality it makes available. You can for instance capitalize words by swiping to the Shift key once you have finished the word, add punctuation by swiping to it, or double letters by scribbling on the letter or looping on it.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Swype introduces several interesting text manipulation shortcuts. Swipe from the menu key on the keyboard to a to mark all text on the screen. Do the same to x to cut the text, to c to copy it, and to v to paste text from the clipboard.

The app includes a learning component that tries to improve word predictions and other features based on past use of the Swype application. In theory, this should improve your typing the longer you use the application.

If English is not your default language, you need to download and install support for one of the 60 languages and 20 dialects that Swype supports right now.It is easy to do. Just open the options, select languages here, then download languages and select the language that you want to add to the application. Once you have added at least one additional language, you can switch between them easily, for instance by moving from the Swype button to the space key.

Here is a demo video that may help you understand better what Swype is offering:

Is Swype worth the price? That depends a lot on how much you type on your phone, or plan to type if Swype speeds things up for you. I’d highly suggest you download the free trial to test it out for a week or two to see how fast you can be with it. If it makes a difference, it is definitely worth the 99 cents it is currently available for in the Play store.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Bàn phím Swype cho Android thay thế mổ chữ cái bằng cách lướt ngón tay của bạn qua chúng. Swype tự động diễn giải cử chỉ của bạn và tìm ra từ bạn định gõ.

Swype có thể nhờ vào tính linh hoạt của Android – nhà phát triển bên thứ ba có thể thay thế bàn phím hệ thống của bạn, cung cấp trải nghiệm nhập văn bản mới. Người dùng iPhone không gặp may.

Chuyển sang Swype

Nhiều thiết bị Android đi kèm với bàn phím Swype nhưng không được bật theo mặc định. Để tìm hiểu xem bạn đã cài đặt Swype chưa, hãy nhấn và giữ bất kỳ khu vực nhập văn bản nào bằng ngón tay của bạn. Bạn sẽ thấy một menu.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Tập tinPhương pháp nhậpThực đơn trong thực đơn.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Chuyển sang Swype bằng cách nhấn vào nó nếu nó xuất hiện trong menu.

Nếu bạn chưa cài đặt Swype, bạn có thể tải xuống bản beta từ trang web của Swype. Đây là một ứng dụng phi thị trường, do đó, bạn sẽ phải kích hoạt tùy chọn Nguồn không xác định của Wap trên Android để cài đặt nó.

Cách sử dụng cơ bản

Nếu bạn muốn gõ vào cách sử dụng cách gõ trên bàn phím màn hình cảm ứng thông thường, bạn sẽ chạm lần lượt từng ký tự, nhấc ngón tay khỏi màn hình sau mỗi lần nhấn. Bạn có thể phải quay lại và chỉnh sửa những gì bạn đã gõ nếu ngón tay của bạn bỏ lỡ một chữ cái.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Trên Swype, bạn vuốt qua các từ. Chạm ngón tay của bạn vào H, di chuyển nó đến O, di chuyển nó đến W và nâng ngón tay của bạn. Swype sẽ tự động phát hiện từ thích hợp và đặt nó vào hộp văn bản.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Tôi thực sự đã overshot O ở đây và đi đến P thay thế. Swype đủ thông minh để sửa lỗi này và biết rằng tôi có thể có ý định gõ vào cách thức, không phải là hp hpw.

Thay vào đó, nếu tôi có ý định gõ kiểu Hy vọng thì thay vào đó? Không vấn đề gì. Swype hiển thị các từ có thể khác phía trên bàn phím của bạn; chạm vào một từ để sử dụng nó thay thế.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Điều này hoạt động ngay cả khi bạn đang gõ một vài từ cùng một lúc. Bạn có thể nhấn vào từ không chính xác trong trường nhập văn bản để chọn từ đó và xem các từ thay thế được đề xuất.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Để nhập các từ bổ sung, nhấc ngón tay của bạn từ màn hình giữa mỗi từ. Swype tự động chèn khoảng trắng cho bạn.

Thư đôi

Swype cố gắng phát hiện khi một từ, chẳng hạn như, geek, Yêu cầu hai chữ cái giống nhau trong một hàng. Cũng có một cách để nói với Swype rằng bạn muốn có nhiều hơn một chữ cái: tạo một vòng lặp nhỏ trên chữ cái hoặc viết nguệch ngoạc lên nó trong khi vuốt.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

viết hoa

Swype tự động viết hoa các từ xuất hiện ở đầu câu, nhưng bạn cũng có thể sử dụng một cử chỉ đặc biệt để viết hoa các chữ cái. Nếu bạn muốn nhập kiểu Cách thức, với chữ H viết hoa, hãy bắt đầu tại H, vuốt lên trên và tắt bàn phím, vuốt xuống bàn phím và vuốt qua các chữ cái khác một cách bình thường.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Thêm từ vào từ điển của Swype

Phép thuật của Swype phụ thuộc vào từ điển nội bộ của từ. Nếu nó không biết một từ hoặc từ viết tắt mà bạn muốn gõ, nó sẽ không cho phép bạn vuốt từ đó. May mắn thay, bạn có thể tự thêm từ. Giả sử chúng tôi muốn thêm HTG vào danh sách từ. Swype cũng có thể được sử dụng như một bàn phím bình thường, săn tìm, vì vậy chúng ta sẽ chạm vào nó một cách bình thường.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Ở dưới cùng của màn hình, Swype gợi ý NTH là trận đấu gần nhất trong từ điển của nó. Chúng ta có thể nhấn vào tùy chọn HT HTG trên đó để chọn nó.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Chạm vào “Thêm vào từ điểny tùy chọn để thêm từ mới của bạn vào từ điển của Swype.

Dấu câu và từ đơn

Để thêm dấu chấm câu, hãy vuốt từ dấu chấm câu vào thanh dấu cách. Ví dụ: để thêm dấu phẩy sau khi gõ một từ, hãy nhấn ngón tay xuống dấu phẩy, di chuyển nó đến thanh không gian và nhấc nó lên. Điều này sẽ tự động chèn dấu chấm câu, theo sau là khoảng trắng, để bạn có thể tiếp tục vuốt. Bạn cũng có thể vuốt vào thanh không gian để gõ một từ đơn lẻ, như là một chữ hay một chữ I, theo sau là một khoảng trắng. Swype tự động viết hoa từ chữ I. I.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Giả sử bạn muốn nhập từ nồi nồi. Lịch trình trực tiếp là một đường thẳng từ P đến T. Nhưng đó có thể là một số từ: pot, put hoặc pit.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Vuốt của bạn không phải đi theo con đường trực tiếp. Tránh chữ U và I và Swype sẽ biết chính xác từ của bạn.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Cấu hình Swype

Bạn có thể nhấn và giữ phím Swype ở góc dưới bên trái của bàn phím để truy cập cài đặt của Swype. Bạn cũng có thể tìm thấy các thiết lập của nó trong Ngôn ngữ và bàn phím trong menu cài đặt hệ thống của bạn.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Từ màn hình cài đặt của Swype, bạn có thể điều chỉnh ngôn ngữ và tùy chọn của Swype, quản lý từ điển cá nhân của bạn và xem các mẹo và trợ giúp của Swype.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Swype có vẻ như là một ý tưởng khá kỳ lạ lúc đầu – ảnh chụp màn hình của nó trong hành động, với những nét vẽ nguệch ngoạc trên khắp bàn phím, có thể trông hơi khó hiểu. Nhưng nếu bạn thử Swype, bạn sẽ ngạc nhiên khi mọi thứ nhấp vào vị trí nhanh như thế nào.

By Roshan – October 4, 2012 – 5 comments Email article | Print article

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for androidOne of the innovative features introduced by Android is the swipe input method. Some love it while some hate it. If you are of the former group, the app Swipe Input Method – Swipe to Type is for you. But after using this app, you might shift to the latter!

What is it and what does it do

The best way to know what this app does is to see it in action. Grab your friends droid and enable the swipe keyboard or what the heck, just download this app for free to check this feature out. Basically, this is a notes app that uses a new type of keyboard; you input text into the app by swiping from one key to another on the keyboard and the app recognizes the word you want to input based on your swipes.

  • The swipe function works
  • Touch response with the alternate keyboard is good
  • Text prediction is present
  • Free version is ad-supported
  • Text prediction is pathetic
  • Ugly design and looks
  • No integration of swipe keyboard into other apps, such as Notes or Messages app — you must copy + paste text from the app if you want to insert it into another app
  • No option to mail or save the text you type

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for androidThe attempt of this app is, obviously, to reproduce the success of Android’s Swype keyboard. However, the app shows an overall disappointing performance in all its aspects. Not only does it lack some features, but it doesn’t even do what it advertises itself to do.

The app welcomes you with an ugly plain yellow screen filled with ads. Tap the yellow sheet to start swiping. Initially, the swiping is difficult and seems that the normal typing is faster. But after some practice, you really gain speed. Although the app performs well for simple words, problems begin when dealing with complex words — the text prediction is slow and inaccurate.

Furthermore, Swype Input Method can be considered as an “app supported ad” instead of an “ad supported app”. Too many ads popup every time you open the app, along with requests of upgrade. A dedicated unlabelled button for ads is also included. Anyone who accidentally presses the button gets redirected to the ad location. Ugh.

Aside from all that, the biggest drawback to this app is there is no integration with other types of apps. In other words, the swipe keyboard is only available within this app; you must type whatever you want into the app and, if you want to use that text elsewhere, you have to manually copy and paste it. This is due to app communication restrictions in iOS by Apple and we can’t blame the dev for that. But, having an e-mail to message function (to pass the content to other apps) is surely possible but is unavailable in this app.

Conclusion and download link

What can I say about this app? Just stay away from it, that is all. If you are accustomed to swipe keyboards in Android and can’t live without them, you can check out this app. Or if you are jailbroken, you can try the Swype tweak from Cydia, which is far better. Overall, only go with this app if you are desperate.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

The stock keyboard that comes by default with your Android device is never sufficient. One of the greatest advantages of being an Android user is the availability of third-party solutions. There are several Android keyboard apps available, varying in functionality to meet your typing style. You can easily swap your stock keyboard to a perfect Android keyboard that is easy and convenient for you. The task of choosing the right keyboard is never easy and hence we are discussing ten Android keyboard options that will help you make the right choice.

1. Swype

Swype is one of the oldest gesture-typing keyboards and has perfected its swipe-to-type engine. Several OEMs have included Swype in their devices but for those who don’t have it, you can now download it from Google Play Store. The predictive text engine offered by Swype is nearly accurate. It offers a smooth and a friendly interface that is convenient for typing. Swype includes dictionaries, great speech recognition and easy language switching. It is fast, flexible and provides extensive hotkeys.

2. Smart Keyboard PRO

Smart Keyboard PRO is a great competitor to other Android keyboard apps in the market. It is a multi-touch keyboard with support for many languages. It offers several customization options and skin themes. Users can customize the settings to suit their style and need. It also offers a smart dictionary, T9 and compact mode, custom Auto-text and prediction features which make it one of the coolest keyboard apps.

3. SwiftKey

SwiftKey is a great all-in-one keyboard app that provides excellent features. The predictive text functionality of SwiftKey is considered one of the best in the league of Android keyboards. It supports multiple layouts and keyboard sizes which is ideally suited for any tablet device. It is one of the best trace keyboards. It also supports gesture typing which makes it convenient to type. Overall, SwiftKey is popular among Android users and is worth a try.

4. Fleksy

Fleksy is an innovative keyboard that uses the traditional QWERTY layout. It has a powerful text predictive engine that is pending for patent approval. It provides an auto correct engine which ensures you are typing the right text even when you are looking away. Fleksy’s latest version has been re-designed to add new themes and supports new languages. The interface is simple offering an effective typing experience. With its revolutionary technology, Fleksy is an awesome keyboard app for your android device.

5. Google Keyboard

Google Keyboard is the stock keyboard that comes with the Nexus device. It is also available on Google Play Store and offers several features which make it a good choice as an alternative keyboard. It provides gesture typing, Flow/Swype style dragging to type. It provides support for emoji and a toggle button to switch back to the keyboard. It is a simple keyboard with basic features that will meet your typing needs.

6. Kii Keyboard

Kii keyboard is a robust keyboard which packages the best features of any Android keyboard app. It renders accurate keyboard predictions which make typing easy. It provides support for multiple keyboard layouts. Hence, you don’t have to worry if the keyboard would suit your android device. You can choose a layout that best fits your device, customize themes and enjoy typing. It supports gesture typing and split keyboard layouts. It is a true multi-touch keyboard that will never let you down.

7. Minuum Keyboard

Minuum features a proprietary keyboard setup different from the conventional QWERTY layout. Initially, you may find it a bit difficult to get accustomed to the layout but once you get used to it, you will be able to experience fast typing. It is extremely flexible and provides a rich set of features. Text prediction is its strength and it relies heavily on its prediction engine to offer a swift typing experience.

8. Go Keyboard

Go Keyboard is one of the coolest Android keyboard apps. The app aims to make typing a fun experience with its colorful themes and support for skins. It provides predictive texting support for multiple languages. It features auto-memory and correct as you type options. Typing using a Go Keyboard is easy and comfortable. Some users are put off by the various color themes but the app provides great typing features which is hard to ignore. The app is available for free on Google Play Store.

9. TouchPal X Keyboard

The sentence gesture technology of TouchPal X keyboard has made it one of the most sought after Android keyboard apps. The accuracy of word gesture and sentence gesture features has made this app a great competitor in the market. The contextual prediction support offered by this app even saves up to 90% of your key strokes. It is an intelligent app that continuously learns from your input and provides personalized output suggestions. Voice- to-text support is also provided. The layout is simple and elegant which makes typing a joyful experience. You will be able to type faster than usual with this layout.

10. SlideIT Keyboard

SlideIT offers a unique typing experience. You can input text by sliding your fingers along the keyboard. It provides predictive sliding feature that completes your words before you slide along the letters completely. It offers an intuitive user interface that allows sliding, tapping and accessing shortcuts. There are several themes available for download so users can always pick a theme that matches their preference. It is a lightweight application that saves battery power consumption.

I've been bouncing back and forth between Swype and SwiftKey for almost 8 months and I thought I would just post some of my thoughts. They may be useful for someone trying to decide.

Swype: This is definitely a fast keyboard but it has some drawbacks. For one it's not as robust as SwiftKey. There's often times when the word suggestion will simply disappear and be replaced with a black bar. It has also gone haywire on me more than once, putting the cursor at the end or beginning of a word even though I lifted my finger with the cursor in the middle of the word. I've also found that Swype is much faster for someone who can spell well. I'm a pretty decent speller but when I'm drunk it goes to shit. I've actually become a better speller after forcing myself to use this keyboard for a few months.

SwiftKey 3: This is about as straight forward as it gets. A lot like the ICS keyboard but with better word suggestion and error correction. The only flaw I've really found is word suggestion is kind of a gimmick. I I think it takes longer to look up at the suggested words after every keystroke than it would if you just mashed out the word entirely. That's another thing about this keyboard that's impressive, the word correction. I can seriously just button mash my life away and somehow the thing knows exactly what I wanted to say. Very impressive. Very conducive to dual finger typers.

Conclusion: If you know how to spell Swype is a very quick input method. However if you get frustrated quickly trying to correct words this is not the keyboard for you. There's been a few days when I use Swype all day long and then after a few drinks with the buddies it's back to SwiftKey. If you are a double finger typer I really suggest SwiftKey. The only caveat to this is again spelling, if your a good speller you owe it to yourself to try Swype.

More than a few Android users have fallen in love with the alternate keyboard Swype as a way to make text input on a touchscreen just a bit easier, and now Swype’s co-founder is hoping to revitalize the keyboard yet again — this time, on tablets. “Even though you can swipe on a tablet, it will max out at about 40–45 words a minute,” Swype co-founder Randy Marsden tells The Verge. “I can type faster than that. Most people can.” Through a separate company, Marsden is now working on a keyboard called Dryft, which — as the name suggests — will drift around the screen if your fingers become slightly misplaced.

A promised 80 words per minute on a touchscreen

Marsden’s goal is the same: to make typing on a flat, glass keyboard a little bit more comfortable. Since there’s no physical way for users to know where their fingers actually are on a tablet’s keyboard, typing has never been the smoothest process. Marsden’s solution for the bigger screen is to just move the keyboard around to wherever a user seems to think it’s located. This, he says, will allow people to type at over 80 words per minute — a speed that rivals typing on a physical keyboard.

In its current incarnation, the keyboard’s home row will appear directly under a user’s fingers when they place all eight of them down on the keyboard at once, just like they were getting ready to type. Though it isn’t available to use just yet, a closed beta is scheduled for early next year with a likely commercial launch sometime in the first half of 2014. Dryft’s first public demo was on Monday, at the TechCrunch Disrupt conference in San Francisco.

When it does launch, don’t expect to pick up Dryft in an app store. Like Swype, Marsden intends to have the keyboard come bundled with hardware. While that may in part be a way to handle monetizing the keyboard without requiring users to directly pay for it, it may also be a technical necessity. “The device has to have a certain fidelity of hardware in order for [Dryft] to work,” Marsden says.

Dryft isn’t headed to an app store

Both a device’s touchscreen and accelerometer have to be sensitive enough to allow Dryft to detect the subtle movements of each finger. That may not seem like a lofty requirement, but Marsden says until recently most tablets didn’t meet it. “The tablets that are shipping right now meet those minimum standards that we have, but as little as earlier this year, the tablets shipping didn’t.” He’s already begun talking to partners about having the new keyboard come bundled.

Unlikely enough, the broader technology for Dryft comes out of work that Marsden has done for dentists. Dryft has been spun off from the company Cleankeys, which manufacturers flat keyboards covered in Gorilla Glass — a description not unlike the surface of a tablet — meant for hygienic environments. While Apple and others may be toying with voice as the input of the future, Marsden thinks flat-surfaced keyboards will only stick around — and someone will have to make a good way to type on them.

Considering the fast-paced life of today, it's only natural that people rush from one meeting to another and don't have time to do the simplest things properly, like writing a text.

But Swype Keyboard Free can prevent you from sending texts with misspellings and grammar mistakes, using its nifty features that compete with some of the top applications in this category. However, it's only free for a 30-day trial afterwards users must pay to continue using the app.

Intelligent keyboard with plenty of instructions

Instead of leaving users to find out for themselves how the app works, Swype Keyboard Free comes with plenty of instructions and tips to get you started. It comes with extensive information on how to use the app and reach all its features. After you've selected the app as your default one, you can choose from 70 input languages, including some dialects.

Highly customizable keyboard

The great thing about Swype is that the keyboard is highy customizable. You can choose from a number of themes to apply, have the app be displayed only in portrait or landscape mode and adjust keyboard height. In addition, you can have it bold font on keys or adjust word choice list font size.

You can disable auto-correct, but it's a neat feature that works like a charm even when switching between languages. The greatest thing about this app is that you can simply swipe your finger over the keyboard to write words and entire sentences. The app also analyzes entire sentences and underlines potential errors for quick fixing, and suggests likely alternatives.

Backup and sync your dictionary

The keyboard keeps a dictionary with words that you've typed in, but users should know that the app records usernames, passwords and email addresses that you've typed in. It also integrates with Facebook and Twitter so that contact names are added to your dictionary.

The app lets users backup their Swype dictionary and sync it across multiple devices. In addition, you can have it automatically download popular, new words based on language and location. It also supports TTS.

The Swype utility on the Droid Bionic is designed to let you type like greased lightning on the touchscreen. The secret is that Swype enables you to type without lifting your finger from the keyboard; you literally swipe your finger over the touchscreen to rapidly type words.

Although Swype is an amazing tool, it’s not for everyone. It appeals mostly to the younger crowd, which sends text messages like crazy. Still, Swype is a worthy alternative to using the normal onscreen keyboard: Even when you’re new and slow with Swype, you’ll probably create text faster than doing the old touchscreen hunt-and-peck.

Swype may be fast, but not as fast as using dictation.

Don’t confuse Swype with Skype, which is a utility you can use to place free phone calls and send instant text messages over the Internet.

Activate Swype on the Droid Bionic

To switch over to the Swype keyboard, follow these steps:

At the Home screen, press the Menu soft button.

Choose Language & Keyboard.

Choose Input Method.

On the Select Input Method menu, choose Swype.

You can press the Home key when you’re done.

When the Swype keyboard is active, you see it instead of the Multi-Touch keyboard whenever text input is required. This figure illustrates the Swype keyboard.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Even though Swype is active, you can continue to use your finger (or thumbs) to touch-type on the keyboard. You can still use dictation when the Swype keyboard is active.

To view the Swype tutorial, press the Swype key on the keyboard and then touch the Tutorial button.

Deactivate Swype on the Droid Bionic

To return to the Multi-Touch keyboard and disable Swype, follow these steps:

At the Home screen, press the Menu soft button.

Choose Language & Keyboard.

Choose Input Method.

Choose Multi-Touch Keyboard.

You can press the Home soft button to return to the Home screen when you’re done with the Language & Keyboard Settings window.

you should know that ShapeWriter is a much better option. It works faster, won't expire like the public beta version of Swype, and has the voice to text option. I downloaded both today and am much more impressed with ShapeWriter. The link above is to the QR Code for ShapeWriter. But you need to hurry as it is coming off the market on the 20th (rumors about Swype suing or buying it).

Edit: "is a much better option" IMO

i didnt like shapewriter i prefer swype.. i used both.. Shapewriter seemed kinda cluttered and looked cheap.. but thats just my opinion..

I heard Shapewriter was being withdrawn.

EDIT: From their website "User Notice: We plan to take ShapeWriter off the Android Market on June 20, 2010 for an indefinite period of time, If you have purchased or downloaded ShapeWriter Keyboard on your Android device, please update it to the latest Version 3.0.9 which will not expire as the previous versions do. We thank you for your interest and support."

That is correct, but as they stated – it will not expire. Once it's on your device, you'll have it for good.

Swype looks cleaner to me and feels bit more intuitive. But that's just me.

I love swype, shapewriter didn't feel as polished to me. But that's also my opinion. I don't know where the voice option went in swype, used to be you could hit options then the microphone would be there. But i notice it's missing in the new beta..

I tried both and at first I liked swype better because I couldn't get ShapeWriter to work at all. Now I'm trying ShapeWriter again and it seems more accurate. I can't find the shift key though.

Huh. I just noticed that ShapeWriter has a game mode that you can practice typing words by popping balloons.

I have both, I hate shapewriter. For me it is almost unusable. I have a hard time with swype as well but between the two swype is cleaner, simpler and more professional. That's just me though, I also thought Freddy got fingered was hilarious.

How do you use the voice-to-text option?

Was just about to type the same question when I saw your post out of the corner of my eye. how about it [S]?

They are so close that it is really down to personal preference.

in your opinion, clearly. You definitely can't say that categorically

You are most definitely correct Mulsanne. I should have originally stated that this is clearly my opinion.

Is there a voice-to-text option on either shapewriter or swype? I couldn't find one on the swype keyboard and that kinda annoys me.

so.. new beta.. am i gonna get addicted to this thing and then they are gonna try and charge me for it ?

Not exactly sure about that, but I am assuming that is what will happen.

I have been using ShapeWriter for a couple weeks because Swype wasn't available on the market at the time. I am completely satisfied with ShapeWriter – I found a .apk of the Swype beta just to try it but it kept throwing an error because it didn't fit my screen.

yeah it did the same thing for me.. but if u go to their website they reopened beta.. u can download the real verison and it wont give u that error anymore http://swypeinc.com/myswype.html

shapewriter may be better, but i would rather go with the option that will be able to get updates

Nope, used both and got terribly annoyed with ShapeWriter after using Swype. Swype worked better for me.

I tried both Swype and Shapewriter initially and found Swype to work vastly better for me. I just installed Shapewriter again to give it another go and it is tremendously better than I remember.

Unfortunately it doesn't seem to play well with ConnectBot. I can't seem to type any text whatsoever. It is also annoying how much more of the screen it takes up than Swype.

Though with the latest Swype Beta, backspace no longer works with ConnectBot.

(I know this probably has more to do with the way ConnectBot interfaces to the IMEs than with the particular IMEs, but Swype at least used to work great with it)

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Клавіатура Swype для Android замінює клювання на листи, пересуваючи їх пальцями. Swype автоматично інтерпретує ваш жест і визначає слово, яке ви хотіли набрати.

Swype можлива завдяки гнучкості Android – сторонні розробники можуть замінити клавіатуру системи, пропонуючи нові можливості для введення тексту. Користувачам iPhone не пощастило.

Перехід на Swype

Багато пристроїв Android постачаються з клавіатурою Swype, але вона не ввімкнена за умовчанням. Щоб дізнатися, чи у вас вже встановлено Swype, довго натисніть будь-яку область введення тексту пальцем. Ви побачите меню.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Натисніть “Метод введення»У меню.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Перейдіть у режим Swype, натиснувши його, якщо він з’явиться в меню.

Якщо у вас не встановлено Swype, ви можете завантажити бета-версію з веб-сайту Swype. Це не-Market додаток, тому вам доведеться ввімкнути опцію “Невідомі джерела” на вашому Android, щоб встановити її.

Базове використання

Якщо ви хочете набрати “як вироджувати” на звичайній клавіатурі з сенсорним екраном, ви повинні торкатися кожного символу послідовно, піднімаючи палець з екрану після кожного натискання. Можливо, вам доведеться повернутися назад і відредагувати те, що ви ввели, якщо ваш палець пропустив лист.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

На Swype, ви проведіть через слова. Доторкніться пальцем до H, перемістіть його до O, перемістіть до W і підніміть палець. Swype автоматично визначить відповідне слово і помістить його в текстове поле.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Я насправді перекрив O тут і пішов на P замість цього. Swype досить розумний, щоб виправити цю помилку і знати, що я, напевно, мав на увазі ввести “як”, а не “hpw”.

Що робити, якщо я маю на увазі замість «надії»? Без проблем. Swype відображає інші можливі слова над клавіатурою; замість цього натисніть слово.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Це працює, навіть якщо ви набираєте відразу кілька слів. Ви можете натиснути неправильне слово в полі введення тексту, щоб вибрати його та переглянути запропоновані альтернативи.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Щоб ввести додаткові слова, підніміть палець із екрана між кожним словом. Swype автоматично вставляє пробіли для вас.

Подвійні літери

Swype намагається визначити, коли слово, наприклад, “geek”, вимагає двох однакових літер поспіль. Також є спосіб повідомити Swype, що ви бажаєте отримати більше однієї літери: зробіть маленький цикл над літерою або напишіть її під час переміщення.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Капіталізація

Swype автоматично вказує великі слова, які з’являються на початку речення, але ви також можете використовувати спеціальний жест для великої літери. Якщо ви хочете набрати “How”, з великою лінією H, почніть з H, проведіть пальцем вгору і вийдіть з клавіатури, проведіть назад на клавіатуру та проведіть звичайними літерами.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Додавання слів до словника Swype

Магія Swype залежить від його внутрішнього словника слів. Якщо він не знає ні слова, ні абревіатури, який ви хочете набрати, він не дозволить вам провести його. На щастя, ви можете додати слова самостійно. Припустимо, ми хочемо додати “HTG” до списку слів. Swype також може використовуватися як звичайна клавіатура для полювання та полювання, тому ми натискаємо її нормально.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

У нижній частині екрана Swype пропонує NTH як найбільш близьку відповідність у своєму словнику. Ми можемо натиснути опцію “HTG”, щоб вибрати її.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Натисніть “Додати до Dictionary ”, щоб додати нове слово до словника Swype.

Знаки пунктуації та слова з однією літерою

Щоб додати розділові знаки, проведіть пальцем від знака пунктуації на пробіл. Наприклад, щоб додати кому після введення слова, натисніть палець на кому, перемістіть його на пробіл і підніміть. Це автоматично вставляє знак пунктуації, за яким слід пробіл, щоб ви могли продовжувати промахування. Також можна провести пальцем до пробілу, щоб ввести слово з однією літерою, наприклад, “a” або “I”, а потім простором. Swype автоматично вводить великими літерами слово “I.”

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Підстрибуючи

Скажімо, ви хочете ввести слово “pot”. Прямий маршрут – це пряма від P до T. Але це може бути кілька слів: pot, put або pit.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Вашому удару не потрібно прямувати. Уникайте U і I, і Swype точно знатимете, яке слово ви мали на увазі.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Налаштування Swype

Натисніть і утримуйте клавішу Swype у нижньому лівому куті клавіатури, щоб отримати доступ до параметрів Swype. Його налаштування також можна знайти в розділі Мова та клавіатура у меню налаштувань системи.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

На екрані параметрів Swype можна налаштувати мову та налаштування Swype, керувати особистим словником і переглянути поради та допомогу Swype.

How to type faster with the swype keyboard for android

Swype спочатку виглядає як досить дивна ідея – скріншоти його в дії, з каракулями по всій клавіатурі, можуть виглядати трохи безсистемно. Але якщо ви даєте Swype спробувати, ви будете здивовані, як швидко все клацає на місце.

We checked out the different Android text inputs, keypad, swipe and voice, to see which was the fastest.

Android gives users a range of input options for text. A regular keyboard, a swipe keyboard and voice input are available by default. Users can choose to install even more keyboards from the store. The inputs are also in a state of flux, with constant updates. The voice input seems to have improved a lot, and is practical, convenient and accurate enough for regular use now. We checked out the different inputs to see which was the fastest. So we examined how long it would take to type out a sentence without errors.

Keypad: The keypad is the traditional input, and we found it to be the fastest. The two finger use helps speed up the typing. Another big factor is the accuracy, it was more accurate than the others.

Swipe: Swipe feels fast, is fun to use, one finger operation is actually convinient. We were surprised that it took so long. Accuracy slowed it down quite a bit, but apart from that, we noticed that it takes time for the fingers to travel across the screen, and it might just be faster to tap. Some words are hard to get for swipe, an example being qwerty. However, the sense of pace might just be an illusion for Swipe.

Voice: Voice input seems the way to go to quickly type long paragraphs. It also is less stressful. This input is ideal for instant messaging conversations. However, the accuracy still has a lot to be desired. This is not that big of a problem though, because you get a list of ranked variations. These are other probable fits to what you have just said, and one of these invariably have the right word. The correction can be done on the fly, without stopping the voice input. While it was not as fast as a keypad, it was not as slow as swipe input.

This is just to give an idea, your mileage may vary. Usually, the tradeoff is between speed and accuracy. While Voice and Swipe were certainly fast, it took longer to correct the errors. Sometimes, both inputs made the same errors multiple times. “Qwerty” was repeatedly picked up as “wet” while swiping, and as “koti” or “kurti” in voice. “Jam” was repeatedly confused for “Jan” by swipe, and for some strange reason, as “Jai Maa” by voice. We were wondering why both swipe and voice had problems with the same words. While we did manage to train ourselves for better accuracy, the input mechanisms themselves are bound to get better. Till that happens though, the fastest and most accurate way to type seems to be the traditional method.

Find latest and upcoming tech gadgets online on Tech2 Gadgets. Get technology news, gadgets reviews & ratings. Popular gadgets including laptop, tablet and mobile specifications, features, prices, comparison.

After over three years on the App Store, developer Nuance has decided to discontinue the gesture-based Swype Keyboard apps for both iOS and Android devices. The company’s announcement of the iOS app’s discontinuation came earlier this month, but it’s only just begun to garner attention due to a confirmation of the Android app’s removal given to XDA Developers.

alt=”swype hero” width=”800″ height=”400″ />
On Android, the company discontinued its Swype+Dragon for Android keyboard app, which combined Swype’s unique swipe-to-type feature with Dragon’s voice dictation. On iOS, it appears that one version of Dragon remains on the App Store in the United States, called Dragon Anywhere. Attempts to search for “Swype Keyboard,” however, do confirm the third-party keyboard app is gone from the App Store, with results surfacing rival company apps like SwiftKey.

According to Nuance, the company’s decision to shut down Swype was a “necessary” move, granting it the ability to focus on selling AI solutions in the enterprise market. Recently, Nuance has been working on voice dictation software for medical professionals, as well as placing it within vehicles.

Nuance will no longer be offering the Swype keyboard on iOS app store. We’re sorry to leave the direct-to-consumer keyboard business, but this change is necessary to allow us to concentrate on developing our AI solutions for sale directly to businesses.

We hope you enjoyed using Swype, we sure enjoyed working with the Swype community.

Although Swype is no more, users still have access to third-party iOS keyboard apps like Gboard, SwiftKey, Fleksy, Grammarly, and more. In terms of functionality, SwiftKey is the app that aligns most with Swype’s swipe-to-text abilities, letting users enter text one handed using the SwiftKey Flow feature.

iOS 8 updated iPhones and iPads with the ability to support third-party keyboards on a systemwide basis, and at the time Fleksy, SwiftKey, and Swype jumped to the top of the paid and free iOS App Store charts in multiple countries. Although Fleksy has had a rocky development history, Swype is the first of these initial keyboard apps to see its development discontinued completely.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Apple recently released multi-room audio functionality on iOS, HomePod and Apple TV which is one jolly news for Apple fans. This latest upgrade by Apple allows you to play music on multiple devices in multiple rooms at the same time.

Like you can play a song on your iPhone and it can simultaneously be streamed in your living room or bedroom or kitchen wherever you want. Thanks to AirPlay2 for this added functionality as we can now jam up our party sessions.

Let’s see how to use multi-room audio feature on iOS devices via AirPlay 2. But, before that let’s explore how AirPlay 2 is better than AirPlay.

What’s the Difference Between AirPlay and AirPlay 2?

AirPlay 2 is the latest version of AirPlay which now supports multi room audio functionality on iOS devices. With AirPlay you could only stream music on a single device which was a huge limitation. But now with AirPlay 2, as long as all your devices are connected on the same WiFi network you can easily play music across your house on multiple devices or multiple rooms.

Which Devices are Compatible with AirPlay 2?

For AirPlay 2 to work smoothly you just have to take care about two things. One, just make sure that all your devices are connected to the same WiFi network and secondly, ensure that you have an AirPlay 2 compatible hardware. Here’s a list of all devices which are compatible with AirPlay 2:

  • iPhone and iPad (Running on iOS 11.4 or later)
  • Apple TV
  • HomePod
  • Any Third-party Bluetooth Speaker that is compatible with AirPlay 2. Here’s the complete list of Bluetooth speakers that are AirPlay 2 compatible and offer multi-room audio functionality. Everyday, new manufacturers are submitting their names to support AirPlay functionality.

How to Use AirPlay 2 on iPhone or iPad?

Now as we’re are through and aware about compatible devices, let’s see how we can use AirPlay 2 on iOS devices.

Pull up the control center on your iPhone or iPad and long press on Music Control.

Once the music control window expands, tap the AirPlay icon on the top right corner.

Now, choose the speaker output and select on which all devices you want to stream music.

Go ahead and select multiple devices, also adjust the volume levels for individual speakers (if required).

Here’s how you can play music across your home on multiple devices via your iPhone or iPad.

How to Use AirPlay 2 on HomePod?

With AirPlay 2 you can stereo pair more than one HomePod altogether and play music across the multiple speakers simultaneously. Suppose, you have two HomePods in a room then you can use both your HomePod speakers together and the sound will automatically split across both the devices.

To use multiple HomePod speakers altogether with AirPlay 2 follow these quick steps:

Launch the default Home app on your iPhone or iPad.

Now, long press on the connected HomePod speaker to open settings.

In the settings window, select “Create Stereo Pair”.

On the next screen you’ll see a bunch of speaker options, select the devices to pair.

Once the multiple HomePod speakers are paired, they’ll stream music together like a single speaker.

So folks, here was a quick guide on how to use multi-room audio feature on iOS devices via AirPlay 2. Guess now it’s time to jam up your house parties and stream music on multiple speakers in perfect sync!

Apple’s AirPlay 2 was a long time coming. First announced at Apple’s 2017 World Wide Developer Conference (WWDC), the much-needed update to Apple’s own streaming protocol didn’t become public until a year later, as part of the iOS 11.4 software update in June 2018.

What’s the big deal? First and foremost, AirPlay 2 supports multi-room streaming. Apple is rarely at the bleeding edge with new technologies, but even by its standards, 2018 was a little late to be joining the multi-room party – such devices had become a household staple over the preceding decade or so. But typically Apple, when it did finally join it became the life and soul of the party, with knockout performance and products to compliment it.

Whether it’s using Apple’s own HomePod or HomePod Mini speakers or other audio brands’ compatible speakers (including the ‘plays nice with AirPlay 2’ Sonos One), Apple has certainly made its mark in the multi-room market. There are even AirPlay 2-compatible TVs available, expanding the experience beyond the AirPlay 2 speaker or AirPlay 2 receiver.

But what’s the big deal with AirPlay 2, and which products support it? And if you already own an AirPlay product, can it be automatically updated or will you need to buy new AirPlay 2 devices? We have all the answers…

AirPlay: the origins

The first iteration of AirPlay launched back in 2010 as part of iOS 4 (around the time of the iPhone 4). Originally it was a way to stream audio, video and photos wirelessly to the Apple TV, but eventually this opened up to include dedicated audio products.

It was based on Apple’s ‘AirTunes’ software from 2004, which was predominantly used to stream audio from iTunes to AirPort Express, so you could wirelessly listen to music across your home network from your Apple device.

Setting itself apart from Bluetooth, AirPlay uses your home’s wireless network to send content from one source (iPhone, iPod etc) to one compatible product (speaker, AV receiver, soundbar). During the early days of AirPlay, setting products up was a complicated, long-winded process that required an extra app – it was hardly seamless. Those early products also didn’t have the most stable connection, so music would often drop out.

Updates to AirPlay over the years have made the setup process much simpler and quicker, and streaming is far more reliable. As long as your Apple device and the AirPlay speaker are on the same wi-fi network, music can be streamed between the two at the tap of a button. Easy.

How to use Apple AirPlay 2

The biggest feature of AirPlay 2? Multi-room.

It’s Apple’s first real move into multi-room technology, with AirPlay 2 finally letting you stream music from your iOS device to more than one product.

Originally meant to launch with the (now retired) Apple HomePod smart speaker, it was designed to let you set up two HomePods as a stereo pair (which we’d recommend) and pepper multiple HomePods around your home – all controlled by your iOS devices.

But it’s not restricted to Apple’s own ecosystem. You can mix-and-match AirPlay-2 compatible speakers from other audio brands to create a more versatile multi-room system. As long as all the devices are on the same wi-fi network, you just have to access the music controls on your iPhone, Apple TV or MacBook’s iTunes and select a connected speaker (or more than one) to send the music to.

Much like Sonos’s app, you can define where in your house the speaker is located, using labels such as ‘Bedroom’ or ‘Kitchen’ to identify them. This can be done in the Home app, which you’ll also need for any Apple smart home actions.

After that, simply access the Control Centre at any point on your iOS device to control which speakers are playing at any time, both individually and as a group.

Other benefits of AirPlay 2 include improved audio buffering, integration with Siri voice control and multiple control access across iOS devices (a useful touch for multi-room streaming). While Siri is integrated into the HomePod, other speakers (such as the Sonos One) rely on AirPlay 2’s connection to your iOS device to speak to Siri.

One key thing about AirPlay 2 is that the music source (and control) is always an Apple product. You can’t get AirPlay 2 on an Android device.

  • Read ourApple HomePod review

Which Apple products support AirPlay 2?

To support AirPlay 2, an Apple product must run iOS 11.4 or later, or the equivalent iPadOS or tvOS version. The following Apple products fulfil that criteria.

This story is part of a group of stories called

It isn’t enough to have great new devices, apps, and games — you also have to know how to use them. Here at The Verge, we offer step-by-step how-tos for experienced and new users who are working with online, macOS, Windows, Chrome OS, iOS, and Android apps, services, phones, laptops, and other tools. From simple instructions on how to install and use new devices, to little-known strategies on how to take advantage of hidden features and the best methods for adding power or storage, we’ve got your technological back.

iOS 11.4 is here, and it brings with it a few highly anticipated features for Apple’s HomePod speaker, including the ability to create a stereo pair of two HomePods and support for Apple’s new multi-room AirPlay 2 standard. Here’s how to get everything all set up:

Before you get to the fun part, you’ll have to first make sure everything has been updated to iOS 11.4. To update your phone, you’ll need to head over to the Settings app → General → Software Update. As for the HomePod, it should automatically look for and install the update at midnight, but you can check that it’s been updated or force the install yourself by heading over to the Home app. There, you’ll be able to see if there’s a HomePod update available, download and install the update, and manage other features for your HomePod. And in a neat option, the Home app can automatically detect if you’ve got multiple HomePods, and download and install the update for all of them in one shot.

Multi-room audio:

Once you’ve got all your updates installed, Multi-room audio should just work right out of the box. To use it, simply head over to your music app of choice on iOS and start playing music over AirPlay, and then select one of your HomePod devices. Now, with iOS 11.4, instead of just playing to a single source, AirPlay 2 compatible speakers will appear in the AirPlay pop-up with a small checkbox next to them, allowing you to toggle multiple speakers to all play the same song from your iPhone. This part will work for the HomePod, and presumably any other AirPlay 2 speakers you’ll get farther down the line.

But with HomePods, there’s an extra level of multi-room audio that you’ll be able to do, where you can have each speaker play independent audio streams over Wi-Fi without having to use AirPlay at all. For now, this feature is limited to the HomePod, and specifically limited to Apple Music subscribers (although, hopefully the Apple TV will also get some sort of similar ability further down the line when it eventually gets updated to AirPlay 2.) To take advantage of that feature, head to the same AirPlay menu as before — which can be accessed from the AirPlay icon in most music apps, or the music widget, and then scroll down below the topmost locally playing track on the iPhone to select one of your HomePod devices. There, you’ll be able to select an Apple Music track to use as a source, and play that track to other AirPlay 2 speakers using the same checkbox system as when you were playing from your iPhone directly.

Stereo Pair:

If you’re planning on keeping your two HomePods together in one room, though, there’s also the option to group them together as a stereo pair.

To create a stereo pair — which treats the two HomePods as one, discrete unit for AirPlay and Siri purposes — head on back over to the Home app, select one of your two HomePods, head into the settings for it, and hit “Create Stereo Pair…” Next, you’ll have the option to select your second HomePod to create the pair with. Once selected, you’ll be taken to a second screen to confirm that you’ve got the left and right channels chosen properly — tapping on each HomePod will cause it to light up with a chime to make sure it’s set up right, and you can easily swap them with another tap — after which you’ll be good to go. When paired, the left HomePod will become the “main” device, handling microphone duties for Siri requests (which probably won’t matter since both speakers will be in the same room in this case.)

The grouped HomePod will show up in Apple Music, iTunes, AirPlay, and everywhere else as a single pair, which will play whatever content you stream to it in stereo audio. The same limitations of multi-room AirPlay will apply with a stereo-paired HomePod as with a single one, where you’ll still need Apple Music to make the most of the set up. Lastly — and I haven’t been able to fully confirm this, due to not having a third HomePod around — but you’ll still presumably be able to use the paired stereo HomePod set with multi-room AirPlay 2 audio as well, should you wish.

To ungroup the stereo pair and have your two speakers function independently again, head back over to the Home app, select your paired HomePods, and scroll down to hit the “Ungroup accessories” button. You’ll be able to re-pair them at any time by following the steps above.

Apple introduces AirPlay 2 and its “multi-room” support for HomeKit

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Once again Apple brings us good news for HomeKit users. This time it’s the new and improved version of AirPlay. At this time AirPlay only works from one device to another, from your iPhone or Mac to another device. Well, with AirPlay 2 we can connect several speakers to play the audio throughout our house.

AirPlay 2 will be compatible with a large handful of well-known brands such as:

  • Bose
  • Denon
  • Bang & Olufsen
  • Bowers & Wilkins
  • Libratone
  • Marantz
  • Polk
  • dynadio
  • naim

Of course, Beats, which Apple owns, will be included. The absence of Sonos is the most surprising, as it is a leading brand in the speaker sector.

It remains to be seen how these speakers will be integrated with the HomeKit application to enjoy all its advantages. We assume that this adaptation will be done through a simple firmware update.

The HomeKit and Music apps will also be supported. In addition, Apple TV will be able to connect to this new technology to reproduce the audio, so it will be perfectly integrated into this new multi-room system.

This wireless technology will be in charge of connecting, controlling and sending the audio to the compatible speakers in our house. Now it remains to be seen if services like Spotify and Google Play Music integrate quickly to get the most out of it.

Another nice feature will be that from your iPhone you’ll be able to set the speaker locations as ‘kitchen’ or ‘living room’, and then control and adjust the volume for each one individually, as well as the master volume for the whole thing. the system.

It is clear that with the launch of HomePod, Apple continues with the strategy related to home training. We are waiting to know the information that the developers will obtain when they start using these news to tell you about it.

Apple’s AirPlay 2 was a long time coming. First announced at Apple’s 2017 World Wide Developer Conference (WWDC), the much-needed update to Apple’s own streaming protocol didn’t become public until a year later, as part of the iOS 11.4 software update in June 2018.

What’s the big deal? First and foremost, AirPlay 2 supports multi-room streaming. Apple is rarely at the bleeding edge with new technologies, but even by its standards, 2018 was a little late to be joining the multi-room party – such devices had become a household staple over the preceding decade or so. But typically Apple, when it did finally join it became the life and soul of the party, with knockout performance and products to compliment it.

Whether it’s using Apple’s own HomePod or HomePod Mini speakers or other audio brands’ compatible speakers (including the ‘plays nice with AirPlay 2’ Sonos One), Apple has certainly made its mark in the multi-room market. There are even AirPlay 2-compatible TVs available, expanding the experience beyond the AirPlay 2 speaker or AirPlay 2 receiver.

But what’s the big deal with AirPlay 2, and which products support it? And if you already own an AirPlay product, can it be automatically updated or will you need to buy new AirPlay 2 devices? We have all the answers…

AirPlay: the origins

The first iteration of AirPlay launched back in 2010 as part of iOS 4 (around the time of the iPhone 4). Originally it was a way to stream audio, video and photos wirelessly to the Apple TV, but eventually this opened up to include dedicated audio products.

It was based on Apple’s ‘AirTunes’ software from 2004, which was predominantly used to stream audio from iTunes to AirPort Express, so you could wirelessly listen to music across your home network from your Apple device.

Setting itself apart from Bluetooth, AirPlay uses your home’s wireless network to send content from one source (iPhone, iPod etc) to one compatible product (speaker, AV receiver, soundbar). During the early days of AirPlay, setting products up was a complicated, long-winded process that required an extra app – it was hardly seamless. Those early products also didn’t have the most stable connection, so music would often drop out.

Updates to AirPlay over the years have made the setup process much simpler and quicker, and streaming is far more reliable. As long as your Apple device and the AirPlay speaker are on the same wi-fi network, music can be streamed between the two at the tap of a button. Easy.

How to use Apple AirPlay 2

The biggest feature of AirPlay 2? Multi-room.

It’s Apple’s first real move into multi-room technology, with AirPlay 2 finally letting you stream music from your iOS device to more than one product.

Originally meant to launch with the (now retired) Apple HomePod smart speaker, it was designed to let you set up two HomePods as a stereo pair (which we’d recommend) and pepper multiple HomePods around your home – all controlled by your iOS devices.

But it’s not restricted to Apple’s own ecosystem. You can mix-and-match AirPlay-2 compatible speakers from other audio brands to create a more versatile multi-room system. As long as all the devices are on the same wi-fi network, you just have to access the music controls on your iPhone, Apple TV or MacBook’s iTunes and select a connected speaker (or more than one) to send the music to.

Much like Sonos’s app, you can define where in your house the speaker is located, using labels such as ‘Bedroom’ or ‘Kitchen’ to identify them. This can be done in the Home app, which you’ll also need for any Apple smart home actions.

After that, simply access the Control Centre at any point on your iOS device to control which speakers are playing at any time, both individually and as a group.

Other benefits of AirPlay 2 include improved audio buffering, integration with Siri voice control and multiple control access across iOS devices (a useful touch for multi-room streaming). While Siri is integrated into the HomePod, other speakers (such as the Sonos One) rely on AirPlay 2’s connection to your iOS device to speak to Siri.

One key thing about AirPlay 2 is that the music source (and control) is always an Apple product. You can’t get AirPlay 2 on an Android device.

  • Read ourApple HomePod review

Which Apple products support AirPlay 2?

To support AirPlay 2, an Apple product must run iOS 11.4 or later, or the equivalent iPadOS or tvOS version. The following Apple products fulfil that criteria.

It may have taken longer than we would have liked, but Apple’s AirPlay 2 is now very real following the arrival of iOS 11.4 today.

That means everyone with an iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, or Mac can now take advantage of AirPlay 2 and everything it offers including music and audio playback throughout multiple rooms simultaneously.

Because this is likely one of the most requested features of AirPlay 2 and something that should perhaps have arrived much sooner, we wanted to make sure everyone had the opportunity to take multi-room audio for a spin, so we’re going to cover just what you need to do in order to do exactly that. Whether you’re using iOS or a Mac, he’s what needs to be done to make AirPlay 2 work for you.

iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch

  1. Open Control Center on your device.
  2. Using 3D Touch or by tapping and holding on the audio card you will see additional audio controls presented. Tap the AirPlay logo to display more options
  3. Tap every device via which you want to play audio.

Mac or PC

  1. Fire up iTunes.
  2. At the top of the iTunes window, click the AirPlay icon.
  3. Check the box beside every device through which you want to play audio. If one of those is an Apple TV, then you may have to enter a passcode in order to authenticate.

Apple TV or HomePod

  1. Using Siri to play audio via a HomePod is perhaps the best way to achieve what we’re trying to do. If you’re using an Apple TV, though, you can swipe up on the remote control and select the AirPay icon. You can also do this by pressing and holding Play/Pause button on Siri Remote.
  2. Select every device through which you want to play audio.

As for volume control, not only do you get volume control slider for each individual device which is part of AirPlay 2 experience, but you also get a universal volume slider to control volume of all the devices at once which are part of AirPlay 2 experience.

Apple’s AirPlay 2 was a long time coming. First announced at Apple’s 2017 World Wide Developer Conference (WWDC), the much-needed update to Apple’s own streaming protocol didn’t become public until a year later, as part of the iOS 11.4 software update in June 2018.

What’s the big deal? First and foremost, AirPlay 2 supports multi-room streaming. Apple is rarely at the bleeding edge with new technologies, but even by its standards, 2018 was a little late to be joining the multi-room party – such devices had become a household staple over the preceding decade or so. But typically Apple, when it did finally join it became the life and soul of the party, with knockout performance and products to compliment it.

Whether it’s using Apple’s own HomePod or HomePod Mini speakers or other audio brands’ compatible speakers (including the ‘plays nice with AirPlay 2’ Sonos One), Apple has certainly made its mark in the multi-room market. There are even AirPlay 2-compatible TVs available, expanding the experience beyond the AirPlay 2 speaker or AirPlay 2 receiver.

But what’s the big deal with AirPlay 2, and which products support it? And if you already own an AirPlay product, can it be automatically updated or will you need to buy new AirPlay 2 devices? We have all the answers…

AirPlay: the origins

The first iteration of AirPlay launched back in 2010 as part of iOS 4 (around the time of the iPhone 4). Originally it was a way to stream audio, video and photos wirelessly to the Apple TV, but eventually this opened up to include dedicated audio products.

It was based on Apple’s ‘AirTunes’ software from 2004, which was predominantly used to stream audio from iTunes to AirPort Express, so you could wirelessly listen to music across your home network from your Apple device.

Setting itself apart from Bluetooth, AirPlay uses your home’s wireless network to send content from one source (iPhone, iPod etc) to one compatible product (speaker, AV receiver, soundbar). During the early days of AirPlay, setting products up was a complicated, long-winded process that required an extra app – it was hardly seamless. Those early products also didn’t have the most stable connection, so music would often drop out.

Updates to AirPlay over the years have made the setup process much simpler and quicker, and streaming is far more reliable. As long as your Apple device and the AirPlay speaker are on the same wi-fi network, music can be streamed between the two at the tap of a button. Easy.

How to use Apple AirPlay 2

The biggest feature of AirPlay 2? Multi-room.

It’s Apple’s first real move into multi-room technology, with AirPlay 2 finally letting you stream music from your iOS device to more than one product.

Originally meant to launch with the (now retired) Apple HomePod smart speaker, it was designed to let you set up two HomePods as a stereo pair (which we’d recommend) and pepper multiple HomePods around your home – all controlled by your iOS devices.

But it’s not restricted to Apple’s own ecosystem. You can mix-and-match AirPlay-2 compatible speakers from other audio brands to create a more versatile multi-room system. As long as all the devices are on the same wi-fi network, you just have to access the music controls on your iPhone, Apple TV or MacBook’s iTunes and select a connected speaker (or more than one) to send the music to.

Much like Sonos’s app, you can define where in your house the speaker is located, using labels such as ‘Bedroom’ or ‘Kitchen’ to identify them. This can be done in the Home app, which you’ll also need for any Apple smart home actions.

After that, simply access the Control Centre at any point on your iOS device to control which speakers are playing at any time, both individually and as a group.

Other benefits of AirPlay 2 include improved audio buffering, integration with Siri voice control and multiple control access across iOS devices (a useful touch for multi-room streaming). While Siri is integrated into the HomePod, other speakers (such as the Sonos One) rely on AirPlay 2’s connection to your iOS device to speak to Siri.

One key thing about AirPlay 2 is that the music source (and control) is always an Apple product. You can’t get AirPlay 2 on an Android device.

  • Read ourApple HomePod review

Which Apple products support AirPlay 2?

To support AirPlay 2, an Apple product must run iOS 11.4 or later, or the equivalent iPadOS or tvOS version. The following Apple products fulfil that criteria.

We have collected the most relevant information on Apple Multi Room Audio. Open the URLs, which are collected below, and you will find all the info you are interested in.

How to Use Apple’s New Multi-Room Audio Features in …

    https://www.howtogeek.com/354172/how-to-use-apples-new-multi-room-audio-features-in-airplay-2/
    Apple just released new versions of iOS, HomePod, and tvOS that support AirPlay 2, a huge upgrade that lets you play music from your iPhone on …

iOS 11.4 brings stereo pairs and multi-room audio . – Apple

    https://www.apple.com/newsroom/2018/05/ios-11-4-brings-stereo-pairs-and-multi-room-audio-with-airplay-2/
    HomePod, the breakthrough wireless speaker from Apple, now delivers an even more immersive listening experience throughout the home with support for HomePod stereo pairs and a new multi-room audio system in iOS 11.4. This free software update introduces the most advanced, easy to use, wireless multi-room audio system using AirPlay 2 to play music in any …

‎Wireless Audio : Multiroom on the App Store

    https://apps.apple.com/us/app/wireless-audio-multiroom/id1081757852
    Apple Watch. Description. The Samsung ‘Wireless Audio – Multiroom’ system enables listeners to enjoy tether-free entertainment in any room in the house, from virtually any audio source, all controlled from a downloadable app and facilitated by …

How to set up multi-room music on Apple HomePod and .

    https://www.tomsguide.com/how-to/how-to-set-up-multi-room-music-on-apple-homepod-and-homepod-mini
    The Apple HomePod and HomePod mini may not be the smartest of smart speakers, but they do sound great, and if you own more than one they’re easy to arrange in a Sonos-style multi-room setup.

Multiple Apple TVs as Muilti-Room Audio S… – Apple Community

    https://discussions.apple.com/thread/2607653
    Is it possible to have multiple Apple TV devices (say one in each room), connected to speakers, and use this as a multi-room audio system? Principal issues I’m thinking of are: 1. How would you select which Apple TV device you want to stream audio to, either from a computer or (when Airplay arrives) from an iPod/iPhone? 2.

Now you know Apple Multi Room Audio

Now that you know Apple Multi Room Audio, we suggest that you familiarize yourself with information on similar questions.

We have collected the most relevant information on Multi Room Audio Apple Tv. Open the URLs, which are collected below, and you will find all the info you are interested in.

How to set up multi-room music on Apple HomePod and .

    https://www.tomsguide.com/how-to/how-to-set-up-multi-room-music-on-apple-homepod-and-homepod-mini#:

Multiple Apple TVs as Muilti-Room Audio S… – Apple Community

    https://discussions.apple.com/thread/2607653
    Yes, you can simultaneously stream to multiple Apple TV’s from the same iTunes library. The example you give is easily done. There is no need for 3 individual iTunes libraries. It is fairly easy to control each Apple TV from one remote App. You just need to go back to the device select menu to swap TV’s

How to Use Apple’s New Multi-Room Audio Features in …

    https://www.howtogeek.com/354172/how-to-use-apples-new-multi-room-audio-features-in-airplay-2/
    How to Use Apple’s New Multi-Room Audio Features in AirPlay 2. Lowell Heddings. Lowell Heddings Founder and CEO. . We were playing music on a HomePod and an Apple TV playing through a TV’s speakers at the same time and everything stayed in perfect sync. The music filled the room perfectly despite playing through two completely different .

Multiroom audio with Apple TV and tvOS beta | Best Apple TV

    https://www.bestappletv.com/news/testing-multiroom-audio-with-apple-tv-and-tvos-beta/
    Testing multiroom audio with Apple TV and tvOS beta. The tvOS 11.3 beta contained support for AirPlay 2 when it was released back in January (screen capture above), but that functionality was stripped before its official release at the end of March. AirPlay 2 will provide advanced functionality for Apple TV and HomePod owners, such as the ability to create …

iOS 11.4 brings stereo pairs and multi-room audio . – Apple

    https://www.apple.com/newsroom/2018/05/ios-11-4-brings-stereo-pairs-and-multi-room-audio-with-airplay-2/
    HomePod, the breakthrough wireless speaker from Apple, now delivers an even more immersive listening experience throughout the home with support for HomePod stereo pairs and a new multi-room audio system in iOS 11.4. This free software update introduces the most advanced, easy to use, wireless multi-room audio system using AirPlay 2 to play music in any …

Multi Room zones and Apple TV? – Apple Community

    https://discussions.apple.com/thread/2798255
    Currently I use the Built-in TV speakers to listen to Music/films etc via my Apple Tv but If I continue I will ruin my TV speakers. I am about to invest in a 5.1 surround sound speaker setup but I also want to create the ability to add a multi zone function so that I can watch a movie in my living room (through surround sound speakers) whilst I .

Apple TV Multiroom Audio | AVForums

    https://www.avforums.com/threads/apple-tv-multiroom-audio.1905524/
    Apple TV Multiroom Audio. Discussion in ‘Home Cinema Buying & Building’ started by Ross W, Sep 15, 2014. Sep 15, 2014 at 3:39 PM. Ross W, Sep 15, 2014 #1. . Living room – apple tv 2 (already have) Bathroom – Audio out from mac mini (already have) Bedroom 1 – …

How to Make a Multi-Room Audio/Video System

    https://www.kenrockwell.com/apple/how-to-create-a-whole-house-music-system.htm
    You can use the TV’s speakers, or feed the TOSLINK optical digital audio output from the Apple TV into a DAC or your receiver and fancy speakers. This will play your entire video library from your Mac, every streaming service you can imagine from the Apple TV itself or your iDevice, any of the videos on your iDevices, or pretty much anything into this TV, and separate speakers if you …

Multi Room Audio for TV – Houzz

    https://www.houzz.com/discussions/5842817/multi-room-audio-for-tv
    Most AV guys want to show me a complicated 5.1 multi-room set up with multiple source selection. I don’t want this expansive (and expensive) of a set up. I just want to hear the TV in the kitchen. Ideally, I’d see something like Apple TV to the TV. TV Audio out to a multi zone amplifier (2 zones). Amplifier output A to soundbar. Amplifier .

How to set up multi-room music on Apple HomePod and .

    https://www.tomsguide.com/how-to/how-to-set-up-multi-room-music-on-apple-homepod-and-homepod-mini
    The Apple HomePod and HomePod mini may not be the smartest of smart speakers, but they do sound great, and if you own more than one they’re easy to arrange in a Sonos-style multi-room setup.

Multi-room audio: everything you need to know | What Hi-Fi?

    https://www.whathifi.com/us/advice/multi-room-audio-everything-you-need-to-know
    Awards. Multi-room speakers include the Award-winning Addon C3 and Addon C10, the five-star Addon C5 and the newly released Addon C10 MkII. See our Audio Pro reviews; Sonos It’s facing more competition than ever, but no multi-room offering is as complete or as pleasurable to live with as Sonos.

Now you know Multi Room Audio Apple Tv

Now that you know Multi Room Audio Apple Tv, we suggest that you familiarize yourself with information on similar questions.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2Andrew O'Hara | May 30, 2018

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

AppleInsider is supported by its audience and may earn commission as an Amazon Associate and affiliate partner on qualifying purchases. These affiliate partnerships do not influence our editorial content.

Multi-room audio may be the biggest feature of AirPlay 2, but it is far from the only new tricks AirPlay 2 has up its sleeve.

Out of the gate, only HomePod, Apple TV 4, and Apple TV 4K support AirPlay 2, though manufacturers are able to add support to their third-party speakers as well. Already Apple has outlined many upcoming speakers including those from Sonos, Pioneer, Libratone, Marshall and more that will gain support.

What can it do?

Chances are, you’ve heard of the headline features of AirPlay 2, namely multi-room audio and stereo pairing on the HomePod. That doesn’t begin to scratch the surface of the true benefits of this impressive update.

Notably, there is now a substantially bigger streaming buffer. This helps reduce interruptions due to network issues. In our testing, this was very noticeable. Audio drops were down significantly from the original AirPlay.

Secondly, there is now tighter sync between devices, which reduces the lag quite a bit in most situations, and lends itself to multi-room audio. There can still be a bit of lag when starting/stopping a stream, but it is definitely less than in the past.

Siri is also better equipped for streaming audio. She can be asked to play/pause music on any AirPlay 2 speaker, regardless of the manufacturer. Your iPhone still stays in the middle with third-party speakers though, with audio going to the device first before being re-streamed to the speaker.

An extremely handy new feature is the ability to move audio. Just ask Siri on the HomePod to “move the music to the living room” and she will.

AirPlay is also now more independent. Instead of constantly being interrupted by a phone call, a game, or a video, AirPlay 2 can continue to stream in spite of all of this. These annoyances have plagued users for ages and these tweaks make it much more usable, especially compared to other smart speakers.

And, AirPlay 2 speakers are a part of HomeKit. Any AirPlay 2 speaker will appear within the Home app and can be assigned an individual room like any other accessory. Speakers can be played/paused from within the Home app, and included within favorites.

HomeKit support seems to end there though, as speakers still aren’t able to be included in any scenes or automations. Amazon recently added music to routines and schedules with Alexa, putting Apple further behind in this regard. Hopefully, Apple remedies this soon.

How do I use it?

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Using AirPlay 2 is as easy as the original. Swipe into Control Center on your iOS device, and tap the AirPlay icon within the music control.

Here, all of your AirPlay and AirPlay 2 speakers will appear. Any speaker that supports AirPlay 2 will have a circle aligned to the right, whereas original AirPlay speakers will have nothing.

Each speaker you select to cast to will be marked with a check within the circle. You can select as many AirPlay 2 speakers as you want, though they cannot be used at the same time as an AirPlay 1 speaker.

You can also access AirPlay from within any app that supports it. Pandora, Spotify, YouTube, Audible, and many more all add a quick and easy AirPlay icon right within their apps.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Apple TV is also AirPlay 2 ready now, so during any playing video a swipe down from the top brings down the info bar. Swiping to Audio shows any AirPlay 2 speakers that can be streamed to. If on the home screen, a long hold of the play/pause button will also bring up the AirPlay controls.

Limitations

AirPlay 2 isn’t without its drawbacks. As mentioned before, third-party speakers can’t stream directly, keeping the phone in the equation. If the phone ever dies or goes outside network range, the music will end.

As of now, Macs aren’t invited to the AirPlay 2 party, still relying on the initial protocol. That means streaming audio to any AirPlay speaker — even one that supports AirPlay 2 — still has a substantial delay, making watching videos nearly impossible.

System audio can only be sent to one speaker at a time, but multi-room audio is still available within iTunes. We are making the guess this particular limitation has to do with the fact Macs currently don’t support HomeKit. If the Mac should gain HomeKit support, say at WWDC, this could change.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

For manufacturers of third-party speakers, AirPlay 2 is more demanding than in the past, which makes it impossible for some to be upgraded. Take the Wren V5, a popular AirPlay speaker. It doesn’t have enough onboard memory, and won’t get the advantages of AirPlay 2. A lot of uncertainty is going around as to what will be able to be upgraded and which speakers won’t.

The biggest and most obvious limitation though is it is completely tied into the Apple ecosystem. Anyone rocking an Android handset will be completely left out in the cold. A few third-party speakers get to participate, but HomePod and Apple TV are still the shining examples of how it should work and have their own distinct advantages.

Music to our ears

Even though it was substantially delayed, AirPlay 2 is definitely worth the wait. Quicker connecting, larger buffer, multi-room audio and a HomePod that is finally starting to be competitive. This is another example of how Apple has tightly integrated their software and hardware, which really pays off for those who have embraced Apple’s family of devices.

It will be interesting to see how quickly third-party speakers adopt Apple’s latest streaming tech, with some promising updates within only one to two weeks.

Hopefully, we see more exciting news regarding AirPlay 2 speakers, as well as their integration with HomeKit, at WWDC18.

Britta O'Boyle, Deputy editor

· Updated 1 February 2022 ·

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

(Pocket-lint) – AirPlay is Apple’s Wi-Fi streaming technology and since 2018, there’s been a second-generation version that’s now widely available on iOS and macOS devices.

This is everthing you need to know about what Apple AirPlay 2 is and what can it do.

What is Apple AirPlay 2?

  • Offers multi-room and stereo pairing for HomePod
  • Supports music, photos, video and mirroring

Apple AirPlay 2 offers wireless streaming of content from Apple devices including iPhone, iPad or Mac.

It enables you to stream a wide range of content from your phone to your Apple TV, certain audio devices like a Sky Q box, an audio device like a compatible Sonos speaker or, new recently, compatible televisions. Lots of audio devices support it, including products from Bose, Bowers and Wilkins, Bang and Olufsen, Naim, Denon/Marantz, Polk, Libratone and Audio Pro.

This latest version of AirPlay also ushers in multi-room compatibility for the HomePod and the HomePod mini. AirPlay 2 also enables device mirroring to share the content of your phone’s display on another device.

AirPlay was first introduced in September 2010, having previously been called AirTunes for audio-only streaming. As mentioned, Apple AirPlay 2 arrived in 2018 and is available on a range of TVs too, specifically newer models from Samsung, Vizio, Sony and LG.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Which Apple devices support AirPlay 2?

AirPlay 2 rolled out as part of iOS 11.4 back in May 2018. The full list of compatible devices is as follows and these are basically the Apple devices you’ll be able to use:

iPhone

  • iPhone 13 mini, iPhone 13, iPhone 13 Pro and iPhone 13 Pro Max
  • iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Pro and iPhone 12 Pro Max
  • iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro and iPhone 11 Pro Max
  • iPhone XS and iPhone XS Max
  • iPhone X and iPhone XR
  • iPhone 8 and iPhone 8 Plus
  • iPhone 7 and iPhone 7 Plus
  • iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus
  • iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus
  • iPhone SE
  • iPhone 5S

iPad

  • All iPad Pros
  • All iPad Air models
  • iPad (5th generation, 2017 or later)
  • iPad mini 2 or later

iPod touch

  • iPod touch (6th generation or later)

Apple TV

MacBook and MacBook Pro

  • MacBook: Late 2009 or later
  • iMac/iMac Pro:Late 2009 or later
  • MacBook Air: 2010 or later
  • MacBook Pro: 2010 or later
  • Mac mini: 2010 or later
  • Mac Pro: 2010 or later

How does AirPlay 2 work with music?

  • Control multiple speakers from the iPhone or iPad
  • Multiple users can add songs to one playlist
  • Multi-room for HomePod

Apple AirPlay 2 adds speaker control to the Home app, meaning you can individually control all of your AirPlay-compatible speakers from your iPhone for the first time. Note, however, that the speakers need to support AirPlay 2.

Considering it’s more down to the phone sending the audio signals to the speakers, most streaming services you have installed on your iPhone should work with AirPlay 2 speakers.

When you play music from your iOS device, you can select which speakers around your home you want it to be sent to and control individual volumes of those speakers. These controls can be found in Control Centre by swiping up from the bottom of your iPhone screen.

One feature possible with AirPlay 2 is the ability to play different songs in different rooms, although only Apple Music subscribers can take advantage of it. You can simply ask Siri to play one song on one speaker, and another on one in a different room.

Another feature of AirPlay 2 is the ability for multiple users to add songs to one playlist. Say you’re at a party, and one person has their iPhone as the music source, playing Apple Music – other Apple Music users are able to send songs they want played to the source iPhone, to save having to connect and reconnect several phones.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Apple AirPlay 2 with Apple TV

Provided you have tvOS 11 or later, your Apple TV can send audio to speakers around your home as well, rather than just coming from your iPhone or iPad.

Whatever speaker is connected to the Apple TV, be it a soundbar or speaker system, is automatically a de facto AirPlay 2 speaker.

Apple AirPlay 2 with Siri

Siri takes on a prominent role with AirPlay 2 and multi-room audio. You can tell her which speakers you want music playing on whichever speakers you have dotted around your home, and you can even ask her to play different songs on different speakers.

You’re not just restricted to using Siri with the HomePod or HomePod mini either, as she will play nice with any other third-party AirPlay 2 speaker.

Today sees the release of iOS 11.4 and with it Apple is adding AirPlay 2. This brings some important changes to HomePod, including the stereo pairing option that was missing at launch.

AirPlay 2 also adds multi-room audio to HomePod, bringing Apple’s smartspeaker in line with Amazon Echo and Google Home. Other new features of iOS 11.4 include the ability to access iMessages via iCloud on any Apple device.

See also:

The lack of stereo pairing and multi-room audio was seen by many as a failing of HomePod, but Apple has now addressed this. The company says that when two speakers are paired, they are capable of “delivering room-filling sound that is more spacious than a traditional stereo pair”.

When it comes to the multi-room feature, speakers use spatial awareness to automatically deliver the best possible sound, and Apple’s wireless peer-to-peer direct link ensures that music stays in sync.

Writing about the new update, Apple says:

HomePod, the breakthrough wireless speaker from Apple, now delivers an even more immersive listening experience throughout the home with support for HomePod stereo pairs and a new multi-room audio system in iOS 11.4. This free software update introduces the most advanced, easy to use, wireless multi-room audio system using AirPlay 2 to play music in any room from any room, move music from one room to another or play the same song everywhere using an iOS device, HomePod, Apple TV or by asking Siri. HomePod is available in the US, UK and Australia and arrives in Canada, France and Germany starting June 18.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

At WWDC 2017, Apple’s HomePod speaker was finally revealed. We even discovered you’d be able to buy two of the things for an amazing stereo experience, and heard how AirPlay could become the foundation of a wireless multi-room audio system.

And then: a year of silence. Which was a bit weird.

But AirPlay 2 finally arrived in a blaze of glory, to tickle your audiophile fancy, and so we’ve whipped up a super-quick guide to what it all means for you, your Apple devices, and compatible kit.

1) It brings things right up to date

AirPlay is Apple’s wireless streaming technology, designed to fling media from devices to receivers. Although best known for enabling you to stream audio, it’s also capable of hurling photos and videos about – for example, to stream a movie from your iPhone to an Apple TV.

The tech’s a bit long in the tooth though, having been around for almost a decade, so AirPlay 2 brings things up to date. Through its integration with the iOS Home app, you can use iPhones and iPads to create multi-room audio set-ups, plus Apple fans blessed with two HomePods can serenade everyone’s ears with stereo bliss.

2) Your kit needs to be up to the job

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

If you want to take advantage of the AirPlay 2 goodness, you’ll need a device that’ll run iOS 11.4, tvOS 11.4, or macOS High Sierra 10.13.6.

Any iPhone 5s or newer will do, as will any Apple TV running tvOS (4th gen or 4K), and the iPod touch 6th-gen.

Using a Mac? Check out Apple’s macOS specs here – and you’ll need to play your audio through iTunes. Rocking an iPad? Any iPad Pro will run iOS 11.4, as will the iPad Air, iPad Air 2, iPad (2018), and any iPad mini apart from the original one.

As for receivers, Apple’s HomePod is the obvious candidate. But Apple helpfully lists third-party speakers where the manufacturers have announced compatibility, which includes the likes of Sonos, Bang & Olufsen, Bowers & Wilkins, Naim and Libratone. Need a ‘budget’ option? The best you’re going to get for now is the Sonos One – which costs £199. Eek.

3) You can now go stereo with HomePod

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

HomePod is playing catch up on the feature front thanks to AirPlay 2, and not a minute too soon. The good news is this is full stereo audio – so your HomePods don’t each belt out a mono signal, but instead play their own audio channel of left or right.

The process of pairing is mercifully simple, assuming the HomePods are both running the latest software update. Open one in the Home app, tap Create Stereo Pair, and choose another to be its mate. Once that’s done, the HomePods are effectively treated as a single receiver, and only one speaker then responds to Siri requests, rather than them both answering in a creepy chorus fashion.

4) Multi-room audio is go

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Lucky enough to own more than one HomePod (or indeed any of the AirPlay 2 compatible speakers)? Then AirPlay 2 comes with a ready-made multi-room system built in, and it’s ready to go with minimal faff.

It works in much the same way it has for a while in iTunes, when sending audio to multiple compatible devices. But now on iOS, you can head to the Control Centre and select to which of your speakers you want to send your music to – selecting them individually or grouping them together for a harmonious flow of music through your home.

If you’re an Apple Music subscriber, you can leave Siri in charge of the whole shebang, and bark your orders at her instead of messing around with menus. She’ll even handle different music in different rooms, for when you need that perfect balance of speed metal in the lounge and Erasure’s greatest hits in the kitchen.

5) It even makes Apple TV smarter

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

While AirPlay 2’s updates have a focus on audio, it does more for your Apple TV setup than you might think.

You could already send audio to an Apple TV using bog standard AirPlay, but combined with tvOS 11.4, your Apple TV becomes more heavily integrated into a multi-room audio set-up.

This is most obvious in you being able to use the tvOS Music app to send audio to AirPlay 2 speakers around your home, while you wield the Siri Remote like a crazed futuristic DJ. Neatly, speakers plugged into your Apple TV effectively become AirPlay 2 speakers as well. Bargain.

6) Your older devices might be upgradeable

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Maybe. It’s best to check that list we already linked to, which outlines speakers where the manufacturer has announced support. You’ll see some existing devices on there, which will at some point get a firmware update so they can play nicely with AirPlay 2. Sonos on 11 July confirmed compatibility on a range of its products, as outlined in a blog post.

Chances are, though, that most older kit will remain rooted in the past, meaning you’ll have to buy new hardware to boogie on down with AirPlay 2. That even goes for Apple’s – AirPort Express doesn’t get an invite to the party.

7) But there are alternatives…

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

If you only really care about basic streaming, Bluetooth will suffice. For multi-room support, Alexa and Chromecast systems have the capabilities, and you can always go all-in with the likes of a Sonos.

However, if you’re deeply immersed and invested in the Apple ecosystem, you likely believe there’s no more an alternative to AirPlay 2 than there’s an alternative smartphone to the iPhone that’s welded to your mitts.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2HomePod, iPhone X, iPad and Apple TV lined up. iOS 11.4 makes it easy to control music playing in every room, on HomePod, Apple TV or any iOS device.

HomePod combines Apple-engineered audio technology and advanced software to set a new audio quality standard for a small speaker, delivering high-fidelity sound and a wide soundstage. Featuring a large, Apple-designed woofer for deep, clean bass, a custom array of seven beamforming tweeters that provide pure high frequency acoustics with incredible directional control and powerful technologies built right in, HomePod is able to preserve the richness and intent of the original recordings.

Stereo pairs create an even wider soundstage for an incredible listening experience on HomePod. With two HomePod speakers set up as a stereo pair, this soundstage gets even wider, delivering room-filling sound that is more spacious than a traditional stereo pair from a speaker that’s just under 7-inches tall. Using spatial awareness to sense their location in the room, each HomePod automatically adjusts the audio to sound great wherever it is placed and sound great together, using an Apple-designed wireless peer-to-peer direct link to communicate with each other and play music completely in sync.

With an A8 chip in each speaker, each HomePod is able to play its own audio channel — left or right — while separating out both the ambient and direct energy. This innovative stereo sound provides a wide, almost three dimensional soundstage for an incredible listening experience anywhere in the room. A HomePod stereo pair creates room filling sound with greater bass extension, resulting in a deeper, more accurate reproduction of low frequencies.

Setting up a stereo pair is simple. When a second HomePod is set up in the same room, the user is prompted whether they would like to form a stereo pair, and in just a matter of minutes, the room is filled with amazing audio. Even though these two speakers act as one, each HomePod communicates with each other so that only one speaker responds to Siri requests.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2HomePod speaker and iPhone X displaying AirPlay 2 and Multi-Room Audio Control Center.

AirPlay 2 enables the most advanced, wireless multi-room audio system, creating an effortless way for people to stream music or podcasts anywhere in the home to different devices, all in-sync. The updated Control Center provides a quick view of what’s playing in every room and simple controls to adjust volume and more. While listening to music, it’s as easy as selecting or unselecting where the music is playing in Control Center, or users can ask Siri to play music in any room, a group of rooms, or everywhere in the home. For HomePod, AirPlay 2 features are automatically supported and music can be streamed around the house without the need to manually group speakers.

AirPlay 2 controls are available across iOS within any app and in Control Center for quick access to what’s playing in every room, on every speaker. Apple Music subscribers can also ask Siri to play different songs in different rooms or the same song everywhere, without ever leaving the room. Just like iPhone and iPad, HomePod will be able to communicate with other AirPlay 2-enabled speakers when they become available, so Siri can control music playing on speakers from Bang & Olufsen, Bluesound, Bose, Bowers & Wilkins, Denon, Libratone, Marantz, Marshall, Naim, Pioneer and Sonos.

Siri, now actively used on over half a billion devices, has a deep knowledge of music and understands personal preferences and tastes. With personal requests turned on for HomePod, Siri can send a message, add reminders and notes and check calendar appointments. Siri can set a timer, play a podcast, check the news, sports, traffic and weather, and control a wide range of HomeKit smart home accessories.

As part of iOS 11, Apple is announcing a handful of improvements to Apple Music and AirPlay. Headlining the changes is Apple’s new AirPlay 2 protocol, while the Music app is also receiving improvements with new social features and more.

Spigen TEKA RA200 Airpods Earhooks Cover

With AirPlay 2, Apple is adding speaker control to the Home app. This means that users will be able to control speakers and manage multi-room audio directly from the Home app on their iOS device. Apple TV can act as a sort-of hub for this, allowing speakers paired to an Apple TV to be controlled with AirPlay 2.

Furthermore, with AirPlay integration in Home, users can operate a shared “Up Next” play queue, meaning everyone can add their favorite songs to the queue from their own device.

In addition to AirPlay 2, Apple has announced some improvements to the Music app. For instance, there’s a new “Friends are listening to” section under the “For You” tab that lets users easily see what their friends and family are listening to. This is similar to features offered by competitors like Spotify.

There’s also a new MusicKit API. This allows developers to integrate with the full Apple Music service. For instance, Nike+ Run Club has integrated Apple Music to create workout and running playlists. Anchor will also be one of the launch partners for MusicKit, as will Shazam.

All of the Music and AirPlay improvements will be available as part of iOS 11, which will be available later this year.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

You updated to iOS 11.4 on your iPhone or iPad, tvOS 11.4 on your Apple TV, and HomePod 11.4 on your HomePod so you have AirPlay 2 support. Now you need to assign rooms to your speakers so you can control where you’re playing music. Here’s how to do that for Apple TV and HomePod.

Assigning Apple TV to a room for AirPlay 2

Your Apple TV can share whatever speakers it uses for audio out through AirPlay 2, and AirPlay 2 supports multi-room playback. That means you can stream the same audio to multiple rooms without anything getting out of sync.

Here’s how to assign an Apple TV to a specific room:

  • Launch Settings
  • Select AirPlay
  • Select Room
  • Choose a room

You can also create custom room names if you don’t see what you want in Apple’s list.

Assigning HomePod to a room for AirPlay 2

There isn’t an interface on HomePod for navigating menus, and saying “Hey Siri, assign this HomePod to the living room” doesn’t work. Instead, you need to use the Home app on your iPhone or iPad.

Here’s how to assign a HomePod to a specific room:

  • Launch the Home app on your iPhone or iPad
  • Press and hold the HomePod tile to open its status view
  • Tap Details
  • Tap Room
  • Select a room
  • Tap Done

You can create custom rooms here, just like you can on Apple TV.

Once speakers are assigned to specific rooms you can shift where audio plays with commands like, “Siri, move music to the bedroom.” In essence, you can make your music follow you through your home.

Sonos is adding support for Apple’s AirPlay 2 wireless audio standard to its speakers, making them far more versatile for anyone who prefers Apple Music (or just likes using Apple’s music app for local music on an iPhone). AirPlay 2 support also means that you’ll be able to use a Sonos speaker in conjunction with Apple’s own HomePod in a multi-room audio setup — an intriguing option for anyone who can’t decide between the two companies. Here’s how to get everything set up:

Update the Sonos app

First off, you’ll want to update the Sonos companion app on your Android or iOS device. AirPlay support needs a firmware update to the speakers, and before you can install that update, you first need to download the update for the app that will let it do that.

Update your speakers

After the Sonos app is updated, open it up and you should automatically be prompted to install the firmware update for your speakers. AirPlay is only supported on the Sonos One, the second-generation Play:5, and the recently released Sonos Beam, so you’ll need at least one of those speakers in your Sonos setup to take advantage of it.

Play some music

Once you’ve installed the update (it’ll take a few minutes), you’re good to go. Your Sonos devices should automatically show up as AirPlay speakers in any audio menu on your iPhone or iPad (as well as in iTunes on your Mac, if you still use it). Stereo pairing works with AirPlay, too. If you’ve got that configured with your setup of two Sonos One or Play:5 speakers, they’ll show up as a single AirPlay target in the menu and output sound in stereo.

If you don’t have all new Sonos speakers, you’re not out of luck either. By grouping your older speakers together with at least one newer, AirPlay-compatible model, you can still output music over AirPlay to the entire group. You can make sure that’s set up correctly by heading to the Settings menu in the Sonos app and going to the AirPlay section. You’ll also be able to toggle whether or not you’d like the app to keep your non-AirPlay speakers grouped together with your AirPlay ones there, too.

Adding Sonos to the iOS Home app

You can tell Siri to start playing music on your Sonos system by adding your speakers to the Home app on iOS. To do that, head over to the Home app, hit the plus button in the corner, tap add accessory, and then hit the “Don’t have a Code or Can’t Scan?” option at the bottom of the screen. A new menu will pop up, displaying your speakers, which you’ll then be able to add as a Home device and assign to a room with HomeKit. Once that’s done, you can just ask Siri to play tracks from Apple Music or, if you’re not a subscriber, whatever is in your Music library.

While we covered Apple’s upcoming iOS 11.3 update yesterday, one feature flew under my radar — AirPlay 2.

Along with new iPhone X Animoji and additional battery performance information/options, multi-room AirPlay audio playback is also included in iOS 11.3.

Apple first announced AirPlay 2 at WWDC back in June, 2017, but didn’t provide details related to what the new wireless audio system improved on over its predecessor.

Multi-room playback means you’ll be able to stream to multiple Apple TVs and speaker around the house directly from your iPhone. While Apple first stated that the HomePod won’t ship with multi-room support, it’s possible AirPlay 2 integration will add this feature to the smart home speaker (this still remains unclear, though). Apple’s HomePod is set to launch on February 9th in the U.S. and other regions, but a Canadian release still hasn’t been revealed.

AirPlay 2 is the first significant update to AirPlay since its launch roughly seven years ago. Early impressions from those using the developer build of iOS 11.3 indicate that AirPlay 2 is still pretty buggy right now, but functionality will likely improve before the full release.

Competing smart home speakers like the Amazon Echo and Google Home feature multi-room playback between various connected devices.

Apple is taking on Sonos with its latest foray into Wi-Fi music, AirPlay 2, which now comes with multiroom support.

Ty Pendlebury is a journalism graduate of RMIT Melbourne, and has worked at CNET since 2006. He lives in New York City where he writes about streaming and home audio.

Enlarge Image

Apple’s head of software Craig Federighi announces the successor to the AirPlay system, which already lets you stream CD-quality music over Wi-Fi.

Apple has unveiled its latest Wi-Fi protocol, called AirPlay 2, at its WWDC conference in San Jose. AirPlay 2 will be compatible with new speakers and third-party apps.

The company also revealed its much-rumored smart speaker, the HomePod .

Apple said that it is partnering with companies such as Bang and Olufsen, Bose, Beats (which it owns), Polk, Denon, Bowers and Wilkins, Definitive Technology, Devialet, Naim and Bluesound to bring AirPlay 2 to market.

It won’t only be Apple apps such as HomeKit and Music that will be able to take advantage of the new features, as Federighi said that “third-party audio apps will be able to get in on the multiroom audio fun”.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Apple is working with over a dozen manufacturers to bring AirPlay 2 to market.

Based on one of the screens the company showed on stage, AirPlay users will be able to select from a list of rooms and group them. At the moment AirPlay is only one-to-one from your phone, though serving to multiple devices is possible with a Mac and/or third-party software. This new capability will bring it in line with competing systems such as Play-Fi, Chromecast Audio and Sonos.

It’s as yet unknown if AirPlay 2 is capable of working on existing equipment or if it requires new gear, though the presence of Play-Fi-supporting companies such as Polk and others such as Devialet means that it may be backwards compatible.

Apple announced AirPlay 2 as part of iOS 11 announcements at WWDC 2017. It adds multi-room audio capabilities to AirPlay’s existing abilities. AirPlay 2 also enables the use of Siri to initiate and control playback to compatible speakers and devices (such as Apple TV).

AirPlay 2 is Apple’s followup to the original AirPlay Wi-Fi-based music playback standard. While Sonos popularized Wi-Fi-based multi-room audio playback, Bluetooth became ubiquitous, and multi-platform Wi-Fi audio standards spread in popularity, Apple lacked a competing story until today’s announcement.

AirPlay 2 shares some competitive similarities to the competing Chromecast Built-in (aka Google Cast) standard, but based on current announcements it lacks video capabilities and partners with mainstream volume. According to the IHS Markit research group, the latter aspect indirectly infers that there is a third competitive weakness compared to Chromecast Built-in, which is integration cost.

With the arguable exception of Beats and Bose, AirPlay 2’s third-party hardware companies are either at the higher end of the market or with products at the high end of consumer price ranges. IHS Markit says that if this is indicative of the partner base for AirPlay 2, it is likely that AirPlay 2 shares the same limiting trait that shackled AirPlay: cost.

In today’s competitive environment filled with ways to play music wirelessly, AirPlay 2’s main benefit is in its built-into-iOS convenience. Its fortunes in terms of mainstream penetration into the third party hardware landscape will lie in whether or not Apple solves the issue of the cost adder for enabling AirPlay, according to IHS Markit.

The research group expects that AirPlay 2 largely will remain a niche proposition for consumers able to afford high-end peripherals – those devices with a high enough total bill of materials cost able to absorb the AirPlay wireless chipset cost within.

Lastly, Apple noted that AirPlay 2 speakers are able to be added as controllable devices in HomeKit households. This implies by extension that the only audio output devices that are going to be available as a common audio resource within the HomeKit smart home, are going to be AirPlay 2 compatible speakers and devices. Apple’s long-term lock-in play with the AirPlay 2 standard may run much broader than simply multi-room music playback.

iCloud storage for messages and their attachments also comes with iOS 11.4.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

reader comments

Share this story

Apple’s iOS 11.4 rolls out today, and it brings a big update to HomePods: AirPlay 2 with multi-room audio. The update allows the HomePod and Apple TV (the two Apple devices that currently support AirPlay 2), as well as forthcoming third-party AirPlay 2 devices, to play the same audio throughout your home or only in select areas of your home.

All AirPlay 2 devices can be controlled using an iOS device, HomePod, Apple TV, or by asking Siri. Users can say, “Hey Siri, play classical in the living room,” and the appropriate audio will play through the AirPlay 2-compatible speakers, but only in the living room. Essentially, the new setup makes it easier for users to play in-sync audio through all (or only some) of the speakers in their home.

Further Reading

Manufacturers that pledged to support AirPlay 2 include Bang & Olufsen, Bose, Bowers & Wilkins, Marshall, Pioneer, and Sonos. AirPlay 2 devices will now show up in the Apple Home app, since AirPlay 2 integrates with HomeKit. In addition to using Siri or individual apps to control speaker selection and music playback, all AirPlay 2 devices available in a home will show up in iOS’ Control Center.

AirPlay 2 makes HomePod a more competitive smart speaker, and a more user-friendly one. For those with multiple HomePods across their home, they will now be able to fill their entire home with in-sync audio through multiple speakers or only in select areas like a bedroom, office, or patio. Airplay 2 also helps HomePod get along with other manufacturers’ speakers (like those from Sonos) to play music through all the speakers in a home at the same time.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

The AirPlay 2 update also allows two HomePods to connect via stereo pairing. That means one HomePod in a room plays the right-channel content while the second HomePod plays the left-channel content at the same time. Stereo pairing, combined with HomePod’s spacial awareness feature, means that the devices can fill a room with sound that has more depth, balance, and power than before.

iOS 11.4 also brings Messages in iCloud to the operating system, a feature that has been in the works since iOS 11 was first introduced last year. Messages in iCloud stores all iMessages in Apple’s cloud storage rather than on each individual device. Previously, all devices signed in to a user’s iCloud account received iMessages. Users who saved all of their iMessage conversations may have found their local storage space taken up by large iMessage logs since all that information saved to individual devices.

Messages in iCloud moves all those messages—including attachments and photos shared in those messages—from Apple devices to iCloud. That frees up storage space for other things like music, photos, and more. While this is good for device-storage optimization, it may not be good for users who don’t have a lot of iCloud storage to spare. Messages in iCloud also makes it easier to delete message information—delete a message, photo, or other attachment from one device and it automatically disappears from all of your other iCloud-connected devices.

You can check out the full release notes for iOS 11.4 at Apple’s website. Users can download iOS 11.4 by going into the Settings app and navigating to Software update under the General tab. HomePod users can update device software in Apple’s Home app.

Apple additionally released tvOS 11.4 to add AirPlay 2 to supported Apple TV models. Today also saw the release of watchOS 4.3.1, which Apple says improves performance on the Apple Watch.

Apple’s Much Anticipated Update to iOS 11 Addresses Prior Shortcoming for Multi-Room Support for a More Immersive and Complete Audio Experience Throughout Your Home

When Apple’s smart speaker HomePod first came out, we were excited to test out its acoustic performance and integration with existing Apple systems. HomePod has an impressive subwoofer for a clean bass sound and provides directional control to more accurately convey the original richness of sound in any audio recording. This is a massive improvement to the smart speaker space with high fidelity sound and a larger sound stage.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Image via Apple

Play and Control Music in Any Room

By adding AirPlay 2 software to the HomePod via iOS 11.4, HomePod can now play sound in multiple rooms throughout your home. You can control music playing in any room, on HomePod, Apple TV or any iOS device. You can also increase your sound stage by adding a second HomePod for a richer acoustic experience to fill any room with sound and more accurately reproduce lower frequencies such as deeper bass extensions.

With AirPlay 2, you can play music in any room, move music from one room to another, or play the same song in multiple rooms using an iOS device through an app or Control Center, the Apple TV, the HomePod or by using Siri voice commands. You can access AirPlay 2 controls within any app and also in the Control Center on an iOS device running iOS 11.4 by swiping up. In the Control Center, you will see a list of all available AirPlay 2 devices in your home. You can send audio to a single device, to multiple devices, or switch audio between devices.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Richer Sound Reproduction via HomePod Pairing

Equipped with a powerful A8 chip in each speaker, HomePod can play its own audio channel, left or right and separate out ambient and direct energy. This creates a fuller, almost three dimensional soundstage for any room. Stereo pairing works via an Apple-designed wireless peer-to-peer direct link that enables communication between two or more HomePods and to play music in sync. The two speakers act as one when paired, and only one HomePod responds to Siri requests.

Setting up HomePod pairs is easy as you will receive a prompt with a popup interface to pair your HomePods if you have more than one. The same information is also available in the HomePod’s settings in the Home app. In the Settings menu, menu, tap on Create stereo pair. Then select another HomePod, choose your room, and assign left and right channels to each HomePod. Set up is almost instantaneous and you can benefit from a richer sound immediately. Paired HomePods offer a richer room-filling sound experience with a deeper bass and louder sound.

If the song you are playing supports stereo sound, you can distinctly hear different instruments being played on each HomePod. This experience is further enhanced if you connect to an Apple TV.

High Fidelity Audio Playback and Improved Podcast Acoustic Experience

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Hayden’s in London

We are thrilled to see these updates and increasing audio performance and connectivity as we get ready to launch our Hayden’s podcast, Stardust this year. www.haydensm.com/podcast

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

AirPlay 2, Multi-Room Audio and Syncing with Other Speakers

What we are most excited about is AirPlay 2 functionality as this extends wireless use of your HomePod(s) to multiple rooms and enables connections to other speakers you may have such as Bower & Wilkins, Bang & Olufsen, Bluesound, Bose, Denon, Libratone, Marantz, Marshall, Naim, Pioneer and Sonos. You can listen to your existing music collection, stream new music and listen to podcasts anywhere in your home in sync with your speakers.

The Control Center offers a quick view of what’s playing in every room and simple controls to adjust volume and more. When you select a single HomePod, you can play music in that room. Adding another HomePod, enables multi-room audio. When you have chosen two HomePods, each one receives its own volume slider for granular volume control. In addition, there is a master volume slider to adjust both speakers simultaneously.

You can also play music via YouTube or other streaming method. You will be prompted to choose the HomePod speaker for playback.

AirPlay 2 controls are available across iOS within any app and in Control Center for quick access to what’s playing in every room, on every speaker. Apple Music subscribers can also ask Siri to play different songs in different rooms or the same song everywhere, without ever leaving the room.

In addition, this synchronization addresses prior connection issues and lag while streaming audio and helps to ensure a better acoustic experience. You can ask Siri to play music in any room right from an iOS device or by asking Siri on HomePod.

Siri integrates well with Apple Music and with growing playlists and users, Siri’s knowledge of music has increased.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

Set Up and How to Update Your HomePod

Set up is easy as the new HomePod software is installed automatically on the HomePod after you update to iOS 11.4. to update your phone, go to the Settings app → General → Software Update.

After you update your iPhone to iOS 11.4, you can also navigate to the Home app, tap Edit and tap on HomePod > Details to go into its settings. Then tap Update Software.

If your HomePod is set up to automatically download and install new firmware, the latest version should already be installed on the device. After you have all your updates installed, Multi-room audio should just work right out of the box.

Start playing music on any iOS device and then select the HomePod. Any speakers you have that are compatible with AirPlay 2 will show up in a pop-up menu with a small checkbox next to them. You can choose multiple speakers to all play the same song from your iPhone or iPad. Apple Music integrates very well with multi-room audio via HomePods.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2

AirPlay is a technology that relies on WiFi to stream content between multiple devices. Users have a multitude of options available from Apple products to third-party devices like speakers. Connect multiple HomePods or other speakers together and play music from the source device throughout your home.

● Stream audio, video, and images to compatible devices
● Support from big-name companies like LG, Sony, Bose, and Sonos
● Screen mirroring to Apple TVs
● Share 4K video from the Photos app
● Siri support
● Collaborative playlist creation
● Mac as a target device in macOS Monterey

Get Apple News Directly in Your Inbox

AppleInsider is supported by its audience and may earn commission as an Amazon Associate and affiliate partner on qualifying purchases. These affiliate partnerships do not influence our editorial content.

AirPlay is an Apple service that allows users to share videos, photos, music, and other various forms of media across various platforms. Supported devices include Apple TV, HomePod and HomePod mini, third-party speakers, and many popular smart TV brands.

AirPlay Features

Apple designed AirPlay to require minimal user setup. Tapping the AirPlay icon, which is part of media-playback controls, on the source device pops up a menu that allows you to choose a nearby destination device. After tapping that, the video, audio, or images will begin to play within a few seconds on the playback device.

AirPlay 2

AirPlay 2, which Apple announced in 2017 and launched in 2018, added new features like HomePod stereo pairing, multi-room listening, support for Smart TVs, and improved buffer times.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2 Using AirPlay to stream audio to other devices

Compatible devices include any iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad capable of running iOS 11.4 or later. Destination devices include the Apple TV (fourth generation and later), HomePod, and any macOS computer running High Sierra or later.

Many Smart TV manufacturers support the feature as well, including Samsung, LG, Sony, and Vizio. Smart speaker manufacturers that support AirPlay 2 include brands such as Beats by Dre, Bose, Denon, Polk, and Sonos.

AirPlay can automatically play movies and shows in the places a user is most likely to watch them. Over time, the service learns where a user prefers to watch TV and can start playing on the TV in that room with one tap.

Compatible devices can receive AirPlay over Wi-Fi or ethernet. Because AirPlay is open-source, any computer can be turned into an AirPlay receiver. However, due to Apple’s DRM encryption, some media is unable to be played on third-party, unsupported devices. This includes iTunes’ rights-protected media, YouTube, and Netflix.

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2 Start your favorite TV show by sending it to your Apple TV

Buffering has been improved in later iterations of the service. AirPlay 2 features a relatively short buffering time – about two seconds – from starting a stream until it is played on a device that supports it.

Users who own more than one device that supports AirPlay 2 can play audio throughout their house in sync with each other. AirPlay improves syncing issues compared to Bluetooth, which has a longer buffering time and can be prone to de-syncing.

Apple Music boasts a feature that allows anyone to add songs to the Up Next, allowing families and friends in the same space to build collaborative playlists. Siri can also make AirPlay suggestions to users, showing up on the lock screen or in search. Siri suggestions for audio and video content can include the option to use AirPlay, allowing users to tap to begin watching a show on the users’ preferred screen.

Mirroring

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2 AirPlay also lets you mirror content from your device to an external display

AirPlay Mirroring allows content to be broadcast from iOS devices to an Apple TV (second-generation or later.) This is especially useful for those who are looking for a convenient way to show off pictures or video without requiring a large number of people to crowd around an iPhone or iPad.

iOS 14 allows users to AirPlay 4K video from their iPhone to the Apple TV. Video that is shared via AirPlay can be placed in Picture-in-Picture mode on tvOS 14 as well.

AirPlay to Mac

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2 Send media to the Mac using AirPlay in macOS Monterey

Users have always been able to send audio and video from the Mac to another device, but the reverse couldn’t work. Soon, with macOS Monterey, the Mac will also be an AirPlay receiver.

Apple boasts superior displays and speakers in many of its Mac products, but they’ve never been able to take advantage of the media sharing technology. Sending media to a Mac works the same way as sending it to an Apple TV or other device, simply pick the Mac from the AirPlay menu.

AirPlay History

How to use apple’s new multi-room audio features in airplay 2 Steve Jobs announcing the rebranding of AirTunes to AirPlay at a 2010 event

Apple released AirTunes in June of 2004 as the company’s first foray into wireless streaming between devices. AirTunes gave users the ability to play audio wirelessly by utilizing the now-defunct AirPort router. In the latter half of 2010, AirTunes was rebranded as AirPlay. The update allowed users to stream audio, video, and images to other Apple devices. Apple added screen mirroring in 2011.

First announced in June of 2017, AirPlay 2 had been slated to release alongside part of the iOS 11 launch in September of 2017. However, due to setbacks during development, it would not be released until June of 2018. It included support for multi-room audio built into the operating system. Previously, iOS could only stream music to one speaker, while multi-speaker support was limited to macOS.

It also integrated with HomeKit for the first time, allowing Siri to be used to play music on a specific speaker.

The update also included a shared “Up Next” option for collaborative playlists while listening with friends. Third-party apps were also able to tap into multi-room audio with a new API.

While we covered Apple’s upcoming iOS 11.3 update yesterday, one feature flew under my radar — AirPlay 2.

Along with new iPhone X Animoji and additional battery performance information/options, multi-room AirPlay audio playback is also included in iOS 11.3.

Apple first announced AirPlay 2 at WWDC back in June, 2017, but didn’t provide details related to what the new wireless audio system improved on over its predecessor.

Multi-room playback means you’ll be able to stream to multiple Apple TVs and speaker around the house directly from your iPhone. While Apple first stated that the HomePod won’t ship with multi-room support, it’s possible AirPlay 2 integration will add this feature to the smart home speaker (this still remains unclear, though). Apple’s HomePod is set to launch on February 9th in the U.S. and other regions, but a Canadian release still hasn’t been revealed.

AirPlay 2 is the first significant update to AirPlay since its launch roughly seven years ago. Early impressions from those using the developer build of iOS 11.3 indicate that AirPlay 2 is still pretty buggy right now, but functionality will likely improve before the full release.

Competing smart home speakers like the Amazon Echo and Google Home feature multi-room playback between various connected devices.

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

Sometimes a tool like Photoshop can be too heavy for your simple image editing needs. In those cases, Canva might be a better fit. Find out how to use it to design clean and attractive materials, without any design knowledge.

What is Canva?

is a popular online graphic design application that makes it easy to create high-quality images and materials. Millions of people use Canva to create social media images, posters, digital invitations, presentations, and physical materials like flyers and business cards.

Unlike high powered tools like Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator, Canva has a low barrier to entry due to its simple and intuitive interface. It is available on the web or as a mobile app for Android and iOS.

Canva offers several pricing plans for individual users, with different levels of functionality:

Free – Has most of the functionality needed to make simple layouts.
Pro ($9.99/mo): The Pro plan contains additional templates, graphics, fonts, and photos. It also allows users to save transparent PNGs, create custom templates, and upload their own fonts.
Enterprise ($30/mo): Designed specifically for corporations, this plan includes project workflows, group resources, and unlimited cloud storage.

Canva Templates and Resources

Canva’s most useful feature is its wide range of templates. Even with a free account, there are thousands of templates in over a hundred design types. There are templates for just about every use you can think of, from a personal resume to an Instagram post for your band’s next live performance. However, it should be noted that many templates are only accessible to Pro or Enterprise users.

To select a template, go to the Canva home page. From here, you can use one of the recommended templates on the home page or hover over the “Templates” button in the menu bar. In the menu, you will find a variety of design types categorized by use.

These categories include “Social Media”, “Personal”, “Business”, “Marketing” and “Study”. Clicking Personal > Cards brings up all the templates that can be used to make custom greeting and holiday cards.

Most templates contain several of the following:

Vectors and Graphics – These are additional elements used to add character to a template, such as shapes, stickers, frames, or in some cases, animated icons.
Stock Images – These are stock images that are available directly from the Canva library. You can decide to keep them or upload your photos and replace them.
Color Palettes – For a cohesive look, most templates follow a specific color palette for all of their elements.
Font Groups: These are combinations of fonts selected by Canva’s designers.
Page Layouts – This is especially true for templates that span multiple pages, like presentations or brochures. There will usually be multiple layout options for each page, similar to Google Slides or Powerpoint.

In addition to the assets listed above, you can add additional items from Canva’s full library of assets. On the left side of the design screen, you’ll find a wide variety of graphics, stock images, and fonts that you can use in addition to what’s in each template.

The design process

To better illustrate the process, let’s edit a simple photo in Canva Web. This design will be posted on social media to promote an upcoming webinar on Internet privacy and cybersecurity. First, select Templates > Social Media > Instagram Post.

report this ad

From here, select a template close to your planned layout. We have selected this template intended to promote remote learning.

On the main screen of Canva, you will see several pages of the particular template. If you’re making a single material, select one of these pages for your final design and discard the rest. Alternatively, if you’re building a multi-page creative, you can easily create a cohesive album with a template.

Here, we’ve edited the first page to fit our event, changing the text, the background color, and a bit of the layout. Now, all that remains is to export this design and upload it to Instagram.

Publish and export your designs

You have several options when publishing your designs. First, you can save it locally as a PNG or JPG file; Please note that only Pro users can export their images as transparent PNGs. You can also send it directly to your printer to ensure high-quality printing.

If you made a presentation, you can set it to “Presentation Mode”. This will bring the platform to full screen and allow it to function similar to any other type of presentation software. If you are showing the design to someone online, you can create a view link that anyone can access.

Lastly, you can directly export your design to a linked social media platform, such as Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram.

How to use canva to design like a professionalI use Canva a lot. It’s one of my all-time favorite content creation tools because it’s versatile, affordable, and easy to use.

While Canva is easy to use, there is a learning curve – of course. It has taken me some time and a lot of trial and error for me to figure out the best ways to use it. In this post, I’m going to share 9 of my favorite tips and tricks to help you use Canva like a pro.

#1: Invest in the Pro Plan

Canva has a free plan, but if you want to create income streams by selling digital or printable designs, I think the $9.95 a month for the Canva pro plan is a worthwhile investment. You’ll get access everything you get with the free plan plus access to 60,000 templates and 60 million stock images, photos, and videos.

You’ll also get Canva’s 1 Brand kit and the ability to upload your own fonts and designs, as well as the ability to create custom templates. Considering its affordability, this plan can be used instead of more expensive design software to create professional-looking designs and products.

#2: Use Canva Mood Boards for Inspiration

One type of template on Canva that I think people don’t use enough is the mood board. Mood boards can serve as design inspiration by helping you visualize color combinations and other design elements. If you search “mood board template” on Canva – in either the free or Pro plan – you’ll get a selection of mood boards. They can serve as inspiration as they are because some of them are quite lovely.

Even better, you can create a new mood board using photos and images that inspire you. It’s a great way to play around with different design elements, including colors, fonts, graphics, photographs, and more. If you’re looking for a way to kick your designs up a notch, using a mood board is a great way to start.

#3: Try Letter Frames to Add a Unique Element to Your Designs

The fonts on Canva tend to get a lot of attention, but a lot of people don’t know about letter frames. Letter frames are exactly what they sound like: letter-shaped frames that you can use just like a picture frame.

To find letter frames, choose “Elements” from the design bar and scroll through the frames. Drop the letter frame you want into your design. Then, choose a photo from Canva’s library or upload one of your own, and drag it to drop it into the frame.

#4: Use Canva to Add Design Elements to Your Videos

I think video design is one of the most under-utilized functions that Canva offers. You can upload a video of your own and add the same design elements to it you would add to any template, including fonts, lines, frames, charts, stickers, and animations.

Best of all, this functionality is available even with the free version of Canva. Simply choose Elements from the design menu and search for what you want. Then, drop it into the frame and relocate and resize it as needed.

#5: Add Royalty-Free Music to Your Videos

Speaking of videos, did you know that in addition to its huge library of photos, images, and other design elements, Canva also has a library of royalty-free music to choose from?

There’s no need to pay extra money to a music service or library if you want to add music to your videos. With Canva, you can choose from thousands of clips in dozens of different styles, including piano, vocal, pop, cinematic, and more.

#6: Limit Your Palette

A common mistake that beginning designers make is making their designs too busy. If people see your design and aren’t sure where to look – or what’s important – they’re going to move on to the next design. Or, worse, the next Etsy shop or website.

Professional designers use a limited palette to ensure that their designs are beautiful and easy on the eyes. It’s a good rule of thumb to limit yourself to four colors. Just as important is choosing colors that work well together. If you create a design with clashing colors, it’s not going to be appealing.

#7: Separate the Background from the Image

What if you have an image you like but you’re not crazy about the background? With Canva Pro, it’s easy to separate them. That way, you can use the part you like and discard the rest – and without paying a premium for Photoshop.

To accomplish the task, upload an image (or choose one from Canva’s library) and add it to a template. Then, click the image and choose “Effects” at the top. Click “Background Remover” and you’ll have just the image. You can add a new background that suits your needs.

#8: Copy One Design to Make New Designs

When you spend your valuable time perfecting a design in Canva, you may want to use the basic design again without having to dedicate time to replicating it. Fortunately, that’s easy to do.

You can simply click the “Copy” icon – it’s the thing that looks like two overlapping rectangles – at the top of the screen. If you prefer a keyboard shortcut, you can use Control + C to copy and Control + V to paste design where you want it.

#9: Use Contrasting Fonts

Just as it’s not a good idea to use too many colors in a design, the same applies to fonts. Professional designers limit themselves to two fonts in contrasting designs. Using more than that is confusing to the eye and may make your design look like a ransom note instead of a professional product.

For example, if you use a clean Sans Serif design for your heading in an image, consider using a handwriting or script font for the subheading – or vice versa.

Conclusion

Canva is my favorite design tool for a reason. You can do a lot with it – and using the 9 design tips I’ve included here will help you create professional-looking graphics and products that people will love.

How to use canva to design like a professional

This post may contain affiliate links for your convenience. If you click on the link and purchase the item, A Personal Organizer, LLC. may receive a small commission at no extra cost to you.

How to use Canva to consistently create shareable content for your business.

When you are trying to grow your business, one of the things you will always need, no matter what stage you are in with your business, is good content. The most effective type of content that will give you a brand following and grow your business must be both of high quality, encourage sharing and engagement, and consistent.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Because creating content can take a lot of time and energy, it’s so important to use great tools that make it easier. Enter Canva.

Not only does Canva give you the most user-friendly design tools available, but it also helps you to easily stay consistent with the content that you are creating and sharing for your business.

Canva’s tools let you create quality and consistent content even if you aren’t a design pro.

Here is just the tip of the iceberg of things you can make for your business using Canva to create the type of content that your business needs:

Now that you have an idea of what you can create with Canva, Here are some of the most useful and user-friendly features that Canva offers.

  • Pre-Sized templates for every type of content
  • Text, graphics, and photo options to create the unique look you want for your content
  • Resize to fit the most popular social media, web, and print sizes- biz cards, logos, , Pinterest graphics, or letterhead for all of your amazing new freebies you can now create.

So where do you start?

First, you’ll want to choose a template for whatever it is you are making. Depending on which social media platform or blog graphic you are creating an image for, these templates will be sized accordingly to what each platform requires for the best looking content images.

Once you select the template for your image, you can then change the graphics, the layout, even use a blank template to start from scratch in the size that you want. Here is a great tutorial on how to get started using all of Canvas’s tools. (link)

Upload your own photos or use Canva’s free stock images (note: make sure you read their terms of use with their images. You cannot use their stock designs to sell products). Or you can pay for the pro photo upgrade and get tons of free stock from the Canva’s inventory.

Bonus tip: don’t forget to create folders for your projects and make a copy of a design you will want to use as a template before creating a new one. This will save you so much time when you want to repeat the styling of a particular type of content.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Conclusion

Canva is truly a game changer for business owners who want to create high quality, beautiful, custom content but do not have a degree in graphic design or do not want to invest the time and energy into learning design programs like Photoshop or InDesign.

In addition to being such a user-friendly tool to create content, Canva also helps you stay on brand by giving you the option to save your design templates and create a brand kit where you can keep all of the elements of your brand together in one place.

Canva’s free membership has a lot of great options to get you started. If you want to get even more out of the app, like pro photo options and templates, and the ability to download your designs on a transparent background, you’ll want to upgrade to their Pro Plan.

Still, feel like you need a little help on the graphic design end or need to take your design and formatting further for an eBook or course launch?

Head over to Fiverr and hire a designer to do the work for you.

Fiverr has a great pool of talented designers that can work on your project for you and save you the hassle of figuring out all of those detailed layout measurements.

Are you ready to take your business’ content game to the next level with amazing graphics and a consistent brand message? Start using Canva today to execute all of those great content ideas you have been thinking up!

How to use canva to design like a professional

Hello. My name is Heather Bragg, owner of a creative marketing agency. I use Canva.

If you aren’t already familiar with Canva, it’s a free do-it-yourself graphic design web and mobile device application. There are a bevy of templates from which you can choose to customize for just about any online and offline marketing endeavor, including Instagram stories, Facebook posts, posters, menus, infographics, etc.

Oh, you know about Canva? You like it, too?

The reason why this article reads like a dirty confessional is because for professional graphic designers, Canva could be a gut punch to the bottom line. Why would anyone need to hire a professional designer if they can do it themselves for free?

I am an Adobe nerd. InDesign, PhotoShop and Illustrator are typically my go-to design applications. I decided to use Canva in part to stay on top of trending technology and and also because professional creatives need to find a way to work with DIY marketing tools. Because they aren’t going anywhere.

Overall, I found Canva fun and easy to use. It felt less like work and more like when I discovered the first version of Windows Paint when I was 9. Like any free marketing tool, however, there are limitations. Here are the pros and cons of Canva that everyone should know.

PRO: Canva saves time

I downloaded the Canva app on my iPhone for a quick on-the-spot social graphic for a client. This particular business had a last-minute event that needed to be promoted on Facebook and Instagram. The ease and intuitive nature of Canva was great! Within less than 10 minutes, I created the graphic, wrote the message and posted it to the Facebook page!

I love the time-saving aspect of Canva for small social media graphics. I created two infographics for Bragg Media’s blog on repurposing content that I also used on LinkedIn and Pinterest. Each social media outlet has different size requirements or aspect ratios, so having an option to quickly choose a template with the correct size is a boon. However, if you want to take the same design for Facebook and automatically resize it for LinkedIn or Twitter, you will have to upgrade to Canva Pro.

Turn your Canva website template into a WordPress website.

CON: Canva has limited free templates and graphics

Canva has a horde of free eye-catching templates that you can completely customize — colors, fonts, graphics, etc. However, there is a limit to the free design templates, and if I exclusively used Canva, this would get old, fast.

Customization also means stock photos and graphics from their depository. However, there is a cap on the number of free graphics and photos from which you can choose. Some of the paid-for templates, graphics and photos are cheesy and generic.

How to use canva to design like a professionalGraphic Design Subscriptions

Professional, convenient, flat-rate graphic design

PRO: Canva has an intuitive interface any technological novice can use

I am amazed at how easy it is to navigate and use Canva. If there isn’t something you know how to do, such as add drop shadows to text, Canva has a library of instructional videos or check YouTube for how-to Canva tutorials.

I found Canva especially easy to use, but I have been in front of a computer since Commodore 64 released Hangman on cassette tapes. For those with no graphic design experience or those with no technological prowess, I can’t help but wonder if they would find Canva as easy as I do?

Canva also offers an option to collaborate with a team by sharing the file you’re working on with other people who can work on projects from their mobile devices. Much like professional design programs (such as my beloved Adobe) you can undo mistakes, save project history automatically, easily upload images and choose from a variety of fonts for the sample text to suit your taste. You also can export Canva projects as industry standard .pdf, .png and .jpg files.

CON: Don’t use Canva for large professional design projects

If you need to design a magazine, multi-page booklet or any project with a specific size, don’t use Canva. Projects like this require a more sophisticated technology with options for little details — such as page numbering, ability to edit the shapes of fonts, bleeds and margin settings, CMYK settings for images (needed for professional printing), drop shadow effects, etc.

I love the fun, hip design templates that Canva offers. But I also see these designs used all over the Internet. I have seen two different social accounts use the same design for #MotivationalMonday memes on Instagram, for example. While Canva is an affordable option for budget-conscious businesses, you still need a professional graphic designer for more important projects.

PRO & CON: Canva offers logos

This gets into a sticky conversation about brand identity and brand awareness. Professional designers who work for branding companies and marketing agencies would likely say that Canva is a blight on the creative industry because it generifies (that is a word, according to urban dictionary) the brand design process. It’s like using the Comic Sans font for anything that is supposed to be professional. In the creative industry where professionals view brand identity design as an art form, you don’t do that!

The Canva logos may look great for the first year or two of your business. Their designs are colorful and very modern. However, brand identity design should be timeless — not trendy. Your logo is a visual representation of your business that should stand the test of time. The question that begs to be asked: Would Canva devalue a brand due to its popularity and tendency to lean toward templated design?

Bottom line: I do not recommend using their Canva templates for a logo. If you take the DIY route for logo design, use Canva as a design application not a template maker. Even Canva warns against this:

Canva’s pre-made logo layouts and elements are used by many people, so your logo will not be exclusive to you if you don’t heavily modify the design and elements. Non-exclusive logos cannot be trademarked. If you intend to trademark your logo, use only elements that you’ve created yourself or commissioned directly.

PRO or CON: The Bottom Line

I will likely continue using Canva for small social media memes for Bragg Media and for some other clients as needed. It saves time and they look great. However, because I know a lot of other people use Canva I still spend more time than most customizing the templates so they have a personal touch.

Overall, Canva is a great, affordable option for startups and small businesses that are on tight budgets and aren’t ready for marketing agency retainers.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Entrepreneurs – here’s your chance to learn more about how you can use Canva to create marketing assets for your business!

Platforms such as Canva mean that anyone can learn the basics of graphic design, and Zoe Doyle from Startup Gippsland and Work My Own Way is here to teach you how to create videos, social media tiles, and marketing materials for yourself!

Not only can you save money from outsourcing your design, but you can channel that creativity and have some fun at the same time!

In this webinar you will learn:

  • What Canva is and how to set up your own account
  • How to develop your brand kit
  • How to find the right templates and graphics for you
  • How to create stand out, personalised assets that will connect with your audience
  • How to use your completed designs to build your marketing funnel

In this hands-on workshop – Zoe will move at your pace to make sure you’re getting the chance to understand this powerful tool, ask questions, and make sure you’re set up for success in the world of marketing!

About Zoe Doyle:

Zoe brings her background of running a successful training studio and personal development coaching business into her work in marketing. As Startup Gippsland and Work My Own Way’s Marketing and Communications Specialist, she is responsible for creating and managing all facets of the brands’ content and digital presence, and securing press and media opportunities for the programs and their participants.

In 2019 she published her book, “Uncage the Lion Within”, and over the past 5 years, she has developed her skills in marketing, communications, and delivering better, more authentic messages and content online.

Let’s start off this post with a few facts.

  • When people hear information, they’re only likely to remember 10% of it three days later. But if a relevant image is paired with that information, people will remember 65% of the information three days later.
    said visual marketing was the most important form of content for their business.
  • Tweets with imagesreceive 150% more retweets than tweets without images.

Why am I sharing these stats with you?

Because it’s hugely important to make sure you include shareable images in blog posts, and for your content on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and Pinterest.

Sounds great, Holly – but isn’t that super difficult to do?

Not with Canva.

You might think you need to have design skills to create an amazing graphic. You might think you need to invest in all the top tools: Photoshop for editing, InDesign for adding fonts, another app for filters, and let’s not even get started on all the stock photo sites out there.

Not with Canva.

Canva includes all of these features. It’s got an editing tool, a publishing tool, plus loads of images, icons and other templates, all within one platform. And the best bit of all?

But I get it – it’s tough to know where to begin, right? Whether you’re creating Facebook post images, infographics or email headers, it can be overwhelming to know where to start.

That’s what today’s post is all about. I’m going to walk you through how you (as a blogger, creative entrepreneur or business owner), can use Canva, with any level of skill or knowledge.

I’ll even give you plenty of examples along the way as we walk through the main steps you can take to use Canva to uplevel your creation of visual content.

Learn how to make professional presentations to elevate your value as an employee and/or student.

In this project you will learn how to make presentations using Canva. Canva is a free web design service where you have a wide variety of tools to design all kinds of media you need. Canva is a great option for those looking for an easy-to-use platform to create presentations for corporate, school, and college classes. Canva has many elements that are free and gives you a lot of freedom when it comes to designing. Canva is an extremely useful tool for those who are just starting out and even becomes a very good tool for those who have been designing in more advanced programs for years. It is a quick option that does not need to be installed on your computer and as long as you have an internet connection, it will be an accessible tool. Additionally, it offers a number of templates that facilitate the creative process and a presentation platform where you can use any medium, from images to videos.

Навыки, которые вы получите

Будете учиться пошагово

На видео, которое откроется рядом с рабочей областью, преподаватель объяснит эти шаги:

Learn what Canva is and how to use its basic tools

Design a presentation from scratch for a class in Canva

Use Canva’s default templates to make a corporate presentation

Learn the different ways to present what Canva offers

Record your presentations with audio and image in Canva

Как устроены проекты с консультациями

Ваше рабочее пространство — это облачный рабочий стол в браузере. Ничего не нужно загружать.

Having an attractive LinkedIn profile opens up many good opportunities for you. A banner or cover photo sits at the top of your profile and can impact anyone’s perception of you within seconds.

A professional LinkedIn banner with the right visuals helps your profile stand out to your potential employers or can solidify your positioning as a brand. Canva offers a plethora of design templates and amazing features to help you create anything and everything on the platform in no time.

In this article, we’ll show you how to design a professional LinkedIn banner using Canva for your profile.

1. Sign Up/Log In to Canva

If you’re new to Canva, the first step would be signing up on the platform. You can do so by using your Google, Facebook, or Apple account. Once you log in, you are directed to Canva’s user interface, where you can create designs, browse through the templates, and much more to get the most out of designing on Canva.

2. Pick Your Favorite Template

You can create pretty much anything and everything on Canva. From a logo to a full-fledged presentation, the platform has got you covered with a dozen of custom templates to design.

To get started with the LinkedIn banner, type in the search bar and tap on the option with the dimensions of 1584×396 px. Then, browse through the templates to find the right template that aligns with your profession or brand. If you have a Canva Pro subscription, you can take advantage of the premium templates, or you can also use Filters on the left-side panel to narrow down to free templates available or any other of your choices.

Once you pick your favorite template, you’re redirected to the canvas page, where you can make changes to it as you like.

3. Change Your Background Photo and Add Text

The next step is to change the background picture of your LinkedIn banner. You can choose to keep the same image or explore Photos on the left-side panel to pick the right one that conveys your profession.

After that, select the text of the template to add your name and designation. You can play around with the fonts and see what looks the best for your profile.

4. Explore Design Elements to Level Up Your LinkedIn Banner

Further, you can enhance your banner design even more by adding suitable elements. Tap on Elements on the left side panel and search for related terms to your profession to add the best graphics.

You can customize your elements by resizing them, adjusting the transparency, and placing them in your design according to your preferences.

Additionally, you can add your social media handles to let your profile visitors know your visibility on all other platforms. Also, you can choose to add your email ID or website on your cover photo to highlight it to your potential clients.

5. Add Your Company Logo to Your Banner to Give It a Finishing Touch

Finally, showcase your company or brand logo on your design to complete your banner. You can simply upload and drop your logo and place it on your design.

6. Download Your Banner and Upload It to Your LinkedIn Profile

After you’re done customizing your design, it’s time to download your banner to show it off on your LinkedIn profile. To do so, tap on Share in the top-right corner of the toolbar and choose to Download your design in PNG or JPG.

Once you’re done downloading your image, sign in to your LinkedIn profile, upload your banner, and tap on Apply to make it live.

Get Noticed With a Professional LinkedIn Banner

By following the above-mentioned steps, you can easily create a professional LinkedIn banner using Canva in no time.

A catchy and professional LinkedIn banner is sure to impress your clients or potential employers, or any of your connections who visit your profile. With Canva’s handy tools and features, you can play around with your banner to enhance it and show it off on your profile.

10 Ways You Can Use Canva to Level Up in Your Career

About The Author

Shreeya Deshpande
(22 Articles Published)

Shreeya is a tech-enthusiast and enjoys keeping up with the latest technological advances. When she is not writing about technology, you can find her travelling or reading her favourite novel!

Subscribe to our newsletter

Join our newsletter for tech tips, reviews, free ebooks, and exclusive deals!

How to use canva to design like a professional

Today I’m finally doing it – sharing how I create my watercolor printables in Canva. I’ve been using Canva pro for a few years for all aspects of Whiskey & Whit and today I wanted to share a Canva tutorial including some Canva Design Ideas on how to create printables and templates.

How to use canva to design like a professional

WHAT IS CANVA?

Canva is a free digital design platform (that also has a paid option) that allows users to make printables, social media graphics, videos, and more. Primarily centered around a drag and drop interface, Canva’s thousands of templates make it very easy to design and create without a ton of prior knowledge about design. You can also edit photos within Canva without needing a pricy subscription to Adobe programs.

How to use canva to design like a professional

WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CANVA AND CANVA PRO?

Canva.com and the Canva app are free to use. You can create designs, collaborate with your team, and access thousands of templates and elements all without cost. I used the free version of Canva when I worked in marketing for a corporation and it did everything I needed, howeverI decided to upgrade to Canva Pro in 2020 for my business because:

  1. The extra fonts and design elements that come with Canva Pro help me level up my designs for my business – this fact alone makes the investment of $12.99/month or $119/year WORTH IT to me.
  2. I’m able to upload my own colors and fonts to create a “Brand Kit” that allows me to easily apply my fonts, colors, and logo with just one click.
  3. I can save my designs as templates to share with my audience.
  4. Because I design literally EVERYTHING in Canva, I really like the 100GB of Cloud storage that comes with my Canva Pro Account.
  5. The Remove Background feature is AWESOME and I use it all the time for thumbnails and social graphics.
  6. Something I dont use, but should, is there social media scheduling feature that also comes with Canva Pro. It’s truly a one stop shop and is a great tool for small businesses or small marketing teams that want to create beautiful and coheasive graphics without much experience in design.

You can find more information on Canva plans and pricing here.

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

HOW DO I DESIGN MY PRINTABLES IN CANVA?

You can use what I’m teaching you today about Canva to sell on Etsy too! This is a Canva beginner tutorial and my goal with this video was to teach you how to use Canva and to give you a resource to reference when you design your own files.

In this Canva editing tutorial, I’ll also show you how to find beautiful watercolor elements for your designs as well. Let me know if you have questions below and topics for a future Canva design video!

How to use canva to design like a professional

WATCH THE FULL CANVA TUTORIAL VIDEO

If you are a beginner, Photoshop might be tough to start creating digital graphics. Also, it consumes a lot of time to create quick designs or make simple edits.

Creating a design with Canva’s tools is simple but effective. It takes less than 5 minutes to create a high−quality engaging design.

Let us start by learning to create a basic graphic. Follow these 7 steps to start creating fascinating designs.

Choose What You Want to Design

Go to the homepage of Canva and click on ‘Create a design.’

When you choose this option, you will get a dropdown list. You can select anything from logos, posters, resumes, thumbnails to infographics, charts, and calendars.

You can search for what you want to make or scroll down and select an option. If you do not what you were looking for, you can choose to create a custom design.

Here we are selecting an Instagram post to guide you through the process of creating your designs.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Select the Template

When you select an option, the design tab automatically opens.

Notice the user−friendly hierarchy. Features like templates, images, elements, audio background, and so on are placed on the left. You can select any of the tabs while designing and search for the specific thing you need. Above the design page you have formatting options for changing the background color, fonts, giving special effects, and so on.

Here is a look at how the design tab will look when it opens.

How to use canva to design like a professional

One of the best features of Canva is its library of templates. It makes designing simple yet effective. The Canva templates always have one or more of the following −

Graphics and Vectors

Elements, audio, and special effects

For our sample design, we will create an Instagram post that aims for saving the environment. We will aim for a post that will have simple lines about saving trees and standing united.

Since we know what we need and we have chosen the appropriate template, let’s begin with editing.

How to use canva to design like a professional

The following steps are selective. You can try all of them or just one or two depending upon your requirement.

Changing the Background Color

I will start with changing the background color to make the post look visually appealing.

To change the background color, click once on the post you are designing. You will notice the background color and animation option have appeared on the bar above your design. Click on background color to get a list of options to choose from.

The color palette will have colors related to the photos or elements in your design. Below are the default colors and an option to add another color palette.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Since light green will be relevant to our design, we will choose that for the background.

Editing the Text

To edit the texts in Canva, select the font you wish to edit by clicking on it. Notice the formatting options that appear on the bar above the design. There are several options like −

More formatting options like underline, add links.

Canva templates or font styles often have different texts grouped. You can ungroup them, position them, or delete them. You can also create a duplicate or add special effects like transparency.

For our design, we will just edit the text to write save the trees.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Resize the Elements

Since changing the texts has disrupted the size of the box it was in, we will resize it to fit in the design proportionately.

We can do this by either resizing the text or resizing the elements. We can resize the elements. Images, and texts with the cursor. Texts are also resized with the option on the formatting bar.

Here we will pull the box on both sides to fit the design. This is how it looks.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Navigate and Add/Remove Elements, Images, or Background

Navigate through the taskbar on the left to select from a library of templates, photos, elements, texts, audio, videos, and background.

For our design, I will simply browse through different elements and select a different tree. To get the precise collection of elements for our design, we will search for trees through the search bar on the element tab.

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

We will select a good tree from the collection and delete the previous one. To delete the element used before, click on it and press the delete option on the right side of the formatting bar.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Save Your Design

Normally, all your designs have stored in your Canva account. You can access them and edit by going to ‘All your designs’ through your homepage. After you complete your design, download it to your local files so that you can post it.

To save your design, click on the download option on the right side above the formatting bar. You will have options to save your graphic in JPG, PNG, PDF format with a recommendation. You will also have an option to adjust the size.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Here we have selected PNG format and pressed the purple download button. After you select download, the dialogue box shown below will appear.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Do not exit or press anything else until your design is prepared. This box then closes and your download will start.

After the download is complete, access it on your local file storage and use it.

How to use canva to design like a professional

With so many elements and options, you might be terrified to begin a project. A great way to create an appealing layout is by using templates. This feature can be found here.

It provides dozens of options to group photos and designs in a prearranged way without doing the cutting and positioning yourself. Simply pick a template you like, apply it, and drop in your images and designs.

Pick fonts with high contrast

How to use canva to design like a professional

Picking a font matters more than you may think. Fonts give your project life and character, just like colors and elements do. An excellent choice to make a design pop is to choose two fonts that contrast each other. The rule of thumb here is not to pick two fonts from the same class and avoid using more than two fonts in one project.

More than two will make graphics look cluttered or busy, while choosing two fonts that contrast and complement each other will make your design pop.

Group elements

How to use canva to design like a professional

When you start playing with multiple elements in one design, things can get confusing. Canva takes this confusion out and allows you to arrange and group elements in several ways with just a few clicks.

At the top of the toolbar, you can send elements backward and forward based on which position you’d like them to have. Or you can pick the elements you want to control and select Group on the toolbar to group them.

Use the image background remover

How to use canva to design like a professional

A feature only available with Canva pro, the image background remover makes touching up a photo a breeze. With just a few easy steps, you can remove the background of any photo to highlight the portion that matters to your design. Here’s how to use it:

  • Select an image
  • Click Edit Image at the top of the screen
  • Choose Background Remover

Don’t wait, animate

How to use canva to design like a professional

You can animate pretty much anything in Canva, and there are various choices in how you do so. You can choose to animate a single element of your design or the entire project. You can also animate each element differently or choose from pre-created animations inside Canva.

To animate an element, click on it and click the Animate button at the top of the screen to choose an option.

These are some of the frustrations that I hear over and over again from fellow entrepreneurs that want to step up their design game but are not sure how to do it.

Well folks, I’m just going to state for the record:

I struggled with these same issues for a while, until I launched this brand earlier this year.

My Struggle With Consistent Branding and Visual Design

As I initially stated, for years I struggled with branding, visual design and just pretty much trying to create a cohesive look + feel for my brand.

I tried using programs like Photoshop, but got easily frustrated with trying to figure out how to use it . Then I tried using PicMonkey, but I didn’t like the fact that I could not save my work.

Then one day I decided to sign up for an account on Canva. I used it to create a few blog post images …but nothing else.

Even though I had been using Canva for a little while I didn’t realize the full potential of this platform until launching YourChicGeek.

I would sit around for hours creating one different branded design after another (HOURS people). Then one day, I after setting up shop on Pinterest , I started looking around at some of the other designs there.

What I noticed was that t he designs that were getting the most re-pins, shares and likes all had one thing in common:

There was a consistent look and feel to their designs!

This my friends, was a hugeeee game changer for me and the way that I moved forward with designing graphics for my brand. These days , Canva is now a staple in my brand + a resource that I use every day for designing graphics and visual designs for YourChicGeek.

What is Canva + How Do I Use It for My Business?

Canva is an online platform that you can use to create super gorgeous visual designs + documents for your brand.

What I loveeee about Canva is that in the dashboard of the platform, there are templates for nearly every type of design you can think of like: presentations, social media profile covers, blog graphics, flyers, postcards, resumes, banners, eBook covers and CD covers.

When I launched this brand earlier this year, I made a promise to myself to get really serious about stepping up my visual design game. I took the time to learn how to use Canva to create graphics that:

  • Would be easily shared on social media networks
  • Would increase engagement, shares, likes Repins and Retweets
  • Stood out from the sea of millions

So far, it has really been working!

Now, I want to make this point clear, I am all about investing in your brand + in tools for building your business.

However, I also know from spending tonnnns of money (to the tune of thousands) in the past, that you also want to be very intentional about where you are investing money into your business.

Because at the end of the day, you want to make a return on your investments.

Why Attractive Visual Content and Graphic Design Matters

Earlier this year, Hubspot published an article that covered that is armed with stats about the importance of visual design . I felt compelled to share these stats with you to stress the importance of using visuals with your marketing:

  • Content with relevant images gets 94 % more views than content without relevant images ( KissMetrics )
  • Visual content is more than 40X more likely to get shared on social media than other types of content ( Buffer Blog )
  • Researchers found that colored visuals increase people’s willingness to read a piece of content by 80% ( Xerox )

I admit, I have definitely noticed an increase in engagement and shares across the board when I share posts with graphics vs. posts without them.

How I Use Canva to Design Graphics for My Brand + Build My Visual Arsenal

One of the questions that I get alllll of the time from fellow entrepreneurs and peeps that I run into online is:

Kim, what are you using to design your branded graphics + images on your blog?

When I tell them Canva, they are floored! But it’s true! I use Canva to design all of the graphics that I use for my brand such as:

My Branded Blog Post Graphics

Remember when I stated earlier that I used to spend hours creating branded images for my blog posts? Soooo, I finally figured out how to create a branded image in Canva, and use it over and over again for future images.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Online design platform Canva, which makes it easy for anyone to create professional graphics quickly – even if they don’t have a design background – is expanding its reach today with the launch of its first-ever iPhone application. Up until now, the company had offered a web application for around three years, and had been available on iPad for a year. With its iPhone launch, Canva’s audience could grow beyond the business and marketing professionals who typically use its service today, and become more popular with consumers.

First launched around mid-2013, Canva was dreamed up by CEO Melanie Perkins whose previous company involved a system for building the layouts used in school yearbooks. She realized then there was demand for simple tools that made design more accessible to the mainstream.

Canva today offers an online editor and a library of templates, graphics, fonts, photos and more some of which can be used for free, while others may be available for just a dollar, given their one-time use cases. The platform lets you design a range of graphics for things like slideshows, handouts, posters, cards, collages, invitations, as well as those graphics needed for social media posts, Facebook Pages and more.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Most importantly, the way the system itself works has made it so easy that anyone can figure out how to put the various pieces together and end up with a professional-looking product, without having to turn to more advanced software like Photoshop or InDesign, for example.

Currently, the platform is used by more than 10 million people, including 50,000 Canva for Work subscribers, which is the company’s premium plan aimed at businesses. These subscribers include several notable names, like Yelp, Lonely Planet, Hubspot and Upworthy, for example. The company to date has raised over $30 million, according to CrunchBase data.

Though Canva emerged as an online service used from the desktop, there has been a growing demand for mobile. Its iPad application has now been downloaded 2 million times, and over half (53%) of its mobile visits today are coming from Apple devices. Meanwhile, the company says that around 30 percent of its engagement with its users via email and more on social media is done on the iPhone.

Combined with the fact that an iPhone app has been users’ most-requested product, Canva knew that launching on iPhone would be a priority this year.

How to use canva to design like a professional

“We’ve seen incredible growth as an online app for desktop computers, but we’ve always realised that mobile devices are becoming the dominant way that people interact online,” explains Canva co-founder and head of product Cam Adams. “It’s important for us to be available on all devices that people use to create visual content, so releasing the iPhone app is a giant leap towards Canva fulfilling that cross-platform vision.”

He adds that being available on the iPhone will open up the platform to a different type of creation – one that’s “more immediate, contextual and social,” he says.

“This will be extremely valuable to the businesses and marketers that we target currently, but will also be a great attraction for the consumer market, who will be able to use Canva to create some really unique content,” Adams notes.

How to use canva to design like a professional

The bigger challenge with the iPhone app was in bringing the breadth of tools that Canva offers to the smaller screen, while still keeping the experience simple.

The mobile app offers over a million layouts, stock photos and illustrations, which can be edited with fonts, photo filters, graphics, stickers, shapes and more. Included are hundreds of layouts for things like greeting cards, invitations, social media posts, sales events and flyers, business presentations, Facebook covers, social media graphics, and more.

Finished items can then be published to Facebook Pinterest, Instagram, and Google+ or saved for emailing or texting.

While there are a number of apps today for doing basic image edits on the iPhone, Canva has a couple of standout features that put it more in the “pro” space. One is its live camera mode, which lets you take a photo and see the camera live in the background of your design. That makes it easy to snap a pic that fits perfectly in the design you’ve chosen.

The other is its support for multi-page designs, which means it can be used for larger projects on the go, like business presentations.

Overall, the end result is an app that makes sense both for Canva’s core user base of business professionals, but one that could find it spilling over to the consumer market as well.

When you are able to tackle successfully designing social media graphics for your own company or clients, you are able to accomplish many objectives:

• Easily capture your audience’s attention

• Effectively share your message

• Engage with your Audience

• Increase leads and conversions

• Improve your Brand experience.

These objectives are crucial for you to successfully demonstrate through your graphics. Competition is tougher than ever on the online world, and it starts learning how to create graphics in Canva.

Yes, we understand that not everyone is a skilled designer and not all businesses have the resources to employ a professional graphic designer.

That is where Canva comes to the rescue! Canva is known as a graphic design platform that allows users to create social media graphics, presentations, posters, resumes, and much more. The best part is they provide you with free templates, options for images, filters, icons, shapes, and fonts- essentially everything you need to create attention grabbing graphics.

To help you maximize all their useful features, we’re outlining a couple of ways to create your next great graphic using Canva.

Things to Consider when creating graphics in Canva

Keep it Clean and Simple ​

With all the features that are offered to you within Canva, it’s important to stay true to your design goals and strategy that represent your business. There are an overwhelming amount of different design aspects accessible to you- try not to go overboard. Keep your graphics clean, simple, and cohesive!

Experiment! ​

Have fun with this side of your marketing duties! It’s time to relax and let your mind be creative and experiment with all the features Canva has to offer. There are many design aspects within both the free version and pro version to help your graphics stand out again your competitors.

Use Quality and Relevant Images

A huge contribution to creating attention grabbing graphics, right off the bat, are the images you select. Your image must catch your audience’s attention upon first glance, or they will keep scrolling. By choosing excellent visual content, you will keep your audience interested in what you have to say and on your page longer. If you like the image but the colors do not cut it, you can use Canva’s photo adjustments option to tweak the contrast, brightness, saturation, and tent.

Browse Canva’s Free Templates

An important first step is to understand your content goals and objectives for your graphics. Which social media channels will you be using and what message you are trying to get out there.

Canva provides users with a variety of professionally made templates and elements that you can incorporate into your graphic. If you use, Canva Pro, you have access to everything for free. If you choose to use the free version, take some time to browse the many templates and check out all the available features before you decide if it is something you would like to purchase.

Use Consistent Brand Color and Fonts

With the endless possibilities within Canva, it is easy to lose site of your content goals and not stay consistent with your brand colors and fonts. On Canva’s basic color picker, you can input your brand’s hex code to directly match your branding colors, which allows for consistency. It is not mandatory to use the same colors over and over, using similar ones across your posts in all your social channels can help you stand out and become recognizable online as well. By using consistent colors throughout your graphics, that will provide an identity and cohesiveness for your brand identity.

A great tool to see what colors go good together is Canva’s Color Tool. Try it out!

Similar to your brand colors giving your brand consistency, fonts bring out your tones and personality of your message. It is important to pick fonts based on what you are trying to say and the tone of your message. Try to pick fonts that are close to your existing marketing pieces. If you cannot find the exact one in Canva, look at the typography of your current pieces and try to find similar fonts with the same serif’s, sans serif, alignment, etc.

Try to stick to one or two fonts at a time when creating graphics. Using two fonts will create contrast and grab the attention of your audience. It’s a best practice to apply one font family and use their variant- italic, bold, or condensed.

Canva is the world’s best free design app for creating quick, beautiful graphics. With just a few clicks of the mouse, you can create stunning designs in minutes, even if you have no design experience. It also provides access to over a million images, graphics, and templates.

So it’s no surprise that Canva is the ideal tool for creating an ebook design — you don’t need any graphic design experience, and you can use this guide to create a high-quality book cover in minutes (and for free!). This article will show you how to create an ebook in Canva step by step.

What’s the best part about how to write an ebook with Canva? The fact that it is extremely simple to get started. Save yourself time searching for beautiful layouts or complicated design elements, avoid hiring a designer who will take days (or even weeks) to put something together for you, and let Canva do all of the heavy lifting.

How to use canva to design like a professional

This article will show you how to make an ebook using Canva. Then, we’ll show you five Canva ebook cover templates that you can use right away.

How To Make An Ebook On Canva

There are only a few steps involved in figuring out how to create an ebook in Canva:

Step1:

Launch Canva.com in your browser and sign in with your credentials.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Step 2:

In the top search bar, type “ebook”, “a4”, or any other format you want your ebook to be in, and press enter.

Step 3:

Select your favorite template. Alternatively, choose “Create a Blank Document” or any template if that option is not available.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Step 4:

In the Canva editor, go to “Templates” on the left navigation bar and type “ebook” in the search bar. Canva provides you with even more template options. Instead of just the cover, I recommend using a template with multiple sites. Of course, it depends on what you require.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Step 5:

Once you’ve decided on a template, begin working on your ebook! Duplicate the pages you want and fill in the blanks with your text. Canva makes it simple to create an ebook. The most crucial aspect, of course, is what you intend to write about.

However, these are the steps in creating your complete ebook with Canva.

How To Make An Ebook Cover With Canva

Fortunately, because Canva is such a great design tool, this is one of Canva’s strengths. Simply put, the first page of your Canva project is your ebook cover.

Alternatively, if you want to make your own, Canva has a plethora of templates for ebook covers.

1. On the Canva home screen, type “ebook covers” into the search box. Canva has an entire section of templates dedicated to this.

How to use canva to design like a professional

2. Select one of the thousands of Canva ebook covers for your story or ebook.

3. Add or edit elements on the cover to fine-tune it to your liking.

Best Canva Ebook Templates

We’ve compiled a list of the best and most useful ebook templates for you to use in your Canva project. All of the formats are A4 in size. If you have the Canva Pro version, you can resize them with a single click.

Template for business ebooks (only available for Canva Pro users)

There are many more ebook templates to choose from, but these are our favorites. You can go through all of Canva’s templates and inspect each one until you find the right one.

How Do I Make An Ebook On Canva Mobile?

The procedure for how to write an ebook on Canva on your mobile phone is similar to how to design an ebook in Canva on your desktop computer.

1. Type “ebook” or “A4” or any other format you want your ebook to the search bar. And then select your favorite template.

How to use canva to design like a professional

2. To change your template, click the large purple “+” button on the bottom left. Then, on the bottom navigation menu, select “Template,” and then, on the top search bar, type “ebooks” or “ebook.”

How to use canva to design like a professional

3. Select another template that you like and begin editing your ebook. Duplicate the pages you want again, add your personal story, text, recipe ideas, or whatever else you want to write about, and begin designing your nice ebook in Canva.

How to use canva to design like a professional

So that answers the question of how to make an ebook with Canva Mobile.

Things To Consider When Writing An Ebook

To get started with your ebook, you’ll need to know more than just how to use Canva to create an ebook. It would be best if you had a specific goal in mind before you could begin working on your ebook. The first question that comes to mind is, “What size should your ebook be?”

The answer for most ebooks is A4, but the standard is not always the best. Because you don’t want to go with a standard size, here are some things to think about when deciding on ebook dimensions:

1. Readability is the most important aspect of designing an ebook cover. As a result, make sure your design works on both large and small screens, as it will be used on various devices.

2. Check that you can read the text at a normal size. If you choose something too small, it may not be easy to understand, but if you prefer something too large, your ebook cover will become cluttered and impact the reader less.

3. A paperback book’s standard dimensions are 5 inches wide by 8 inches high. This is the ideal size for an ebook cover, so select your dimensions accordingly to ensure that your design works well for both paperback and ebooks.

4. The standard font size for a paperback book is 11 pt, but you can go smaller if there is too much text or larger if there isn’t much text.

5. The golden rule for ebook cover design is to have essential information at around half the height of your book, so if you have a lot of text, make sure this covers some of your design. You don’t want to go over 100% because that will leave some parts out, and you don’t want to go under 50% because that will result in too little information on the cover.

How to use canva to design like a professional

If you’ve been an entrepreneur running any part of your business online for a while, or if you’ve DIY-ed your graphics but are not a professional designer, you might have heard about or even used “Canva.”

Canva is basically an easy-to-use graphic design tool (in the form of a web-based app) that allows beginners, non-designers (and anyone, myself included!) to create designs quickly and efficiently, with the help of ready-made, “drag and drop” templates, shapes, icons, photos, fonts and color palettes.

Need an already-sized Facebook or Pinterest graphic? Canva is loaded with ‘em.

A presentation deck?

The options are endless when it comes to needing a template for just about anything!

To get to the short and sweet of it, here are a few of the pros (and cons) to using it:

PRO: As mentioned above, there is a ready-made, ready-sized template for any design imaginable. Just choose the one that you like best and customize it to fit your needs!

PRO: You can get by with a free account! Who doesn’t love free?

PRO: While free is great, I believe that you get what you pay for and I highly recommend that any business upgrades to using the “Canva Pro” account. While Canva on a basic use level is indeed free, you have more control over your branding with a paid subscription. The paid account allows you to upload your own fonts, color palettes, logos, graphics, icons, photography, etc. You can organize all of your assets into folders and everything within your account can be shared among your team members (who you can assign with email addresses.) It’s a handy and minor investment to make for the design/artwork aspect for your business, if you don’t have an on-staff designer or design/marketing department in place. Use my affiliate link to get Canva Pro today!

PRO: Canva is very user-friendly and intuitive, the more that you play around with it. It’s a good tool for anyone, but especially beginners or non-designers, who don’t have access to professional design software.

PRO: Canva can be easily accessed! It’s a website that you login to, so it doesn’t require any software downloads taking up space on your computer. And, if you’re on the go and unable to work from your laptop, simply download the app to your phone!

CON: With templates being available to literally anyone on the planet, without too much customization of your own, any of your designs can look just like anyone else’s who may be using the same templates.

CON: While you can create a variety of print and digital graphics easily, Canva is not ideal for designing logos, because it isn’t a vector-based program (like Adobe Illustrator) — meaning that you cannot create an image or design that will be scalable to any size, beyond what it’s already set at — without losing resolution/quality. You can create a logo design and export it as a high-quality PDF, which will give you a file format that gets you by in some instances. However, at the end of the day, it’s really crucial that your logo is always and originally created in a vector file format (.AI or .EPS) (both of which can be done using Illustrator.)

CON: You’ll need to keep in mind a few “legal” technicalities when using Canva within your business or for commercial projects. Canva gives you access to a lot of free and paid images, but you have to be careful about how/when/where you use them (as well as paid ones.) For example, per the Canva website: “All free media on Canva can be used for free for commercial and noncommercial use.” However, If you are going to design a logo within Canva, you cannot use any of their images (free or paid) within the design. For specific licensing agreements, please refer here.

Canva (free or Pro) is definitely a great resource for entrepreneurs who want to design brand graphics and visuals that look professional with its endless collection of ready-made templates and ability to upload your own brand kit!

Disclaimer: Hey there, friend! This article includes affiliate links for Canva (a design tool I use, love & swear by) and I would love if you decided to use them. Affiliate links help creators like me to fund the free content that we provide on our blogs. Thank you for your endless support!

How to use canva to design like a professional

These days, I’m all about working smarter, not harder in my online biz (can I get an amen?!).

And so, after bouncing back & forth for way too long between Photoshop, InDesign and Canva, I finally decided it was time to fully commit to just one design program for all my online biz graphics.

And Canva it was.

Ya, I know what you’re thinking. “Come on Fal… you’re not a real designer if you’re using Canva…”

Well, I actually am. And with the release of Canva 2.0 & Canva Pro came some insane features that allow me to 10x my content creation & design workflow— features that make it a serious no-brainer to cut all former ties with complicated design programs.

So with all that said— below, you’ll find my must-know Canva tips, tricks & design hacks to 10x your content creation workflow so you can get back to what matters in your online business!

Aaaand so all the haters out there finally realize that Canva isn’t just an app for amateur bloggers & designers. 😉

Quick side note before we begin…

… most of the features included in this article are for Canva Pro users only (sorry to all my peeps on the free plan!).

But I come bearing good news, promise… 😉

If you click that little image below, you can take Canva Pro for a spin, completely free for 30 days!

While Photoshop is my number one tool for creating most of my designs, I know, learning to use this photo editor needs a lot of time and effort.

Luckily, there are tons of designer tools even beginners can use. One of the most important tools you should know and use is Canva.

And I bet most of you have already heard about this graphic design platform.

Because Canva is amazing.

It allows you to easily create banners, logos, social posts, and more using pre-made templates.

You can also upload your own photos or graphics and add them to Canva’s templates using a drag and drop interface.

I love Canva.

Even if I’m using Photoshop for my Redbubble designs, I’m still using Canva almost every day for making YouTube thumbnails, Pinterest graphics, various graphics for my articles and social posts, and more.

With Canva, you can also create stunning t-shirt designs, they already have an entire section, where you can make your artwork from scratch or use some pre-made templates and edit them.

And they are also running a print-on-demand service, so you can easily create and then print your design on t-shirts without leaving the platform.

However, there is a little issue with Canva. They have a little bit of confusing licenses. And legal stuff, while boring, is important for print-on-demand business.

That’s why, in this article, I want to show you a few tips on how to be legal with Canva.

But before I get into the article, if you are new at NechEmpire, then you should also check out my YouTube channel, because on this channel I like to talk all about print-on-demand, and helping people to succeed with this business model.

Can You Use Free Images and Graphics from Canva for Print-on-demand?

Let’s be clear. Canva wants you to design, they want your stuff to look really good, but they also have guidelines that you need to stick to.

At Canva, content can be either Free or Pro. They have two main pricing plans, a free plan, where you get access to hundreds of thousands of templates, images, videos, or graphics, but you don’t have access to the premium stuff. After you upgrade your free plan to Pro, then you get unlimited access to premium tools and content.

Let’s go to Canva, and create a new document. It doesn’t matter what and which size, because I want to show you the different licenses.

At Canva, all the content is either free or pro. So, when you scroll through the elements, you can see that on some graphics there is a free label and the pro content has a golden crown and PRO label.

When I select a premium graphic, it comes with a watermark that can be removed by paying for one design license. But this means, you can use the graphic only one time, and then you need to buy it again.

If this sounds complicated, you can upgrade the Canva plan to PRO, and then all the premium elements come with one design license.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Let’s take a closer look at the free and pro subscription.

For Canva Free users, the Pro content comes with a watermark and you need to pay one dollar for every watermarked content in your final design.

If you have Canva Pro, there is nothing to pay for except the subscription, and you can use all the pro content without limits until you pay for the subscription.

Free Media Licence on Canva

All the free content comes with a Free Media Licence, and you are allowed to use this content for any free or commercial use. You can also modify and edit this content.

However, with the free media license, it is not allowed to sell unchanged copies of such content as a print or on any physical products without adding any value.

And this is the most important part of the license. In other words, you can legally use any free content from Canva, and sell it on any print-on-demand platform such as Redbubble or Merch by Amazon, but you need to create something unique from free content.

How to use canva to design like a professional

You need to change it. I don’t know if just changing a color counts as a changed version, but I always recommend playing it safe and being more creative.

Because with a free plan, each license allows you to use the content in one design, you must pay to obtain a new license each time you’d like to use the same piece of content in a new design.

If you have a Canva subscription, then a new license is automatically issued to you each time you use content in a new design.

So, if you want to use the Canva subscription, then all things will be more simple. All content available for the Canva Pro subscription is licensed under one design use license.

Simply put, you can use the pro content on multiple unlimited designs, even for print-on-demand, but only when you create unique designs with these elements. So you need to change them, add text, change color, or make it your own.

And one last thing. All fonts on Canva can be used for any commercial project unless stated otherwise at the time of publishing, Only the Chinese fonts can be used for personal use.

Here Are Some of My Favorite Tools For Print-on-demand

Thank you for reading this article. I hope you found it helpful as you build your own print-on-demand business. Here are some tools I use as a designer that I hope you will also find helpful.

Designs: For getting started, I really like Creative Fabrica. They have millions of cheap graphics that can elevate your t-shirt design. If you are not the most skillful designer, then try Placeit or Vexels. These are platforms, where you can find thousands of pre-made t-shirt designs you can easily edit and publish on any print-on-demand platform. I recommend Placeit for beginners and after you get some sales move to Vexels.

Free Designs: I love Canva. I’m using this platform almost every day. With Canva, you can create stunning t-shirt designs, they already have an entire section, where you can make your artwork from scratch or use some pre-made templates and edit them. Canva comes with two main pricing plans: FREE and PRO. And if you are a beginner, then I recommend the free plan, it should be enough for you.

Disclosure: Some of the links above may contain affiliate partnerships, meaning, at no additional cost to you, NechEmpire may earn a commission if you click through to make a purchase.

If you’re using Canva, you’ll love the ease of use of this feature to search for and find similar graphics and templates.

Creating and maintaining a cohesive look in our designs can be challenging, but it can be energizing if we have the right tools and tips to begin and, hopefully, thrive! ♥

If you follow me on Instagram, you’ll know as a content creator, I love to share informative content and resources. You’ll typically see me share:

  • Design Ideas & Branding Strategies
  • Social Media Marketing Tips to fuel online Success
  • Blogging Tips & Free Resources

As a blogger, I love sharing this same content with you!

This blog post was inspired by a recent “How-To” Tutorial I shared as an Instagram Post.

Canva is is my go-to design tool for social media graphics. With its easy-to-use templates, we can easily design graphics for social media, marketing material, and so much more. And the features are amazing!

In this short tutorial, we’ll go through the few steps of searching for similar design elements and templates in Canva. ♥

Canva Tip

Finding Similar Designs

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to find similar designs in Canva

I love the simplicity and elegance of line art. I gathered a few of my favourites to share in the image below. ♥

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to find similar designs in Canva

Finding similar designs is a quick and simple process. If we discover a beautiful design or element and would like to access similar graphics, we can easily do so in just a few steps.

NOTE: You’ll also notice if the element is Free or a Pro Feature. If you’re not using the Pro Version, you can trial it for Free for 30 days. If you’d like, you can use my referral link below.

Okay, let’s jump in.

When you hover over a design, you’ll see the three dots in the right corner.

To view more designs by the designer click on the three dots.

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to find similar designs in Canva

Click on view more by

  • Search by keywords
  • Add to folder
  • See more like this

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to find similar designs in Canva

When we click on view more by… it will display a brand name/number. All designs by that designer will display. It’s a fantastic way to find similar designs and maintain a cohesive look.

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to find similar designs in Canva

I love the line art by this designer. I saved the brand name/number and shared it on Instagram for others that may love these designs, too.

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to find similar designs in Canva

And we’re done. Easy peasy!

I used this art with an inspirational quote by Ralph Waldo Emerson, which I recently designed and shared on social media. I love his words of wisdom. ♥

Ralph Waldo Emerson

How to use canva to design like a professional

Inspirational Quote by Ralph Waldo Emerson

If you haven’t been using this feature in Canva, I hope this post encourages you to do so. It’s a fantastic tool to use and access more elements and maintain a cohesive look. For more Canva tips stop by

Have a tip you’d like to share? Please feel free to share in the comments below.

If you’re using Instagram and/or Pinterest and would like to connect, please share a link to your profile in the comments below. Let’s connect!

Until next time … happy creating, my friends! ♥

Pin for Later

How to find similar designs in Canva” width=”288″ height=”512″ /> Canva Tip

Using consistent branding not only builds brand recognition but it also will save you so much time. The key is to get your branding set up in Canva. You can easily set up a brand kit in Canva Pro and in Canva, in this post I am going to show how to do that in each version of Canva. I’m also going to show you how to set up brand kits for client work.

But First… If you are thinking:

I don’t like my branding

I can’t settle on a color palette

My branding is all over the place

Or I haven’t even thought about my branding

Then check out these post…

How to use canva to design like a professional

What You will need to set up your brand kit in Canva

  1. Your Color Codes (How to Get Colors Codes)
  2. Brand Fonts (for the Free Version of Canva you will have to pick from the available fonts)
  3. Logo and any other images or creative elements you plan to use often

Set up Your Brand Kit in Canva Pro:

Canva Pro Makes it super Simple with your very own Brand Section

1. From the Canva Home Screen Click on Brand Kit

How to use canva to design like a professional

2 . Upload your logo and other brand assets to the logo section

3 . Add in your brand colors. I made a note of my color codes to copy and paste in. (How to Get Color Codes). Don’t forget to name your color palette.

4 . Upload any brand fonts you will use or skip this step if you plan to use Canva Pro’s Fonts

5. Set your Brand Fonts and styles. You can use uploaded fonts and Canva Pro Fonts.

Now watch the clip to see what this looks like on the design side of Canva.

Set up Your Brand Kit in Canva (free version):

In the free version, you can only save 3 brand colors in the brand kit area but below I show you how to store all your branding info by creating a brand guide in Canva. You can also set Brand fonts in the Brand Kit Area.

Optional You can set up to 3 brand colors in the Free Canva Brand Kit. The next steps will show you how to save as many colors as you need but you may want to go ahead and plug in your 3 most used colors. (See step 3 from above).

Create a Brand Style Guide in Canva

1. Create 5-6 identical shapes. One for each color in your brand palette. These can be squares, circles, or something creative like a paint swash.

2. Color each shape by selecting one then open the color panel hit the + icon to add in your color code. Repeat for each color. You may want to note the color code under each swatch.

3. Create some sample text for your Brand fonts. Include headline, sub-headlines and body text samples.

4. Upload your logo and any other brand assets. You do not have to include them in your brand guide but I think it helps have a cohesive brand guide. You can even take it a step further and add it some of your favorite Canva Elements and photos.

How to use canva to design like a professional

5. Now You can Copy and Paste the elements from your guide onto any design size. The colors will be available in your color panel and the fonts will be right on top of the font list. (use command c and command v to copy and paste)

Lets Recap Setting Up Canva Like a Pro with your Bradning

How to use canva to design like a professional

You must have Your Branding Set with a Color Palette and Fonts

You will need your color codes, here is a tutorial on how to get your color codes. If you have not set your branding yet, check out this post.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Canva Pro Has a Brand Section

Canva Pro is more streamlined with a Brand Section for you but you can make a brand guide and have all your colors and fonts stored in the free version of Canva.

How to use canva to design like a professional

The Next Step to Using Canva a like a pro is to Apply Your Branding to Templates

Want to see how to quickly apply your branding to templates and snag a sample of my premium Canva Templates? Sign up below!

Humans are visual creatures; you need good graphics to keep people interested. Thankfully, graphic design is becoming more accessible to everyone, even those who have no prior knowledge.

Enter Canva, the free online design creator that you can use to create (and collaborate on!) beautiful designs for your website, social media accounts, presentations, and more.

Are you wondering how to use Canva and unlock its potential? Then keep reading. I’ll show you how to familiarize yourself with this amazing and useful tool.

What is Canva?

How to use canva to design like a professional

First off: what is Canva exactly?

Canva is a graphic design platform that lets you create all sorts of graphics, such as posters, social media graphics, and more. What’s great about it is it’s easy to use and comes with templates so you don’t have to pour hours into creating things from scratch.

In addition, Canva is available on both your browser and mobile phone, which means you can even create graphics on the fly if need be! This can be especially helpful if you update your social media accounts in real-time and need some eye-catching visuals.

Canva is free to use, which makes it extremely accessible to everyone. You can try it out for free and experiment with its features. And if you like them, you can always upgrade to Canva Pro, which unlocks even more features.

The Layout

How to use canva to design like a professional

The first thing you should do is get familiar with the layout.

Once you’ve logged in, you’ll see the Dashboard. There’s a menu on the left side where you’ll find things like the templates, photos, apps, and all your saved designs.

There’s also a button labeled “Create a design” underneath your name on the top. A drop box will appear after clicking, and you can use the Search function to find what you’re creating. For instance, you can select “Pinterest Pin” or “Instagram graphic.”

How to use canva to design like a professional

After selecting what you want to create, this takes you to the editor. Here, you can edit the design. choose your own custom dimensions or choose from preset ones for things like posters, logos, videos, presentations, and more.

Within the editor, there’s a Search function. All you have to do is click on the search bar, then type in whatever it is you’re looking for, such as a “Pinterest Pin” design or a particular photo or graphic.

If you want to use a template, there are two ways to do so. First, you can browse them in the editor by category. Select the one you want and it’ll pop up in the editor.

Or you can go back to the Dashboard and browse the templates from there. Once you select the one you like, you can then start a new design in the editor.

Getting Started

If you’re completely new to web design, then you’ll want to make things easy on yourself, at least for the beginning. After clicking on “Create a design,” you can choose one of the preset dimensions for whatever it is you’re creating.

How to use canva to design like a professional

It’s super convenient, as you’ll know how large to make graphics for certain platforms, such as Twitter or Pinterest. And if you’re unfamiliar with design, the templates that are created for various applications (such as presentations or Instagram) can help you out in a pinch.

After you get familiar with Canva, feel free to experiment with custom dimensions to truly make your graphics your own.

Once you’ve clicked on a preset dimension (such as “announcement”), Canva will take you to a new page that displays all the relevant templates. They’ve neatly gathered everything and placed them into different categories (such as “wedding announcement,” “birth announcement,” “engagement announcement,” and more).

How to use canva to design like a professional

Take a look to see which templates speak to you; remember that you can play around with it and customize it, so it’ll have your flair on it by the time you’re done.

You’ve heard about Canva, and you’ve maybe made an account and poked around, but you perhaps haven’t realized its full potential yet as a graphics creator. Canva is essentially a design program for non-designers. Despite owning and operating a design studio, I LOVE Canva because it reaches my main goal: empowering my clients to take the reins on their website!

What capabilities does Canva have for web graphics, however, especially when it comes to your Squarespace site? You know how to upload images to your Squarespace, but you maybe haven’t realized that there are easy ways to take those images to the next level with Canva.

Why should I care about making my site graphics with canva?

If you care about branding, and making your site look cohesive, adding some simple touches to your site is a great way to make your website look extremely custom. When images break boundaries, have different types of shapes, or don’t have straight corners, users know that you went the extra mile in editing. The work is obvious. And, someone who puts a lot of work into their website is someone that elicits trust from their users and clients.

We know that graphics help boost your website and branding. But how on earth do you go from boring images and portfolio items to creative, going-the-extra-mile frames and images? You use this article, of course!

In this post, we’ll cover 5 ways to enhance your site using Canva:

Canva is a super handy graphic design platform that is used to create graphics for social media and so much more (think templates for that powerpoint preso you’ve got coming up, eye catching posters, A4 documents like letterheads etc). The website and smartphone app includes templates for users to use for free (you heard right!) but it does offers paid subscriptions to upgrade to Canva Pro for a small monthly fee.

We love the fact that anyone can hop into Canva and start designing anything they may need for their business – its super easy to use with it’s drag and drop functionality. Ok, so you’re here because you’re already sold on Canva – righteo, lets hop to sharing our hot tips!

The key to using Canva well you need to add your branding guidelines. You can add your fonts, colours and logo so you don’t go rogue and use all the pretty things in Canva 🙂

Not sure what branding guidelines are? Thats ok – we’ve written another blog post about it – you can catch up here.

When we do full branding for our clients, its part of the dealio that we set up our clients in Canva so they have all that they need to hit the ground running.

To set up your Brand Kit, you must have paid to upgraded to Canva Pro – which for all the added bonuses you get, we believe it’s a steal!

These are the four steps to follow in Canva – so you can start designing like a pro!

Go into Canva on your desktop computer and go to the Brand Kit. Here you will:

Add your logo

Add your primary and secondary fonts

Add your colour pallette

Add your professional photos and any elements you may have / patterns / illustrations etc

We really love to help our clients set this up, with design templates for them to use. We go this extra mile because we know that the designing doesn’t finish when you finish with us. Being able to create your own designs, with your swanky new guidelines will give you the ultimate confidence to share your branding far and wide!

We set the below up for Audrey Paige in canva for her to use.

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

How to use canva to design like a professional

As always, get in touch if this is something you need help with – we do offer this is an add on package to our full branding identity package.

What is Canva? Many people will ask themselves this question since it is an increasingly popular application in businesses of all kinds, especially for your content plan. Canva is a graphic design tool established in 2012 that offers you online templates to create your designs. It has an attractive, intuitive, and easy to use interface and many templates to choose from 8,000 templates to form more than 100 types of assets: flyers, infographics, social network images, emails, and posters.

In a short time, Canva has become an indispensable tool for marketing professionals, bloggers, and small business owners. However, its great advantage is that it gives “non-designers” the possibility of creating straightforward content to fulfill their objectives.

The primary way to use Canva for business is to incorporate it into your web design and development, creating engaging content that convinces potential customers and makes existing ones loyal. You only need to choose the images, fonts, and perfect colors that fit the style you want. If you want to know how Canva works and investigate Design Thinking, read on:

How to use Canva: follow our steps

Canva Templates: choose your favorite

Canva offers a wide variety of formats to generate the design that best suits you: social media templates, marketing materials, documents, presentations, invitations, ads, eBooks, resumes, and even holiday cards, allowing you to work on both digital and printed material.

It is important to note that you can also customize your design as you like.

How to use canva to design like a professional

You can use Canva editor to modify your design

Canva has a fairly intuitive drag-and-drop interface at its basis. Handling it only takes a few days at most and as soon as you have made 3 or 4 designs you will have caught the trick to go fast and furious.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Search: You can find images, icons, and graphics.

Templates: Canva offers a series of ready-to-use templates.

Uploaded files: Canva allows you to upload your elements.

Photos: Choose from the selection of images that Canva makes available to you.

Elements: A variety of icons and shapes to help you with your design

Text: Here, you’ll find pre-designed text in many different formats that you can change as you please.

Music: Put the soundtrack to your videos.

Video: You have several options in this tab depending on your video’s theme (cities, fashion, business, beach).

Background: If you are not using a design (i.e., starting from scratch), you can use one of the many background colors and images found here.

Folders: Order your designs in different folders.

Zoom control: Use this option to make your work area larger or smaller.

Canvas: This is where you will create your design.

Add a new page: Add another page to your work.

Page Control: Lets you know which page you are on.

Name: Assign a name to your work.

Share Button: You can share your design with anyone.

Download Button: You can download your image here.

Other Options: Here, you will find ways to share your design on social media or save it to your Google Drive.

Uses thousands of resources from the Canva website

Several resources can help you communicate what you need to convey: images, graphics, icons, and more. You can modify the elements, change their color, font, position, or transparency. Play, explore, and find which components communicate your message best.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Create designs with Canva that you can download for free

Once you’re done, you’ll next wonder how to download a Canva project. You can choose the format you want and use the image as you see fit. As you can see, Canva offers you several options.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Share your Canva design in a Facebook or Twitter post

You can share your project on social media or send it directly by email.

How to use canva to design like a professional

Create an account in Canva. How to sign in

With an email or your Facebook account, you can register and access the tool for free. Suppose you need to do work for a brand that has stricter visual brand identity standards. In that case, your best bet is to pay for a premium account, which allows you to upload your fonts, save a broad color palette, and, above all, have the option to resize a project to repurpose in another format.

What is Canva and why choose it: pros and cons

The benefits of using Canva

Work with Canva your design online directly in your browser, so you don’t need to install any software.

It’s effortless, intuitive, and quick to use.

The designs are stored for later reuse (if necessary).

You can use your own image bank and corporate imagery.

It has a version for iPad and iPhone.

The drawbacks of using Canva

You have some instability when working directly from a browser and being connected to the Internet.

Some resources are not free.

Design tools are limited.

You won’t be able to use certain functions such as align objects, use guides, etc. At least in the free version.

Canva has made a name for itself in web apps thanks to its ease of use, versatility, and price in a short time. It is the graphic design tool designed for “non-designers” to get quick and attractive solutions within your professional sector. Dare to use Canva because, as its slogan says, Canva is the power of design.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Cortana is the digital assistant for Windows Phone and now in Windows 10 and when “Hey Cortana” is on, it’s always listening which can make it come on unintentionally.

Microsoft’s digital assistant, Cortana, first appeared on Windows Phone 8.1 and has migrated to Windows 10. The “Hey Cortana” feature allows you to activate the digital assistant by voice and use it. Here’s how to enable this feature or turn it off if you when don’t need it.

I like to use the “Hey Cortana” feature because it’s always listening, and makes it easy to launch programs, settings, create appointments and reminders…etc. However, if I’m using my laptop while listening to a podcast, music, or watching Netflix, sometimes Cortana can turn on and start launching things – which can be annoying.

Update: Microsoft has decoupled Cortana from Windows Search and a lot of its settings have changed over time. This article has been updated to reflect those changes.

Turn Windows 10 “Hey Cortana” On or Off

Since the updates, you can get Cortana to respond by saying either: “Hey, Cortana,” or simply just “Cortana.” To get started, make sure you’re signed into the Cortana app.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

To turn it on, launch the Cortana app from your taskbar. Then click the menu button (three dots) on the left-hand side and click Settings.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Next, click on Voice Activation from the menu.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Now click on the Voice Activation Permissions link.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

If this is the first time using Cortana to open Settings, you will need to click Yes to verify.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Now in Voice Activation Settings, you want to make sure that the “Allow apps to use voice activation” switch is enabled.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Then scroll down to the “Choose which apps can use voice activation” section and turn on the switch to let Cortana respond to the keyword. Here you can also flip the switch for Cortana to respond when your PC is locked. But that’s optional.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

To turn Cortana’s responding to the keyword off, just go back into Settings and flip off the switches you enabled. And that’s it.

Digital Assistants

All digital assistants seem to have the problem of activating due to background noise. From Google Now to Siri and even Alexa on Amazon Echo is guilty. So if you have one of those digital assistants on your phone or other devices, you’ll want to toggle the “always listening” feature off on those.

We haven’t even touched the surface of what Cortana can do, but if you are concerned about privacy, we did show you how to erase your search content from Cortana’s database. We will have a complete guide on setting up and using it coming soon.

But, if you’re just getting started with Cortana in Windows 10, this should take care of at least one thing that might annoy you at first.

What’s your take on Cortana, and more specifically, the “Hey Cortana” feature? Leave a comment below and let us know.

Matt Klein
How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Matt Klein
Writer

Matt Klein has nearly two decades of technical writing experience. He’s covered Windows, Android, macOS, Microsoft Office, and everything in between. He’s even written a book, The How-To Geek Guide to Windows 8. Read more.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Cortana in Windows 10 is proving to be a promising new feature. To really take advantage of it, you can use voice activation to give your computer commands and perform tasks without needing to actually physically touch it.

This feature works similarly to Android’s “OK Google” and iOS’s “Hey Siri.” With Microsoft’s version, you can enable this same kind of hands-free mode and then simply say “Hey Cortana” to make a Windows 10 PC respond.

Cortana for Windows 10 isn’t yet fully baked (nor is Windows 10 for that matter), meaning Microsoft is still perfecting it and adding features. You can ask her questions like “Hey Cortana, what’s up?” and she’ll give you a whimsical answer.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10“Hey Cortana, what’s up?” At least she didn’t tell us it’s a preposition.

But, for productive activities like having it set alarms or change computer settings, it’s still a work in progress. Yes, you can do some cool things like ask her what the weather is somewhere.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Get the weather from anywhere.

She’ll also find files for you, such as if you’re looking for a document, but she won’t open anything up yet.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10“Hey Cortana, find ‘something somethng!’”

She can also deliver sport scores, perform calculations, track flights, and other simple tasks. So it has great potential, and we hope that it actually becomes a feature everyone uses because having the option to finally boss your PC around is pretty neat.

Enabling “Hey Cortana” for Hands-Free Searching

“Hey Cortana” isn’t enabled by default, which is understandable because not everyone wants their computer actively listening to them. But, keep in mind, your computer isn’t actually paying attention to anything you say except those two words in that exact order: Hey Cortana.

Normally Cortana will sit on your Taskbar waiting for you to click on her. When you first do this, she will ask you for your name so she can personalize herself to you. You can skip this part if you like.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Removing the Cortana taskbar feature will not completely disable her.

You may also right-click on the taskbar and decide whether to remove Cortana from the taskbar, or simply reduce it to a small circle.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

If you click on Cortana, then you’ll see three lines in the top-left corner, which when clicked, reveal options. Click “Settings” to access more options.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

The settings are pretty simple. The last one you’ll see is for “Let Cortana respond when you say ‘Hey Cortana.” Turn that to on to enable hands-free voice operation on your Windows 10 computer.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

To turn this option off, simply repeat the process and switch the option to “Off.”

If you don’t want Cortana to operate on your computer at all, then you can completely disable her in just a few clicks. Notice on the settings panel that you accessed that there is an option right at the top to disable Cortana outright.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Note, doing this actually disables Cortana, meaning that it won’t work. This is not the same thing as removing the search icon from the taskbar.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Again, this does not actually disable Cortana.

If you simply remove the taskbar’s search feature, you can still use Cortana unless you disable her completely. For example, if you want to use hands-free mode and you don’t want Cortana on the taskbar, you can still use “Hey, Cortana” even when it is hidden.

If you don’t plan on using full-on Cortana integration, or voice activation isn’t your cup of tea, it’s still a little fun to try out. And if you don’t like it, you can always turn it off again.

Windows 10 is still only available as a technical preview (beta) so things are bound to change between now and its final release, sometime this summer. Still, it’s evident that Cortana is going to be a big part of it, so it’s good to know what you can do with it ahead of time.

If you have anything you would like to add, such as a question or a comment, please leave your feedback in our discussion forum.

  • › How to Sync Cortana Reminders From a Windows 10 PC to Your iPhone or Android Phone
  • › How to Disable Cortana on the Windows 10 Lock Screen
  • › What’s New in Windows 10’s Creators Update
  • › How to Remove Cortana from the Windows 10 Taskbar
  • › How to Make Siri Respond to Your Voice (Without Pressing Anything)
  • › How to Stop All the Voice Assistants from Storing Your Voice
  • › How to Control Your Smarthome Products with Cortana on Windows 10
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10 Matt Klein
Matt Klein has nearly two decades of technical writing experience. He’s covered Windows, Android, macOS, Microsoft Office, and everything in between. He’s even written a book, The How-To Geek Guide to Windows 8.
Read Full Bio »

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Microsoft’s ‘Hey Cortana’ is a feature on Windows 10 that lets your personal assistant recognize your voice and wake it up just by calling its name. The feature is disabled by default, so we’ll show you how to enable it. See it in action on our Surface 3.

  1. Tap or click the search area in the taskbar
  2. Tap or click the notebook button
  3. Select Settings
  4. Toggle On the option, Let Cortana respondto“Hey Cortana”

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

That’s it! You can let Cortana respond to anyone, or just your voice. Tap or click Learn my voice if you prefer the latter. Cortana gives you six phrases to repeat so she can get familiar with your voice. They’re all things you can actually ask her:

  • Hey Cortana, do I have anything on Wednesday?
  • Hey Cortana, what’s the traffic like on the way to work?
  • Hey Cortana, what’s a cheap pizza place that’s open now?
  • Hey Cortana, when I talk to Joy, remind me to tell her ‘congratulations on the job.’
  • Hey Cortana, remind me to look for the yellow tape measure when I get home.
  • Hey Cortana, tell me a good joke.

Note: Cortana is currently only available for the U.S., UK, China, France, Italy, Germany and Spain. Cortana is also expanding to Japan and Australia, and in English in Canada and India for those on the Windows Insider program (early access). Later this year, Cortana will be available to Windows Insiders in Brazil and Mexico, and in French in Canada as well. Read more about Cortana’s cultural training and programming from Microsoft right here.

If you think this guide is helpful, we have many more posts like this in our Windows 10 help, tips and tricks page.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

. I kinda want Halo Infinite’s cancelled ‘Overwatch’ mode

As someone who finds standard Halo to be painfully dull, modes that shake up the traditional formula may be exactly what Halo Infinite needed to find a new audience.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

The LG gram 17 still tops the 17-inch laptop field

With the crowded laptop field, it’s hard to know which one suits your needs. For our money, though, if you want a 17-inch laptop in 2022, then you want the LG gram 17.

You can now register to virtually attend Microsoft Build 2022

Registrations for Microsoft Build 2022 are now open. Anyone can virtually attend the conference for free, but they’ll have to register through Microsoft’s website.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Need a dock for your Dell Latitude 9420? Check out our favorites.

The Dell Latitude 9420 is a powerful and versatile 2-in-1, but which docking station should you get if you’re looking to transform it into an effective desktop machine? Here are our recommendations.

Matt Klein
How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Matt Klein
Writer

Matt Klein has nearly two decades of technical writing experience. He’s covered Windows, Android, macOS, Microsoft Office, and everything in between. He’s even written a book, The How-To Geek Guide to Windows 8. Read more.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Cortana in Windows 10 is proving to be a promising new feature. To really take advantage of it, you can use voice activation to give your computer commands and perform tasks without needing to actually physically touch it.

This feature works similarly to Android’s “OK Google” and iOS’s “Hey Siri.” With Microsoft’s version, you can enable this same kind of hands-free mode and then simply say “Hey Cortana” to make a Windows 10 PC respond.

Cortana for Windows 10 isn’t yet fully baked (nor is Windows 10 for that matter), meaning Microsoft is still perfecting it and adding features. You can ask her questions like “Hey Cortana, what’s up?” and she’ll give you a whimsical answer.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10“Hey Cortana, what’s up?” At least she didn’t tell us it’s a preposition.

But, for productive activities like having it set alarms or change computer settings, it’s still a work in progress. Yes, you can do some cool things like ask her what the weather is somewhere.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Get the weather from anywhere.

She’ll also find files for you, such as if you’re looking for a document, but she won’t open anything up yet.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10“Hey Cortana, find ‘something somethng!’”

She can also deliver sport scores, perform calculations, track flights, and other simple tasks. So it has great potential, and we hope that it actually becomes a feature everyone uses because having the option to finally boss your PC around is pretty neat.

Enabling “Hey Cortana” for Hands-Free Searching

“Hey Cortana” isn’t enabled by default, which is understandable because not everyone wants their computer actively listening to them. But, keep in mind, your computer isn’t actually paying attention to anything you say except those two words in that exact order: Hey Cortana.

Normally Cortana will sit on your Taskbar waiting for you to click on her. When you first do this, she will ask you for your name so she can personalize herself to you. You can skip this part if you like.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Removing the Cortana taskbar feature will not completely disable her.

You may also right-click on the taskbar and decide whether to remove Cortana from the taskbar, or simply reduce it to a small circle.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

If you click on Cortana, then you’ll see three lines in the top-left corner, which when clicked, reveal options. Click “Settings” to access more options.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

The settings are pretty simple. The last one you’ll see is for “Let Cortana respond when you say ‘Hey Cortana.” Turn that to on to enable hands-free voice operation on your Windows 10 computer.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

To turn this option off, simply repeat the process and switch the option to “Off.”

If you don’t want Cortana to operate on your computer at all, then you can completely disable her in just a few clicks. Notice on the settings panel that you accessed that there is an option right at the top to disable Cortana outright.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Note, doing this actually disables Cortana, meaning that it won’t work. This is not the same thing as removing the search icon from the taskbar.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10Again, this does not actually disable Cortana.

If you simply remove the taskbar’s search feature, you can still use Cortana unless you disable her completely. For example, if you want to use hands-free mode and you don’t want Cortana on the taskbar, you can still use “Hey, Cortana” even when it is hidden.

If you don’t plan on using full-on Cortana integration, or voice activation isn’t your cup of tea, it’s still a little fun to try out. And if you don’t like it, you can always turn it off again.

Windows 10 is still only available as a technical preview (beta) so things are bound to change between now and its final release, sometime this summer. Still, it’s evident that Cortana is going to be a big part of it, so it’s good to know what you can do with it ahead of time.

If you have anything you would like to add, such as a question or a comment, please leave your feedback in our discussion forum.

  • › How to Sync Cortana Reminders From a Windows 10 PC to Your iPhone or Android Phone
  • › 11 Tips and Tricks for Microsoft Edge on Windows 10
  • › How to Make Siri Respond to Your Voice (Without Pressing Anything)
  • › How to Stop All the Voice Assistants from Storing Your Voice
  • › How to Control Your Smarthome Products with Cortana on Windows 10
  • › What’s New in Windows 10’s Creators Update
  • › How to Remove Cortana from the Windows 10 Taskbar
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10 Matt Klein
Matt Klein has nearly two decades of technical writing experience. He’s covered Windows, Android, macOS, Microsoft Office, and everything in between. He’s even written a book, The How-To Geek Guide to Windows 8.
Read Full Bio »

There’s a switch you’ll need to enable before you can get Cortana’s attention from across the room.

Contributing Writer, ZDNet

Jason Cipriani is based out of beautiful Colorado and has been covering mobile technology news and reviewing the latest gadgets for the last six years. His work can also be found on sister site CNET in the How To section, as well as across several more online publications.

Editors’ note: This post has been updated to reflect changes to Windows 10 and the process for activating “Hey, Cortana.”

One of the standout new features found in Windows 10 is the addition of Cortana . For those unfamiliar, Cortana is a voice-activated personal assistant . Think of it as Siri, but for Windows. You can use it to get weather forecasts, set reminders, tell you jokes, send email, find files, search the Internet and so on.

One feature aimed at making Cortana a staple of your Windows 10 experience involves being able to summon the digital assistant using nothing but your voice with a simple “Hey, Cortana” command. The only thing is, you have to enable the extra capabilities. Here’s how.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Enlarge Image

  1. To activate “Hey, Cortana,” click in the search box located in the Taskbar. When the Search window comes up, click the Notebook icon on the left side of the window.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Enlarge Image

You can now go about using your computer as you normally would, and whenever you need Cortana to perform a task, start by saying, “Hey, Cortana,” followed by your command. I’ve found you have to continue with your command immediately after the activation prompt, instead of waiting for Cortana to load and indicate that it’s listening.

You have to be stuck in the dark ages to not want an intelligent virtual assistant these days. Apple has Siri. Google has Google Now, and Microsoft has Cortana. It’s rumored that Facebook will ultimately have Moneypenny, but let’s not get into that discussion right now. The ‘Hey Cortana’ feature is present and correct in Windows 10 but is turned off by default. Thankfully, it’s extremely easy to to get access to the system settings to turn it on, so we’re going to show you how.

As well as ensuring that Windows 10 allows immediate Cortana assistance when saying “Hey Cortana”, the internal settings also allow Cortana to respond to anyone attempting to interact with her, or it can be locked down to a solitary voice. Follow the simple step-by-step guide below to get up and running with Cortana immediately.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Step 1: Click or tap the search field in the Taskbar.

Step 2: On the left hand side of the presented menu select the icon that resembles a Notebook, located under the home icon.

Step 3: Select the Settings option.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Step 4: The resulting interface should display a number of settings pertaining to Cortana and other areas of the OS. Under the heading Hey Cortana make sure the toggle for Let Cortana respond to “Hey Cortana.” is switched to On.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Additional settings include instructing Cortana and allowing it to respond to anyone’s command that begins with “Hey Cortana”. Alternatively, this can be limited to just your own voice. In the case of the latter, you’ll need to train Cortana to understand your own voice using the Learn my Voice button.

As part of the process of learning an individual voice, Cortana runs through a collection of phrases that the user is required to repeat. Phrases such as “Hey Cortana, what’s the traffic like on the way to work?”, and “Hey Cortana, when I talk to Joy, remind me to tell her congratulations on the job.”. These phrases are of course all actual commands that can be given to Cortana at any time to get feedback and help from Microsoft’s virtual assistant. Windows 10 users in the United States, United Kingdom, China, France, Italy, Germany and Spain are currently able to take advantage of Cortana in Windows 10.

You may also like to check out:

You can follow us on Twitter, add us to your circle on Google+ or like our Facebook page to keep yourself updated on all the latest from Microsoft, Google, Apple and the web.

Enabling ‘Hey Cortana’ feature on your Windows 10 system will save your time in accessing the applications to a great instant. Once enabled, with the help of Cortana, the user can use commands starting with ‘Hey Cortana’. Commands to open the application, knowing the current temperature and many more commands are possible using this feature. Here is how you enable the ‘Hey Cortana’ feature on the Windows 10 system.

Step 1
Click ‘Start Windows’ Icon

User must click the ‘Start Windows’ icon present at the taskbar. User can also press the start windows button present in the desktop to access the start options.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Step 2
Click the ‘Search Box’

After pressing the Start Windows icon, the user must click the ‘Search Box’ that is highlighted and shown in the below picture.

Step 3
Click the ‘Hamburger Menu’ Option

Now the user must click the ‘Hamburger Menu’ option as shown below. On clicking this menu option, you will find the options related to the Cortana feature.

Step 4
Click ‘Notebook’ Option

After clicking the hamburger menu option, you will find popular Cortana features including home, reminders, notebooks, and feedback. Here the user must click the ‘Notebook’ option.

Step 5
Click the ‘Settings’ option

After clicking the notebook option, you will find a list of options for the Cortana feature as shown below. Now the user must click the ‘Settings’ option to alter the settings of the Cortana feature in the Windows 10 system.

Step 6
Enable ‘Hey Cortana’ Feature

In the settings option, scroll down to locate the Hey Cortana feature. Now the user must ensure to turn on the ‘Hey Cortana’ feature by pushing the slide bar to the right as shown below.

Step 7
Say aloud ‘Hey Cortana, Start Calculator’

To open the calculator, the user must say aloud, ‘Hey Cortana, Start Calculator’. This command will instruct the system to open the calculator application. You will find the calculator application getting opened instantly.

‘You can now easily enable the ‘Hey Cortana’ feature in the Windows 10 system by following the above steps’

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Microsoft’s ‘Hey Cortana’ is a feature on Windows 10 that lets your personal assistant recognize your voice and wake it up just by calling its name. The feature is disabled by default, so we’ll show you how to enable it. See it in action on our Surface 3.

  1. Tap or click the search area in the taskbar
  2. Tap or click the notebook button
  3. Select Settings
  4. Toggle On the option, Let Cortana respondto“Hey Cortana”

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

That’s it! You can let Cortana respond to anyone, or just your voice. Tap or click Learn my voice if you prefer the latter. Cortana gives you six phrases to repeat so she can get familiar with your voice. They’re all things you can actually ask her:

  • Hey Cortana, do I have anything on Wednesday?
  • Hey Cortana, what’s the traffic like on the way to work?
  • Hey Cortana, what’s a cheap pizza place that’s open now?
  • Hey Cortana, when I talk to Joy, remind me to tell her ‘congratulations on the job.’
  • Hey Cortana, remind me to look for the yellow tape measure when I get home.
  • Hey Cortana, tell me a good joke.

Note: Cortana is currently only available for the U.S., UK, China, France, Italy, Germany and Spain. Cortana is also expanding to Japan and Australia, and in English in Canada and India for those on the Windows Insider program (early access). Later this year, Cortana will be available to Windows Insiders in Brazil and Mexico, and in French in Canada as well. Read more about Cortana’s cultural training and programming from Microsoft right here.

If you think this guide is helpful, we have many more posts like this in our Windows 10 help, tips and tricks page.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Here are all the teams across Xbox Game Studios and first-party division

Xbox Game Studios has grown over the past several years. Here are all the studios under Xbox Game Studios — and adjacent publishers of the Xbox first-party division.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Here’s every car in Forza Horizon 5, including DLC cars and more

Forza Horizon 5 is bigger than ever, with a huge list of cars at launch and a massive map to explore with them. Here’s the full list of Forza Horizon 5 cars, with more added all the time.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Review: Acer’s 2021 TravelMate P6 is better than ever after a big refresh

Acer’s TravelMate P6, refreshed for 2021, gets a host of new features that makes it more tempting than ever. And the fact that it’s so affordable only adds to the allure.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

The best photo editing apps for Windows 10

Whether you need to remove red eyes or do heavy duty editing, these are the best photo editing apps for Windows 10.

2. I try to turn on the Hey Cortana – toggle, it toggles back to off.

3. I tried to Troubleshoot the microphone and it didn’t detect any problem.

4. Then I did a sound test with Skype and evrything worked fine. So the mircophone is working fine.

Then why I am not being able to configure “Hey Cortana”?

Kindly suggest,

  • Subscribe
  • Subscribe to RSS feed

Report abuse

Replies (3) 

Please give these steps a try to see if they help:

Method 1: Run the Search and Indexing Troubleshooter.
Follow the below steps:
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Select Troubleshooting.
3. Click on Search and Indexing Troubleshooter.
4. Run the Troubleshooter.

Method 2: Run the DISM Tool. If the issue persists, I would have run the DISM tool to check the system health and will try to restore the files.
Press Windows key + X
Click Task Manager
Click File > Run new task
Type: CMD
Hold down the shift key then click OK

4. In the Administrator: Command Prompt Window, type the following commands. Press the Enter key after each command:
DISM.exe /Online /Cleanup-image /Scanhealth DISM.exe /Online /Cleanup-image /Restorehealth
To close the Administrator: Command Prompt window, type Exit,
and then press Enter.
Note: The tool might take 15-20 minutes to finish running, so please do not cancel it.

Click Start
Scroll down to Cortana
Right click Cortana
Click More > App Settings

Click Terminate
Click Reset

See if Cortana starts working.

Method 3: Restart the Cortana Process in Task Manager

Press Windows key + X
Click Task Manager
Select the Processes tab

Scroll through the list of processes, select Cortana then click End Task.

Restart Windows 10 then see if it starts working.

Method 4: Reinstall Cortana

Press Windows key + X
Click PowerShell (Admin)

At the command Prompt, type then following the hit Enter.
Exit Powershell the restart

Microsoft’s digital assistant, Cortana, first appeared on Windows Phone 8.1 and has migrated to Windows 10. The “Hey Cortana” feature allows you to activate the digital assistant by voice and use it. Here’s how to enable this feature or turn it off if you when don’t need it.

The “Hey Cortana” feature is always listening, and it makes it easy to launch programs, settings, create appointments and reminders… etc. However, if you’re using your laptop while listening to a podcast, music, or watching Netflix, sometimes Cortana can turn on and start launching things – which can be annoying.

Turn Windows 10 “Hey Cortana” On or Off

It’s actually not enabled by default, so if you want to use it, you’ll need to turn it on first. To do that, open Cortana, and choose the Notebook icon on the right side, and then Settings.

Next, scroll down a bit and find the switch to turn “Hey Cortana” on or off as needed. Cortana will still work with the voice activation off, you just need to type in your queries.

It’s also worth noting that if you’re on a laptop or tablet and battery power is low, turning it off can save you some juice.

All digital assistants seem to have the problem of activating due to background noise. From Google Now to Siri and even Alexa on Amazon Echo is guilty. So if you have one of those digital assistants on your phone or other devices, you’ll want to toggle the “always listening” feature off on those.

If you’re just getting started with Cortana in Windows 10, this should take care of at least one thing that might annoy you at first.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Have you disabled Windows 10 Cortana due to some reason? But now you want to get Cortana back? What can you do to realize this aim? Easy! Read this post written by MiniTool and you will know how to enable Cortana on Windows 10 with 3 simple methods.

As is well known, Cortana is a voice assistant that is embedded in Windows 10 and Microsoft has spent much time building this virtual assistant. With it, you are able to do many tasks, for example, search for information on the web, organize your calendar, receive the weather forecast, find things on your PC, etc.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Windows 10 users complained that their Cortana Web Preview is not working after the Windows update.

But, not all of you are satisfied with Cortana since some said that this feature could collect some private information and eat up a large percentage of system memory. Thus, you choose to disable Cortana.

What if you change your mind and want to bring Cortana back on Windows 10? You will be happy to read this article since we will show you how to enable Cortana easily.

How to Re-Enable Cortana in Windows 10

Method 1: Enable Cortana via Registry Editor

If the method chosen by you to turn off Cortana is to use Windows Registry Editor, you also need to use the same way to get Cortana back.

  1. Open the Run window by simply pressing two keys on your keyboard – Win + R.
  2. Input regedit to the text box and press Enter or click OK.
  3. In the Registry Editor window, navigate to the following path: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\WindowsSearch.
  4. Double-click the AllowCortana key and change its value data to 1. This can tell Windows to enable Cortana.
  5. Exit Registry Editor and restart your computer.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Method 2: Enable Cortana via Group Policy

If you are a Windows Pro user, you may disable Cortana in Windows 10 via the Group Policy Editor. To re-enable it, you should also use it.

  1. Input msc in the Run window and click OK.
  2. After entering the Local Group Policy Editor interface, go to Local Computer Policy > Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components.
  3. Go to Search, find Allow Cortana and double-click it.
  4. Check the Enabled option, then click Apply and OK to save changes. Later, restart your PC.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Method 3: Get Cortana Back via Using the Correct Program Path Name

If you have initially renamed the path to disable Cortana in Windows 10, you should re-enable it in the same manner. Here is what you should do:

  1. Open the Run window, input taskmgr and press Enter to open Task Manager.
  2. Find Cortana from the Processes tab, right-click on it and choose Open file location. This will take you to C:windowssystemapps.
  3. Locate to the Windows.Cortana folder with the .bak extension.
  4. Right-click this folder to choose Rename and then remove the .bak extension.
  5. Restart your computer.

Final Words

After reading this post, you have clearly known how to get Cortana back. Hope that all the mentioned methods can help you to enable Cortana easily. If you don’t remember which method you used to disable it, try them one by one.

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Linkedin
  • Reddit

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Position: Columnist

Vera is an editor of the MiniTool Team since 2016 who has more than 5 years’ writing experiences in the field of technical articles. Her articles mainly focus on disk & partition management, PC data recovery, video conversion, as well as PC backup & restore, helping users to solve some errors and issues when using their computers. In her spare times, she likes shopping, playing games and reading some articles.

“Hey Cortana” on Windows 10 is a feature that lets Cortana recognize your voice and help you wake your personal assistant by calling its name. As the feature is disabled by default, follow this post to see how you can enable Hey Cortana to avail all of its functionality.

How to enable Hey Cortana in Windows 10

Cortana is a voice-activated personal assistant, and is one of the most highlighted Windows 10 features. Behaving much like Siri, you can get assistance in almost everything including traffic directions, set reminders, send emails, have it search files for you, or even tell you jokes. Here are the steps to help you enable Hey Cortana in Windows 10 powered computers and tablets.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

  • In Cortana, click on the Search box in the taskbar.
  • When the Search windows appears, click on the Notebook icon.
  • Now, click on the Settings icon.
  • Once inside the Settings, you will find a toggle to enable Cortana: Let Cortana respond to “Hey Cortana.” Toggle it on.

When enabled, you just need to call Cortana by saying “Hey, Cortana” and follow it with your command. Cortana will respond to your voice or just about anyone’s. If you want it to respond only to your commands, you can click on Learn my voice to help Cortana identify your voice. Cortana will give you six phrases to repeat so she can get familiar with your voice.

Cortana is a truly awesome digital assistant, available across all kinds of platforms such as Xbox, Windows 10, Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, and even Android. If you’re looking for more added convenience and personalization, however, you might want to consider enabling “Hey Cortana,” so you can summon the assistant from just your lock screen. What follows is a guide on how to enable “Hey Cortana” on your supported Windows 10 Mobile device, in my case the Lumia 950 XL.

Writer’s Note: Support for “Hey Cortana” is only available on higher-end devices and in 11 languages such as on the Lumia 950, Lumia 950 XL, HP Elite X3, Lumia 930, Lumia 1520 and Lumia ICON. Please be aware of this before you proceed!

Step One: Access Cortana from the app list

Of course, the initial step to enable “Hey Cortana” on your supported Windows 10 Mobile device is to first access Cortana from the list of apps, or directly from your start screen if you have pinned it. After you do so, you can head to the far bottom left side of your screen and press the hamburger menu to access Cortana settings.

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Step Two: Toggle the setting switch for “Hey Cortana”

After you head into settings, you will see a list of options for Cortana. At the very top of the list you will see the option to enable “Hey Cortana,” along with a warning that if “Hey Cortana” is enabled, you may end up using more of your battery. Despite the warning, you can still toggle other settings for Cortana to try and respond to you only, or to everyone else.

I would suggest for you to click on “try to respond to only me,” since this makes Cortana more personal, and will protect your private information from others who may want to summon Cortana while your phone is locked.

If you choose “try to respond to only me,” Cortana will prompt you to repeat several phrases so it could learn your voice. These phrases are commonly used Cortana Prompts such as, “Hey Cortana, do I have anything on Wednesday,” or “Hey Cortana, when I talk to Joy, remind me to tell her ‘congratulations on the job’.”

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

Step Three: Enjoy Cortana!

That’s it! There are no more additional settings to toggle! After you finish training Cortana to learn your voice, you can go ahead and lock your Windows 10 Mobile device. You can immediately begin using Cortana straight from the lock screen, without a restart! One tidbit worth mentioning, though, is that you may notice that your device may use up more battery with “Hey Cortana” turned on, but it may be worth the sacrifice since you can now summon your digital assistant without opening the app!

How often do you use Cortana? Do you have the app installed on your other devices as well? As always, let us know what you think, and be sure to stay tuned to OnMSFT, as we will continue to bring you more how-to guides!

How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10 Image Courtesy: WindowsCentral.com

One of the major differences between the Cortana experiences in Windows 10 PC and Windows 10 Mobile is the formers ability to respond to “Hey Cortana”. Accessing a personal digital voice assistant should be easy as calling its name. Most people use these assistants from their mobile device rather than their PC. So having “Hey Cortana” option in Windows 10 Mobile makes more sense. But Microsoft has not enabled that option in most of the Windows Phones.

This tutorial consists of 3 simple steps to enable “Hey Cortana” in your Windows 10 Mobile. Once you complete all the steps, you can access Cortana by simply saying “Hey Cortana”. But first you would have to download Interop Tools and Interop unlock your device. This is because Microsoft has not enabled this option in the operating system so we would have to tweak the registry to enable this.

Enable Hey Cortana in Windows 10 Mobile

    1. Download and extract the Zip file: The first step you have to do is to download the “Hey Cortana” Registry file by clicking here.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    • This is a Zip file, so you would have to use an app like 8 Zip Lite to extract the original file from the Zip while. Once you have done that, go to the next step.
    • Importing the Registry file: As we told in the beginning, you would need Interop Tools to tweak the registry. Assuming that you have installed it and Interop unlocked your Windows 10 Mobile.
    • Open Interop Tools and select THIS DEVICE.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    • This will take you to the home page of Interop Tools. From there, you can see recently used options within the app. There is a hamburger button at the top left of the app. Select it to reveal all the available options.
    • From all the available options, choose Registry.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    • This will show you all the sub-options available in Registry. The sub-options include: Registry Editor, Registry Browser, Registry Search, Import Registry File, Registry Browser vNext and Registry History. What we want to do is to import an external Registry file. So select the option Import Registry File.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    • On pressing Import Registry File option, you would be taken to the File Manager. Now, you would have to go find the file which you have already extracted in step 1. Select the file and you would be taken to another window.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    • All you have to do now is to press Import and that’s it. You can now close Interop Tools and go to the next step.
    • Turning on Hey Cortana: Hey Cortana is now enabled in the operating system but it is turned off by default. To turn it on, open Cortana by touching the Search button at the bottom right in your Windows Phone. Touch the hamburger button and select Cortana Settings.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    • The Cortana Settings page will be opened and you the first thing that you can see is Hey Cortana option. Toggle it On to activate Hey Cortana.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Under the toggle, you can either choose the option Respond when anyone says “Hey Cortana” or Try to respond only to me option.

    Windows 10 Mobile will not get any new features from Microsoft so small hacks like these will definitely help you in the long run.

    Use your voice just by uttering the phrase ‘Hey Cortana.’ Here’s how.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Microsoft’s Cortana voice assistant is an integral part of Windows 10. But normally, to pose a question or command, you first have to click on the microphone icon next to Cortana’s “Ask me anything” field just to wake it up.

    But why bother clicking on something when you can use your voice? Through Microsoft’s “Hey Cortana” feature, you can get the attention of the voice assistant just by saying “Hey Cortana,” and segue into your converation seamlessly. Let’s see how this works.

    In Windows 10, click on the microphone icon next to Cortana’s “Ask me anything” field to open the Cortana window.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Then click on the Settings icon (the one that looks like a gear).

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    In the Settings pane, turn on the option under “Hey Cortana” that says “Let Cortana respond to ‘Hey Cortana.'”

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Now Cortana will respond to you when you utter that special phrase. But, wait, there’s more. The next option says: “Keep my device from sleeping when it’s plugged in so I can always say ‘Hey Cortana’ (unless I turn it off myself).” If you want your laptop to never fall asleep when plugged into an outlet so that “Hey Cortana” will always be available, turn on this option.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Next up is deciding who can say “Hey Cortana” to activate the voice assistant. If you want anybody to be able to turn on the feature by saying the magic words, then click on the button that says: “Respond when anyone says ‘Hey Cortana.'” If you want to be the only person who can wake up Cortana by voice, then click on the next button that says: “Try to respond to only me.”

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    If you’re going to be the sole user of “Hey Cortana,” then it’s a good idea to help Cortana better understand the sound and quality and nuances of your voice. In that case, click on the link that says: “Learn how I say ‘Hey Cortana.'”

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    A screen pops up telling you that you’ll have to repeat six phrases so Cortana can get familiar with your voice. As the screen says, it’s best to do this in a quiet place so no extraneous noise interferes with the process. Click on the Start button.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Cortana prompts you to repeat the six phrases, one after the other. If it has trouble understanding a particular phrase, it will ask you to repeat it. When you’ve repeated all six phrases to Cortana’s satisfaction, you can now say “Hey Cortana” followed by your question, command, or comment, but now with a bit more confidence that it will understand what you’re saying.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Okay, now that Cortana can wake up via your voice, what are some questions, commands, and comments you can throw at it? Here are a few examples. You can tell Cortana to…

    • Open a specific app on your Windows 10 PC
    • Turn key Windows 10 features on and off
    • Set a calendar appointment for a specific date and time.
    • Set a reminder for a specific date and time
    • Provide a weather forecast
    • Compose and send emails and texts to specific people
    • Search for photos, videos, music, documents, and other files by name or other criteria
    • Serve up information on various research questions, such as “What is the population of the United States?” or “Who was the 25th US president?”
    • Tell you a joke

    Cortana can even offer suggestions as it learns more about you. For example, it can cull information about you from its Notebook (the third icon from the top of the Cortana window) to suggest books to read, movies to see, restaurants to dine at, and events to attend. It can also track the status of your airline flights, package shipments, investments, local traffic, and an array of other items.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Finally, Microsoft’s Meet Cortana and What is Cortana webpages provide more details on just what you can ask the voice assistant. For more, check out 11 Cortana Tricks for a Master Chief and some of our other Windows 10 tips below.

    This feature works similarly to Android’s “OK Google” and iOS’s “Hey Siri.” With Microsoft’s version, you can enable this same kind of hands-free mode and then simply say “Hey Cortana” to make a Windows 10 PC respond.

    Cortana for Windows 10 isn’t yet fully baked (nor is Windows 10 for that matter), meaning Microsoft is still perfecting it and adding features. You can ask her questions like “Hey Cortana, what’s up?” and she’ll give you a whimsical answer.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    But, for productive activities like having it set alarms or change computer settings, it’s still a work in progress. Yes, you can do some cool things like ask her what the weather is somewhere.

    She’ll also find files for you, such as if you’re looking for a document, but she won’t open anything up yet.

    She can also deliver sport scores, perform calculations, track flights, and other simple tasks. So it has great potential, and we hope that it actually becomes a feature everyone uses because having the option to finally boss your PC around is pretty neat.

    Enabling “Hey Cortana” for Hands-Free Searching

    “Hey Cortana” isn’t enabled by default, which is understandable because not everyone wants their computer actively listening to them. But, keep in mind, your computer isn’t actually paying attention to anything you say except those two words in that exact order: Hey Cortana.

    Normally Cortana will sit on your Taskbar waiting for you to click on her. When you first do this, she will ask you for your name so she can personalize herself to you. You can skip this part if you like.

    You may also right-click on the taskbar and decide whether to remove Cortana from the taskbar, or simply reduce it to a small circle.

    If you click on Cortana, then you’ll see three lines in the top-left corner, which when clicked, reveal options. Click “Settings” to access more options.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    The settings are pretty simple. The last one you’ll see is for “Let Cortana respond when you say ‘Hey Cortana.” Turn that to on to enable hands-free voice operation on your Windows 10 computer.

    To turn this option off, simply repeat the process and switch the option to “Off.”

    If you don’t want Cortana to operate on your computer at all, then you can completely disable her in just a few clicks. Notice on the settings panel that you accessed that there is an option right at the top to disable Cortana outright.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Note, doing this actually disables Cortana, meaning that it won’t work. This is not the same thing as removing the search icon from the taskbar.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    If you simply remove the taskbar’s search feature, you can still use Cortana unless you disable her completely. For example, if you want to use hands-free mode and you don’t want Cortana on the taskbar, you can still use “Hey, Cortana” even when it is hidden.

    If you don’t plan on using full-on Cortana integration, or voice activation isn’t your cup of tea, it’s still a little fun to try out. And if you don’t like it, you can always turn it off again.

    Windows 10 is still only available as a technical preview (beta) so things are bound to change between now and its final release, sometime this summer. Still, it’s evident that Cortana is going to be a big part of it, so it’s good to know what you can do with it ahead of time.

    If you have anything you would like to add, such as a question or a comment, please leave your feedback in our discussion forum.

    By Tu Nguyen – February 17, 2015 – 4 comments Email article | Print article

    You may already know that Cortana is a great new virtual assistant in Windows 10. In the previous article, I showed you how Cortana stores all of your personal information in a Notebook so you have a complete control of her knowledge about you. There is one more thing that makes her even smarter. It’s her ability to listen to you whenever you say “Hey Cortana.”

    This feature may help you quickly do thing hand-free. Although Cortana is only at the preview stage in Windows 10 build 9926, this always-listening feature is so good that you will get a correct answer when you say: “Hey Cortana How’s the weather today” without waiting for her respond after the phrase “Hey Cortana.”

    To enable “Hey Cortana” feature, you need to do the followings.

    • Open Cortana homepage by tapping/clicking the search box right next to the Start button.
    • Hit the menu button at the top left corner of the page then select Settings.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    • In Settings page, you’ll see the option “Let Cortana respond when you say “Hey Cortana.” Just simply turn this option on and you’re done.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Because Windows 10 in general is still buggy, “Hey Cortana” may sometimes stop working. You just need to log out and log back in to try again.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Start by letting Cortana in the door.

    Here’s a quick run-through of how you can enable Hey Cortana:

      Click the Settings (gear) icon.

    Windows brings up the Settings, Talk to Cortana pane.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Time to give Cortana a try.

    Cortana works whether or not you turn on the voice prompt. It’s kind of the face of Windows’ built-in search routines.

    If you want Cortana to listen, even when your machine is locked (typically when the cover is closed), do one of the following:

    • Select the box that says Spy Away O Mighty One.
    • Select the box below the Hey Cortana slider that says Keep My Device from Sleeping When It’s Plugged in So I Can Always Say “Hey Cortana.”

    But wait! There’s more!

    A bunch of customizing options appear.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Start the customizing of Cortana.

    For now, let’s have her call us Boss.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Even more Cortana settings.

    Cortana then tries to pronounce your name. If her pronunciation sounds good, click Sounds Good. If she messes up, click That’s Wrong and teach Cortana how to say your name by speaking into the mic.

    If that doesn’t rouse the old biddy, click the microphone icon in the Type Here to Search box and then ask your question.

    After the first time or two, Cortana gets the idea that she’s supposed to be listening for the sound of your voice.

    You’ll find that you need to pause slightly after saying “Hey, Cortana.” For example, if you say “Hey, Cortana” (pause a second) “How is the weather,” you get a response like the one below.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Cortana’s great at telling you the MSN weather forecast.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    If you are thinking about getting a new Lumia 950 or Lumia 950 XL (or you already have one), you may want to remember to enable Hey Cortana. For those who are not familiar Hey Cortana is Microsoft’s hands-free solution to activating the Cortana personal digital assistant. Simply calling out ‘Hey, Cortana’ while your phone is in standby (the display is off) summons the helper to do your bidding. Once activated, you can then dictate a text message, check the weather, or activate an programs that utilizes commands like the Windows 10 Weather Channel app.

    For those already used to Hey Cortana you may be think that enabling the feature is obvious. However, Microsoft did change it on the Lumia 950 and Lumia 950 XL when compared to the Lumia 1520 and Lumia 930. This change is actually welcomed as it now matches Windows 10 desktop.

    Under Nokia Hey Cortana was located under Settings > Extras > Hey Cortana. Those ‘Extra’ settings were Nokia customizations that fell outside the default settings of the OS. However, with Windows 10 Mobile Microsoft has the chance to start to build those features into the OS itself. As a result, there simply is no Hey Cortana configuration under Settings anymore as it has moved directly to Cortana.

    Here is how to turn it on!

    Enable Hey Cortana (Lumia 950, Lumia 950 XL)

    1. Launch

    Hit the search button to launch Cortana (or choose the Tile or Cortana from the app menu)

    2. Menu

    From the upper left split-view menu (aka Hamburger button) choose Notebook

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    3. Settings

    In the top area of the Notebook select Settings

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    4. Enable

    From the menu items listed enable Hey Cortana. You also have the secondary option to train Cortana to recognize just your voice or anyone. To train for your voice select To me and the program will walk you through the steps to learn your manner of speaking.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    That’s it! Once completed, you can now just say Hey Cortana anytime you are near your Lumia. Cortana will pop up on the display, and you and you will hear a beep letting you know that you can speak your command. This behavior differs from the desktop version where you can just say “HeyCortanaRemindMeToGetSomeBreadTonight” with no pauses.

    [Edit: Turns out, another change with the Lumia 950 and Lumia 950 XL is you do not need to pause after saying ‘Hey Cortana’. Cool!]

    It should be noted that using Hey Cortana requires some extra battery as the microphone needs to stay on when the display is off. Although the battery usage is exceedingly minimal if you find yourself struggling to get by through the day without recharging you may want to consider disabling it.

    Do you plan to use Hey Cortana on your Lumia 950 or Lumia 950 XL? Let us know in comments!

    Where to buy

    Want to know which Type-C cable to get? How about a micro SD card? Read these guides for the best tips.

    Want all the latest news on these phones? Hit these topic pages for all that we got.

    Support and help forums

    Want to chat about the Lumia 950 and Lumia 950 XL? Jump into our forums and ask others what they think or get help and advice on your new phone!

    We may earn a commission for purchases using our links. Learn more.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    . I kinda want Halo Infinite’s cancelled ‘Overwatch’ mode

    As someone who finds standard Halo to be painfully dull, modes that shake up the traditional formula may be exactly what Halo Infinite needed to find a new audience.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    The LG gram 17 still tops the 17-inch laptop field

    With the crowded laptop field, it’s hard to know which one suits your needs. For our money, though, if you want a 17-inch laptop in 2022, then you want the LG gram 17.

    You can now register to virtually attend Microsoft Build 2022

    Registrations for Microsoft Build 2022 are now open. Anyone can virtually attend the conference for free, but they’ll have to register through Microsoft’s website.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Need a dock for your Dell Latitude 9420? Check out our favorites.

    The Dell Latitude 9420 is a powerful and versatile 2-in-1, but which docking station should you get if you’re looking to transform it into an effective desktop machine? Here are our recommendations.

    Cortana is one of the more noteworthy features that were added in Windows 10. It’s had it’s problems but overall it works well enough. You can use Cortana by clicking the search button on the Taskbar, and then either typing in a question of speaking it. Microsoft has taken the ‘Hey Siri’ hotword command feature from iOS and implemented it for Cortana. You can enable the spoken command and invoke Cortana by saying ‘Hey Cortana’. If you’d like to have a little fun with it, you can change what you call Cortana and how you invoke her with the help of a free app called MyCortana.

    Download and run MyCortana. The UI is pretty basic; to configure a new name and phrase for Cortana, click ‘Settings’ at the top of the app’s home screen.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    The Settings screen is simply a list of commands for Cortana. Click the plus button to add a new command. You will add the command and append it to the new name you want to give Cortana.

    For example, if you want to call Cortana ‘Jarvis’, and invoke it via the ‘Hey’ command, enter the following;

    If you want to invoke Cortana with a different command but not change what she’s called, enter the phrase you want to use followed by Cortana’s name.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    You can add multiple phrases for invoking Cortana. Once you’ve configured the new name and phrase, minimize the app and allow it to run in the system tray. You can now use any one of the new commands to invoke Cortana. We should mention that this makes no change to what Cortana is called in the search settings.

    MyCortana doesn’t make UI changes, only back-end functional ones. The search still works as it does before. Once you’ve invoked Cortana with your custom command, go ahead and ask it to find a file, save a reminder, or tell you the current weather.

    If you haven’t tried Cortana yet on a Windows 10 PC, you really should. Even if you don’t have a microphone to use the “Hey Cortana” command, you can still type requests into the Cortana search box in the taskbar.

    Learn how to use Cortana every single day.

    Instructions in this article apply to Windows 10.

    Open an App

    When you’re in the middle of a focused work session, it’s often faster to let Cortana open programs than doing it yourself. This can be for something as frivolous as launching a music app such to more productive uses like opening Outlook.

    Send an Email

    When you need to fire off a quick email, Cortana can do it for you when you say, “Send an email.”

    Using this feature for long messages is not advisable, but it’s a great feature for confirming a meeting time or asking a quick question. However, if that quick message becomes more involved Cortana has an option to continue in the Mail app.

    News Updates

    Cortana can also help find the latest news about a politician, a favorite sports team, a specific company, or many other topics.

    Try something like, “Hey Cortana, what’s the latest on the New York Jets.” Cortana shows a selection of recent stories about the football team and reads the first headline to you. This feature works for most subjects, but sometimes Cortana pushes you off to a web search in the browser instead of presenting top news stories.

    Those are just some of the features you can use every day when you’re at your desk, but there’s far more to Cortana for PCs. Check out everything Microsoft’s digital personal assistant can do by clicking on the Cortana search box or icon on the taskbar. Then click on the question mark icon on the left side of the panel that pops up to get a helpful list of possible Cortana commands.

    Along with adding a lot of features and with numerous improvements and features addition, the best thing Microsoft team did is to provide Cortana Personal Assistant in Windows 10 Operating System. Consider this personal assistant software as “Siri” for Windows. You can talk to it, ask to play your favorite music, weather report, time, reminders, open any installed app, search web for something etc. Either type in Cortana’s search box or just speak, it will follow your instructions in the most intelligent way.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Windows Personal Assistant — Cortana

    Cortana is also available in Windows 10 Mobile, Windows Phone 8.1, Microsoft band (smartwatch), Xbox One & even in iOS and Android App stores now and it has its ‘Hey Cortana’ voice launch feature available for smartphones, similar to ‘Hey Google’ voice command of Google Now. So, whether you are at Cortana’s window or not, whenever you say Hey Cortana, it appears and follows your instructions.

    Unfortunately, this feature is not available by default for Windows 10 users. So, if you say ‘Hey Cortana’, in front of your Windows 10 Laptop or PC, nothing will happen. But don’t be upset, if you want to activate Hey Cortana for your PC, follow below given instructions and you’ll be able to activate Hey Cortana Voice Command for your Windows 10 Operating System too :-

    Steps to activate “Hey Cortana” Voice Launch in Windows 10 OS

    Step 1 :- Click on Cortana Search Box saying ‘Ask me anything’ available at taskbar of your Windows 10 Laptop/PC.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Cortana’s Windows 10 panel will appear.

    Step 2 :- Click Notebook icon available at the top-left corner (below Home button) of Cortana’s Windows 10 panel.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Step 3 :- At the Notebook screen, click “Settings”. Here, tap the switch button provided in Hey Cortana options section to turn it ON and yes, you are done.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Now, while doing other tasks at your Windows 10 Laptop/PC, when you say Hey Cortana, Cortana’s Windows 10 Panel will appear to serve you.

    Tip – By default, Cortana will respond to any voice speaking “Hey Cortana”, but you have the option to make it recognize only your voice and respond only to that (screenshot no. 3) but first you need to make it learn your voice. Click the button “Learn My Voice” and follow the instruction which requires you to read 6 phrases in your clear and concise voice to Cortana.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Note – Turning Cortana’s “Hey Cortana” feature will make your computer run additional services to provide this feature which will use more resources and battery, not much though!

    Editors’ note:This post has been updated to reflect changes to Windows 10 and the process for activating “Hey, Cortana.”

    One of the standout new features found in Windows 10 is the addition of Cortana. For those unfamiliar, Cortana is a voice-activated personal assistant. Think of it as Siri, but for Windows. You can use it to get weather forecasts, set reminders, tell you jokes, send email, find files, search the Internet and so on.

    One feature aimed at making Cortana a staple of your Windows 10 experience involves being able to summon the digital assistant using nothing but your voice with a simple “Hey, Cortana” command. The only thing is, at least as of right now in the technical preview, you have to enable this feature.

    You can now go about using your computer as you normally would, and whenever you need Cortana to perform a task, start by saying, “Hey, Cortana,” followed by your command. I’ve found you have to continue with your command immediately after the activation prompt, instead of waiting for Cortana to load and indicate that it’s listening.

    Windows 10 has a release date of July 29, and is a free upgrade for Windows 7, 8 and 8.1 users.

    How to enable ‘Hey, Cortana’ on Windows 10 – CNET
    Screenshot by Jason Cipriani/CNET There you’ll find a button to enable Hey Cortana. Click on it to slide it to the On

    How to enable “Hey Cortana” in Windows 10
    New survey claims that vast majority of users love Windows 10 and Cortana. Aug 22, 2015 · Hot! Microsoft expected to hold launch event for Surface, Lumia flagships

    How to enable ‘Hey Cortana’ in Windows 10 | Windows Central
    Microsoft’s ‘Hey Cortana’ is a feature on Windows 10 that lets your personal assistant recognize your voice and wake it up just by calling its name. The feature is

    How to enable Hey Cortana in Windows 10
    ‘Hey Cortana’ is a feature on Windows 10 that lets your personal assistant recognize your voice and wake it up just by calling its name. The feature is

    How to Turn On ‘Hey Cortana’ in Windows 10 – Laptop Mag
    Having issues with Windows 10? Our sister site, Toms Hardware, has a team of staffers standing by in the forums to answer your questions 24/7.

    Windows 10 – How to Enable “Hey Cortana” Voice Command
    How to enable the “Hey Cortana” voice command in Windows 10.

    Enable “Hey, Cortana” in Windows 10 | Windows 10 content .
    Enable Cortana’s new capabilities in Windows 10. Q. How can I enable Cortana to respond to “Hey Cortana” in Windows 10? A.

    Windows 10 Technical Preview: How to enable Hey Cortana
    Windows 10 Technical Preview build 9926 brings Cortana personal assistantMicrosoft One of the major features introduced in the January build (number 9926) of Windows

    How to enable Hey Cortana on Windows 10 Preview and other .
    Store app for Windows 10 updated with some new features and polish 15 hours ago 73 By Daniel Rubino If you are on Windows 10 tonight, you may want to use the Windows

    How to Turn On Hey Cortana in Windows 10
    Cortana in Windows 10 is proving simply say Hey Cortana to make a Windows 10 PC when you say Hey Cortana. Turn that to on to enable hands-free

    Use your voice just by uttering the phrase ‘Hey Cortana.’ Here’s how.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Microsoft’s Cortana voice assistant is an integral part of Windows 10. But normally, to pose a question or command, you first have to click on the microphone icon next to Cortana’s “Ask me anything” field just to wake it up.

    But why bother clicking on something when you can use your voice? Through Microsoft’s “Hey Cortana” feature, you can get the attention of the voice assistant just by saying “Hey Cortana,” and segue into your converation seamlessly. Let’s see how this works.

    In Windows 10, click on the microphone icon next to Cortana’s “Ask me anything” field to open the Cortana window.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Then click on the Settings icon (the one that looks like a gear).

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    In the Settings pane, turn on the option under “Hey Cortana” that says “Let Cortana respond to ‘Hey Cortana.'”

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Now Cortana will respond to you when you utter that special phrase. But, wait, there’s more. The next option says: “Keep my device from sleeping when it’s plugged in so I can always say ‘Hey Cortana’ (unless I turn it off myself).” If you want your laptop to never fall asleep when plugged into an outlet so that “Hey Cortana” will always be available, turn on this option.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Next up is deciding who can say “Hey Cortana” to activate the voice assistant. If you want anybody to be able to turn on the feature by saying the magic words, then click on the button that says: “Respond when anyone says ‘Hey Cortana.'” If you want to be the only person who can wake up Cortana by voice, then click on the next button that says: “Try to respond to only me.”

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    If you’re going to be the sole user of “Hey Cortana,” then it’s a good idea to help Cortana better understand the sound and quality and nuances of your voice. In that case, click on the link that says: “Learn how I say ‘Hey Cortana.'”

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    A screen pops up telling you that you’ll have to repeat six phrases so Cortana can get familiar with your voice. As the screen says, it’s best to do this in a quiet place so no extraneous noise interferes with the process. Click on the Start button.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Cortana prompts you to repeat the six phrases, one after the other. If it has trouble understanding a particular phrase, it will ask you to repeat it. When you’ve repeated all six phrases to Cortana’s satisfaction, you can now say “Hey Cortana” followed by your question, command, or comment, but now with a bit more confidence that it will understand what you’re saying.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Okay, now that Cortana can wake up via your voice, what are some questions, commands, and comments you can throw at it? Here are a few examples. You can tell Cortana to…

    • Open a specific app on your Windows 10 PC
    • Turn key Windows 10 features on and off
    • Set a calendar appointment for a specific date and time.
    • Set a reminder for a specific date and time
    • Provide a weather forecast
    • Compose and send emails and texts to specific people
    • Search for photos, videos, music, documents, and other files by name or other criteria
    • Serve up information on various research questions, such as “What is the population of the United States?” or “Who was the 25th US president?”
    • Tell you a joke

    Cortana can even offer suggestions as it learns more about you. For example, it can cull information about you from its Notebook (the third icon from the top of the Cortana window) to suggest books to read, movies to see, restaurants to dine at, and events to attend. It can also track the status of your airline flights, package shipments, investments, local traffic, and an array of other items.

    How to turn on “hey cortana” in windows 10

    Finally, Microsoft’s Meet Cortana and What is Cortana webpages provide more details on just what you can ask the voice assistant. For more, check out 11 Cortana Tricks for a Master Chief and some of our other Windows 10 tips below.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Here is how you can disable “The Publisher could not be verified” Error message while trying to open certain files and programs on your Windows 10 computer.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Publisher Could Not Be Verified Warning in Windows 10

Publisher could not be verified warning dialog box appears in Windows 10 when you try to open a File or Run a Program on your computer that Windows does not recognize as a trusted file.

Windows 10 will continue to block the File or prevent the Program from Running on your computer, until you specifically instruct your computer that the File can be opened.

If you are certain that you have downloaded the file from a trusted source, you can disable “Publisher could not be verified” Error in Windows 10 by using any of the following methods, as applicable in your case.

1. Over Rule Windows 10

If Windows 10 is unable to confirm the origin or the authenticity of the File that you are trying to open, it will provide you with an option to overrule the File block.

1. Open the File on your computer

2. On “Publisher could not be verified” dialogue box, uncheck Always ask before opening this file option and click on Run .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

3. Depending on your User Account settings, you may see “Do you want to allow this app from unknown publisher” pop-up. Click on Yes to confirm.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

After this, the File should automatically open on your computer.

2. Unblock File Using Properties

If the File that you are trying to open is already on your computer (Desktop, Downloads or Documents), you can easily unblock the file by going to its properties screen.

1. Right-click the File that you want to unblock and select Properties .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2. On the File Properties screen, click on the General tab > check the Unblock box and click on Apply .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Note: If you do not see Unblock box, the file is not blocked and you should be able to open the File.

After this, you should be able to open the File without coming across “Publisher could not be verified” message.

3. Disable Smart Screen Filter

The Smart Screen Filter in Windows can prevent Files and Programs from opening on your computer.

If you trust the File or Program and its publisher, you can open the File after disabling smart screen filter on your computer.

1. Open Settings > Click on Update & Security .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2. On Update & Security screen, click on Windows Security > App & Browser Control .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

3. On the next screen, select Warn option.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

After this try to open the File/Program and click on Open Anyway on the pop-up warning.

If you are still unable to open the File, you can temporarily disable Windows Defender by selecting OFF option.

If you are using a Windows PC, probably you’d have seen this message, especially while trying to install applications from some not-so-popular vendors on your computer.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

There isn’t anything to worry about this message- it’s just a warning that you can simply ignore. Here, I can summarize the cause of this problem in one sentence, “Windows fails to recognize publisher of that program.”

How this explanation seems to you? If you’ve doubts, try to install programs from any recognized software vendors. For example, let’s try to install Remo Recover 4.0 on the same PC. Perhaps, you’d see a pop-up like this.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Here you can see Windows has identified the program as a verified publisher – which did not happen with the first program. This happens because of Microsoft’s policy that asks vendors to get the approval as verified publisher. For this, the vendor needs to earn a code signing certificate for their product from a trusted third party provider like DigiCert. Consumers often trust programs powered by these certificates like shrink-wrapped programs they purchase from a retail store. Actually, a code signing certificate is nothing more than a document for validating a program in order to prove it has not been altered by a third party.

But, what’s the guarantee that such programs do not harm your computer? The reality is, any software vendor can acquire a code signing certificate for their program for a sum of money. So, how can you assure that such programs do not have malicious nature?

Also, you can’t blindly consider that an unverified program will disrupt your system. So it doesn’t matter if a program is verified or unverified, sometimes these programs can put your PC at risk.

Precaution you should take before Running an Unverified Program

It is always best to run a verified program, but if you still want to run a program from unknown source ignoring the security warning, it is recommended to at least create a system restore point. So that you can always restore the system to a previous working state if something goes wrong.

Methods to Unblock File from any Publisher in Windows 10

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

1 st Method

While trying to install program from an unknown publisher on your Windows 10 PC, you might have seen a check box saying “Always ask for opening this file”. Just tick the check box. Next time, when you try to open that particular file, you’ll not see the publisher could not be verified warning.

2 nd Method

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Right click on the file and select properties option. On the bottom of General tab, you’ll see a security tab saying “This file came from another computer and might be blocked to help protect this computer” and an “Unblock” check box to its right.

Note: This method will work only if your file is in a location where your account has permission. For example- Desktop, Downloads, Documents …

3 rd Method – for Advanced Users

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. “Windows + R” Key to launch the “Run Utility”.
  2. Type gpedit.msc and press enter to access Local Group Policy Editor.
  3. Select “User Configuration” -> “Administrative Templates” -> “Windows Components” -> “Attachment Manager”.
  4. On the right pane of the windows, you’ll see certain settings. You’ve to open “inclusion list for moderate risk file types” setting.
  5. Configure the policy setting to “Enabled” state and in the ‘options’ textbox, specify the high-risk file extensions separate by a period.
  6. Logoff you system and Login again. You’ll never see “Publisher Could Not Be Verified warning for your particular file type in the future.

Also Read:

John Harris

Senior Editor, Content Analyst and a fan of exceptional customer service. John develops and publishes instructional and informational content regarding partition management, Windows hot-fixes, data management and computer troubleshooting.

As a tenured data recovery specialist, John shares exceptional insights and blog posts about data loss and data recovery across any storage device. With 8+ years’ experience in writing for Data Recovery for both Mac OS and Windows OS computers, he is an avid learner who always wants to polish and simplify the data recovery process. John passes his free time playing Chess and reading Science Fiction novels.

Users need to unblock downloaded files from the Internet to stop Windows 11 from blocking access to them. When you click such a file in Explorer, it shows a security warning. Also, for some files like executables (*.exe), Windows blocks them from opening. Here’s how to unblock such a file and stop Windows 11 from blocking them.

By default, Windows adds a zone information to each of the files downloaded from the Internet or received by email. When you are opening any file, the operating systems analyzes that data. If the zone info presents and is refers to the “unsafe” source, you see a warning.

This functionality is implemented in the Attachment Manager component. It writes the zone information to a special area called “alternate data steam” which is invisible to the end user. Such streams, also known as “metadata”, only exist on NTFS partitions.

Attachment Manager identifies how risky the downloaded file can be for you by several factors. In short, it checks with what program you open the file, the type of the file, and the source from where you obtained the file.

There are three levels of security warnings you may see when opening a downloaded file.

  • High – You see the message like “Windows found that this file is potentially harmful. To help protect your computer, Windows has blocked access to this file.” This warning typically appears for download executable files that don’t have a digital signature and aren’t known for SmartScreen.
  • Moderate – This applies to certain documents and executables received from LAN. For the latter, you may see the “The publisher could not be verified. Are you sure you want to run this software?” message.
  • Low – For files that are “safe” regardless of the source, Windows doesn’t notify the user and allows opening them.

If you find inconvenient to see such prompts every time you open the downloaded files, you need to unblock them. Here is how.

When downloading files from the Internet, Windows will look at the file and categorize it as High Risk, Moderate Risk, or Low Risk and decide if it’s safe for you to run the file. Windows will then allow or block the file. If you know a file is safe, but blocked from running by Windows Security, here are some options to unblock a blocked file.

TIP : Hard to fix Windows Problems? Repair/Restore Missing Windows OS Files Damaged by Malware with a few clicks

Before we get started, there are four places that a file could come from:

After that, there are three categories Windows uses to determine if a file is safe:

Video tutorial:

How to Unblock Blocked Files Downloaded From the Internet – File Explorer Properties

Open File Explorer and right-click on the file.

Click on Properties.

Click on Unblock.

If Unblock is not available, the file isn’t blocked, or try another method below.

How to Unblock Blocked Files Downloaded From the Internet – Security Warning

Open or run the blocked file.

Uncheck the box next to Always ask before opening this file, and click on the Open or Run button.

You might also see a User Account Control (UAC) warning that says, “Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?” Click Yes.

How to Unblock Blocked Files Downloaded From the Internet – Microsoft Defender SmartScreen

Open or run the blocked file.

Click on More info.

Click on Run anyway. If you don’t see Run anyway, look for the scroll bar at the bottom and slide it to the right.

How to Unblock Blocked Files Downloaded From the Internet – Windows Terminal or PowerShell

Windows Terminal or PowerShell is a powerful tool to unblock files if all else fails.

There are numerous options for the Command Prompt. Here are the commands you need to know. Be sure to include the quotes. Add -confirm to the end of any line for a confirmation prompt.

Unblock a file:
Code: unblock-file -path “full path of blocked file”
Examples:
unblock-file -path “C:\Users\tim\Downloads\filename.zip”
unblock-file -path “C:\Users\tim\Downloads\filename.zip” -confirm

Unblock all files in a folder:
Code: get-childitem “full path of folder” | unblock-file
Examples:
get-childitem “C:\Users\tim\Downloads” | unblock-file
get-childitem “C:\Users\tim\Downloads” | unblock-file -confirm

Unblock all files in a folder and subfolders:
Code: get-childitem “full path of folder” -recurse | unblock-file
Examples:
get-childitem “C:\Users\tim\Downloads” -recurse | unblock-file
get-childitem “C:\Users\tim\Downloads” -recurse | unblock-file – confirm

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Диалоговое окно Предупреждение о безопасности в Windows отображается при запуске или открытии файла, который Microsoft не распознает в качестве надежного файла. Файл заблокирован, если вы не указали Windows, что файл может быть запущен или открыт.

Если вы загрузили файл из надежного источника и часто запускаете его, вы можете разблокировать этот файл, чтобы вы не открывали диалоговое окно «Предупреждение о безопасности» при каждом его запуске.

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Обязательно разблокируйте только файлы, которые вы знаете, из надежных источников. Разблокирование неизвестных файлов может увеличить риск заражения вашего компьютера вредоносными программами или вирусами.

Как разблокировать файл непосредственно в диалоговом окне «Предупреждение о безопасности»

Самый простой способ разблокировать файл – это флажок в диалоговом окне «Предупреждение безопасности». Когда появится предупреждение о безопасности, снимите флажок «Всегда спрашивать перед открытием этого файла». Затем нажмите «Запустить» или «Открыть», чтобы запустить или открыть файл.

ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Этот метод разблокирует файл в любом месте на вашем ПК.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Если появится диалоговое окно «Контроль учетных записей пользователей», нажмите «Да», чтобы продолжить.

ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Диалоговое окно «Контроль учетных записей» отображается, если файл находится в том месте, в котором ваша учетная запись пользователя не имеет разрешения на доступ по умолчанию. Отображается ли диалоговое окно Контроль учетных записей пользователей, также зависит от настроек управления учетными записями пользователей.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

При следующем запуске или открытии этого конкретного файла вы не увидите диалоговое окно Предупреждение о безопасности.

Как разблокировать файл, используя его свойства

Вы также можете разблокировать файл, изменив параметр в свойствах файла.

ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Этот метод можно использовать только для разблокирования файла, если файл находится в одном из мест в вашей пользовательской папке, например «Рабочий стол», «Загрузки» или «Документы» (или укажите, что у вашей учетной записи есть разрешение на доступ). Если это не в одном из этих мест, сначала необходимо перенести файл в одно из этих мест, разблокировать файл, а затем переместить файл обратно в исходное местоположение.

Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши файл, который вы хотите разблокировать, и выберите «Свойства» во всплывающем меню.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Откроется диалоговое окно «Свойства». В Windows 10 на вкладке «Общие» установите флажок «Разблокировать», чтобы в нем была отметка. В Windows 7 и 8 / 8.1 нажмите кнопку «Разблокировать» на вкладке «Общие». Нажмите «ОК».

ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Если флажок или кнопка Unblock не отображается, файл уже разблокирован.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Когда вы запустите или откроете этот конкретный файл с этого момента, диалоговое окно «Предупреждение о безопасности» не будет отображаться.

Как разблокировать файлы с помощью фильтра SmartScreen в Windows 8 / 8.1 и 10

Фильтр SmartScreen от Microsoft предотвращает запуск неизвестных и вредоносных программ, если только вы не дадите разрешение на это. Фильтр SmartScreen, используемый для части Internet Explorer 8 и 9. Однако с Windows 8 фильтр SmartScreen интегрирован в операционную систему Windows. Вы можете разблокировать файлы из диалогового окна «Фильтр SmartScreen», если вы столкнулись с ним в Windows 8 / 8.1 или 10.

Помните, что оченьосторожно, когда вы выбираете разблокировать файл и убедитесь, что знаете, что файл поступает из надежного источника.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Fix Downloaded Files from being Blocked in Windows 10: When you try to open or execute the files you just download over the internet you may receive a security warning stating “The publisher could not be verified and the file might be a security threat“. This happens when Windows can’t verify the digital signature of the file, hence the error message. Windows 10 comes with an Attachment Manager which identifies an attachment either safe or unsafe, if the file is unsafe then it warns you before you open the files.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Windows Attachment Manager uses the IAttachmentExecute application programming interface (API) to find the file type and file association. When you download some files from the Internet and save it on your disk (NTFS) then Windows add specific metadata to these downloaded files. These metadata are saved as an Alternate Data Stream (ADS). When Windows adds metadata to the download files as an attachment then it is known as Zone Information. This zone information is not visible and is added to the download file as an Alternate Data Stream (ADS).

When you try to open the downloaded file then Windows File Explorer also checks the zone information and see if the file came from an unknown source. Once Windows recognizes that the file is an unrecognized or came from unknown sources the Windows Smart Screen warning will appear stating “Windows smart screen prevented an unrecognized app from starting. Running this app might put your PC at risk“.

If you wish to unblock the file then you could do that manually by right-clicking on the downloaded file and then select Properties. Under properties window checkmark “Unblock” then click Apply followed by OK. But users don’t prefer this method as it’s very annoying to do that every time you download a file instead you could disable the additional zone information which means there won’t be any smart screen security warning. So without wasting any time let’s see How to Fix Downloaded Files from being Blocked in Windows 10 with the help of the below-listed tutorial.

Fix Downloaded Files from being Blocked in Windows 10

Make sure to create a restore point just in case something goes wrong.

Method 1: Enable or Disable Downloaded Files from being Blocked in Registry Editor

1.Press Windows Key + R then type regedit and hit Enter.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2.Navigate to the following registry key:

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\Attachments

3.If you can’t find Attachments folder then right-click on Policies then select New > Key.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

4.Name this key as Attachments and hit Enter.

5.Now right-click on Attachments then select New > DWORD (32-bit) Value.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

6.Name this newly created DWORD as SaveZoneInformation and hit Enter.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

7.Double-click on SaveZoneInformation then change it’s value to 1.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

8.If in future you need to enable Zone information simply right-click on SaveZoneInformation DWORD and select Delete.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

9.Close Registry Editor then reboot your PC to save changes.

This is How to Fix Downloaded Files from being Blocked in Windows 10 but if you still have some problem then follow the next method.

Method 2: Enable or Disable Downloaded Files from being Blocked in Group Policy Editor

Note: This method won’t work for Windows 10 Home Edition Users as it only work in Windows 10 Pro, Education, and Enterprise Edition.

1.Press Windows Key + R then type gpedit.msc and hit Enter.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2.Navigate to the following Policy:

User Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Attachment Manager

3.Make sure to select Attachment Manager then in the right window double-click on “Do not preserve zone information in file attachments” policy.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

4.Now if you need to enable or disable zone information do the following:

To Enable Downloaded Files from being Blocked: Select Not configured or Disable

To Disable Downloaded Files from being Blocked: Select Enabled

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

5.Click Apply followed by OK.

6.Reboot your PC to save changes.

Recommended:

That’s it, you successfully Fix Downloaded Files from being Blocked in Windows 10 but if you still have any questions regarding this tutorial then feel free to ask them in the comment’s section.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Aditya Farrad

Aditya is a self-motivated information technology professional and has been a technology writer for the last 7 years. He covers Internet services, mobile, Windows, software, and How-to guides.

Here is how you can disable “The Publisher could not be verified” Error message while trying to open certain files and programs on your Windows 10 computer.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Publisher Could Not Be Verified Warning in Windows 10

Publisher could not be verified warning dialog box appears in Windows 10 when you try to open a File or Run a Program on your computer that Windows does not recognize as a trusted file.

Windows 10 will continue to block the File or prevent the Program from Running on your computer, until you specifically instruct your computer that the File can be opened.

If you are certain that you have downloaded the file from a trusted source, you can disable “Publisher could not be verified” Error in Windows 10 by using any of the following methods, as applicable in your case.

1. Over Rule Windows 10

If Windows 10 is unable to confirm the origin or the authenticity of the File that you are trying to open, it will provide you with an option to overrule the File block.

1. Open the File on your computer

2. On “Publisher could not be verified” dialogue box, uncheck Always ask before opening this file option and click on Run.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

3. Depending on your User Account settings, you may see “Do you want to allow this app from unknown publisher” pop-up. Click on Yes to confirm.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

After this, the File should automatically open on your computer.

2. Unblock File Using Properties

If the File that you are trying to open is already on your computer (Desktop, Downloads or Documents), you can easily unblock the file by going to its properties screen.

1. Right-click the File that you want to unblock and select Properties.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2. On the File Properties screen, click on the General tab > check the Unblock box and click on Apply.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Note: If you do not see Unblock box, the file is not blocked and you should be able to open the File.

After this, you should be able to open the File without coming across “Publisher could not be verified” message.

3. Disable Smart Screen Filter

The Smart Screen Filter in Windows can prevent Files and Programs from opening on your computer.

If you trust the File or Program and its publisher, you can open the File after disabling smart screen filter on your computer.

1. Open Settings > Click on Update & Security.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2. On Update & Security screen, click on Windows Security > App & Browser Control.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

3. On the next screen, select Warn option.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

After this try to open the File/Program and click on Open Anyway on the pop-up warning.

If you are still unable to open the File, you can temporarily disable Windows Defender by selecting OFF option.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Once you download files from the Internet, Windows 10 shows you a security warning every time you try to open it. Some file types are blocked from opening. SmartScreen, a security feature of Windows 10, causes such behavior. Let’s see how to unblock those files.

When you try to open a file which was downloaded from the Internet, you can see a warning like this:

To get rid of it, you need to do the following:

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. Right click the file in File Explorer.
  2. In the context menu, select the last item named “Properties”.
  3. In the Properties dialog, on the General tab, tick the checkbox named “Unblock”:

After that, the security warning will disappear.
This is very useful when you need to unblock just one file. In the situation when you need to unblock several files at once, it is impractical to right click on every file, and open its Properties to unblock it.

Using PowerShell, it is posssible unblock multiple files at once in any given folder. It can be done as follows:

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. Press Win + R on the keyboard to open the Run dialog.
  2. In the Run box, type powershell:
  3. In the PowerShell console, type the following command:

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

In this example, C:\Users\winaero\Downloads is the path to the folder which contains all files you need to unblock all at once.

Winaero greatly relies on your support. You can help the site keep bringing you interesting and useful content and software by using these options:

If you like this article, please share it using the buttons below. It won’t take a lot from you, but it will help us grow. Thanks for your support!

Author: Sergey Tkachenko

Sergey Tkachenko is a software developer who started Winaero back in 2011. On this blog, Sergey is writing about everything connected to Microsoft, Windows and popular software. Follow him on Telegram, Twitter, and YouTube. View all posts by Sergey Tkachenko

25 thoughts on “How to unblock files downloaded from Internet in Windows 10”

it’s very annoying message! thanks!

Don’t mention it.

Thank you for this! My problem is a little more complex. I have sub-folders and sub-sub-folders with files to get unblocked. Is there a way to unblock all files on a drive, or at least all files within folders & sub-folders. I have also been unsuccessful at getting downloads to not be blocked in the first place.

Open Powershell and run the command below.
This will work for you silently:
dir c:\users\winaero\downloads -Recurse | Unblock-File
This one will report which files will be unblocked, but WILL NOT UNBLOCK them (the report only):
dir c:\users\winaero\downloads -Recurse | Unblock-File -WhatIf
Enjoy.
It is a good idea to cover it tomorrow.

I was really kicking myself for having forgotten to ‘Unblock’ a ZIP file containing a TON of files I had to take off Copy.com (because they’re shutting down) and this really saved me from having to sit and do this by hand, which would have taken, well, quite some time.

To prevent sites from having this error in the future, you need to add them to trusted sites. This is useful when you download often from a particular site.

This can be done (in IE8 onwards) by setting the following registry keys:

Create new Key under:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\ZoneMap\Domains\exampledomain.com]

Create a DWord Value for each protocol you need to trust; for example
“http”=dword:00000002
“https”=dword:00000002

Quality – how annoying is that and painful to do one by one – simple things and all that.

Thanks for this, although is there a way to make it do entire folders and subfolders?

Sure. Use
Get-ChildItem -recurse

Is this the correct way it write out the command to unblock all files in folders and subfolders? ‘Get-ChildItem -recurse | unblock-file’ ? Thanks.

I use the following command

Another way to bulk unblock files is to ZIP them, delete the originals, then UNZIP them.

-Recurse was the switch I was missing to take care of subfolders .
Thanks!
Steve

Here is how you can disable “The Publisher could not be verified” Error message while trying to open certain files and programs on your Windows 10 computer.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Publisher Could Not Be Verified Warning in Windows 10

Publisher could not be verified warning dialog box appears in Windows 10 when you try to open a File or Run a Program on your computer that Windows does not recognize as a trusted file.

Windows 10 will continue to block the File or prevent the Program from Running on your computer, until you specifically instruct your computer that the File can be opened.

If you are certain that you have downloaded the file from a trusted source, you can disable “Publisher could not be verified” Error in Windows 10 by using any of the following methods, as applicable in your case.

1. Over Rule Windows 10

If Windows 10 is unable to confirm the origin or the authenticity of the File that you are trying to open, it will provide you with an option to overrule the File block.

1. Open the File on your computer

2. On “Publisher could not be verified” dialogue box, uncheck Always ask before opening this file option and click on Run .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

3. Depending on your User Account settings, you may see “Do you want to allow this app from unknown publisher” pop-up. Click on Yes to confirm.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

After this, the File should automatically open on your computer.

2. Unblock File Using Properties

If the File that you are trying to open is already on your computer (Desktop, Downloads or Documents), you can easily unblock the file by going to its properties screen.

1. Right-click the File that you want to unblock and select Properties .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2. On the File Properties screen, click on the General tab > check the Unblock box and click on Apply .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Note: If you do not see Unblock box, the file is not blocked and you should be able to open the File.

After this, you should be able to open the File without coming across “Publisher could not be verified” message.

3. Disable Smart Screen Filter

The Smart Screen Filter in Windows can prevent Files and Programs from opening on your computer.

If you trust the File or Program and its publisher, you can open the File after disabling smart screen filter on your computer.

1. Open Settings > Click on Update & Security .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

2. On Update & Security screen, click on Windows Security > App & Browser Control .

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

3. On the next screen, select Warn option.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

After this try to open the File/Program and click on Open Anyway on the pop-up warning.

If you are still unable to open the File, you can temporarily disable Windows Defender by selecting OFF option.

This annoying error code is something that has been bugging users from all around the world, especially the ones who recently upgraded their computers from an earlier version of Windows OS to Windows 10.

This does not happen solely to users who are trying to install a shady or a suspicious program but rather for almost all programs. After the error message appears, there are almost no instructions on how to resolve the issue because even after clicking on the “How do I unblock this options”, users are still unable to change anything.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Fixing this issue can be achieved in various different ways and they are almost always quite straight-forward. The error is quite common and users have reported that the methods written below have helped them resolve their issue immediately. Follow the rest of the article for more info!

Solution 1: Using Command Prompt With Administrator Permissions

This particular method has helped quite a lot of users fix their issue and it involves using the elevated Command Prompt in order to gain access to the file. This method can be achieved in several simple steps and it’s recommended that you try this one out before trying anything else.

  1. Use the Windows Key + X key combination in order to open the menu where you should select the Command Prompt (Admin) option. Alternatively, you can right-click on the Start menu for the same effect or you can simply search for Command Prompt, right-click on it and select Run as administrator.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. Locate the setup file of the program you want to install on your computer, Shift + Right-click on it and select Copy as path.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. Paste the path in the Command Prompt by using the Ctrl + V key combination and click on the Enter key. The file should execute without problems and you should be able to install it on your computer.

Alternatively, you can open Command Prompt from the folder where you file is located and you can simply run the file from Command Prompt.

  1. Right-click on the folder where the file you want to run is located and select the “Open command windows here” option.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. After Command Prompt opens, copy and paste the name of the file you want to run. Make sure you include the “.exe” extension at the end of the file.

Solution 2: Edit the Properties of the File

Sometimes Windows blocks download executable files if its unable to verify its origin. However, if you are certain that the file you are trying to run is safe to use, you can overrun their security settings by editing the file’s properties.

  1. Right click on the file and select Properties at the bottom of the context menu.
  2. After you navigate to the General tab you should be able to see the “This file came from another computer and might be blocked to help protect this computer” message.
  3. Select “Unblock” and click Apply in order to apply these changes. Try running the file again.

Solution 3: Using the Internet Explorer

Since some of the most essential Windows 10 settings can still be controlled if you try using Internet Explorer, this problem can also be addressed if you tweak certain settings in Internet Explorer. Follow the steps below carefully in order to try and fix you issue.

  1. Open Internet Explorer by locating it in the Start menu. It should be located in the default apps list.
  2. On the Tools menu, click Internet Options.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Note: If the menu is not available in the Internet Explorer window, press the ALT key on the keyboard to display the menu.

  1. Navigate to the Content tab and check under the Certificate section.
  2. Click on the Publishers button and navigate to the Untrusted Publishers section.How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning
  3. Locate the publisher whose software or file has been blocked and click on Remove in order to get rid of the security warning you have been receiving.
  4. Try running the file again.

Solution 4: Disabling the Security Warning and User Account Control

Since Windows can sometimes overreact with their security warnings and messages, you can turn them off for a short period of time needed for you to install the program you are struggling with. You should undo these changes as soon as you are done with the process since the last thing you want to do is leave your computer unprotected.

*Disable Security File Warning**

  1. Open Internet Explorer by locating it in the Start menu. It should be located in the default apps list.
  2. On the Tools menu, click Internet Options.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. Navigate to the Security tab, select Internet from the list of icons at the top of the Windows and click on the Custom level… option.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

  1. Locate the “Launching Applications and Unsafe Files” which should somewhere between the middle of the list and the end. Click on the radio button next to Enable.
  2. Certain prompt may appear notifying you that changing these settings may be unsecure for your computer. You can ignore them but make sure you undo these changes later.

Unfortunately, some users have reported that, even after they have performed this method and they were able to get rid of the annoying error message, another message appear stating “This app has been blocked for your protection”. This is controlled by User Account Control and you may have to disable it for now if you want to install the file. Make sure you re-enable it after you install the file.

  1. Open Control Panel by searching for it in the Start menu.
  2. Switch the View by option in Control Panel to Large Icons and locate the User Accounts option.How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning
  3. Open it and click on “Change User Account Control Settings”.
  4. You will notice that there are several different options you can choose on the slider. If your slider is set at the top level, you will definitely receive more of these pop-up messages than usual.How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning
  5. Try decreasing this value by one if it’s at the top slider and check to see if it helped.
  6. We recommend you turn it off for now as the file should probably install successfully. You may also be able to run the file even if you don’t disable UAC completely, but you should definitely leave it on as it serves to protect your PC.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Hộp thoại Cảnh báo Bảo mật trong Windows hiển thị khi bạn chạy hoặc mở tệp mà Microsoft không nhận ra là tệp đáng tin cậy. Tệp bị chặn trừ khi bạn nói cụ thể với Windows tệp có thể được chạy hoặc mở.

Nếu bạn đã tải xuống một tệp từ một nguồn đáng tin cậy và bạn chạy nó thường xuyên, bạn có thể bỏ chặn tệp đó để không nhận được hộp thoại Cảnh báo bảo mật mỗi khi bạn chạy nó.

CẢNH BÁO: Đảm bảo chỉ bỏ chặn các tệp bạn biết là từ các nguồn đáng tin cậy. Bỏ chặn các tệp không xác định có thể làm tăng nguy cơ máy tính của bạn bị nhiễm phần mềm độc hại hoặc vi-rút.

Cách bỏ chặn tệp trực tiếp trên hộp thoại cảnh báo bảo mật

Cách dễ nhất để bỏ chặn tệp là một hộp kiểm trên hộp thoại Cảnh báo Bảo mật. Khi Cảnh báo bảo mật xuất hiện, chỉ cần bỏ chọn mục Luôn luôn hỏi trước khi mở hộp tệp này. Sau đó, nhấp vào Trò chơi Run Run hoặc Trò chơi Mở ra để chạy hoặc mở tệp.

LƯU Ý: Phương pháp này sẽ bỏ chặn một tệp ở bất kỳ vị trí nào trên PC của bạn.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Nếu hộp thoại Kiểm soát tài khoản người dùng hiển thị, hãy nhấp vào Có Có để tiếp tục.

GHI CHÚ: Hộp thoại Kiểm soát Tài khoản Người dùng hiển thị nếu tệp nằm ở vị trí mà tài khoản người dùng của bạn không có quyền truy cập theo mặc định. Hộp thoại Kiểm soát tài khoản người dùng có hiển thị hay không cũng tùy thuộc vào cài đặt Kiểm soát tài khoản người dùng của bạn.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Lần sau khi bạn chạy hoặc mở tệp cụ thể này, bạn sẽ không thấy hộp thoại Cảnh báo bảo mật.

Cách bỏ chặn một tệp bằng các thuộc tính của nó

Bạn cũng có thể bỏ chặn tệp bằng cách thay đổi cài đặt trong thuộc tính của tệp.

LƯU Ý: Bạn chỉ có thể sử dụng phương pháp này để bỏ chặn tệp nếu tệp nằm ở một trong các vị trí trong thư mục người dùng của bạn, chẳng hạn như Máy tính để bàn, Tải xuống hoặc Tài liệu (hoặc vị trí tài khoản người dùng của bạn có quyền truy cập). Nếu nó không ở một trong những vị trí này, trước tiên bạn phải di chuyển tệp đến một trong những vị trí này, bỏ chặn tệp và sau đó di chuyển tệp trở lại vị trí ban đầu.

Nhấp chuột phải vào tệp bạn muốn bỏ chặn và chọn Thuộc tính của Hồi giáo từ menu bật lên.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Hộp thoại Thuộc tính hiển thị. Trong Windows 10, trên tab Chung, hãy chọn hộp kiểm Unblock Unblock để có dấu kiểm trong hộp. Trong Windows 7 và 8 / 8.1, hãy nhấp vào nút Unblock Unblock trên tab Chung. Nhấp vào OK OK OK.

LƯU Ý: Nếu bạn không thấy hộp kiểm Bỏ chặn hoặc nút, tệp đã được bỏ chặn.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Khi bạn chạy hoặc mở tệp cụ thể này kể từ bây giờ, hộp thoại Cảnh báo Bảo mật sẽ không hiển thị.

Cách bỏ chặn tệp bằng Bộ lọc SmartScreen trong Windows 8 / 8.1 và 10

Bộ lọc SmartScreen của Microsoft ngăn các chương trình độc hại và không xác định chạy, trừ khi bạn cho phép làm như vậy. Bộ lọc SmartScreen được sử dụng cho một phần của Internet Explorer 8 và 9. Tuy nhiên, kể từ Windows 8, Bộ lọc SmartScreen được tích hợp vào hệ điều hành Windows. Bạn có thể bỏ chặn các tệp từ hộp thoại Bộ lọc SmartScreen, nếu bạn gặp nó trong Windows 8 / 8.1 hoặc 10.

Nhớ là rất cẩn thận khi chọn bỏ chặn tệp và chắc chắn rằng bạn biết tệp đến từ nguồn đáng tin cậy.

These forums are a place for learning, helping and sharing experiences with others about any of our products. Feel free to ask a question and get answers from our community and our most advanced users.

Note that these are public forums – anyone can view the discussions here.

VISIT OUR DIFFERENT FORUMS:

Quali’s Idea Box!

This is where you can suggest your ideas to help and improve the product for everyone.

Please make sure to read the following article before posting a new idea, to get more information about the required information and ideas lifecycle.

Feel free to vote and comment on other ideas to promote them.

Thanks for everyone who suggested the ideas and voted for them.

Quali’s Community Integrations

Find, download and share integrations that can extend and enhance the CloudShell experience.

Integrations have several levels:
Certified – Officially tested and supported by Quali.
Preview – Provides a sneak peek to what the Quali team is developing. Officially supported by Quali. Feel free to experiment and comment, but please take into consideration that it is not yet tested and released.
Community – Integrations shared by community users. Feel free to look into what other users have contributed, please take into consideration that these integrations are not tested by Quali.

To learn more about creating Shells and integrating with CloudShell, use the following links:

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

We understand small businesses need support just as much as enterprises. With our Enterprise expertise and Small Business cost model, we have the knowledge and experience to help your technology grow as your small business grows.

Our team of engineers will bring your business technologies up to industry standard best practices providing you with a fast, stable, secure, and backed up environment.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Speed

Your employees are only as productive as the technology allows them to be. When their computers, applications, or internet connections are sluggish, you loose productivity…
Read More

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Security

Today’s compliance standards such as PCI and HIPPA can be difficult for Small Businesses to understand, let alone comply with. In addition, you need your systems to be stable…
Read More

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Backups

It happens all the time. Drives fail, backups don’t exist, and years of data is lost. Even if you have backups, are you confident they work? When was the last time they were tested…
Read More

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

กล่องโต้ตอบคำเตือนเพื่อความปลอดภัยใน Windows จะปรากฏขึ้นเมื่อคุณเรียกใช้หรือเปิดไฟล์ที่ Microsoft ไม่รู้จักว่าเป็นไฟล์ที่เชื่อถือได้ ไฟล์ดังกล่าวถูกปิดกั้นเว้นแต่คุณแจ้งให้ Windows ทราบว่าไฟล์นั้นสามารถเรียกใช้หรือเปิดได้.

คำเตือน: อย่าลืมปลดล็อคเฉพาะไฟล์ที่คุณรู้จักจากแหล่งที่เชื่อถือได้ การเลิกบล็อกไฟล์ที่ไม่รู้จักสามารถเพิ่มความเสี่ยงของคอมพิวเตอร์ที่ติดมัลแวร์หรือไวรัส.

วิธียกเลิกการบล็อกไฟล์โดยตรงบนกล่องโต้ตอบคำเตือนความปลอดภัย

วิธีที่ง่ายที่สุดในการปลดบล็อกไฟล์คือช่องทำเครื่องหมายในกล่องโต้ตอบ Security Warning เมื่อคำเตือนความปลอดภัยปรากฏขึ้นให้ยกเลิกการเลือกช่อง“ ถามทุกครั้งก่อนเปิดไฟล์นี้” จากนั้นคลิก“ Run” หรือ“ Open” เพื่อเรียกใช้หรือเปิดไฟล์.

หมายเหตุ: วิธีการนี้จะปลดบล็อกไฟล์ในตำแหน่งใด ๆ บนพีซีของคุณ.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

หากกล่องโต้ตอบการควบคุมบัญชีผู้ใช้ปรากฏขึ้นให้คลิก“ ใช่” เพื่อดำเนินการต่อ.

หมายเหตุ: กล่องโต้ตอบการควบคุมบัญชีผู้ใช้จะปรากฏขึ้นหากไฟล์อยู่ในตำแหน่งที่บัญชีผู้ใช้ของคุณไม่มีสิทธิ์เข้าถึงโดยค่าเริ่มต้น ว่ากล่องโต้ตอบการควบคุมบัญชีผู้ใช้จะปรากฏขึ้นหรือไม่นั้นขึ้นอยู่กับการตั้งค่าการควบคุมบัญชีผู้ใช้ของคุณด้วย.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

วิธียกเลิกการบล็อกไฟล์โดยใช้คุณสมบัติของมัน

หมายเหตุ: คุณสามารถใช้วิธีนี้ในการปลดบล็อกไฟล์ได้หากไฟล์อยู่ในตำแหน่งใดตำแหน่งหนึ่งในโฟลเดอร์ผู้ใช้ของคุณเช่นเดสก์ท็อปดาวน์โหลดหรือเอกสาร (หรือที่ตั้งที่บัญชีผู้ใช้ของคุณมีสิทธิ์เข้าถึง) หากไม่ใช่ตำแหน่งใดตำแหน่งหนึ่งคุณต้องย้ายไฟล์ไปที่หนึ่งในตำแหน่งเหล่านี้ก่อนปลดบล็อกไฟล์แล้วย้ายไฟล์กลับไปที่ตำแหน่งเดิม.

คลิกขวาที่ไฟล์ที่คุณต้องการปลดบล็อกและเลือก“ Properties” จากเมนูป๊อปอัพ.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

กล่องโต้ตอบคุณสมบัติจะปรากฏขึ้น ใน Windows 10 บนแท็บทั่วไปให้ทำเครื่องหมายที่ช่อง “เลิกบล็อก” เพื่อให้มีเครื่องหมายถูกในกล่อง ใน Windows 7 และ 8 / 8.1 ให้คลิกปุ่ม“ ปลดบล็อก” บนแท็บทั่วไป คลิก“ ตกลง”.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

วิธียกเลิกการบล็อกไฟล์โดยใช้ตัวกรอง SmartScreen ใน Windows 8 / 8.1 และ 10

ตัวกรอง SmartScreen ของ Microsoft ป้องกันไม่ให้โปรแกรมที่ไม่รู้จักและประสงค์ร้ายทำงานยกเว้นว่าคุณให้สิทธิ์ในการทำเช่นนั้น ตัวกรอง SmartScreen ใช้เพื่อเป็นส่วนหนึ่งของ Internet Explorer 8 และ 9 อย่างไรก็ตามในฐานะที่เป็น Windows 8 ตัวกรอง SmartScreen จะรวมอยู่ในระบบปฏิบัติการ Windows คุณสามารถปลดบล็อกไฟล์ได้จากกล่องโต้ตอบตัวกรอง SmartScreen หากคุณพบไฟล์ดังกล่าวใน Windows 8 / 8.1 หรือ 10.

จำไว้ว่าให้เป็น มาก ระมัดระวังเมื่อเลือกที่จะปลดบล็อคไฟล์และให้แน่ใจว่าคุณรู้ว่าไฟล์นั้นมาจากแหล่งที่เชื่อถือได้.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Also home of the Windows Defender Antivirus, Windows Security includes tools which can block malware before it reaches your data, and this is part of a more aggressive approach that makes prevention a priority on every Windows 10 device.

SmartScreen, for example, is part of this stage, and it warns you whenever files that you want to launch could pose a threat to your device.

Basically, SmartScreen was originally implemented in Microsoft’s browsers to alert whenever users tried to load potentially dangerous websites. In Windows 10, Windows Defender SmartScreen can also let you know when the files that you try to launch could harm the computer.

The warning that Windows Defender SmartScreen displays when potentially dangerous applications are detected is the following:

“Windows protected your PC. Windows Defender SmartScreen prevented an unrecognized app from starting. Running this app might put your PC at risk.”

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Microsoft says it analyzes a bunch of data before deciding whether SmartScreen should block the launch of an application or not:

“Windows Defender SmartScreen uses information from Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, and Windows users around the world as well as anti-virus results, download volumes, download history, URL reputation, and many other criteria to determine the likely risk of downloaded programs.

For example, programs that are downloaded by many users over a long period of time without a history of malware are not likely to be malicious. This warning indicates that caution should be taken before running the downloaded program, especially if the download is not digitally signed.”

Unblocking a file that was previously blocked by Windows Defender SmartScreen and preventing the warning from showing up once again is easier than you think, albeit it’s definitely not the most straightforward.

First and foremost, you must find the location of the executable file on your PC. If you attempt to launch it from a shortcut, just right-click the file > Open file location.

Once you locate it, right-click the file > Properties > General. In the lower part of the screen, there should be a message reading:

This file came from another computer and might be blocked to help protect this computer.
Simply check the box next to this option that reads Unblock and then hit Apply in the same window. At this point, SmartScreen should be disabled for the selected app and the warning should no longer show up on launch.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

What’s very important to know is that despite Windows Defender becoming a more powerful security product, it can very well send false positives too. So not all files marked as dangerous can harm your device.

Microsoft recommends users to first check if the file is digitally signed by a software publisher. To do this, right-click the file > Properties > Digital Signatures.

Then, you need to check the download source. “How were you directed to this download? Was the download link unsolicited, such as from an email, instant message, or social networking post? If the download link was unsolicited – even if it looks like it’s from someone you trust – it is more likely to be malicious,” the software giant says.

And last but not least, if you download a game that’s supposed to be popular, but SmartScreen issues a warning that only shows up for unknown files, this should sound like a huge warning.

Eventually, if you’re not sure if a downloaded file is dangerous or not, it’s better not to run it, or at least, to launch the process in a secure environment like Windows Sandbox.

Open System by clicking the Start button , right-clicking Computer , and then clicking Properties .

Click Advanced system settings . If you’re prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

Under Performance , click Settings .

Click the Data Execution Prevention tab, and then click Turn on DEP for all programs and services except those I select .

To turn off DEP for an individual program, select the check box next to the program that you want to turn off DEP for, and then click OK .

If the program is not in the list, click Add . Browse to the Program Files folder, find the executable file for the program (it will have an .exe file name extension), and then click Open .

Click OK , click OK in the System Properties dialog box if it appears, and then click OK again. You might need to restart your computer for the changes to take effect.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Microsoft’un güvenilir bir dosya olarak tanımadığı bir dosyayı çalıştırdığınızda veya açtığınızda Windows’taki Güvenlik Uyarısı iletişim kutusu görüntülenir. Özellikle Windows’a dosyanın çalıştırılabileceğini veya açılabileceğini söylemediğiniz sürece dosya engellenir.

Bir dosyayı güvenilir bir kaynaktan indirdiyseniz ve sık sık çalıştırırsanız, bu dosyanın engelini kaldırabilirsiniz, böylece her çalıştırdığınızda Güvenlik Uyarısı iletişim kutusunu alamazsınız..

UYARI: Yalnızca güvenilir kaynaklardan olduğunu bildiğiniz dosyaların engelini kaldırdığınızdan emin olun. Bilinmeyen dosyaların engellenmesi, bilgisayarınızın kötü amaçlı yazılım ya da virüslerden etkilenme riskini artırabilir.

Doğrudan Güvenlik Uyarısı İletişim Kutusundaki Bir Dosyanın Engellemesini Kaldırma

Bir dosyanın engelini kaldırmanın en kolay yolu, Güvenlik Uyarısı iletişim kutusunun kendisindeki bir onay kutusudur. Güvenlik Uyarısı göründüğünde, “Bu dosyayı açmadan önce her zaman sor” kutusunun işaretini kaldırmanız yeterlidir. Ardından, dosyayı çalıştırmak veya açmak için “Çalıştır” veya “Aç” ı tıklayın..

NOT: Bu yöntem PC’nizdeki herhangi bir konumdaki bir dosyanın kilidini kaldırır..

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Kullanıcı Hesabı Denetimi iletişim kutusu görüntülenirse, devam etmek için “Evet” i tıklayın..

NOT: Dosya, kullanıcı hesabınızın varsayılan olarak erişim izninin olmadığı bir konumda ise Kullanıcı Hesabı Denetimi iletişim kutusu görüntülenir. Kullanıcı Hesabı Denetimi iletişim kutusunun gösterilip gösterilmeyeceği, Kullanıcı Hesabı Denetimi ayarlarınıza da bağlıdır.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Bu dosyayı bir sonraki açışınızda veya çalıştırdığınızda, Güvenlik Uyarısı iletişim kutusunu görmezsiniz..

Bir Dosyanın Özelliklerini Kullanarak Engellemeyi Kaldırma

Dosyanın özelliklerinde bir ayarı değiştirerek dosyanın engellemesini kaldırabilirsiniz..

NOT: Bu yöntemi yalnızca, dosyanın kullanıcı klasörünüzdeki Masaüstü, İndirilenler veya Belgeler (veya kullanıcı hesabınızın erişim iznine sahip olduğu konumlar) konumlarından birindeyseniz engelini kaldırmak için kullanabilirsiniz. Bu konumlardan birinde değilse, dosyayı önce bu konumlardan birine taşımanız, dosyanın engelini kaldırmanız ve ardından dosyayı tekrar orijinal konumuna getirmeniz gerekir..

Engelini kaldırmak istediğiniz dosyayı sağ tıklayın ve açılır menüden “Özellikler” i seçin..

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Özellikler iletişim kutusu görüntülenir. Windows 10’da, Genel sekmesinde, “Engellemeyi kaldır” onay kutusunu işaretleyin, böylece kutuda bir onay işareti belirir. Windows 7 ve 8 / 8.1’de, Genel sekmesindeki “Engellemeyi kaldır” düğmesini tıklayın. “Tamam” ı tıklayın.

NOT: Bir Engellemeyi kaldır onay kutusu veya düğme görmüyorsanız, dosya zaten engellenmiştir.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Şu andan itibaren bu belirli dosyayı çalıştırdığınızda veya açtığınızda, Güvenlik Uyarısı iletişim kutusu görüntülenmeyecek.

SmartScreen Filtresi Kullanarak Windows 8 / 8.1 ve 10’da Dosyaların engeli kaldırılması

Microsoft’un SmartScreen Filtresi, izin vermediğiniz sürece bilinmeyen ve kötü amaçlı programların çalışmasını önler. SmartScreen Filtresi, Internet Explorer 8 ve 9’un bir parçası olarak kullanılır. Ancak, Windows 8’den itibaren, SmartScreen Filtresi, Windows işletim sistemine entegre edilmiştir. Windows 8 / 8.1 veya 10’da karşılaştıysanız, SmartScreen Filtresi iletişim kutusundan dosyaların engellemesini kaldırabilirsiniz..

Olmayı hatırla çok Bir dosyanın engelini kaldırmayı seçerken dikkatli olun ve dosyanın güvenilir bir kaynaktan geldiğinden emin olun..

If you have been frustrated by the warning message on Windows computers “This file came from another computer and might be blocked to help protect this computer.”, you are not alone. The warning might pop up when you try to open a file that you downloaded from the Internet. It can cause a decent amount of frustration because of the way it is implemented.

If you right-click on a single file and choose Properties, you can see the Security section at the bottom of the window.

“This file came from another computer and might be blocked to help protect this computer.”

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

You can check the box (in Windows 10) or click the Unblock button (in Windows 7/8) to unblock the file. However, if you have multiple files, you cannot select more than one and view the properties to unblock all of the files at once. Instead, you will have to check each file separately and unblock them one at a time. One tip was to always unblock a zip file before extracting it for this reason.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

You can disable the setting through Group Policy by enabling the setting ‘Do not preserve zone information in file attachments’ found under User Configuration -> Administrative Templates -> Windows Components -> Attachment Manager. I don’t recommend this as I prefer to keep security warnings in place. I previously dealt with this several years ago when a script had problems running a blocked file where the solution was to add a UNC path of the file to the Trusted Sites Intranet zone.

Microsoft has a command line utility called ‘streams’ that you can download and tell it to remove the NTFS-attached data stream that identifies a file as downloaded from the Internet. The command for this is streams -s -d [directory path]. Nirsoft also has a utility called Alternate Data Streams with similar functionality.

Rather than having to download a separate executable, there is native PowerShell functionality that will allow us to unblock multiple files at a time. The command is:

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

This command will recurse through a directory and all sub-folders and unblock them. If you have a few files that you trust but were downloaded from the Internet, you can quickly get them all by sticking them in a folder and running that PowerShell command on them to have the stream property removed. It certainly beats the weird issues that can be caused by this setting and weird workarounds to zip the files up, unblock the zip and then extracting the files again.

Sometimes, when you try to install software that Windows 10 cannot verify, you might see this dialog that remind you publisher has been blocked in Windows 10.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

The dialog shows:" This publisher has been blocked from running software on your machine ". That is an embarrassing moment especially in the front of some girls you want to show your intelligence to and in order to save you from that, we offer your guys the way to solve that problem.

We divide the process unblocking a publisher in Windows 10 into 4 steps.

Step 1: Go and find the physical location of the program and find the installation file ( this file usually end with .exe ) of it, then there are two ways to copy path of the installation file. Here offers 2 ways to copy path.

Way 1: Click the address bar to copy the path simply.

Way 2: Right-click your mouse and press Shift button at same time, and it will alert a list of options, choose the Copy as path . All the actions are shown in under picture.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Step 2: Press Win + X at same time, then you will see a menu appearing, select the "Command prompt(Admin)" to open a prompt.

Step 3: When Command prompt(Admin) is appearing, you should right click the mouse, choose Paste in the next coming menu.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Step 4: Then click to finish installation.

Tip: After these 4 steps, you’ll find that you have unblocked a publisher in windows 10 successfully, If not, read how to unblock a publisher in windows 10 again.

Related Articles:

Hot Articles How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning How to Reset Windows 10 Forgotten Password How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning How to Bypass Windows 10 Password Login with/without Password How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning Easy Guide to Reset Windows 10 Admin Password Like an Expert How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning 4 Tips to Change Windows 10 Password without Knowing Current Password How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning Can’t Sign into Microsoft Account Windows 10 | Account Locked/Blocked More + Hot Categories Windows 10 Password Windows 8 Password Windows 7 Password More + Latest Articles How to Calculate Power Consumption of a PC 7 Useful Commands Windows 10 Users Should Know 7 Ways to Access System Restore in Windows 10 How to Create or Delete Partitions Using Command Prompt How to Format Disk Partition Using Command Prompt How to Enable and Use God Mode in Windows 10 More + Hot Products Windows Password Genius iTunes Password Genius Product Key Finder More +

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Het dialoogvenster Beveiligingswaarschuwing in Windows wordt weergegeven wanneer u een bestand uitvoert of opent dat Microsoft niet herkent als een vertrouwd bestand. Het bestand is geblokkeerd, tenzij u specifiek aan Windows laat weten dat het bestand kan worden uitgevoerd of geopend.

Als u een bestand van een vertrouwde bron hebt gedownload en vaak gebruikt, kunt u het bestand deblokkeren zodat u de beveiligingswaarschuwing niet krijgt dialoogvenster telkens wanneer u het uitvoert.

WAARSCHUWING: zorg ervoor dat u alleen bestanden deblokkeert waarvan u weet dat ze van betrouwbare bronnen zijn. Het deblokkeren van onbekende bestanden kan het risico vergroten dat uw computer wordt geïnfecteerd door malware of virussen.

Een bestand direct deblokkeren in het dialoogvenster Beveiligingswaarschuwing

De eenvoudigste manier om een ​​bestand te deblokkeren is een selectievakje in het dialoogvenster Beveiligingswaarschuwing doos zelf. Wanneer de beveiligingswaarschuwing verschijnt, schakelt u het selectievakje “Altijd vragen voordat u dit bestand opent” uit. Klik vervolgens op “Uitvoeren” of “Openen” om het bestand uit te voeren of te openen.

OPMERKING: Met deze methode wordt een bestand op elke locatie op uw pc gedeactiveerd.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Klik op “Ja” in het dialoogvenster Gebruikersaccountbeheer. “Om door te gaan.

OPMERKING: Het dialoogvenster Gebruikersaccountbeheer geeft aan of het bestand zich op een locatie bevindt die standaard niet toegankelijk is voor uw gebruikersaccount. Of het dialoogvenster Gebruikersaccountbeheer wordt weergegeven, hangt ook af van uw instellingen voor Gebruikersaccountbeheer.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

De volgende keer dat u dit specifieke bestand uitvoert of opent, wordt het dialoogvenster Beveiligingswaarschuwing niet weergegeven.

Hoe een blokkering op te heffen Bestand met zijn eigenschappen

U kunt ook een bestand deblokkeren door een instelling in de eigenschappen van het bestand te wijzigen.

OPMERKING: u kunt deze methode alleen gebruiken om een ​​bestand te deblokkeren als het bestand zich op een van de locaties in uw gebruikersmap, zoals Desktop, Downloads of Documenten (of locaties waar uw gebruikersaccount toegang toe heeft). Als het zich niet op een van deze locaties bevindt, moet u het bestand eerst naar een van deze locaties verplaatsen, het bestand deblokkeren en het bestand vervolgens terugzetten naar de oorspronkelijke locatie.

Klik met de rechtermuisknop op het bestand dat u wilt deblokkeren en selecteer “Eigenschappen” in het pop-upmenu.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Het dialoogvenster Eigenschappen wordt weergegeven. Schakel in Windows 10 het selectievakje “Deblokkeren” in op het tabblad Algemeen, zodat er een vinkje in het vakje staat. Klik in Windows 7 en 8 / 8.1 op de knop “Deblokkeren” op het tabblad Algemeen. Klik op “OK”.

OPMERKING: als u het selectievakje Niet blokkeren niet ziet, is het bestand al geblokkeerd.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Wanneer u dit specifieke bestand voortaan uitvoert of opent, wordt het dialoogvenster Beveiligingswaarschuwing niet weergegeven weergeven.

Bestanden machtigen met behulp van het SmartScreen-filter in Windows 8 / 8.1 en 10

GERELATEERD: Hoe het SmartScreen-filter werkt in Windows 8 en 10

Het SmartScreen-filter van Microsoft voorkomt onbekende en schadelijke programma’s van rennen, tenzij je daar toestemming voor geeft. Het SmartScreen-filter dat wordt gebruikt om deel uit te maken van Internet Explorer 8 en 9. Vanaf Windows 8 is het SmartScreen-filter echter geïntegreerd in het Windows-besturingssysteem. U kunt de blokkering van bestanden uit het dialoogvenster SmartScreen-filter ongedaan maken, als u deze tegenkomt in Windows 8 / 8.1 of 10.

Wees voorzichtig erg wanneer u besluit het bestand te deblokkeren en zorg ervoor dat u de bestand is afkomstig van een vertrouwde bron.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Ik heb nu ongeveer een jaar een Netgear draadloze router en het was redelijk goed tot een paar weken geleden mijn draadloze verbinding plotseling bleef hangen of ik geen verbinding kon maken tenzij ik de router herstartte! Het was koninklijke pijn, maar omdat ik lui ben, kwam ik er niet aan toe om het eerder te repareren

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Bereid u voor op een andere formaatoorlog! Het volgende grote ding in TV is HDR. Maar “HDR” is niet slechts een eenvoudige functie: er zijn twee verschillende, incompatibele HDR-standaarden. Dat betekent dat niet alle HDR-video’s en -games met elke tv werken. Wat is HDR? GERELATEERD: Moet u een “Ultra HD” 4K-tv kopen?

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Windowsin suojausvaroitus -valintaikkuna avautuu, kun suoritat tai avaat tiedoston, jota Microsoft ei tunnista luotettavana tiedostona. Tiedosto on estetty, ellei nimenomaisesti sanota Windowsille, että tiedostoa voidaan käyttää tai avata.

Jos olet ladannut tiedoston luotettavasta lähteestä ja suoritat sen usein, voit poistaa sen tiedoston, jotta et saa Security Warning -valintaikkunaa aina, kun suoritat sen.

VAROITUS: Varmista, että vain tunnistat tiedostot ovat luotettavista lähteistä. Tuntemattomien tiedostojen poistaminen voi lisätä riskiä, ​​että tietokoneesi voi saada haittaohjelmia tai viruksia.

Tiedoston poistaminen käytöstä suoraan Security Warning -valintaikkunasta

Helpoin tapa vapauttaa tiedosto on suojausvaroituksen valintaikkunan valintaruutu. Kun suojausvaroitus tulee näkyviin, poista valinta "Kysy aina ennen tämän tiedoston avaamista" -ruutuun. Napsauta sitten "Suorita" tai "Avaa" avataksesi tai avaat tiedoston.

HUOMAUTUS: Tämä menetelmä estää tiedoston missä tahansa tietokoneessa.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Jos Käyttäjätilien valvonta -valintaikkuna tulee näkyviin, jatka valitsemalla Kyllä.

HUOMAUTUS: Käyttäjätilien valvonta -valintaikkuna tulee näyttöön, jos tiedosto on sijainnissa, jossa käyttäjätunnuksella ei ole käyttöoikeutta oletuksena. Käyttäjätilien valvonnan valintaikkunan näyttäminen riippuu myös Käyttäjätilien valvonnan asetuksista.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Seuraavan kerran, kun suoritat tai avaat tämän tiedoston, et näe suojausvaroituksen valintaikkunaa.

Kuinka vapauttaa tiedoston sen ominaisuuksien avulla

Voit myös vapauttaa tiedoston muuttamalla asetusta tiedoston ominaisuuksiin.

HUOMAUTUS: Tämän menetelmän avulla voit vapauttaa tiedoston vain, jos tiedosto on jonkin käyttäjän kansion paikoista, kuten työpöydän, latausten tai asiakirjojen (tai sijainnit, joilla käyttäjätunnuksella on käyttöoikeus). Jos se ei ole yhdellä näistä sijainneista, sinun on ensin siirrettävä tiedosto johonkin näistä sijainneista, poista se käytöstä ja siirrä tiedosto takaisin alkuperäiseen sijaintiinsa.

Napsauta hiiren kakkospainikkeella tiedostoa, jonka haluat poistaa ja valitse ponnahdusvalikosta "Ominaisuudet".

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Ominaisuudet-valintaikkuna avautuu. Jos käytössä on Windows 10, valitse Yleiset-välilehdellä Poista lukitus -valintaruutu, jotta laatikossa on valintamerkki. Napsauta Windows 7: ssä ja 8 / 8.1: ssa Yleiset-välilehden "Unblock" -painiketta. Napsauta "OK".

HUOMAUTUS: Jos et näe Poista lukitus -valintaruutu tai -painiketta, tiedosto on jo estetty.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Kun suoritat tai avaat tämän tiedoston nyt, Security Warning -valintaikkuna ei tule näkyviin.

Tiedostojen lukituksen poistaminen SmartScreen-suodattimen avulla Windows 8 / 8.1 ja 10: ssa

Microsoftin SmartScreen-suodatin estää tuntemattomat ja haittaohjelmat toimimasta, ellet anna lupaa tehdä niin. SmartScreen-suodatin, jota käytetään Internet Explorer 8: n ja 9: n osaan. Windows 8: n mukaan SmartScreen-suodatin on kuitenkin integroitu Windows-käyttöjärjestelmään. Voit avata tiedostot SmartScreen Filter -valintaikkunasta, jos kohtaat sen Windows 8 / 8.1 tai 10: ssa.

Muista olla erittäinvaroen, kun valitset tiedoston eston ja varmista, että tiedät, että tiedosto tulee luotettavasta lähteestä.

when attempting to run this ps1 file inside powershell ise then I got the following the popup message.

my question is : how can I get rid of "The Publisher could not be verified. Are you sure you want to run this software"?

2 Answers 2

This is due to a setting in Windows that flags .exe files as ‘high-risk’. You can unblock them using the Unblock-File command before running the executable.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

1 – Running external executables is a well-documented use case directly from Microsoft.

2 – You must make sure the exe is not marked as from an untrusted source, meaning, you downloaded this from the internet and it is marked with the internet alternate data stream (ADS). You need to remove this stuff on internet-based downloads, using the cmdlet.

. or open Windows Explorer, right-click, select properties, unblock. See the help files for details and examples.

Not the answer you're looking for? Browse other questions tagged powershell or ask your own question.

Related

Hot Network Questions

To subscribe to this RSS feed, copy and paste this URL into your RSS reader.

Site design / logo © 2022 Stack Exchange Inc; user contributions licensed under cc by-sa. rev 2022.4.21.42004

By clicking “Accept all cookies”, you agree Stack Exchange can store cookies on your device and disclose information in accordance with our Cookie Policy.

Every time you download an executable file from the Internet and try to run it, Windows 10 shows you a security warning. The message box says “The publisher couldn’t be verified. Are you sure you want to run this software?“. In case you are not happy seeing this message every time, here is how to disable it.

Here is how the security prompt looks in Windows 10:

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

To disable “The publisher couldn’t be verified” message in Windows 10, you need to apply a simple registry tweak:

  1. Open Registry Editor.
  2. Go to the following Registry key:

Tip: You can access any desired Registry key with one click.
If you do not have such a key, then just create it.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

If you already have this value, then modify it as mentioned above. See the following screenshot:

You are done. I made ready-to-use Registry files which you can apply and avoid editing Registry manually. You can download it here:

That’s it. This trick works in Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8 and Windows 7. If you have any questions, feel free to leave a comment.

Winaero greatly relies on your support. You can help the site keep bringing you interesting and useful content and software by using these options:

If you like this article, please share it using the buttons below. It won’t take a lot from you, but it will help us grow. Thanks for your support!

Author: Sergey Tkachenko

Sergey Tkachenko is a software developer who started Winaero back in 2011. On this blog, Sergey is writing about everything connected to Microsoft, Windows and popular software. Follow him on Telegram, Twitter, and YouTube. View all posts by Sergey Tkachenko

4 thoughts on “How to disable the “Publisher couldn’t be verified” message in Windows 10”

I get a error message that windows cant verify the publisher. plz help me

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

La finestra di dialogo Avviso di sicurezza in Windows viene visualizzata quando si esegue o si apre un file che Microsoft non riconosce come un file attendibile. Il file è bloccato a meno che tu non specifichi specificatamente a Windows che il file può essere eseguito o aperto.

Se hai scaricato un file da un’origine attendibile e lo esegui spesso, puoi sbloccare quel file in modo da non ricevere l’Avviso di sicurezza finestra di dialogo ogni volta che lo esegui.

ATTENZIONE: assicurati di sbloccare solo i file che conosci provenire da fonti attendibili. Lo sblocco di file sconosciuti può aumentare il rischio che il tuo computer venga infettato da malware o virus.

Come sbloccare un file direttamente nella finestra di dialogo Avviso di sicurezza

Il modo più semplice per sbloccare un file è una casella di controllo nella finestra di dialogo Avviso di sicurezza scatola stessa. Quando appare l’avviso di sicurezza, deseleziona la casella “Chiedi sempre prima di aprire questo file”. Quindi, fai clic su “Esegui” o “Apri” per avviare o aprire il file.

NOTA: questo metodo sbloccherà un file in qualsiasi posizione sul PC.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Se viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Controllo account utente, fai clic su “Sì”. “Per continuare.

NOTA: la finestra di dialogo Controllo account utente viene visualizzata se il file si trova in una posizione in cui l’account utente non dispone dell’autorizzazione per l’accesso per impostazione predefinita. La visualizzazione o meno della finestra di dialogo Controllo account utente dipende anche dalle impostazioni del Controllo account utente.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Al successivo avvio o apertura di questo file specifico, non verrà visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Avviso di sicurezza.

Come sbloccare un File che utilizza le sue proprietà

Puoi anche sbloccare un file modificando un’impostazione nelle proprietà del file.

NOTA: puoi utilizzare questo metodo solo per sbloccare un file se il file si trova in una delle posizioni nel tuo cartella utente, come Desktop, Download o Documenti (o posizioni in cui il tuo account utente ha il permesso di accedere). Se non si trova in una di queste posizioni, devi prima spostare il file in una di queste posizioni, sbloccare il file, quindi riportare il file nella posizione originale.

Fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sul file che si desidera sbloccare e selezionare “Proprietà” dal menu popup.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Proprietà. In Windows 10, nella scheda Generale, seleziona la casella di controllo “Sblocca” in modo che nella casella vi sia un segno di spunta. In Windows 7 e 8 / 8.1, fare clic sul pulsante “Sblocca” nella scheda Generale. Fare clic su “OK”.

NOTA: se non viene visualizzata alcuna casella o pulsante Unblock, il file è già sbloccato.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Quando si esegue o si apre questo file specifico da ora in poi, la finestra di dialogo Avviso di sicurezza non display.

Come sbloccare i file utilizzando il filtro SmartScreen in Windows 8 / 8.1 e 10

CORRELATI: Funzionamento del filtro SmartScreen in Windows 8 e 10

Il filtro SmartScreen di Microsoft impedisce l’accesso a programmi sconosciuti e dannosi in esecuzione, a meno che tu non dia il permesso di farlo. Il filtro SmartScreen utilizzato per parte di Internet Explorer 8 e 9. Tuttavia, a partire da Windows 8, il filtro SmartScreen è integrato nel sistema operativo Windows. Puoi sbloccare i file dalla finestra di dialogo Filtro SmartScreen, se la incontri in Windows 8 / 8.1 o 10.

Ricorda di essere molto attento quando scegli di sbloccare un file e assicurati di conoscere il file proviene da una fonte attendibile.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Ho una domanda: perché hai installato così tante app su Android TV? Sai, così tutte quelle cose che hai installato “solo per provare”, quindi non sono mai stato usato di nuovo? Sì, quella roba. È ora che tu ripulisca quel tuo piccolo set-top box, in questo modo puoi creare spazio per nuove cose che userai solo una volta.

How to unblock a file from windows’ “publisher could not be verified” warning

Windows 7, Windows 8, 8.1, 10 e Vista includono una funzionalità integrata in Gestione disco per restringere ed espandere le partizioni. Non sono necessarie altre utilità di terze parti! Vale la pena notare che molte utilità di terze parti saranno più ricche di funzionalità, ma è possibile eseguire le operazioni di base in Windows senza aggiungere nulla di nuovo.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Craig Lloyd
How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneCraig Lloyd
Writer

Craig Lloyd is a smarthome expert with nearly ten years of professional writing experience. His work has been published by iFixit, Lifehacker, Digital Trends, Slashgear, and GottaBeMobile. Read more.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

The Kwikset Kevo smart lock comes with a clever design that lets you simply touch the lock to unlock it—but that’s not the only feature that makes it so great. Here’s how to get the most out of our Kevo smart lock.

Use Your Previous Key with the Kevo

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Buying a new lock requires using new keys. You could hire a locksmith to change the lock pin pattern of the deadbolt to match your old keys, but most of the time it’s not worth the trouble.

However, the Kevo comes with Kwikset’s SmartKey technology, which allows you to use your old Kwikset key to unlock the Kevo—no locksmith necessary. It’s really easy to do and only takes about 30 seconds thanks to a special little tool that comes with the lock. Check out our guide to see how to program it. (If your house previously used Schlage locks, then you won’t be able to use that key to unlock the Kevo—you’ll need a new Kwikset key insetad).

Get a Kevo Fob So You Don’t Have to Use Your Phone

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

The Kevo normally relies on location and Bluetooth data from your phone in order to determine if it’s actually you that’s trying to unlock your door. However, that means you have to leave the app running in the background at all times. If that doesn’t sound appealing to you, you can use a Kevo Fob instead of the lock relying on your phone.

The Kevo Fob acts as a direct replacement for your phone. If you touch the lock with the fob in your pocket, it will open. So if you don’t want the app running in the background all the time or you usually have the Bluetooth off, you can use the fob instead. Here’s how to set it up.

Create “eKeys” for Family Members

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

One drawback of the Kevo (as opposed to other smart locks with keypads) is that you just can’t share a simple keycode with other people if you want to give them access to your house. Instead, you have to give them their own “eKey” to use on their phone, but it’s easy to set up.

Just open up the Kevo app and send an eKey to a contact in your phone (or send them an email if they’re not in your contacts). From there, their phone will now act as a digital key to your Kevo lock, and you can even restrict access at certain times or only give them temporary access if they’re a guest.

Control Your Kevo Remotely (or With Alexa) with Kevo Plus

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

By itself, the Kevo only lets you lock and unlock your door from your phone if you’re nearby and within Bluetooth distance. You can control the lock from afar, but you need Kevo Plus to make that happen.

Kevo Plus costs a one-time fee of $99 and comes with an internet gateway device that you plug into your router. This connects your Kevo to the internet, which then allows you to access your lock even when you aren’t home. Kevo Plus also allows you to integrate Kevo with other smarthome devices, like the Amazon Echo, to control your lock.

Enable Auto-Lock If You’re a Forgetful Person

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

I can’t tell you how many times I’ve forgotten to lock the door behind me. Luckily, it hasn’t cost me, but others may not be so lucky. Kevo has an auto-lock feature that automatically locks your door 30 seconds after you unlock it, that way your forgetfulness won’t come around and bite you in the rear end later in.

To enable it, all you have to do is take the interior cover off, locate the #4 switch, and turn it on. After that, your Kevo will automatically lock itself after 30 seconds, whether the door is open or closed.

Lock the Door without Your Phone

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

When locking your door, the Kevo still relies on your phone. So if you don’t have your phone (or fob) with you, you can’t lock your door by touch. However, you can enable a feature called Triple Touch Lock that allows you to lock your Kevo without needing your phone.

You just take off the interior cover on the lock and turn on switch #2. From there, Triple Touch Lock will be enabled. When you leave, just tap on the lock three consecutive times to lock the door.

Hide a Spare Key, Just in Case

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Even though you don’t need a key to lock and unlock your Kevo, it’s still a good idea to have a spare key handy, just in case the batteries run out or some other mechanical failure.

You don’t have to keep this spare key on your person at all times, although it’s probably not that big of a deal, since you carry your car keys with you anyway. However, you could just hide the key somewhere outside your house if you really don’t want to carry it around with you.

  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone Craig Lloyd
Craig Lloyd is a smarthome expert with nearly ten years of professional writing experience. His work has been published by iFixit, Lifehacker, Digital Trends, Slashgear, and GottaBeMobile.
Read Full Bio »

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Le Kwikset Kevo repose principalement sur votre smartphone pour le verrouillage et le déverrouillage, mais que se passe-t-il si votre téléphone est mort ou si vous avez tout simplement oublié de l'emporter avec vous lorsque vous avez quitté la maison? Vous n’avez pas tout à fait de la chance et avec quelques mesures préventives, vous pouvez être tranquille, sachant que vous pouvez toujours déverrouiller votre porte, même si votre téléphone n’est pas en mesure de vous aider.

Kevo fait largement appel à la commodité de verrouiller et de déverrouiller votre porte sans avoir besoin de clé physique. Au lieu de cela, il utilise une combinaison des technologies Bluetooth, Wi-Fi et GPS de votre téléphone pour détecter si vous êtes arrivé à la maison et si vous vous trouvez près de la porte d'entrée. Si c'est le cas, vous pouvez appuyer sur le verrou pour le déverrouiller rapidement. Sinon, le Kevo reste déverrouillable.

Toutefois, si la batterie de votre téléphone est morte, si vous avez oublié votre téléphone ou si vous l'avez perdu, vous vous demandez peut-être comment vous allez pouvoir rentrer chez vous. Il y a quelques choses que vous pouvez faire.

Utilisez vos clés réelles (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Le Kwikset Kevo peut toujours fonctionner comme n'importe quel pêne dormant traditionnel: il dispose d’une serrure traditionnelle qui se déverrouille et se verrouille avec une clé normale (fournie avec le Kevo), en contournant complètement les facultés de la serrure. Donc non, vous n'êtes pas complètement foutu si votre téléphone meurt ou si vous ne l'avez pas.

Bien grande; maintenant, vous devez toujours avoir avec vous une clé de secours au cas où. Mais la vérité est que vous portez probablement déjà déjà un porte-clés rempli de clés, surtout si vous avez une voiture. Donc, le problème de devoir ajouter une autre clé à votre configuration n’est probablement pas si grave.

Cependant, si vous n’avez pas de porte-clés sur vous, il serait toujours bon d’avoir accès à une clé de rechange, de préférence en la cachant quelque part à l’extérieur de votre maison.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Maintenant, ne faites pas ce qui est évident et cachez votre clé de rechange sous votre paillasson ou dans l’appareil d’éclairage de votre porche, car ce sont des endroits évidents où les voleurs auraient l'air. Au lieu de cela, cachez-le quelque part qui ne se trouve pas près de votre porte, comme quelque part sur le côté de votre maison. À partir de là, cachez-vous dans un endroit auquel personne ne penserait, comme à l’intérieur de votre gril ou même quelque part sous votre gros appareil de climatisation.

Récupérer cette clé de secours peut s’avérer pénible à l’arrière si vous vous enfermez à l’extérieur de votre maison… mais au moins, vous pourrez rentrer chez vous.

Emprunter le téléphone d’un ami

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Si vous n’avez pas accès à une clé de secours, ni à votre téléphone, il reste encore de l’espoir. En dernier recours, vous pouvez demander à un ami si vous pouvez emprunter son téléphone, télécharger l'application Kevo, vous connecter avec vos identifiants Kevo, puis utiliser son téléphone pour déverrouiller votre porte. Étant donné que vos eKeys numériques sont verrouillés sur votre compte Kevo plutôt que sur votre téléphone, cela fonctionnera.

Bien sûr, il s’agit là d’un dernier effort, et j’imagine qu’un ami ne serait pas particulièrement ravi que vous téléchargiez une application sur son téléphone. J'espère que c'est un bon ami et qu'ils vous aideront quand même.

Verrouiller votre porte sans votre téléphone

Pour ce qui est de verrouiller votre porte à la sortie de la maison, tout ce que vous avez à faire est de taper sur le Kevo pour le verrouiller, tant que vous avez votre téléphone sur vous. Si le téléphone ne se verrouille pas, sachez que vous avez probablement oublié votre téléphone et que vous pouvez le récupérer. Et j'espère que vous êtes assez malin pour ne pas quitter la maison avec un téléphone sans batterie.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Cependant, dans le cas où vous n'avez pas votre téléphone, ou s'il est mort et que vous devez verrouiller la porte, vous pouvez tirer parti de la fonction Triple Touch Lock, une fonctionnalité du Kevo qui vous permet de verrouiller votre porte. sans que votre téléphone soit présent.

Pour ce faire, vous devrez enlever le capot intérieur de la serrure et localiser le petit tableau de contrôle (comme illustré ci-dessus). À partir de là, activez le commutateur n ° 2 en prenant un stylo et en appuyant sur le petit commutateur.

À partir de là, le verrouillage triple tactile sera activé et il vous suffira de taper sur la serrure trois fois de suite pour verrouiller votre porte.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Das Kwikset Kevo ist beim Sperren und Entsperren hauptsächlich auf Ihr Smartphone angewiesen. Was wäre, wenn Ihr Handy gestorben wäre oder Sie vergessen hätten, es mitzunehmen, als Sie das Haus verlassen haben? Sie haben kein Glück, und mit ein paar vorbeugenden Maßnahmen können Sie sich darauf verlassen, dass Sie Ihre Tür auch dann aufschließen können, wenn Ihr Telefon nicht helfen kann.

Kevo verlässt sich stark auf die Bequemlichkeit, Ihre Tür ohne physischen Schlüssel zu verriegeln und zu entriegeln. Stattdessen verwendet es eine Kombination aus Bluetooth, Wi-Fi und GPS Ihres Telefons, um zu erkennen, ob Sie zu Hause angekommen sind und sich in der Nähe der Haustür befinden. In diesem Fall können Sie auf das Schloss tippen, um es schnell zu entsperren. Wenn nicht, bleibt der Kevo weiterhin freischaltbar.

Wenn Ihr Telefonakku jedoch nachlässt, Sie Ihr Telefon vergessen haben oder es verloren haben, fragen Sie sich vielleicht, wie Sie in Ihr eigenes Haus kommen. Es gibt ein paar Dinge, die Sie tun können.

Verwenden Sie Ihre tatsächlichen Schlüssel (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Der Kwikset Kevo kann immer noch wie ein herkömmlicher Riegel funktionieren – er verfügt über ein traditionelles Schloss, das mit einem normalen Schlüssel (der im Lieferumfang des Kevo enthalten ist) entriegelt und gesperrt wird, wodurch die intelligenten Fähigkeiten des Schlosses vollständig umgangen werden. Nein, Sie sind nicht völlig vermasselt, wenn Ihr Telefon stirbt oder Sie es nicht bei sich haben.

Gut, ok; jetzt müssen Sie immer einen Ersatzschlüssel für alle Fälle mit sich führen. Die Wahrheit ist jedoch, dass Sie wahrscheinlich sowieso schon einen Schlüsselbund voller Schlüssel bei sich haben, besonders wenn Sie ein Auto haben. Das Problem, einen weiteren Schlüssel zu Ihrem Setup hinzufügen zu müssen, ist wahrscheinlich keine große Sache.

Wenn Sie jedoch keinen Schlüsselbund bei sich tragen, ist es dennoch eine gute Idee, Zugriff auf einen Ersatzschlüssel zu haben, vorzugsweise indem Sie ihn außerhalb Ihres Hauses verstecken.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Tun Sie jetzt nicht das Offensichtliche und verstecken Sie Ihren Ersatzschlüssel unter Ihrer Fußmatte oder in Ihrer Veranda-Leuchte, da dies offensichtliche Stellen sind, an denen Diebe aussehen würden. Verstecken Sie es stattdessen an einem Ort, der sich nicht in der Nähe Ihrer Haustür befindet, wie irgendwo an der Seite Ihres Hauses. Verstecken Sie sich von dort aus an einem Ort, an den niemand denken möchte, etwa innerhalb Ihres Grills oder sogar irgendwo unter Ihrer großen Klimaanlage.

Das Abholen dieses Ersatzschlüssels kann im hinteren Bereich eine Wende sein, wenn Sie sich aus Ihrem Haus sperren… aber Sie können zumindest in Ihr Haus zurückkehren.

Leihen Sie sich das Telefon eines Freundes

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Wenn Sie weder auf einen Ersatzschlüssel noch auf Ihr Telefon zugreifen können, besteht noch Hoffnung. Als letzten Ausweg können Sie einen Freund fragen, ob Sie ihr Telefon ausleihen können, die Kevo-App herunterladen, sich mit Ihren Kevo-Anmeldeinformationen anmelden und dann die Tür mit dem Telefon aufschließen können. Da Ihre digitalen eKeys nicht an Ihr Telefon, sondern an Ihr Kevo-Konto gebunden sind, funktioniert dies.

Natürlich ist dies eine letzte Anstrengung, und ich schätze, ein Freund wäre nicht besonders begeistert, wenn Sie eine App auf ihr Telefon herunterladen. Hoffentlich ist es ein guter Freund und sie werden dir trotzdem helfen.

Verriegeln Ihrer Tür ohne Telefon

Um Ihre Tür auf dem Weg aus dem Haus abzuschließen, müssen Sie nur auf den Kevo tippen, um ihn zu sperren, solange Sie Ihr Telefon bei sich haben. Wenn es also nicht gesperrt ist, wissen Sie, dass Sie Ihr Telefon wahrscheinlich vergessen haben und es wieder ausführen können. Und hoffentlich sind Sie klug genug, um das Haus nicht mit einem Telefon zu verlassen, in dem der Akku leer ist.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Falls Sie Ihr Telefon jedoch nicht bei sich haben oder wenn es tot ist und Sie die Tür verriegeln müssen, können Sie das Triple Touch Lock nutzen, eine Funktion des Kevo, mit der Sie Ihre Tür verriegeln können ohne dass Ihr Telefon anwesend ist.

Dazu müssen Sie die innere Abdeckung des Schlosses entfernen und die kleine Schalttafel (wie oben abgebildet) ausfindig machen. Schalten Sie von dort den Schalter Nr. 2 ein, indem Sie einen Stift nehmen und den kleinen Schalter nach oben drücken.

Von dort wird die Dreifach-Tastensperre aktiviert und Sie müssen nur dreimal hintereinander auf das Schloss tippen, um die Tür zu verriegeln.

Craig Lloyd
How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneCraig Lloyd
Writer

Craig Lloyd is a smarthome expert with nearly ten years of professional writing experience. His work has been published by iFixit, Lifehacker, Digital Trends, Slashgear, and GottaBeMobile. Read more.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

The Kwikset Kevo allows you to lock and unlock your door without the need for actual keys. However, what if you want others to have access to your house, especially family members? Here’s how to give “eKeys” to other household members, as well as guests.

With the Kevo app, you can give unlimited access to family members that live under the same roof as you or provide a temporary 24-hour pass to a guest who might be staying the night. You can also give a key to someone like a contractor and set a schedule for when they can and can’t have access to your house.

Unfortunately, yes; the person you send an eKey to will need to download the Kevo app and create an account. There’s definitely some friction there, especially for those reluctant to download yet another app to their phone. However, the convenience of the Kevo lock itself makes it worth it.

To get started, open up the Kevo app and select your lock if it isn’t already.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

From there, tap on the small key arrow button in the top-right corner of the screen.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

You can either select from contacts that are on your phone, or enter in the email for the person you want to send the eKey to by tapping on the “Email” tab at the top.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Enter in their email and tap “Continue”.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Next, select either “Anytime”, “Scheduled”, or Guest”. Here’s a quick rundown of what each of these options mean:

  • Anytime: This gives unrestricted access to the user 24/7.
  • Scheduled: This allows you to control which days and times that the user can and can’t unlock your door.
  • Guest: This is similar to “Anytime”, but it only lasts for 24 hours.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

If you select “Anytime”, you can also choose whether or not to make that user an admin, which will also give them the ability to create and manage eKeys.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

After that, type in a short message if you’d like and then hit “Send eKey”.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Hit “OK” when the confirmation pop up appears.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

If you go to the eKeys screen (the keys tab at the bottom), you’ll see that the sent eKey is currently pending until that user accepts the eKey on their phone.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

When the user downloads the Kevo app and signs up for an account, they’ll see your eKey invite in the app.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Tapping on it will allow them to accept or reject your eKey.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Once they accept, you’ll receive a notification (if you have notifications enabled). Keep in mind that they’ll need to have Bluetooth on and at least have a data connection (if not Wi-Fi), as well as the Kevo app running in the background in order for the touch-to-open functionality to work. The app doesn’t have to be open, but it will need to remain in the app switcher for them to open the door.

  • › How to Get the Most Out of Your Kwikset Kevo Smart Lock
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone Craig Lloyd
Craig Lloyd is a smarthome expert with nearly ten years of professional writing experience. His work has been published by iFixit, Lifehacker, Digital Trends, Slashgear, and GottaBeMobile.
Read Full Bio »

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Το Kwikset Kevo εξαρτάται κυρίως από το smartphone σας για το κλείδωμα και το ξεκλείδωμα, αλλά τι θα συμβεί αν το τηλέφωνό σας πέθανε ή μόλις ξεχάσατε να το φέρετε μαζί σας όταν φύγετε από το σπίτι; Δεν είστε εντελώς τυχεροί και με μερικά προληπτικά μέτρα μπορείτε να ξεκουραστείτε εύκολα γνωρίζοντας ότι μπορείτε ακόμη να ξεκλειδώσετε την πόρτα σας ακόμα και αν το τηλέφωνό σας δεν είναι σε θέση να σας βοηθήσει.

Το Kevo εξαρτάται σε μεγάλο βαθμό από την ευκολία κλειδώματος και ξεκλειδώματος της πόρτας σας χωρίς να χρειάζεστε ένα φυσικό κλειδί. Αντ 'αυτού, χρησιμοποιεί ένα συνδυασμό Bluetooth, Wi-Fi και GPS του τηλεφώνου σας για να ανιχνεύσει εάν έχετε φτάσει στο σπίτι και είστε κοντά στην μπροστινή πόρτα. Αν ναι, μπορείτε να πατήσετε στο κλείδωμα για να το ξεκλειδώσετε γρήγορα. Εάν όχι, τότε το Kevo παραμένει ανοικτό.

Ωστόσο, εάν η μπαταρία του τηλεφώνου σας πέθανε, ξεχάσατε το τηλέφωνό σας ή το χάσατε, ίσως να αναρωτιέστε πόσο καλός πρόκειται να φτάσετε στο σπίτι σας. Υπάρχουν μερικά πράγματα που μπορείτε να κάνετε.

Χρησιμοποιήστε τα πραγματικά κλειδιά σας (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Το Kwikset Kevo μπορεί ακόμα να λειτουργήσει όπως οποιοδήποτε παραδοσιακό βαλβίδα – θα έχει μια παραδοσιακή κλειδαριά που ξεκλειδώνει και κλειδώνει με ένα κανονικό κλειδί (το οποίο περιλαμβάνεται στο Kevo), παρακάμπτοντας τελείως τις μυρωδιές της κλειδαριάς. Έτσι, όχι, δεν είστε βιδωμένοι εντελώς αν το τηλέφωνο σας πεθάνει ή δεν το έχετε μαζί σας.

Λοιπόν, υπέροχα. τώρα πρέπει να έχετε μαζί σας ένα εφεδρικό κλειδί όλη την ώρα για κάθε περίπτωση. Αλλά η αλήθεια είναι ότι πιθανότατα έχετε ήδη ένα κλειδί με πλήκτρα γεμάτα κλειδιά μαζί σας, ειδικά αν έχετε αυτοκίνητο. Έτσι, ο κόπος να χρειάζεται να προσθέσετε ένα άλλο κλειδί στην εγκατάσταση σας πιθανώς δεν είναι μεγάλη υπόθεση.

Ωστόσο, αν δεν έχετε μαζί σας ένα μπρελόκ, θα ήταν ακόμα καλή ιδέα να έχετε πρόσβαση σε ένα κλειδί ανταλλακτικών, κατά προτίμηση με το να το κρύβετε κάπου έξω από το σπίτι σας.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Τώρα, μην κάνετε το προφανές και αποκρύψτε το κλειδί σας κάτω από το θόρυβο σας ή στο φωτιστικό της βεράντας σας, καθώς αυτές είναι προφανείς θέσεις όπου θα φαίνεται κλέφτες. Αντ 'αυτού, κρύψτε το κάπου που δεν είναι κοντά στην πόρτα σας, όπως κάπου στην πλευρά του σπιτιού σας. Από εκεί, κρύψτε σε μια τοποθεσία που κανείς δεν θα σκεφτόταν να κοιτάξει, όπως στο εσωτερικό της σχάρας σας ή ακόμα και κάπου κάτω από τη μεγάλη μονάδα κλιματισμού.

Αναζητώντας ότι το ανταλλακτικό κλειδί μπορεί να είναι πόνου στο πίσω μέρος, αν κλείσετε τον εαυτό σας έξω από το σπίτι σας . αλλά τουλάχιστον θα είστε σε θέση να επιστρέψετε στο σπίτι σας.

Δανειίστε το τηλέφωνο ενός φίλου

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Εάν δεν έχετε πρόσβαση σε εφεδρικό κλειδί, ούτε στο τηλέφωνό σας, εξακολουθεί να υπάρχει κάποια ελπίδα. Ως έσχατη λύση, μπορείτε να ζητήσετε από έναν φίλο εάν μπορείτε να δανειστείτε το τηλέφωνό σας, να κατεβάσετε την εφαρμογή Kevo, να συνδεθείτε με τα διαπιστευτήριά σας Kevo και στη συνέχεια να χρησιμοποιήσετε το τηλέφωνό σας για να ξεκλειδώσετε την πόρτα σας. Δεδομένου ότι τα ψηφιακά eKeys σας είναι κλειδωμένα στο λογαριασμό σας Kevo και όχι στο τηλέφωνό σας, αυτό θα λειτουργήσει.

Φυσικά, αυτό είναι μια τελευταία προσπάθεια χαντάκι, και υποθέτω ότι ένας φίλος δεν θα είναι πολύ ιδιαίτερα ενθουσιασμένος για σας κατεβάζοντας μια εφαρμογή στο τηλέφωνό τους. Ας ελπίσουμε ότι είναι ένας καλός φίλος και θα σας βοηθήσουν ούτως ή άλλως.

Κλείδωμα της πόρτας σας χωρίς το τηλέφωνό σας

Όσο για το κλείδωμα της πόρτας σας στην έξοδο από το σπίτι, το μόνο που έχετε να κάνετε είναι να αγγίξετε το Kevo για να το κλειδώσετε, όσο έχετε το τηλέφωνό σας στο πρόσωπό σας. Έτσι, αν δεν κλειδώσει, τότε ξέρετε ότι πιθανώς ξέχασε το τηλέφωνό σας και μπορεί να τρέξει πίσω για να το πάρει. Και ελπίζω ότι είστε αρκετά έξυπνοι ώστε να μην αφήσετε το σπίτι με ένα τηλέφωνο που έχει μια νεκρή μπαταρία.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Ωστόσο, σε περίπτωση που δεν έχετε το τηλέφωνό σας σε σας ή είναι νεκρό και πρέπει να κλειδώσετε την πόρτα, μπορείτε να επωφεληθείτε από το Triple Touch Lock, το οποίο είναι ένα χαρακτηριστικό στο Kevo που σας επιτρέπει να κλειδώσετε την πόρτα σας χωρίς να υπάρχει το τηλέφωνό σας.

Για να γίνει αυτό, θα πρέπει να αφαιρέσετε το εσωτερικό κάλυμμα της κλειδαριάς και να εντοπίσετε τη μικρή πλακέτα διακόπτη (όπως απεικονίζεται παραπάνω). Από εκεί, ενεργοποιήστε το διακόπτη # 2, τραβώντας ένα στυλό και πιέζοντας προς τα πάνω τον μικροδιακόπτη.

Από εκεί, το Triple Touch Lock θα ενεργοποιηθεί και το μόνο που έχετε να κάνετε είναι να πατήσετε το κλείδωμα τρεις συνεχόμενες φορές για να κλειδώσετε την πόρτα σας.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

The Kwikset Kevo smart lock comes with a clever design that lets you simply touch the lock to unlock it—but that’s not the only feature that makes it so great. Here’s how to get the most out of our Kevo smart lock.

Use your previous key with the keyo

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Buying a new lock requires using new keys. You could hire a locksmith to change the lock pin pattern of the deadbolt to match your old keys, but most of the time it’s not worth the trouble.

However, the Kevo comes with Kwikset’s SmartKey technology, which allows you to use your old Kwikset key to unlock the Kevo—no locksmith necessary. It’s really easy to do and only takes about 30 seconds thanks to a special little tool that comes with the lock. Check out our guide to see how to program it. (If your house previously used Schlage locks, then you won’t be able to use that key to unlock the Kevo—you’ll need a new Kwikset key insetad).

Get a kevo fob so you don’t have to use your phone

The Kevo normally relies on location and Bluetooth data from your phone in order to determine if it’s actually you that’s trying to unlock your door. However, that means you have to leave the app running in the background at all times. If that doesn’t sound appealing to you, you can use a Kevo Fob instead of the lock relying on your phone.

The Kevo Fob acts as a direct replacement for your phone. If you touch the lock with the fob in your pocket, it will open. So if you don’t want the app running in the background all the time or you usually have the Bluetooth off, you can use the fob instead. Here’s how to set it up.

Create “ekeys” for family members

One drawback of the Kevo (as opposed to other smart locks with keypads) is that you just can’t share a simple keycode with other people if you want to give them access to your house. Instead, you have to give them their own “eKey” to use on their phone, but it’s easy to set up.

Just open up the Kevo app and send an eKey to a contact in your phone (or send them an email if they’re not in your contacts). From there, their phone will now act as a digital key to your Kevo lock, and you can even restrict access at certain times or only give them temporary access if they’re a guest.

Control your kevo remotely (or with alexa) with kevo plus

By itself, the Kevo only lets you lock and unlock your door from your phone if you’re nearby and within Bluetooth distance. You can control the lock from afar, but you need KevoPlus to make that happen.

Kevo Plus costs a one-time fee of $99 and comes with an internet gateway device that you plug into your router. This connects your Kevo to the internet, which then allows you to access your lock even when you aren’t home. Kevo Plus also allows you to integrate Kevo with other smarthome devices, like the Amazon Echo, to control your lock.

Enable auto-lock if you’re a forgetful person

I can’t tell you how many times I’ve forgotten to lock the door behind me. Luckily, it hasn’t cost me, but others may not be so lucky. Kevo has an auto-lock feature that automatically locks your door 30 seconds after you unlock it, that way your forgetfulness won’t come around and bite you in the rear end later in.

To enable it, all you have to do is take the interior cover off, locate the #4 switch, and turn it on. After that, your Kevo will automatically lock itself after 30 seconds, whether the door is open or closed.

lock the door without your phone

When locking your door, the Kevo still relies on your phone. So if you don’t have your phone (or fob) with you, you can’t lock your door by touch. However, you can enable a feature called Triple Touch Lock that allows you to lock your Kevo without needing your phone.

You just take off the interior cover on the lock and turn on switch #2. From there, Triple Touch Lock will be enabled. When you leave, just tap on the lock three consecutive times to lock the door.

The Kevo app is available for iPhones 4S and select Android devices. Please click here to see your device is compatible.

Blackberry and Windows platforms are not supported at this time.

What is Kevo’s battery life?

The Kevo lock provides multiple low battery indicators and plenty of warnings if you need to change the batteries, including notifications inside the Kevo mobile app. In the event that the batteries are not replaced in time, you will need to use your standard key to unlock the door.

The Kevo lock operates on 4 AA batteries, and the Kevo fob operates on one CR2025 battery. Depending on usage, the batteries should last for a year before they need to be replaced.

What happens if I lose my phone?

What do I need to install my Kevo lock?

A Philips head screwdriver and 4 AA batteries (included) are all that is required to install a Kevo lock.

How can I give others access to my Kevo lock?

If my phone or fob is inside the house and someone touches the lock from the outside, will the door unlock?

Does the Kevo mobile app have to be open when I unlock my Kevo?

Can I use both phones and fobs with my Kevo lock?

What is Kevo’s warranty?

Your Kwikset Kevo products are backed by one of the most comprehensive warranty programs available. You can feel confident that with the purchase of Kwikset you have selected the best quality product, backed by the best customer service available. Your Kwikset Kevo deadbolt product comes with a lifetime mechanical and finish warranty along with a 1 year electronic warranty to the original residential user of the product against defects in material and workmanship as long as the original user occupies the residential premises upon which the product was originally installed.

You can view our full warranty statement here.

Return Policy
View our complete return policy here.

What is an eKey and how is it used?

What is an eKey?
An eKey is an encrypted electronic key that can be sent to friends and family with Kevo-compatible smartphones. It works just like your existing mechanical key but resides on your Smartphone. Kwikset is pleased to announce that eKeys will be completely free of charge starting February 1, 2017. Please note that refunds are not available for eKeys purchased prior to February 1st, 2017.

Each eKey is unique and assigned specifically to a Kevo user. In order to guarantee the best security, sharing of eKeys is not available at this time.

Keep your phone in your pocket — Kevo uses Bluetooth to know you’re home and unlocks with a tap.

Back in 2013, Kwikset unveiled one of the first smart locks, the Kevo. Conceptually similar to the August lock , it let you unlock your front door without taking a key (or smartphone, for that matter) out of your pocket. The Kevo had some security issues with its deadbolt assembly though, and in 2016 the company released a new, improved second-generation Kevo smart lock . That newer Kevo is now available for $90.46 on Amazon. That’s 40% off the list price of $150. It’s also the lowest price we’ve seen for this item on Amazon. One caveat: this deal only applies to the Venetian Bronze finish — the Satin Nickel and Polished Brass are significantly pricier.

The new Kevo is much more secure than the original version, now designed to withstand the sorts of brute-force attacks that can compromise any deadbolt — smart or otherwise. Unlike the August smartlock, Kevo completely replaces your deadbolt assembly, but is relatively easy to install with just a few simple tools. (I did it myself a couple of years ago, and I am not the handiest of handymen.)

When you approach your front door, Kevo recognizes you via your smartphone and unlocks as soon as you tap the lock with your finger — no need to take the phone our of your pocket. If you prefer (or if the batteries in the lock should die while you’re out), the deadbolt comes with old-fashion keys, which work as well. You can read our full Kevo review for more information.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Meet Kevo Convert: A new smart lock conversion kit from Kwikset, and the latest extension of the trusted Kwikset Kevo platform.

Available for purchase now, Kevo Convert is a simple way to make your lock smart and pair it with your phone, adding convenience and peace of mind to your life without committing to installing a full smart lock or smart home hub. Whether you are unable or to change your door lock or simply do not want to because you love its style, Kevo Convert offers an affordable and DIY smart lock upgrade for your existing deadbolt.

What is a smart lock conversion kit?

Unlike our whole lock solution with the Kevo Smart Lock, installing the Kevo Convert smart lock conversion kit replaces only the interior of your lock so you can keep the style of your existing exterior deadbolt while adding smart lock features to make your life a little bit easier.

In just minutes, you can transform your existing deadbolt and control your lock from your phone with the Kevo app. Smart lock features with Kevo Convert include:

  • Lock and unlock Kevo Convert with your smartphone or other device within Bluetooth range of the lock, so you can unlock the door when you’re standing outside or lock it from your bed
  • “Auto Lock” Security: This optional security feature automatically locks your door after the lock is unlocked and 30 seconds has passed
  • Easy Home Management with eKeys: Easily manage home access for family, friends, and guests using the digital eKeys in the Kevo app, so you can grant or revoke access to others from your smartphone
  • Smart Home Integration: Pair Kevo Convert with a range of smart home products to easily configure a custom smarter home
  • Remote Access with Kevo Plus: Upgrade to Kevo Plus to lock and unlock your door from anywhere in the world connected to the Internet

Visit Kwikset.com/Kevo/Convert to find out more about how you can an affordable, easy to install smart lock conversion kit with Kevo Convert.

Check out other blog posts about our smart lock family and how you can get a smart home today:

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo förlitar sig mest på din smartphone för att låsa och låsa upp, men vad händer om din telefon dog eller bara glömde att ta med dig när du lämnade huset? Du är inte helt otur och med ett par förebyggande åtgärder kan du vila lätt och veta att du fortfarande kan låsa upp dörren även om telefonen inte kan hjälpa till.

Kevo starkt litar på är bekvämligheten att låsa och låsa upp din dörr utan att behöva en fysisk nyckel. Istället använder den en kombination av telefonens Bluetooth, Wi-Fi och GPS för att upptäcka om du har kommit hem och ligger nära ytterdörren. Om så är fallet kan du trycka på låset för att snabbt låsa upp det. Om inte, är Kevo fortfarande upplåst.

Men om ditt telefonbatteri dog, glömde du din telefon, eller du förlorade det, kanske du undrar hur heck du kommer att komma in i ditt eget hus. Det finns ett par saker du kan göra.

Använd dina faktiska nycklar (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo kan fortfarande fungera som vilken traditionell deadbolt som helst – det har ett traditionellt lås som låser upp och låser med en vanlig nyckel (som ingår i Kevo), helt och hållet omgå låsens smarts. Så nej, du är inte helt skruvad om din telefon dör eller du inte har den med dig.

Tja, bra; nu måste du bara ha en reservnyckel med dig hela tiden. Men sanningen är att du förmodligen redan bär en nyckelring full av nycklar med dig ändå, speciellt om du har en bil. Så problemet med att behöva lägga till en ny nyckel till din inställning är nog inte en stor sak.

Om du inte bär en nyckelring med dig, skulle det dock vara en bra idé att få tillgång till en reserv nyckel, helst genom att gömma den någonstans utanför ditt hus.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Nu, gör inte det självklara och göm din reserv nyckel under din dörrmatta eller i din veranda lampa, eftersom det är uppenbara platser där tjuvar skulle se ut. Göm istället någonstans som inte ligger nära din ytterdörr, som någonstans längs sidan av ditt hus. Därifrån, göm på en plats som ingen skulle tro att se ut, som inuti din grill eller ens någonstans under din stora luftkonditioneringsenhet.

Att hämta den reservnyckeln kan vara en smärta i bakänden om du låser dig ur ditt hus . men åtminstone kan du komma tillbaka i ditt hus.

Låna en väns telefon

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Om du inte har tillgång till en reservnyckel, eller din telefon, finns det fortfarande hopp kvar. Som en sista utväg kan du snälla fråga en vän om du kan låna din telefon, ladda ner Kevo-appen, logga in med dina Kevo-uppgifter och använd sedan sin telefon för att låsa upp din dörr. Eftersom dina digitala eKeys är låsta till ditt Kevo-konto istället för din telefon fungerar detta.

Självklart är det så som en sista grävsträvan, och jag gissar att en vän inte skulle vara så speciellt glad över att du hämtar en app till sin telefon. Förhoppningsvis är det en bra vän och de hjälper dig ändå.

Låsa din dörr utan din telefon

När det gäller att låsa dörren på vägen ut ur huset, behöver du bara trycka på Kevo för att låsa den så länge du har din telefon på din person. Så om det inte låser, vet du att du förmodligen glömde telefonen och kan springa in igen för att få den. Och förhoppningsvis är du smart nog att inte lämna huset med en telefon som har ett dött batteri.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Men om du inte har din telefon på dig eller om den är död och du behöver låsa dörren, kan du dra nytta av Triple Touch Lock som är en funktion på Kevo som låter dig låsa dörren utan att din telefon är närvarande.

För att göra detta måste du ta bort det inre locket på låset och hitta det lilla brytbordet (som bilden ovan). Därifrån, sätt på strömbrytare # 2 genom att ta en penna och trycka på den lilla brytaren.

Därifrån aktiveras Triple Touch Lock och allt du behöver göra är att trycka på låset tre gånger i följd för att låsa dörren.

How often have you driven out of your neighborhood, only to turn the car around to double check that your door is locked? When was the last time you left a key under the mat so your neighbor could water the plants while you were vacationing?

Now you can control your home security from the palm of your hand with a simple DIY home upgrade to our trusted Bluetooth smart lock, Kevo. Kevo Plus is the latest technology advancement to Kevo, allowing you to check if the door is locked or unlocked from your phone, and then lock or unlock it from anywhere in the world using an Internet-connected device like a smartphone or tablet.

Upgrade to Kevo Plus today for an enhanced Kevo experience made for the world you live in.

Step 1: Upgrade at MyKevo.com

If you already have a Kevo smart lock, visit MyKevo.com to upgrade your account to Kevo Plus for a one-time fee of $99.99. Kwikset will send you a free Bluetooth gateway that will establish online connectivity to your current Kevo lock to allow for remote locking and unlocking.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

If you do not already have a Kevo lock, you can purchase one today at a variety of home improvement and consumer technology retailers. Visit Kwikset.com/where to buy for a list of retailers near you. Once you have purchased and installed your lock, follow the instructions above for upgrading to Kevo Plus and check your mail for the Bluetooth gateway!

Step 2: Update your Kevo App

While you are waiting for your Bluetooth gateway to arrive, upgrade to Kevo app versions 1.4 (iOS) or 1.1 (Android). Beyond establishing Kevo Plus compatibility, the app update includes InHome Locking and Unlocking*, which means you can lock or unlock Kevo from a phone or tablet when you are within Bluetooth range.

Say goodbye to the nights where you drag yourself out of bed to check if you locked the door before retiring for the night. With InHome Locking and Unlocking, you can check from your phone in bed if your door is unlocked and lock it if you forgot.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Step 3: Install the Bluetooth Gateway

Your Bluetooth gateway arrived! Plug the Bluetooth gateway into an Internet router with an Ethernet connection to form a secure wireless connection between Kevo and the Bluetooth gateway. Make sure the gateway is within Bluetooth range of the lock to get the best connection. If you have more than one Kevo deadbolt and wish to control all Kevo locks remotely, you are in luck! One Kevo Plus gateway can connect to multiple Kevo locks.

Step 4: Enjoy Ultimate Convenience

When you need to open the door, tap “Unlock” on the app or on MyKevo.com, and the Kevo Plus gateway will communicate via Bluetooth Low Energy with the Kevo smart lock, unlocking it in seconds. Never wonder if your door was left unlocked or scramble home to let someone inside again.

Love Kevo’s Touch-to-Open feature? All Kevo users will still be able to use the patent-pending Touch-to-Open Technology, which enables users to lock or unlock the door by touching the smart lock if an authorized smart phone is within range.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

For more information on how Kevo Plus can add convenience in your world, visit https://www.kwikset.com/kevo/kevo-plus

*With InHome Locking and Unlocking, users will be able to lock and unlock Kevo with their smartphones if they are within Bluetooth range, whether or not they have upgraded to Kevo Plus. The Kevo app is available for free download from compatible smartphone app marketplaces, such as the Apple App Store or Google Play Store.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

The Kwikset Kevo smart lock comes with a smart design that allows you simply touch the lock to unlock it–but that’s only one feature that makes it really great. Here is how to get the most from our Kevo lock gt locksmith Mississauga.

Utilize your previous key with the keyo

Purchasing a new lock necessitates using keys. You can hire a locksmith to change the lock pattern of this deadbolt to match your old keys, but most of the time that it’s not worth the trouble.

But, the Kevo includes Kwikset’s SmartKey technology, which permits you to use your old Kwikset key to unlock the Kevo–no locksmith essential. It’s really simple to do and only takes about 30 seconds thanks to a special little tool that accompanies the lock. Check out our guide to see how to program it. (In case your home formerly used Schlage locks, and then you won’t be able to use that key to unlock the Kevo–you are going to need a brand new Kwikset key insetad).

Get a kevo fob so you don’t have to use your Mobile Phone

The Kevo generally relies on location and Bluetooth information from your phone in order to determine whether it’s actually you that is trying to unlock your door. However, this means you have to leave the program running in the background at all times. If this does not sound appealing to you personally, you may use a Kevo Fob instead of the lock relying on your phone.

The Kevo Fob functions as a direct replacement to the phone. If you touch the lock using the fob in your pocket, it is going to open. So in the event that you don’t need the program running in the background all the time or you generally have the Bluetooth off, then you may use the fob instead. Here’s the way to set this up.

Create”ekeys” for family members

One drawback of the Kevo (as opposed to other smart locks with keypads) is that you just can’t share a easy keycode with other people if you want to give them access to a house. Instead, you need to provide them their own”eKey” to use on their telephone, however it’s easy to establish.

Just open up the Kevo app and send an eKey to a contact in your phone (or send them an email whenever they’re not in your contacts). From that point, their telephone will now work as a virtual key to a Kevo lock, and you can also restrict access at certain times or just offer them temporary access if they are a guest.

Control your kevo liberally (or with alexa) with kevo plus

By itself, the Kevo only enables you to unlock and lock your door from your phone if you’re nearby and inside Bluetooth distance. It’s possible to control the lock from afar, however you need KevoPlus to make that happen.

Kevo Plus costs a one-time fee of $99 and comes with an internet gateway device that you plug into your router Mississauga. This connects your Kevo to the world wide web, which then permits you to access your lock even when you aren’t home. Kevo Plus also allows you to integrate Kevo along with other smarthome devices, such as the Amazon Echo, to command your lock.

Enable auto-lock if you are a forgetful person

I can not tell you how often I have forgotten to lock the door behind me. Luckily, it hasn’t cost mepersonally, but others might not be so lucky. Kevo comes with an auto-lock attribute that automatically locks your door 30 minutes after you unlock it, that way your forgetfulness won’t come around and bite you in the rear end later in.

To help it, all you have to do would be to take the interior cover off, find the 4 switch, and turn it on. Following that, your Kevo will automatically lock itself after 30 minutes, if the door is open or shut.

Lock the door with no Cell Phone

When locking your door, the Kevo still depends upon your phone. Therefore, in the event that you don’t own your phone (or fob) with you, then you can not lock your door by contact. However, it is possible to enable a feature known as Triple Touch Lock that permits you to lock your Kevo without needing your cell phone.

You just take off the interior cover onto the lock and turn switch #2. From that point, Triple Touch Lock is going to be empowered. When you leave, just tap on the lock three successive days to lock the door.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Open your world with the latest Touch-to-Open™ Kevo smart lock, powered by your smartphone and Bluetooth®. Fumbling with your keys is now a thing of the past.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Come home the smart way with Kevo

Whether leaving or coming home, Kevo smart lock takes only a touch to lock and unlock.

Let Kevo make your life easier.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

“In our home, people are constantly coming and going. Kevo tracks exactly who is locking and unlocking the door.”

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

“The Kevo app sends notifications when my kids get home from school. I love knowing they’re safe while I’m at work.”

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Vacation

“Halfway around the world, I can send our neighbor an eKey so they can make sure our home is safe.”

Thoughtfully designed to complement your style.

With a small interior panel and traditional exterior, the Kevo deadbolt matches any home’s decor.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneHow to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneHow to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone* Kevo Smart Lock, 2nd Gen interior shown above. Compare Kevo Locks: 1st & 2nd Gen

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Easily track who comes and goes.

With eKeys, give loved ones access to your home from your phone. You’ll even get a notification when they use one.

Protect what matters most.

Backed by Kwikset’s 70 years of trusted security and the latest innovations in intelligent access control, Kevo was engineered to protect what matters most.

Open your door to a smart home

Kevo makes coming home personal because it works with a variety of smart products that you already love.

  • How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneHoneywell Thermostats*
  • How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneRing Video Doorbell #
  • How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneSkybell Video Doorbell # IFTTT Applets & Services –>
  • How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phoneAmazon Alexa +

Complements Your Style.

The dramatically reduced interior of Kevo 2nd Gen is smaller and sleeker than the 1st Gen.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo 1st Gen

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo 2nd Gen

Enhanced Performance.

From installation to security, Kevo 2nd Gen is an enhanced home security experience.

  • Improved & simplified installation
  • Color-coded installation hardware
  • Single cable installation
  • Improved authentication
  • All-metal design
  • Tamper-resistant screws
  • Quick access window
  • BHMA Grade 2 Certified
  • UL Fire rated

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

More about Kevo

Kevo Family

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo Contemporary

new style with the same Touch-to-Open™ convenience.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo Traditional

Turn your smartphone into a key with Touch-to-Open™ convenience.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo Convert

Make your lock smart with the smart lock conversion kit.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo Plus

Upgrade to even greater control with remote access.

Requires Kevo Smart Lock

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo Fob

Get Touch-to-Open™ convenience without a smartphone.

Requires Kevo Smart Lock

Sign-up for Kwikset news.

We just sent you an email with a link to confirm your email address.

For more of the latest news and information about Kwikset check out our Smart Security Blog!

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

El Kwikset Kevo se basa principalmente en su teléfono inteligente para bloquear y desbloquear, pero ¿qué pasaría si su teléfono se apagara o si se olvidara de traerlo cuando salía de casa? No estás completamente sin suerte, y con un par de medidas preventivas, puedes estar tranquilo sabiendo que aún puedes desbloquear tu puerta incluso si tu teléfono no puede ayudar.

Kevo depende en gran medida de la conveniencia de bloquear y desbloquear la puerta sin necesidad de una llave física. En su lugar, utiliza una combinación de Bluetooth, Wi-Fi y GPS de su teléfono para detectar si ha llegado a casa y está cerca de la puerta principal. Si es así, puedes tocar el bloqueo para desbloquearlo rápidamente. Si no, entonces el Kevo permanece desbloqueable.

Sin embargo, si la batería de tu teléfono se agotó, olvidaste tu teléfono o lo perdiste, quizás te preguntes cómo diablos vas a entrar a tu propia casa. Hay un par de cosas que puedes hacer.

Usa tus claves reales (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

El Kwikset Kevo aún puede actuar como lo haría un cerrojo tradicional: tiene una cerradura tradicional que se desbloquea y se bloquea con una llave normal (que se incluye con el Kevo), que pasa por alto la inteligencia de la cerradura. Así que no, no estás completamente atornillado si tu teléfono muere o si no lo llevas contigo.

Pues, genial; ahora tienes que llevar contigo una llave de repuesto todo el tiempo por si acaso. Pero la verdad es que probablemente ya lleves contigo un llavero lleno de llaves, especialmente si tienes un auto. Por lo tanto, la molestia de tener que agregar otra clave a su configuración probablemente no sea un gran problema.

Sin embargo, si no lleva un llavero con usted, sería una buena idea tener acceso a una llave de repuesto, preferiblemente escondiéndola en algún lugar fuera de su casa.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Ahora, no haga lo obvio y oculte su llave de repuesto debajo de su felpudo o en su artefacto de iluminación del porche, ya que esos son lugares obvios donde se verían los ladrones. En su lugar, ocúltelo en algún lugar que no esté cerca de la puerta de su casa, como en algún lugar a lo largo del lado de su casa. Desde allí, ocúpese en un lugar que nadie piense mirar, como dentro de su parrilla o incluso en algún lugar debajo de su gran unidad de aire acondicionado.

Recuperar esa llave de repuesto puede ser un dolor en la parte trasera si se cierra la puerta de su casa . pero al menos podrá regresar a su casa.

Pedir prestado el teléfono de un amigo

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Si no tiene acceso a una llave de repuesto ni a su teléfono, todavía queda algo de esperanza. Como último recurso, puede preguntarle amablemente a un amigo si puede pedir prestado su teléfono, descargar la aplicación Kevo, iniciar sesión con sus credenciales de Kevo y luego usar su teléfono para abrir la puerta. Dado que sus eKeys digitales están bloqueadas en su cuenta Kevo en lugar de su teléfono, esto funcionará.

Por supuesto, es una especie de último esfuerzo y supongo que a un amigo no le encantaría que descargue una aplicación en su teléfono. Esperemos que sea un buen amigo y te ayuden de todas formas.

Bloqueo de su puerta sin su teléfono

En cuanto a cerrar la puerta con llave al salir de la casa, todo lo que tiene que hacer es tocar el Kevo para que se bloquee, siempre y cuando tenga su teléfono en la persona. Por lo tanto, si no se bloquea, sabrá que probablemente olvidó su teléfono y puede volver a ejecutarlo para obtenerlo. Y espero que seas lo suficientemente inteligente como para no salir de casa con un teléfono que tiene una batería descargada.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Sin embargo, en el caso de que no tenga su teléfono puesto o esté muerto y necesite bloquear la puerta, puede aprovechar el Triple Touch Lock, que es una función del Kevo que le permite bloquear la puerta. sin que su teléfono esté presente.

Para hacer esto, deberá quitar la cubierta interior de la cerradura y ubicar el tablero de interruptores pequeño (como se muestra en la imagen de arriba). A partir de ahí, encienda el interruptor n. ° 2 obteniendo un bolígrafo y presionando hacia arriba el interruptor pequeño.

Desde allí, Triple Touch Lock se activará y todo lo que tienes que hacer es tocar la cerradura tres veces consecutivas para cerrar la puerta.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Il Kwikset Kevo si basa principalmente sul tuo smartphone per il blocco e lo sblocco, ma cosa succede se il tuo telefono è morto o hai semplicemente dimenticato di portarlo con te quando hai lasciato la casa? Non sei completamente sfortunato e, con un paio di misure preventive, puoi stare tranquillo sapendo che puoi ancora sbloccare la porta anche se il tuo telefono non è in grado di aiutarti.

Kevo fa molto affidamento sulla comodità di bloccare e sbloccare la porta senza bisogno di una chiave fisica. Invece, utilizza una combinazione di Bluetooth, Wi-Fi e GPS del tuo telefono per rilevare se sei arrivato a casa e sei vicino alla porta d'ingresso. In tal caso, puoi toccare il lucchetto per sbloccarlo rapidamente. In caso contrario, il Kevo rimane sbloccabile.

Tuttavia, se la batteria del telefono è morta, hai dimenticato il telefono o l'hai perso, potresti chiederti come diamine entrerai in casa tua. Ci sono un paio di cose che puoi fare.

Usa le tue chiavi effettive (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Il Kwikset Kevo può ancora funzionare come qualsiasi catenaccio tradizionale: ha una serratura tradizionale che si sblocca e si blocca con una normale chiave (che è inclusa con Kevo), ignorando completamente le capacità della serratura. Quindi no, non sei completamente fregato se il tuo telefono muore o non ce l'hai con te.

Bene, bene; ora devi portare sempre con te una chiave di riserva per ogni evenienza. Ma la verità è che probabilmente porti già con te un portachiavi pieno di chiavi, soprattutto se hai una macchina. Quindi il problema di dover aggiungere un'altra chiave alla configurazione probabilmente non è un grosso problema.

Tuttavia, se non porti con te un portachiavi, sarebbe comunque una buona idea avere accesso a una chiave di riserva, preferibilmente nascondendolo da qualche parte fuori dalla tua casa.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Ora, non fare l'ovvio e nascondere la chiave di scorta sotto il tuo zerbino o nella tua lampada portico, in quanto quelle sono luoghi ovvi dove guardano i ladri. Invece, nascondilo da qualche parte che non è vicino alla tua porta di casa, come da qualche parte lungo il lato della tua casa. Da lì, nasconditi in una posizione che nessuno potrebbe pensare di guardare, come dentro la tua griglia o anche da qualche parte sotto la tua grande unità di condizionamento d'aria.

Recuperare quella chiave potrebbe essere un fastidio nel retrotreno se ti blocchi da casa tua . ma almeno sarai in grado di tornare a casa tua.

Prendi in prestito il telefono di un amico

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Se non hai accesso a una chiave di riserva, né al tuo telefono, rimane ancora qualche speranza. Come ultima risorsa, puoi chiedere gentilmente ad un amico se puoi prendere in prestito il telefono, scaricare l'app Kevo, accedere con le tue credenziali di Kevo e quindi usare il loro telefono per sbloccare la porta. Dato che i tuoi eKeys digitali sono bloccati sul tuo account Kevo piuttosto che sul tuo telefono, funzionerà.

Certo, è una specie di ultimo sforzo per il fosso, e immagino che un amico non sarebbe particolarmente entusiasta del fatto che tu possa scaricare un'app sul loro telefono. Spero che sia un buon amico e ti aiuteranno comunque.

Bloccare la tua porta senza il tuo telefono

Per quanto riguarda il blocco della porta mentre esci da casa, tutto ciò che devi fare è toccare il Kevo per bloccarlo, purché tu abbia il tuo telefono sulla tua persona. Quindi, se non si blocca, allora sai che probabilmente hai dimenticato il tuo telefono e puoi tornare a prenderlo. E si spera che tu sia abbastanza intelligente da non uscire di casa con un telefono che ha una batteria scarica.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Tuttavia, nel caso in cui tu non abbia il tuo telefono su di te, o sia morto e tu debba bloccare la porta, puoi approfittare di Triple Touch Lock, che è una funzionalità di Kevo che ti permette di bloccare la tua porta senza il tuo telefono presente.

Per fare ciò, dovrai rimuovere la copertura interna della serratura e individuare la piccola scheda dell'interruttore (come nella foto sopra). Da lì, accendi l'interruttore n. 2 prendendo una penna e spingendo verso l'alto il piccolo interruttore.

Da lì, Triple Touch Lock sarà attivato e tutto ciò che devi fare è toccare la serratura tre volte consecutive per bloccare la porta.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

O Kwikset Kevo depende principalmente do seu smartphone para bloquear e desbloquear, mas e se o seu telefone morreu ou você acabou de se esquecer de trazê-lo consigo quando saiu de casa? Você não está completamente sem sorte e, com algumas medidas preventivas, pode ficar tranqüilo sabendo que ainda pode abrir sua porta mesmo que seu telefone não consiga ajudar.

Kevo depende muito da conveniência de trancar e destrancar sua porta sem precisar de uma chave física. Em vez disso, ele usa uma combinação de Bluetooth, Wi-Fi e GPS do smartphone para detectar se você chegou em casa e está perto da porta da frente. Se assim for, você pode tocar na fechadura para desbloqueá-lo rapidamente. Se não, então o Kevo permanece destravável.

No entanto, se a bateria do seu telefone faleceu, você esqueceu o seu telefone, ou você o perdeu, você pode estar se perguntando como diabos você vai entrar em sua própria casa. Há algumas coisas que você pode fazer.

Use suas chaves reais (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

O Kwikset Kevo ainda pode agir como qualquer deadbolt tradicional – ele tem um bloqueio tradicional que desbloqueia e bloqueia com uma chave normal (que é incluída com o Kevo), ignorando completamente a inteligência do bloqueio. Então não, você não está completamente ferrado se seu telefone morre ou você não está com você.

Bem, ótimo; agora você tem que carregar uma chave sobressalente com você o tempo todo por via das dúvidas. Mas a verdade é que você provavelmente já carrega um chaveiro cheio de chaves com você, especialmente se você tiver um carro. Então, o problema de ter que adicionar outra chave à sua configuração provavelmente não é grande coisa.

No entanto, se você não levar um chaveiro com você, ainda seria uma boa ideia ter acesso a uma chave reserva, de preferência escondendo-a em algum lugar fora de sua casa.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Agora, não faça o óbvio e esconda sua chave sobressalente sob o seu capacho ou na luminária da sua varanda, pois esses são locais óbvios onde os ladrões ficariam. Em vez disso, esconda-o em algum lugar que não seja perto da sua porta da frente, como em algum lugar ao lado da sua casa. De lá, esconda-se em um local que ninguém pensaria em olhar, como dentro de sua grade ou mesmo em algum lugar debaixo de sua grande unidade de ar condicionado.

Recuperar essa chave sobressalente pode ser uma dor na extremidade traseira se você se trancar fora de sua casa . mas pelo menos você poderá voltar para sua casa.

Pedir emprestado o telefone de um amigo

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Se você não tem acesso a uma chave reserva nem ao seu telefone, ainda há alguma esperança. Como último recurso, você pode perguntar a um amigo se pode pedir emprestado o telefone, fazer o download do aplicativo da Kevo, fazer login com suas credenciais da Kevo e usar o telefone para abrir a porta. Como as suas eKeys digitais estão bloqueadas na sua conta do Kevo em vez do seu telefone, isso funcionará.

É claro que esse é um último esforço, e acredito que um amigo não ficaria muito empolgado com você fazendo o download de um aplicativo para o telefone dele. Espero que seja um bom amigo e eles ajudarão você de qualquer maneira.

Travando sua porta sem o seu telefone

Quanto a trancar a porta ao sair da casa, tudo o que você precisa fazer é tocar no Kevo para bloquear, contanto que você tenha o telefone na pessoa. Então, se não bloquear, você sabe que provavelmente esqueceu o seu telefone e pode voltar correndo para obtê-lo. E esperamos que você seja inteligente o suficiente para não sair de casa com um telefone que tenha uma bateria descarregada.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

No entanto, no caso em que você não tem o telefone em você, ou ele está morto e você precisa trancar a porta, você pode tirar proveito do Triple Touch Lock, que é um recurso no Kevo que permite que você trancar sua porta sem o seu telefone estar presente.

Para fazer isso, você precisará retirar a tampa interna da fechadura e localizar o pequeno quadro de distribuição (como na foto acima). A partir daí, ligue o switch # 2 pegando uma caneta e empurrando o pequeno interruptor.

A partir daí, o recurso Triple Touch Lock será ativado e tudo o que você precisa fazer é tocar na trava três vezes consecutivas para trancar a porta.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Il Kwikset Kevo si basa principalmente sul tuo smartphone per il blocco e lo sblocco, ma cosa succede se il tuo telefono è morto o hai semplicemente dimenticato di portarlo con te quando hai lasciato la casa? Non sei completamente sfortunato e, con un paio di misure preventive, puoi stare tranquillo sapendo che puoi ancora sbloccare la porta anche se il tuo telefono non è in grado di aiutarti.

CORRELATO: Come installare e Impostare Kvikset Kevo Smart Lock

Kevo fa molto affidamento sulla comodità di bloccare e sbloccare la porta senza bisogno di una chiave fisica. Invece, utilizza una combinazione di Bluetooth, Wi-Fi e GPS del tuo telefono per rilevare se sei arrivato a casa e sei vicino alla porta d’ingresso. In tal caso, puoi toccare il lucchetto per sbloccarlo rapidamente. In caso contrario, il Kevo rimane sbloccabile.

Tuttavia, se la batteria del telefono è morta, hai dimenticato il telefono o l’hai perso, potresti chiederti come diamine entrerai in casa tua. Ci sono un paio di cose che puoi fare.

Usa le tue chiavi effettive (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Il Kwikset Kevo può ancora comportarsi come un catenaccio tradizionale: ha un blocco tradizionale che si sblocca e si blocca con una normale chiave (che è incluso con il Kevo), bypassando completamente le intelligenze della serratura. Quindi no, non sei completamente fregato se il tuo telefono muore o non ce l’hai con te.

Bene, bene; ora devi portare sempre con te una chiave di riserva per ogni evenienza. Ma la verità è che probabilmente porti già con te un portachiavi pieno di chiavi, soprattutto se hai una macchina. Quindi il problema di dover aggiungere un’altra chiave alla configurazione probabilmente non è un grosso problema.

Tuttavia, se non porti con te un portachiavi, sarebbe comunque una buona idea avere accesso a una chiave di riserva , preferibilmente nascondendolo da qualche parte fuori dalla tua casa.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Ora non fare l’ovvio e nascondi la tua chiave di scorta sotto il tuo zerbino o nella tua veranda, in quanto quelle sono ovvi luoghi in cui i ladri guarderebbero. Invece, nascondilo da qualche parte che non è vicino alla tua porta di casa, come da qualche parte lungo il lato della tua casa. Da lì, nasconditi in una posizione che nessuno potrebbe pensare di guardare, come dentro la tua griglia o anche da qualche parte sotto la tua grande unità di condizionamento.

Recuperare quella chiave di riserva potrebbe essere un fastidio nel retrotreno se ti blocchi di casa tua . ma almeno sarai in grado di tornare a casa tua.

Prendere in prestito il telefono di un amico

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Se non hai accesso a una chiave di riserva, né al tuo telefono, rimane ancora qualche speranza . Come ultima risorsa, puoi chiedere gentilmente ad un amico se puoi prendere in prestito il telefono, scaricare l’app Kevo, accedere con le tue credenziali di Kevo e quindi usare il loro telefono per sbloccare la porta. Dato che i tuoi eKey digitali sono bloccati sul tuo account Kevo piuttosto che sul tuo telefono, funzionerà.

Ovviamente, è una sorta di ultimo tentativo, e immagino che un amico non sarebbe particolarmente entusiasta del fatto che tu stia scaricando un’app al loro telefono. Speriamo che sia un buon amico e ti aiuteranno comunque.

Bloccare la tua porta senza il telefono

Per chiudere la porta mentre esci da casa, tutto ciò che devi fare è toccare il Kevo per falla bloccare, purché tu abbia il tuo telefono sulla tua persona. Quindi, se non si blocca, allora sai che probabilmente hai dimenticato il tuo telefono e puoi tornare a prenderlo. E spero che tu sia abbastanza intelligente da non uscire di casa con un telefono che ha una batteria scarica.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Tuttavia, nel caso in cui non hai il telefono su di te, o è morto e devi chiudere la porta , puoi approfittare di Triple Touch Lock, una funzionalità di Kevo che ti consente di bloccare la porta senza che sia presente il tuo telefono.

Per farlo, dovrai rimuovere la copertura interna della serratura e individuare la piccola scheda di commutazione (come nella foto sopra). Da lì, attiva l’interruttore n. 2 ottenendo una penna e spingendo verso l’alto il piccolo interruttore.

Da lì, Triple Touch Lock sarà attivato e tutto ciò che devi fare è toccare la serratura tre volte consecutive per bloccare la porta .

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

La libreria di Hulu sta diventando più utile in quanto continua a prendere show amati da Netflix. A differenza della maggior parte degli altri servizi di abbonamento, Hulu ti consente di fare una pausa temporanea per un massimo di dodici settimane senza cancellare completamente l’abbonamento. Ecco come mettere una sospensione temporanea sul tuo account.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

L’aggiornamento per i creatori di Windows 10 ha aggiunto un nuovo touchpad virtuale che funziona come la tastiera touch. È possibile utilizzare questo touchpad per controllare il cursore del mouse su un dispositivo con touch screen. Per abilitare il touchpad virtuale, premere a lungo o fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sulla barra delle applicazioni e selezionare “Mostra pulsante touchpad”.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo förlitar sig mest på din smartphone för att låsa och låsa upp, men vad händer om din telefon dog eller du bara glömde att ta den med dig när du lämnade huset? Du är inte helt otur och med ett par förebyggande åtgärder kan du vila lätt och veta att du fortfarande kan låsa upp din dörr även om din telefon inte kan hjälpa.

RELATED: Så här installerar du och Konfigurera Kwikset Kevo Smart Lock

Kevo är starkt beroende av bekvämligheten att låsa och låsa upp dörren utan att behöva en fysisk nyckel. Istället använder den en kombination av telefonens Bluetooth, Wi-Fi och GPS för att upptäcka om du har kommit hem och ligger nära ytterdörren. Om så är fallet kan du trycka på låset för att snabbt låsa upp det. Om inte, så är Kevo fortfarande upplåst.

Men om ditt telefonbatteri dog, glömde du telefonen, eller du förlorade det, kanske du undrar hur duck kommer att komma in i ditt eget hus. Det är ett par saker du kan göra.

Använd dina faktiska nycklar (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo kan ändå fungera som en traditionell deadbolt-det har ett traditionellt lås som låser upp och låser med en normal nyckel ingår i Kevo), helt och hållet kringgå låsens smarts. Så nej, du är inte helt skruvad om din telefon dör eller du inte har den med dig.

Tja, bra; nu måste du bara ha en reservnyckel med dig hela tiden. Men sanningen är att du förmodligen redan bär en nyckelring full av nycklar med dig ändå, speciellt om du har en bil. Därför är det svårt att behöva lägga till en ny nyckel till din inställning. Det är nog inte en stor sak.

Om du inte bär en nyckelring med dig, skulle det dock vara en bra idé att få tillgång till en reservnyckel , helst genom att gömma den någonstans utanför ditt hus.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Gör inte det självklara och göm din reserv nyckel under din dörrmatta eller i din veranda, eftersom det är uppenbara platser där tjuvar skulle se ut. Göm istället någonstans som inte ligger nära din ytterdörr, som någonstans längs sidan av ditt hus. Därifrån gömmer du dig på en plats som ingen skulle tycka om, som inuti din grill eller ens någonstans under din stora luftkonditionering.

Att hämta den reservnyckeln kan vara en smärta i bakänden om du låser dig själv av ditt hus . men åtminstone kommer du att kunna komma tillbaka i ditt hus.

Låna en väns telefon

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Om du inte har tillgång till en reserv nyckel eller din telefon finns det fortfarande hopp om att lämna . Som en sista utväg kan du snälla fråga en vän om du kan låna din telefon, ladda ner Kevo-appen, logga in med dina Kevo-uppgifter och använd sedan sin telefon för att låsa upp din dörr. Eftersom dina digitala eKeys är låsta till ditt Kevo-konto i stället för din telefon, kommer det att fungera.

Det är självklart en sista grävningsansträngning, och jag antar att en vän inte skulle vara särskilt glad över att du hämtar en app till deras telefon. Förhoppningsvis är det en bra vän och de hjälper dig ändå.

Låsning av din dörr utan din telefon

När du låser dörren på väg ut ur huset behöver du bara trycka på Kevo till få det att låsa, så länge du har din telefon på din person. Så om det inte låser, vet du att du förmodligen glömde telefonen och kan springa in igen för att få den. Och förhoppningsvis är du smart nog att inte lämna huset med en telefon som har ett dött batteri.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Men om du inte har din telefon på dig eller det är död och du måste låsa dörren , kan du dra nytta av Triple Touch Lock, vilket är en funktion på Kevo som låter dig låsa dörren utan att telefonen är närvarande.

För att göra detta måste du ta bort locket på locket och lokalisera det lilla växelbordet (enligt bilden ovan). Därifrån slår du på strömbrytare # 2 genom att ta en penna och trycka på den lilla brytaren.

Därifrån aktiveras Triple Touch Lock och allt du behöver göra är att trycka på låset tre gånger i rad för att låsa dörren .

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Som standard kommer Netgears Arlo Pro-kamerasystem med flera olika lägen som du kan byta mellan, beroende på om du ‘ hemma eller borta. Men du kanske vill anpassa inställningarna för olika lägen. Så här skapar du dina egna lägen i Arlo-appen. Det finns fyra standardlägen tillgängliga: Beväpnad, Avväpnad, Schema och Geofencing.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

I mer än ett år har Gmail tillåtit dig att ångra sändningen av ett e-postmeddelande. Den här funktionen var dock endast tillgänglig när du använder Gmail i en webbläsare, inte i Gmail-mobilapparna. Nu är en “Ångra” -knapp äntligen tillgänglig i Gmail för iOS. RELATED: Så här aktiverar du Ångra-knappen i Gmail (och överför det pinsamma e-postmeddelandet) Med Gmail för webben kan du ställa in tidsgräns för Ångra-knappen till 5, 10, 20 eller 30 sekunder, men Ångra-knappen i Gmail för iOS är inställd till en tidsgräns på 5 sekunder, utan att ändra det.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo, kilitleme ve kilidini açmak için çoğunlukla akıllı telefonunuza güveniyor, ama ya telefonunuz öldüyse ya da evden çıkarken yanınızda getirmeyi unuttuysanız? Tamamen şanstan yoksun ve birkaç önleyici tedbirle, telefonunuz yardım edemese bile kapının kilidini açabileceğinizi bilerek rahat dinlenebilirsiniz.

Kevo ağır bir şekilde güvenmek, fiziksel bir anahtara gerek kalmadan kapınızı kilitlemek ve kilidini açmak için kullanılabilecek kolaylıktır. Bunun yerine, eve gelip gelmediğinizi ve ön kapıya yakın olup olmadığını öğrenmek için telefonunuzun Bluetooth, Wi-Fi ve GPS'ini bir arada kullanır. Eğer öyleyse, kilidi açmak için kilidi açabilirsiniz. Değilse, Kevo kilitlenebilir kalır.

Ancak, telefonunuzun pili biterse, telefonunuzu unutmuşsunuzdur ya da kaybettiniz, kendi evinize nasıl gireceğinizi merak ediyor olabilirsiniz. Yapabileceğin birkaç şey var.

Gerçek Anahtarlarınızı Kullanın (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo, her zaman geleneksel bir sürgü olarak hareket edebilir – kilidin zekasını tamamen atlayarak, normal bir anahtarla (Kevo'da bulunan) kilitlenen ve kilitlenen geleneksel bir kilidine sahiptir. Öyleyse, telefonun ölürse ya da seninle birlikte olmazsa tamamen vidalanmazsın.

Eh, harika; Artık her zaman yanınızda yedek bir anahtar bulundurmanız gerekiyor. Ama gerçek şu ki, muhtemelen bir arabanız varsa, zaten anahtarlarınızla bir anahtarlık taşıyorsunuzdur zaten. Bu yüzden, kurulumunuza başka bir anahtar eklemenin zorluğu büyük bir olasılık değil.

Ancak, yanınızda bir anahtarlık bulundurmazsanız, tercihen evin dışında bir yerde saklayarak yedek bir anahtara erişmeniz iyi bir fikir olacaktır.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Şimdi, açık olanı yapmayın ve yedek anahtarınızı paspasınızın altında veya sundurma ışık fikstürünüzde saklayın, çünkü bunlar hırsızların göründüğü yerlerdir. Bunun yerine, evinizin kenarındaki bir yer gibi, ön kapınıza yakın olmayan bir yere gizleyin. Oradan hiç kimsenin bakmayacağı bir yerde saklanın, örneğin ızgaralarınızda veya büyük klima ünitenizin altında bir yerde.

Evinizin dışına kilitlendiğinde yedek anahtarın arka tarafında bir ağrı olabileceğini . ama en azından evinize geri dönebileceksiniz.

Bir arkadaşınızın telefonunu ödünç al

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Yedek bir anahtara ve telefonunuza erişiminiz yoksa, hala bir miktar umut var. Son çare olarak, bir arkadaşınıza telefonlarını ödünç alabilir, Kevo uygulamasını indirebilir, Kevo kimlik bilgilerinizle oturum açabilir ve ardından kapınızın kilidini açmak için telefonlarını kullanabilirsiniz. Dijital eKey'leriniz telefonunuzdan çok Kevo hesabınıza kilitlendiğinden, bu işe yarayacaktır.

Tabii ki, bu son bir hendek çabası, ve bir arkadaşımın telefonlarına bir uygulamayı indirdiğiniz için çok fazla heyecanlanmayacağını tahmin ediyorum. Umarım bu iyi bir arkadaştır ve size yine de yardımcı olurlar.

Telefonunuz Olmadan Kapınızı Kilitleme

Kapıyı evin dışına doğru kilitlemek için, tek yapmanız gereken, Kevo'nun üzerindeyken, telefonunuzu kişi üzerinde olduğu sürece kilitlemek. Yani eğer kilitlenmezse, muhtemelen telefonunuzu unuttuğunuzu ve bunu elde etmek için geri dönebileceğinizi biliyorsunuz. Umarım evi evden çıkmış bir bataryası olan bir telefonla bırakmamanız için yeterince akıllı olursunuz.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Ancak, telefonunuzun üzerinde olmaması durumunda veya ölmüşse ve kapıyı kilitlemeniz gerekiyorsa, Kevo'da kapınızı kilitlemenizi sağlayan bir özellik olan Üçlü Dokunmatik Kilit'den yararlanabilirsiniz. telefonunuzun mevcut olmaması.

Bunu yapmak için, kilit üzerindeki iç kapağı çıkarmanız ve küçük anahtar kartını bulmanız gerekecektir (yukarıda gösterildiği gibi). Oradan, kalem alıp küçük düğmeye basarak 2 numaralı anahtarı açın.

Oradan, Üçlü Dokunmatik Kilit devreye girecek ve yapmanız gereken tek şey kapıyı kilitlemek için üç kez art arda kilitlemek.

went from "shutupandtakemymoney" to "fuckoffandmakesomethingbetter" real quick when I saw that. More android phones out there than apple, and they continue to dominate sales – especially on a global scale.

If youre going to exclude over half of the market you dont get to use the term "smart phone" you should say "Use your iphone to unlock your door"

Pretty much my reaction too. Locks need to not have lock in. My current lock has no lock in, every lock I've ever interavted with did not lock in.

Hopefully just a temporary hiccup, but then I'd expect "other devices coming soon". Smells of intentional exclusivity.

The site say that the lock also comes with a KevoFob keychain which allows for the same touch-to-open functionality, just on your keychain instead of your smartphone (which I think might even have a broader appeal, especially due to IOS only).

Or you can get this which is easy to install and works with any phone. https://lockitron.com/preorder

Uses your smart phone iPhone to unlock your door

I'm still not really convinced OP isn't a spam account taking money from Kwikset for this.

12 day old account
Only 1 other post

You might be on to something. To r/HailCorporate or r/KarmaCourt

damnit.. why no android!

I made my own, Android friendly

Just get the key fob, stays in your pocket just like the phone

Kwikset Kevo uses your iPhone 4 or iPhone 5 to unlock your door.

I am a locksmith. These lock cylinders are fucking terrible. The Worst. Having a key cut that isn't the correct keyblank and there is a good chance the lock will just stop working all together as soon as you try the key. Or if the key is cut badly. Or if someone tries to pick the lock the same thing can happen.

Having a lock that opens with your smartphone is not a bad idea, but from my experience DO NOT BUY KWIKSET SMARTKEY LOCKS.

Came here to say this, thank you. Kwikset is beyond lousy.

Home Automation guy here. I sell Kwikset and Yale locks to work with iPhones and Android. This is just the latest in their line-ups, many of which work with both OSs. While this is cool, most of my customers want to be able to remotely access the lock so they can let in the pool guy or the landscapers while they are out of town. Many do not care about using a key if they are actually in town, or in the alternative, prefer a lock that they can open with a code instead of a key. Not sure if this fills a niche or not. But it does have blue LEDs so. I'll take 3.

Kevo Convert is a smart lock conversion kit. It uses your existing deadbolt and turns it into a smart lock in minutes! No hardwiring needed.

Kevo Convert on the inside.

Easily replace your current lock’s interior hardware only & install in minutes.

Existing lock on the outside.

Your current lock’s exterior hardware stays the same. No additional installation required.

How does it work?

Kevo Convert offers security and convenience as you’ve never experienced before.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Download the Kevo app to lock or unlock your door, send digital eKeys and track home access from your smartphone.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kevo Convert controls your existing deadbolt by locking and unlocking from the inside of your door.

Meet the Kevo App

Easily track who comes and goes.

With eKeys, give loved ones access to your home from your phone. You’ll even get a notification when they use one.

Send and retract eKeys

Instantly give, remove and customize access to all those who enter your home. With Kevo, you can send and retract digital eKeys in a flash.

Get alerts on lock activity.

Kevo notifications keep you posted on your home’s comings and goings. Know when your family comes home safely.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Lock and unlock from your smartphone.

Use your phone to lock or unlock your Kevo Convert within Bluetooth range. For even more control, upgrade to Kevo Plus for a one-time fee and lock or unlock your door from anywhere.

The best in smart home security.

With Kevo Convert, quickly change any of your home’s deadbolts into smart locks for the ultimate in safety and peace of mind.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Các Kwikset Kevo chủ yếu dựa vào điện thoại thông minh của bạn để khóa và mở khóa, nhưng nếu điện thoại của bạn chết hoặc bạn chỉ quên mang theo bên mình khi bạn rời khỏi nhà? Bạn không hoàn toàn không may mắn và với một vài biện pháp phòng ngừa, bạn có thể yên tâm khi biết rằng bạn vẫn có thể mở khóa cửa ngay cả khi điện thoại của bạn không thể trợ giúp.

Kevo phụ thuộc rất nhiều vào sự tiện lợi để khóa và mở khóa cửa mà không cần chìa khóa vật lý. Thay vào đó, thiết bị này sử dụng kết hợp Bluetooth, Wi-Fi và GPS của điện thoại để phát hiện xem bạn có đến nhà và ở gần cửa trước hay không. Nếu có, bạn có thể nhấn vào khóa để mở khóa nhanh chóng. Nếu không, thì Kevo vẫn mở khóa được.

Tuy nhiên, nếu pin điện thoại của bạn bị chết, bạn quên điện thoại hoặc bị mất điện thoại, bạn có thể tự hỏi làm thế nào mà bạn sẽ đi vào ngôi nhà của mình. Có một vài điều bạn có thể làm.

Sử dụng các phím thực tế của bạn (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo vẫn có thể hoạt động như bất kỳ chốt cửa truyền thống nào – nó có khóa truyền thống mở khóa và khóa bằng khóa thông thường (được bao gồm trong Kevo), hoàn toàn bỏ qua các thông minh của khóa. Vì vậy, không, bạn không hoàn toàn bị bóp méo nếu điện thoại của bạn chết hoặc bạn không có nó với bạn.

Tuyệt vời; bây giờ bạn phải mang theo một chìa khóa dự phòng với bạn tất cả các thời gian chỉ trong trường hợp. Nhưng sự thật là, bạn có thể đã mang theo một chìa khóa đầy đủ các phím với bạn anyway, đặc biệt là nếu bạn có một chiếc xe hơi. Vì vậy, rắc rối khi phải thêm một khóa khác vào thiết lập của bạn có thể không phải là vấn đề lớn.

Tuy nhiên, nếu bạn không mang theo móc khóa, bạn vẫn nên có quyền truy cập vào chìa khóa dự phòng, tốt nhất là nên giấu nó ở đâu đó bên ngoài ngôi nhà của bạn.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Bây giờ, đừng làm rõ ràng và giấu chìa khóa dự phòng của bạn dưới tấm thảm chùi chân của bạn hoặc trong vật cố ánh sáng hiên của bạn, vì đó là những địa điểm rõ ràng nơi những tên trộm sẽ nhìn. Thay vào đó, hãy giấu nó ở đâu đó không gần cửa trước của bạn, như một nơi nào đó dọc theo bên cạnh ngôi nhà của bạn. Từ đó, ẩn mình ở một vị trí mà không ai có thể nghĩ đến, giống như bên trong lò nướng của bạn hoặc thậm chí ở đâu đó bên dưới bộ điều hòa không khí lớn của bạn.

Lấy chìa khóa dự phòng đó có thể là một cơn đau ở phía sau nếu bạn khóa mình ra khỏi nhà… nhưng ít nhất bạn sẽ có thể quay trở lại ngôi nhà của mình.

Mượn điện thoại của bạn bè

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Nếu bạn không có quyền truy cập vào khóa dự phòng, cũng như điện thoại của bạn, vẫn còn một số hy vọng còn lại. Như một phương sách cuối cùng, bạn có thể yêu cầu một người bạn tốt nếu bạn có thể mượn điện thoại của họ, tải xuống ứng dụng Kevo, đăng nhập bằng thông tin Kevo của bạn và sau đó sử dụng điện thoại của họ để mở khóa cửa của bạn. Vì các khóa điện tử kỹ thuật số của bạn bị khóa vào tài khoản Kevo của bạn chứ không phải là điện thoại của bạn, điều này sẽ hoạt động.

Tất nhiên, đó là một nỗ lực mương cuối cùng, và tôi đoán một người bạn sẽ không quá hồi hộp khi bạn tải ứng dụng xuống điện thoại của họ. Hy vọng rằng đó là một người bạn tốt và họ sẽ giúp bạn ra ngoài.

Khóa cửa của bạn mà không cần điện thoại của bạn

Đối với khóa cửa của bạn trên đường ra khỏi nhà, tất cả các bạn phải làm là bấm vào Kevo để có được nó để khóa, miễn là bạn có điện thoại của bạn trên người của bạn. Vì vậy, nếu nó không khóa, sau đó bạn biết rằng bạn có thể quên điện thoại của bạn và có thể chạy trở lại để có được nó. Và hy vọng bạn đủ thông minh để không rời khỏi nhà bằng điện thoại có pin chết.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Tuy nhiên, trong trường hợp bạn không có điện thoại trên mình, hoặc nó đã chết và bạn cần khóa cửa, bạn có thể tận dụng lợi thế của Triple Touch Lock, một tính năng trên Kevo cho phép bạn khóa cửa của bạn mà không có điện thoại của bạn.

Để làm điều này, bạn sẽ cần phải tháo vỏ bên trong trên khóa và định vị bảng chuyển đổi nhỏ (như hình trên). Từ đó, bật công tắc số 2 bằng cách lấy bút và đẩy lên công tắc nhỏ.

Từ đó, Triple Touch Lock sẽ được kích hoạt và tất cả những gì bạn phải làm là chạm vào khóa ba lần liên tiếp để khóa cửa của bạn.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo ส่วนใหญ่อาศัยสมาร์ทโฟนของคุณในการล็อคและปลดล็อค แต่ถ้าโทรศัพท์ของคุณเสียชีวิตหรือคุณแค่ลืมนำติดตัวไปด้วยเมื่อคุณออกจากบ้าน? คุณไม่โชคดีอย่างสมบูรณ์และด้วยมาตรการป้องกันสองสามข้อคุณสามารถพักผ่อนได้อย่างง่ายดายโดยรู้ว่าคุณยังสามารถปลดล็อกประตูได้แม้ว่าโทรศัพท์ของคุณจะไม่สามารถช่วยได้.

Kevo พึ่งพาอย่างหนักคือความสะดวกในการล็อคและปลดล็อคประตูของคุณโดยไม่ต้องใช้รหัสทางกายภาพ แต่จะใช้การผสมผสานระหว่างบลูทู ธ Wi-Fi และ GPS ในโทรศัพท์ของคุณเพื่อตรวจสอบว่าคุณกลับมาถึงบ้านและอยู่ใกล้ประตูหน้าหรือไม่ ถ้าเป็นเช่นนั้นคุณสามารถแตะที่ล็อคเพื่อปลดล็อคได้อย่างรวดเร็ว ถ้าไม่เช่นนั้น Kevo ก็ยังคงปลดล็อคได้.

อย่างไรก็ตามหากแบตเตอรี่โทรศัพท์ของคุณเสียชีวิตคุณลืมโทรศัพท์ของคุณหรือคุณทำหายคุณอาจสงสัยว่า heck คุณจะเข้าไปในบ้านของคุณเองได้อย่างไร มีสองสิ่งที่คุณสามารถทำได้.

ใช้คีย์จริงของคุณ (Duh)

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

Kwikset Kevo ยังคงสามารถทำหน้าที่เหมือนสายฟ้าแบบดั้งเดิมได้ – มันมีการล็อคแบบดั้งเดิมที่ปลดล็อคและล็อคด้วยกุญแจปกติ ดังนั้นไม่คุณจะไม่เมาอย่างสมบูรณ์ถ้าโทรศัพท์ของคุณตายหรือคุณไม่ได้อยู่กับคุณ.

ดีมาก ตอนนี้คุณต้องพกกุญแจสำรองไว้กับคุณตลอดเวลาในกรณีที่ แต่ความจริงก็คือคุณอาจมีพวงกุญแจที่เต็มไปด้วยกุญแจอยู่แล้วโดยเฉพาะอย่างยิ่งถ้าคุณมีรถ ดังนั้นปัญหาของการเพิ่มคีย์อื่นในการตั้งค่าของคุณอาจไม่ใช่เรื่องใหญ่.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

ตอนนี้อย่าทำที่ชัดเจนและซ่อนกุญแจสำรองของคุณภายใต้พรมเช็ดเท้าหรือในโคมไฟระเบียงของคุณเพราะเป็นสถานที่ที่เห็นได้ชัดที่โจรจะมอง ให้ซ่อนไว้ที่ไหนสักแห่งที่ไม่ได้อยู่ใกล้ประตูหน้าบ้านของคุณเหมือนอยู่ข้างบ้าน จากที่นั่นซ่อนตัวอยู่ในสถานที่ที่ไม่มีใครคิดว่าจะมองเช่นภายในย่างของคุณหรือแม้กระทั่งที่ไหนสักแห่งภายใต้หน่วยเครื่องปรับอากาศขนาดใหญ่ของคุณ.

ยืมโทรศัพท์ของเพื่อน

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

หากคุณไม่สามารถเข้าถึงกุญแจสำรองหรือโทรศัพท์ของคุณยังมีความหวังเหลืออยู่ เป็นทางเลือกสุดท้ายคุณสามารถถามเพื่อนว่าคุณสามารถยืมโทรศัพท์ของพวกเขาดาวน์โหลดแอพ Kevo ลงชื่อเข้าใช้ด้วยข้อมูลประจำตัวของ Kevo แล้วใช้โทรศัพท์เพื่อปลดล็อกประตูของคุณ เนื่องจาก eKeys ดิจิตอลของคุณถูกล็อคไปยังบัญชี Kevo ของคุณแทนที่จะเป็นโทรศัพท์ของคุณสิ่งนี้จะใช้งานได้.

ล็อคประตูของคุณโดยไม่มีโทรศัพท์ของคุณ

สำหรับการล็อคประตูของคุณเมื่อออกจากบ้านสิ่งที่คุณต้องทำคือแตะที่ Kevo เพื่อล็อคประตูตราบใดที่คุณมีโทรศัพท์กับคนของคุณ ดังนั้นถ้ามันไม่ล็อคคุณก็รู้ว่าคุณอาจลืมโทรศัพท์ของคุณและสามารถวิ่งกลับเข้ามาได้ และหวังว่าคุณจะฉลาดพอที่จะไม่ออกจากบ้านด้วยโทรศัพท์ที่มีแบตเตอรี่หมด.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

อย่างไรก็ตามในกรณีที่คุณไม่มีโทรศัพท์หรือคุณตายและคุณต้องล็อคประตูคุณสามารถใช้ Triple Touch Lock ซึ่งเป็นคุณสมบัติของ Kevo ที่ช่วยให้คุณล็อคประตูได้ ไม่มีโทรศัพท์ของคุณเป็นปัจจุบัน.

ในการทำเช่นนี้คุณจะต้องถอดฝาครอบด้านในล็อคออกและหาสวิตช์บอร์ดขนาดเล็ก (ดังภาพด้านบน) จากนั้นเปิดสวิตช์ # 2 โดยรับปากกาแล้วดันสวิตช์เล็ก ๆ ขึ้น.

จากนั้นล็อค Triple Touch จะเปิดใช้งานและสิ่งที่คุณต้องทำคือแตะที่ล็อคสามครั้งติดต่อกันเพื่อล็อคประตูของคุณ.

How to unlock your kevo smart lock without your phone

If you want the ability to lock and unlock your front door with Amazon Alexa, you have about a million and one options these days. It seems like every smart device ships with Alexa integration now, and smart locks are no different. A good lock with Alexa support can easily cost $200 or $250 though, and not everyone wants to spend that kind of cash. Check out the Kwikset Kevo Convert Smart Lock Conversion Kit, which is available on Amazon right now for under $110.

Here are the highlights from the product page:

* Kevo Convert upgrades your existing deadbolt into a smart lock that you can control using your smart device (check device compatibility below before purchase)
* Kevo 2nd Gen now works with Alexa voice commands (requires Kevo Plus hub, sold separately for $99 via Kevo App)
* Download the Kevo app to lock or unlock your door, send digital eKeys, and track home access from your compatible iOS or Android smartphone (check list of compatible smartphones, below, before purchase)
* Download the Kevo app to lock or unlock your door, send digital eKeys, and track home access from your compatible iOS or Android smartphone (check list of compatible smartphones, below, before purchase)
* Kevo Convert features an optional auto lock that will lock your door 30 seconds after unlocking for safety and peace of mind
* Use your phone to lock/unlock your Kevo Convert within Bluetooth range, or utilize a Kevo Plus hub to remotely lock or unlock your door from anywhere (sold separately for $99 via Kevo App)
* Please see Installation Manual and Compatibility PDF (titled User Manual) under Technical Specification section for additional information
* Smart Home compatibility with Amazon Alexa, Ring Doorbell, Skybell, Nest Learning Thermostat, select Honeywell Thermostats, Android Wear and IFTTT

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

This section of our Wiki Guide contains a detailed walkthrough on how to find and unlock the secret Cow Level in Minecraft Dungeons.

Looking for something specific? Click the quick links below to find everything that you to know about the secret Moo? level.

  • What are Runes
  • How Do You Find Runes
  • How to Get to the Secret Moo? Level

What are Runes

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Hidden amongst all main story missions, you will find 9 runes that can be used to unlock a hidden level titled . Upon visiting the island, you'll find that it is made entirely up of just Mooshrooms. Unfortunately, these once friendly creatures are now filled with anger and are ready to attack on sight.

It is believed that this hidden level is a reference to Diablo II, which also featured a hidden Cow level.

How Do You Find Runes

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Before you go finding runes, it is important to ensure that you have completed the game on Default difficulty mode. Without this level of difficulty completed, the runes will not appear for you in game.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Should you have completed the game, it's now time to unlock the area in which you will need to access. To do this, make your way to the large church that can be found in the South Eastern area of your camp. To reach the church on your first visit, you will need to travel through some nearby trees in order to reach the entrance. You will find this gap of trees just South of the large house that is just South East of your camp.

Once you are outside the church, pull the lever that is near the entrance in order to lower the drawbridge. Lowering the drawbridge will create a shortcut to the area, making it much easier and quicker to reach.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

With the drawbridge lowered, head inside and make your way to the very end of the room. Here you will find a wall with a button on the ground and 9 symbols. Pressing the button will turn all of your currently collected runes Purple.

How to Get to the Secret Moo? Level

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft mapOnce all the runes have been collected, press the button once again to reveal a hidden doorway that leads to a small room that contains 2 chests and a map. This map will unlock the secret level on the map as ". ". How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

GameWith uses cookies and IP addresses. By using our site you agree to our privacy policy.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

  • Tweet
  • Share

Learn the difficulty levels in Minecraft Dungeons in this guide. This includes the different difficulty levels, changes per difficulty, how to change difficulty, & more!

Table of Contents

What Is Difficulty Level?

3 Levels Of Difficulty

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

In Minecraft Dungeons, players are free to set the difficulty of a level or dungeon they’ll be running . There are a total of three difficulties with Default being the easiest and Apocalypse as the hardest.

Each Difficulty Has 6 Sub Difficulties

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Players will also be able to further set the difficulty of the game by choosing between 1

6. The lower the number, the lower the recommended power level is!

Difficulty Affects Enemy Levels & Strength

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

The higher the difficulty, the stronger the enemies will be in a level . You will see a significant jump between their levels in harder difficulties, requiring players to also have higher levels.

Has Different Recommended Levels

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Each difficulty and sub-difficulty will show a recommended level and overall recommended team power. This will be your indication if you & your team can run a dungeon in a specific difficulty.

May Effect Loot Drops

The drops you get from levels may be affected by the difficulty that you’re running them in. If you’re gunning for better loot, doing the levels in higher difficulties may be recommended!

Equipment Related Articles

How To Change Difficulty

Set Before Running A Level

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Initially, only Default difficulty is unlocked. Players can set the sub-difficulty right before they run a dungeon . You can find it at the side panel where the details of the dungeon are listed.

Cannot Be Changed Mid-Level

You won’t be able to change the difficulty while inside a dungeon. Make sure you’ve set it in a difficulty that you can win against or you or your team will be wiped out.

Unlock New Difficulties

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Once you clear the game on Default difficulty, you will unlock Adventure difficulty. Clearing the game in Adventure mode will then unlock Apocalypse Mode. These tougher difficulties can be chosen via the lower right button on the overworld map.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

YOUR QUEST – You must fight your way through every level until you defeat the Arch-Illager. There are three difficulties for you to attempt. Completing all nine levels in normal mode will unlock Adventure mode – a greater difficulty in which you will face even more challenging mobs!

The term difficulty refers to a mechanic in Minecraft Dungeons that influences the balance by affecting the challenge of gameplay.

Contents

Difficulty modes [ ]

There are three sequential difficulty modes.

  • Default
  • Adventure
  • Apocalypse

Defeating the Arch-Illager atop obsidian pinnacle and completing it on a difficulty setting opens the next mode.

On higher difficulty modes, mobs are harder to defeat, more numerous, and enchanted mobs occur more often with new enchantments. However, equipment of higher power is rewarded to heroes as they traverse higher difficulties, alongside with new gear and artifacts drops and increased experience from mobs. Heroes can switch between unlocked difficulty modes at any time from the Select Mission Map, retaining all their equipment, and can re-play accessible missions at lower difficulty modes.

The three difficulty modes are depicted by a skull icon that appears more menacing at higher difficulty. They also have their own color, mob, and sound cue to represent the difficulty in the Difficulty Mode selection screen, with Default using blue (a chicken jockey mob and a chicken sound), Adventure with pink (a necromancer mob and a vindicator sound), and Apocalypse with red (a redstone golem mob and a ghast scream sound).

Difficulty exclusive equipment [ ]

Difficulty influences the equipment drop pool for missions. As the difficulty increases, some equipment that was already available in default appear in more locations and new equipment that cannot be obtained in Default become available.

At Adventure difficulty, the following equipment becomes available:

At Apocalypse difficulty, the following equipment becomes available:

Threat levels [ ]

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

The threat level selection slider for Apocalypse difficulty.

The higher the threat level, the higher the minimum and maximum power of weapons, armors, and artifacts that can drop during and after the mission. The number of enemies and the damage they inflict in a mission also increase.

For each threat level, a recommended power level is assigned to provide guidance to heroes. When opening the Threat Level Panel for a mission, the game positions the slider at a recommended threat level for the hero based on the mission’s recommended power and the heroes power. This practice is known as dynamic game difficulty balancing. In a multiplayer game, the game instead uses the average power of all heroes present to determine a recommended threat level.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Minimum Threat Level for Obsidian Pinnacle at Adventure Difficulty is shown to be Adventure IV. Players cannot enter the mission at a lower Threat Level than the minimum.

Some missions have a set minimum threat level. The only mission with no adjustable threat level is Squid Coast , the tutorial mission, which is always set at Default I and is inaccessible when set to Adventure or Apocalypse diffculty modes.

  • Default
  • Adventure
  • Apocalypse

Apocalypse Plus [ ]

Apocalypse Plus is an extension upon the existing Apocalypse difficulty mode that aims to be, especially at its most difficult state, an “impossibly hard” [1] challenge for players and encourage the use of “highly optimized” [2] equipment setups.

Consisting of 25 threat levels appended upon Apocalypse VII, sharing the threat level slider, Apocalypse Plus applies stat enhancing modifiers to mobs and permit equipment classed as rare to drop more frequently, in addition to increasing the maximum equipment power obtainable.

Heroes unlock the first three Apocalypse Plus threat levels after completing any mission at Apocalypse VII. To gain access to the next triplet of threat levels, the hero must complete a number of boss missions at the higher end of the accessible triplet. The number of boss missions required increases, up to a maximum of 7, with each threat level Triplet. Each boss counts only once per threat level.

The Lost Settlement , Crimson Forest , Basalt Deltas and Coral Rise aren’t counted as boss missions despite them harboring one or two bosses.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Minecraft Dungeons has a story mode divided into the different missions. Each mission has a hidden level that allows you to access secret levels. There are different methods to unlock these hidden levels and this Minecraft Dungeons Guide will help you with that.

How to Find Hidden Levels in Minecraft Dungeons?

In this Minecraft Dungeon secrets guide you will learn all locations of all secret missions, what are the rewards, and how to unlock Apocalypse difficulty.

Secret Missions Location

There are four secret missions in Minecraft Dungeons hidden in the main story. Sometimes these missions spawn randomly on different difficulties, you can try searching their common spots. There are chances you will encounter them randomly in-game while exploring every nook and corner.

  1. Creepy Crypt Secret Missions: Hidden in the Creeper Woods story missions. After freeing the villagers, look for a big temple on the left side. Open the door and you will be inside the temple, just click on the glowing green map to play the first secret mission in Minecraft Dungeons.
  2. Soggy Cave Secret Missions: Located in Soggy Swamp you will have to search for a cave near the supply area. You cannot access this mission if you defeat the boss. So you look for the cave or follow the path that leads to the second cave after the supply area. Go inside and activate the switch, recover the map from the pedestal and you can play the Soggy cave secret mission in Minecraft Dungeons.
  3. Arch Have: Located in Pumpkin Pastures, near the giant fort you will see a path on the side, follow this and stop once you see a ship. Go to the lower deck and kill the monster to collect the map.
  4. Underhalls: In Highblock Halls, at the very start, you will have to climb down a double staircase near the wall. It is at the bottom with two shields, activate one shield to open the hidden door and grab the amp inside.

Among above all secret motions leaving Creepy Crypt the next three are random. Depending on the difficulty level the location of secret missions changes, so keep looking. There is also a Secret Cow Mission in the camp area, just check the link to know more.

How to unlock Adventure and Apocalypse Difficulty?

Complete the base game to unlock Adventure difficulty. And then complete every mission on Adventure to unlock Apocalypse difficulty.

There are drops and rewards in every level of Minecraft Dungeons. Keep exploring every nook and corner. Killing enemies, creatures, etc will drop items around you. Rewards are directly attached to the gameplay, the objective is to keep important items and salvage unnecessary ones.

Playing everything Minecraft Dungeons has to offer means finding all of the secret levels. Here is how to do just that.

Many of the levels in Minecraft Dungeons have unlockable secret levels. To unlock these secret missions, you must find maps whilst playing through the game.

Although the levels in Minecraft Dungeons are randomized, there are still some tips you should bear in mind if you want to find these levels as quickly as possible. Here’s how to unlock every secret level in Minecraft Dungeons.

How To Unlock Creepy Crypt

Creepy Crypt can be found whilst exploring Creeper Woods, which is the first main level in Minecraft Dungeons after Squid Coast. The entrance to the Crypt is randomized each time you play, but here’s what you should look for.

Whilst exploring the woods, you might stumble across a sealed door with a button. Interact with the button and the door will open up, revealing a new area on the map. Head inside to find the map for Creepy Crypt on a pedestal.

How To Unlock Soggy Cave

During the level Soggy Swamp, players are able to discover Soggy Cave, which is another secret level. The entrance is randomized for this level too, just like Creepy Crypt is in Creeper Woods.

Whilst adventuring through the Soggy Swamp, you need to be on the lookout for a mossy cobblestone temple hidden off the main path to the objective. Once you have found the temple, head inside and the Soggy Cave map will be sat on top of a pedestal. Pick it up to unlock the secret level.

How To Unlock Arch Haven

Arch Haven is a secret level hidden within Pumpkin Pastures. Its location is also randomized, but it is much easier to spot thanks to the entrance being found on a large ship.

As you explore Pumpkin Pastures, keep an eye out for a large ship. A few will spawn during the level, one of which could have the entrance to a room containing the Arch Haven map.

This ship could spawn in a variety of places throughout the level. Interestingly, it is possible for the ship to spawn along the main path whilst following objectives. Regardless, make sure you explore every nook and cranny of Pumpkin Pastures if you are struggling to find it.

How To Unlock Lower Temple

Despite being included in guides for the original launch of Minecraft Dungeons and being referenced in its files, Lower Temple was cut from the main game before release. However, when Mojang released the first paid expansion for the game, it also released a free update that included the Lower Temple level for all players.

To find the Lower Temple map, you must explore the Desert Temple level. When you reach the section after using the Golden Key, continue on whilst looking around the edges of the map. You should find a door leading to another area.

Enter the door to find the map for Lower Temple. However, you can’t just grab it immediately. First, you must activate three beacons around this area. Once all three have been activated, a bridge will form that allows you to take the map for Lower Temple, unlocking the secret level.

How To Unlock Underhalls

Underhalls is one of the easier secret levels to find, but it spawns in Highblock Halls, which is a harder level towards the end of the game.

When you first start Highblock Halls, go forward until you find that the path splits into sets of large stairs on either side. Go down the stairs and look between them. You may find a sealed wall with a shield on either side. Interact with one of the shields to unlock a hidden passageway. Go inside to find the map to the Underhalls, unlocking the secret level.

How To Unlock The Secret Cow Level

The final secret level in Minecraft Dungeons can only be unlocked once you have defeated the Arch-Illager on Default difficulty. After completing the game, you will be able to find Runes in each of the nine main levels.

Once you have found all the Runes, you can take them to a Church in your Camp to unlock the secret cow level.

General Tips For Finding Secret Levels

When hunting for any of the secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons, there are some general tips that you should keep in mind.

Keep Your Map On Screen

Whilst hunting around each level trying to find the secret map, keep your map up on the screen at all times. Although you cannot move if you bring up the big map, there is a general sketched outline that you can overlay on the screen whilst moving.

This might clutter up the screen a bit, but you will be able to see every hidden path as you explore. It will also mark any doors that you might have missed.

Check How Many Secrets Have Spawned

Hold down the map button to bring up the proper map, which will prevent you from moving. This map has another benefit: you can see how many secrets have spawned on the level.

Secrets in Minecraft Dungeons include different kinds of chests, such as Obsidian or Golden, and the secret levels that you are hunting for. When you bring up the big map, look in the bottom left corner to see a total of secrets that have spawned in after loading up a level. It will show the total you have found so far on this run as well as the number of secrets that have spawned.

This gives you the opportunity to see whether the secret level could have spawned in. If it displays 0/0, you can be certain that you won’t find the secret level. In this scenario, return to camp and restart the mission to try again. Likewise, if it shows 0/5 then you can be confident that you might find the secret level.

Explore Every Corner Of Each Level

With the sketched map up on the screen, explore every corner and path that doesn’t lead to the main objective. This is where you are most likely to unlock the secret levels, as they usually spawn away from the main path. This makes them harder to find unless you are actively searching for them.

Return To Camp

After you have found the secret level, don’t waste time finishing your mission. Hit pause and return to your camp. The secret level will still be unlocked, regardless of whether you finish the associated level or not. After searching Creeper Woods over and over, don’t force yourself to finish it again. Head back to camp and jump straight into the exciting secret level that you’ve just unlocked.

Players cannot manually change the difficulty in Phasmophobia. Instead, they will need to earn enough XP to unlock more difficult maps.

New indie horror co-op Phasmophobia drops players into the world of professional ghost hunting as they seek and collect Evidence that can help them identify the kind of creature haunting a home, hospital, school, or other building. Players have access to a variety of ghost hunting tools, like EMF readers, thermometers, and a spirit box that can allow them to sense and even hear the dead. This equipment can be used to gather evidence that will help the team identify the kind of ghost, and using the equipment to complete objectives can earn the team more money. They can use that money to purchase better equipment and tackle bigger buildings and harder challenges.

Of course, the ghosts in the game aren’t all friendly spirits just wanting to mind their own business. In fact, the majority of specters a player will encounter in the game are aggressive, and during their hunting phase, they will kill off members of the team if players aren’t careful. The ghosts can hear the player through their computer microphone, so even the slightest sound made while in hiding can tip off the ghost as to the player’s whereabouts. For this reason, and because the game more or less dumps the team into a haunted house without much help, players must begin with the Amateur difficulty settings. The unpredictability of the various ghost types even at the Amateur stages can pose its own challenges, but as players and teams improve, they can increase the difficulty and take their ghost hunting to more professional levels. Difficulty in Phasmophobia is tied to levels, both for the player’s character and the maps.

How to Change the Difficulty Settings in Phasmophobia

Right now, players can increase the game’s difficulty after getting the hang of the more Amateur stages, but this cannot be done manually. Difficulty is tied to stage maps. If players are looking for a bigger challenge, they will need to choose a different, more difficult map.

A team of beginner ghost hunters can’t choose a new map right away either. Instead, they will need to work on leveling up their characters. This, in turn, will unlock access to these higher difficulty levels.

Players will level up their characters by completing various objectives, outlined on the white board in the truck, and staying alive through the ghost’s hunting phases. They earn XP in addition to cash for completing the job, staying alive, and performing the required tasks.

Once players reach level 10, Intermediate difficulty maps unlock, and once players reach level 15, the Professional difficulty maps unlock. At that point, changing the difficulty is as easy as selecting a new map.

Intermediate and Professional maps are larger and take more time to explore to find the ghost room and determine the kind of ghost haunting the building. Due to their size, Intermediate and Professional maps cause the players to lose their sanity 50% and 100% more quickly, respectively. On Intermediate maps, players only have 3 minutes to set up their equipment before the ghost becomes active, and on Professional maps, the ghost is active immediately.

With all these added challenges, players may wonder what the point of playing on a harder difficulty might be. Apart from the challenge to test the group’s mettle and ghost-hunting prowess, completing Intermediate maps and successfully identifying the ghost pays twice as much cash and 50% more XP than Amateur maps, and completing Professional maps pays triple the cash and twice the XP of Amateur maps. It can also keep the game from becoming to bland, simplistic, or repetitive and ensure the experience stays scary for longer.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Source: Windows Central

Minecraft Dungeons has a bunch of hidden levels, that must be unlocked by finding a map in an adjacent main level. As part of the Jungle Awakens DLC update, Mojang added the brand new “Lower Temple” level, which was previously teased in some early marketing materials.

It’s not a massive level, but it has some cool new items including double crossbows and battle staffs and is filled with desert biome-style mobs, including husks and tribal skeletons. Here’s how to unlock it.

Go to the Desert Temple level. We unlocked this on Apocalypse difficulty, but it’s probably available on any tier.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Source: Windows Central

About a third of a way through the level, you’ll come upon a hallway that is filled with water and hieroglyphic designs on the walls. Turn left, and you should see an entrance to another section.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Source: Windows Central

Across the bridge is your map to the Lower Temple!

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Source: Windows Central

Previously this bridge contained a chest, so many of you may already be familiar with its whereabouts. It’s unclear whether the map spawns every time you enter the dungeon or not, but if it’s not there first time, give it another try.

The Jungle Awakens DLC is totally worth picking up, even if this Lower Temple level is free. Jungle Awakens contains three large new levels, a bunch of additional equipment, and new mobs and bosses to battle through. You can grab it on the Microsoft Store for $10 as part of the Hero Edition, or pick it up with Xbox Game Pass.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Underhalls in Minecraft Dungeons is another of the secret zones tucked away in the game. Whether you’re farming for emeralds or achievements, there’s a lot of really good loot to be plucked here. There area a bunch of secret levels too. And if you’re looking for more of a challenge, the game also features some uniquely challenging higher difficulty levels as well.

With all these hidden zones, there’s actually a fair bit of hunting you have to do find them. Each one involves hunting for a special map in a certain zone. It also usually involves a bunch of killing of mobs and navigating to traps. For Highblock Halls, you can unlock the secret level, Underhalls. The Underhalls in Minecraft Dungeons are pretty spooky, but lots of fun.

Keep in mind that you need to unlock these zones in order to get them to spawn properly. Some players are reporting that to unlock Arch Haven, you first need to unlock Soggy Caves. And to unlock the Underhalls in Minecraft Dungeons, you need to do those first two as well.

So head into the Highblock Halls level. Keep your eyes open for that first staircase. There’s a large chandelier above it, denoting the proper pathway. Head down until you find the stone wall with two shields mounted on it. The location of these two shields will change slightly during each run, so it won’t always be in the same place. The color of the shields will also change. Many players are reporting that the color is most often black and white. Interact with the shield on the left-hand side, and a crevice should open in the wall nearby.

This is the easiest of the secret levels to unlock. You don’t have to deal with any traps or mob ambushes to claim this map. Head out and complete the dungeon run to gain access to the Underhalls mission.

Difficulty in Minecraft is a big, important option, with a direct effect on many parts of the gameplay. In essence, difficulty allows the player (or in case of a server, the server owner) to choose how easy, or how hard, they want their gameplay experience to be.

While the difficulty setting changes many things, the most noticeable effect it has is on the enemies. As the difficulty the game is set to increases, the enemies begin to spawn at higher rates, and they become much, much more dangerous — at the hardest difficulties, certain enemies can even break down doors!

By default, Minecraft’s difficulty is set to Easy. However, this might not be something that the server owner wants — perhaps they want their game to be harder, or easier, or they want to remove enemies from the game altogether. Luckily, the difficulty of a Minecraft server can be changed at any time, to any other difficulty, and it’s quite easy!

The guide below outlines the different difficulties, as well as the steps needed to change the difficulty on a Minecraft server.

The Difficulty Levels

Minecraft comes with four difficulty levels: Peaceful, Easy, Normal, and Hard, and these can be changed at any time — either by the player in Singleplayer or by an operator on a server. The four difficulty levels are as follows:

Peaceful — Enemies can’t spawn. If an enemy is spawned forcefully, using an egg or a spawn command, they will instantly vanish upon spawning. Player health regenerates quickly; however, it’s still possible to die if your health is taken down to 0 — for example, if you fall down in lava. The hunger meter never depletes. If changing from any higher difficulty down to Peaceful, all hostile and neutral enemies will disappear.

Easy — Enemies spawn, but they deal less damage than they would on Normal or Hard. If the hunger meter depletes, a player’s health will tick down until they have 5 hearts left. Enemies like Cave Spiders can’t poison players, Zombies can’t break down doors, and enemies deal between 0.5 to 1 hearts of damage.

Normal — Enemies spawn, and deal between 1 and 1.5 hearts of damage. If the hunger meter depletes, a player’s health will tick down until they have 0.5 hearts left. Vindicators can break doors.

Hard — Enemies spawn, dealing greater damage than on Normal. If the hunger meter depletes, a player’s health will tick down until they die. Zombies can break wooden doors.

Changing Through Commands

The command /difficulty lets you change a Minecraft server’s difficulty on the fly, without any need for restarts.

Bear in mind that you need to be an operator on your server in order to use this command; otherwise, you won’t have permission on the server to use the command. Check out our guide on how to make yourself an operator here.

  1. Enter your Minecraft server.
  2. Open the chat, and type in the /difficulty command. Don’t send the command just yet, however!
  3. After /difficulty, type in which difficulty you’d like: Peaceful, Easy, Normal or Hard. For example, if you want to set your server’s difficulty to Hard, you’d type in /difficulty hard
  4. And that’s it! Your server’s difficulty is now set to the difficulty you chose.

Changing Through the Panel

If you’d like to change your difficulty without having to enter the server, you can do so using the server’s control panel. There are two ways to go about this. You can either issue the difficulty command using your server’s console, or change the difficulty in the configuration file.

Using the Console

  1. Open your server’s control panel.
  2. On the top left, click Console to bring up the server’s console.
  3. In the text entry box below the console, issue the difficulty command, together with the difficulty you’d like to set it to. For example, if you want to set your server’s difficulty to Hard, you’d type in difficulty hard and press Enter to issue the command.
  4. Make sure you’re not adding a / to the beginning of the command, as the console doesn’t recognise those.

Using the Config Files

  1. Open your server’s control panel.
  2. On the top left, click Config Files .
  3. Select Server Settings .
  4. Find the Difficulty field, third from the top, and set it to what you want the difficulty to be.

Conclusion

The difficulty of a Minecraft server is an important part of the experience, and knowing how to change it on the fly is important. Thankfully, as the guide has shown, it’s quite an easy and quick process, and you don’t even need to restart the server to do it!

Simply make sure you know which difficulty you want to set the server to, and the changes that difficulty brings with itself, then set the server to that difficulty following the guide above.

Start Your Minecraft Server

Get started with your own minecraft server in 5 min and start trying out these great features.

Underhall is one of the few hidden dungeon levels in Minecraft Dungeons players can find and explore, here’s how players can unlock it.

Minecraft Dungeons hides more secrets the farther players progress in the game. Underhall is but one of the few available to players, a dungeon full of lurking mobs waiting to defeat players and prevent them from making their way back out. Defeating them will award players with powerful weapons, armor, and artifacts, making it well worth the traversal.

Minecraft Dungeons released on Monday, May 26th, a simple and straight forward action-RPG with a bit of depth to it. Secrets are common and increase in quantity as players progress, but remain fairly attainable if players have the patience to find them. Here’s how players can find Underhall, and earn some of those powerful items.

How to Unlock Underhall in Minecraft Dungeons

Underhall is hidden within the second to last mission before facing the Archilleger, Highblock Halls. Locating this secret dungeon is a bit different as there isn’t a fairly noticeable entrance that screams “this is a dungeon” but is hidden rather well. After players start the level, oddly enough the dungeon is located along the main path, hidden quite clearly in plain sight. It’s easy to overlook things directly in front of the intended pathway, so missing it is quite easy as it appears quite early in the level if not the very next large room after the first. There is a wall with shields on either side beneath a ledge that players can drop down if they choose to ignore the stairs. Simply face the wall and walk toward the shield on the left and activate it when prompted. After players enter the dungeon, there will be a scroll somewhere nearby, unlocking Underhalls after picking it up. Find the exit, leave the dungeon, and finish the main level as normal.

Like Creepy Crypt and Soggy Cave, this secret level can be found on the “Default” story difficulty. So there are no prerequisites or conditions in order to unlock this secret level, aside from progressing through the main story and making it to Highblock Halls. Some of the level-specific gear drops available in Underhalls are maces, hammers, power bows, shroud armor, firecracker arrows, iron hide amulets, and totems of shielding. Hammers work very well with stunning enchantments as well as those that activate at the end of a weapon combo since hammers are a single hit combo. Totems of shielding are great for those who like to sit back while another character tanks, or for the tanking player to deflect any incoming projectiles while dealing with a parade of mobs that enter melee range. Farm secret levels for unique items as they drop more frequently and enjoy making builds that demolish mobs with extreme prejudice.

Minecraft Dungeons is available on Xbox, PS4, and PC

Minecraft servers have 4 levels of difficulty you can choose from Peaceful, Easy, Normal, and Hard.

Here’s a brief summary of each difficulty level and the differences between them:

  • Peaceful : Hostile mobs can not spawn naturally, except for a select few that do not deal damage to a player. Hostile mobs that try to spawn are removed from the game instantly. When switching to this difficulty level from any other level, hostile mobs are despawned. Player health is also restored much more rapidly at this level.
  • Easy : Hostile mobs will spawn at this level, but they’ll do less damage than they would at the Normal level. Player health will not decrease if they are starved.
  • Normal : Everything is standard at this level. Hostile mobs deal the standard damage, players’ health will deplete to 1 heart when they are starving, and villagers have a 1 in 2 chance of becoming a zombie when they are killed by one.
  • Hard : Hostile mobs cause more damage than they would at the Normal level, players can starve to death, and villagers will become zombies when they are killed by one. In addition, zombies can break through wooden doors and spawn more zombies when attacked by players.

You can adjust your server’s difficulty based on what you prefer. Below are the ways to do this:

CHANGING SERVER DIFFICULTY VIA MULTICRAFT

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

  1. Before making any changes to your server configuration files, it is very important to stop your server.
  2. On your Multicraft Panel (https://mc.shockbyte.com/), navigate to Files > Config Files.

CHANGING SERVER DIFFICULTY VIA COMMAND

You can also change your server’s difficulty level via command. You can either do the command in-game or through your server console.

Console Command

  • difficulty : View current server difficulty on your console.

In-Game Chat Command

  • /difficulty : View current server difficulty in-game.

Mitchell Smith

Managing Director @ Shockbyte

  • Minecraft server, difficulty, peaceful, easy, normal, hard, hardmod, hardmode, server difficulty, minecraft pc, minecraft, server.properties, Minecraft Pocket Edition, minecraft bedrock edition, Minecraft Java Edition
  • 34 Users Found This Useful

Related Articles

The Bukkit Config file has many options and settings that can be modified to change the behavior.

We have a video tutorial on how to configure your Minecraft server: The server.properties.

Minecraft servers have 5 game modes to choose from: Survival, Creative, Hardcore, and.

Creating custom commands is a feature that is available in the Multicraft panel. Custom commands.

We have a video tutorial for giving OP to a player: Important note: Players that you OP.

Learn how to find and unlock the hidden levels in Minecraft Dungeons so you can keep delving deeper.

Xbox Series X will be backwards compatible with ‘thousands’ of games at launch

Xbox Series X backwards compatibility will also add HDR support for 360 and OG Xbox games, with improved framerate.

I’ve never trusted Minecraft’s cubes. What secrets are those blocks hiding? The answer, as it happens, is a number of secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons. If you’ve already delved too greedily and deep through the campaign, you might want to know how to get a little extra. We getcha, so below we’ve put together a simple guide on how to unlock all secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons.

Unlock all secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft mapThere are five secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons!
© Mojang

There are five different secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons, and to unlock them you’ll need to explore the game’s core levels well. The secret missions hide powerful items that’ll give you an extra boost, making them well worth working through. Unlocking them involves finding maps hidden throughout the game. Below, we’ll take you through how to unlock all secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons so that you don’t miss out on any of the extra content hidden in the game.

Secret Level 1: Creepy Crypt

Location: Creeper Woods

You’ll need to hunt around the Creeper Woods, sticking to the left side until you find an optional pathway that leads off to the left. Follow this path until you reach a circular space and see a stone temple door with a switch on the floor next to it. Step on it and you can enter to find the map within.

Secret Level 2: Soggy Cave

Location: Soggy Swamp

This level can be a bit of a pain to find and may require multiple runs, but you will be able to get it eventually. Head through to the second area and start looking through the dungeons on the left side of the level. If you find an old ruin, you’re in the right place. Enter the caves and solve the puzzles inside to get access to this hidden level.

Secret Level 3: Arch Haven

Location: Pumpkin Pastures

To access the first secret level in Minecraft Dungeons, you need to explore the pirate ship located along an optional side path. Make your way to the lower level of the ship and find the map that’s in the back end of the room. You’ll be attacked by a throng of enemies here, but if you survive the assault you’ll get access to the Arch Haven level.

Secret Level 4: Underhalls

Location: Highblock Halls

Underhalls is a secret prison level in the Highblock Halls stage. Near the start of the level you should find some stairs that lead to a prominent pair of shields hanging on walls either side of a gap. Interact with the shields and the doorway between them will open up. There’s a map sitting on a pedestal inside this hidden room that’ll unlock the Underhalls secret level.

Secret Level 5: Moo?

Location: The lobby camp

By far the hardest level to unlock, getting access to this level you need to collect all 10 Runes hidden throughout the game. Before you can grab them, you need to have beaten the game on the basic difficulty to unlock the next level up. Once you’ve done that, make your way to the church that’s found near your campsite (over the springy pads then left into the woods). Interact with the dog painting inside the church, then head out and collect your runes. Return to the church after grabbing all the runes and you can interact with the golden button at the end to open a secret chamber with a map to the level.

And there you go! How to unlock all secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons. We hope you enjoy testing your party against these extra challenges and secure some rare loot!

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft mapBy Nikita On May 28, 2020

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

One secret level that you can find in Minecraft Dungeons is the Soggy Cave. In order to get to this level, you have to explore every nook and cranny of the map. If you want to know how to unlock the soggy cave entrance in Minecraft Dungeons, then this guide will give you some helpful tips for that.

Soggy Cave Secret Level Entrance

The key to finding the Soggy Cave entrance is to play the Soggy Swamps level and then locate a scroll. This scroll will be found in a mini dungeon anywhere on the Soggy Swamps level map. Keep looking for it and when you do, you will see a ‘New Location’ popping up on the screen.

Now, the thing is that since Minecraft Dungeons has so many randomly spawning elements, there is no guarantee of getting this here. One good tip is to look for the Secrets Found section when you open the map. If it shows zero/zero then you have not spawned the scroll, and if it shows any other number, luckily, you have a chance. This will end up saving a lot of your time, so make sure to do it.

There is also a chance that this Soggy caves level can be unlocked at higher difficulty levels such as the Adventure mode. Note that the map layout and enemies could be different in different playthroughs. But basically, what you need to do is explore dungeons carefully. Then if you see some ruins, know that you are in the right cave. Keep going and solve the puzzles that you come across.

This is how you can unlock the Soggy Cave level in Minecraft Dungeons. Most of the times, you will find the entrance on the left side of the map, so continue looking there. Once you find the Soggy Cave level, it opens up the perfect opportunity to farm loot there. So, don’t miss out.

Also, did you know that there’s a secret cow level in Minecraft Dungeons too? Check out our guide on how to unlock the secret cow level for more details.

Lower Temple is a secret mission in Minecraft Dungeons. It is a part of the Jungle Awakens free DLC, but since it’s a secret, you will have to solve a puzzle in order to unlock it. Even if you are well versed in the game, you might have trouble finding the entrance and figuring the puzzle out. That is why we’ve written this guide, to show you how to unlock Lower Temple secret mission in Minecraft Dungeons.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Minecraft Dungeons Lower Temple Secret Mission – How to Unlock

How to unlock Lower Temple secret level?

First of all, start the Desert Temple mission – the entrance is hidden there. Once you have the golden key, go to the locked door and open it. After that, you will reach a crossroads. Go down the left path, and you’ll end up in another section of the level, by way of a portal. If you open a map, you’ll notice there are four corridors branching away from the main hall. Go down them – there will be pillars you can interact with in three of them. Activate all three pillars, and a draw bridge will rise in the main hall, allowing you to cross the gap and reach the scroll that unlocks the Lower Temple secret mission.

Once you’ve returned to the camp, you will be able to access the Lower Temple level from the world map. It’s pretty much the same puzzle as the one that allows you to unlock Panda Plateau in the Dingy Jungle. Find sub-area, activate three switches, gain access to the scroll.

If you are having other issues with the Jungle Awakens DLC, we have written guides about topics as well, like the one on where to find the Vine Whip, or the one exlpaining the whole nasty bussiness surrounding Diamond Dust.

Terraria servers have 4 levels of difficulty you can choose from: Journey, Classic, Expert, and Master. Please note that server difficulties differ from character difficulties.

Here’s a brief summary of each difficulty level and the differences between them:

  • Journey: Terraria’s easiest/creative difficulty. Characters start with wings and improved tools. Characters can duplicate items, modify personal buffs, and toggle infection spread. Characters can also change global time, weather, enemy spawn rates, and difficulty. Please note that only Journey characters can connect to Journey worlds.
  • Classic: Terraria’s base difficulty, used as the benchmark for higher difficulties.
  • Expert:Enemies are more aggressive, have twice as much health, deal twice as much damage, and drop significantly more loot. Players drop 75% of their coins upon death, regenerate health 50% more slowly, defense blocks up to 75% damage received, and players have one additional accessory slot. Expert difficulty also features various expert-exclusive items with the Rainbow rarity.
  • Master: Terraria’s hardest difficulty. Enemies have 250% more health and deal 250% more damage. Players drop all coins upon death, defense blocks up to 100% of damage received, and players gain two additional accessory slots. Master difficulty features expert-exclusive items, as well as master-exclusive items with the Fiery Red rarity.

CHANGING THE DIFFICULTY OF A NEW WORLD

This section will show you how to change the difficulty of a new world prior to its generation. To change the difficulty of an existing world, follow the instructions in the section below.

  1. Before making any changes to your config files, make sure to Stop your server.
  2. On your control panel, navigate to Files > Config Files.
    How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map
  3. On the Config Files page, select Terraria Server Settings.
    How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map
  4. Change the value in the Difficulty field to the value representing the difficulty you wish to run on your server.
    • Classic: 0 (1 on Mobile)
    • Expert: 1 (2 on Mobile)
    • Master: 2 (3 on Mobile)
    • Journey: 3 (4 on Mobile)

    How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

  5. Restart your server for changes to apply

After restarting your server, simply generate a new world to take advantage of the difficulty changes.

CHANGING THE DIFFICULTY OF AN EXISTING WORLD

This section will show you how to change the difficulty of your existing Terraria world using an external program, TEdit. To change the difficulty of a new world before its generation, follow the instructions in the section above.

  1. Stop your server if it is running.
  2. Create a backup of your world. You can do this by navigating to Files > Backup on your server control panel. We have a guide on this here.
  3. Download your world to your computer. You can find our guide on doing this here.
  4. Download the TEdit program files ( TEdit-x.x.x.zip ) in the Assets section from: https://github.com/TEdit/Terraria-Map-Editor/releases/
  5. Unzip the TEdit program files.
  6. Open the folder named TEdit-x.x.x and run TEdit.exe .
  7. In TEdit, open your world by clicking File > Open at the top of the program and navigating to your Terraria world file. Your world file should end in .wld .
  8. Click the World Properties section on the right-hand side, if it isn’t selected already.
    How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map
  9. Scroll down to the Game Mode setting and change this to your difficulty of choice.
  10. Save your file by clicking File > Save. Once “World Save Complete” appears in the bottom right corner of the program, you can close TEdit.
  11. Upload the edited world to your server via FTP. Providing that you made a backup in step 1, it is safe to overwrite the existing world file on your server.

The world difficulty of your existing world has now been changed! You can now Start the server and play with your new difficulty.

New Player Help for Minecraft Dungeons features information that will help a player understand the basics of the game’s mechanics as well as recommended things to do before starting the game. The aim is to help the players to further understand the game and to know what it has to offer.

Minecraft Dungeons New Player Help

Minecraft Dungeons UI

  • Enchantment Points : This determines the number of Enchantment Points that are available for you to use to unlock and upgrade Enchantments . Enchantment Points are obtained by leveling up.
  • Inventory : Press [ I ] on the keyboard to open up your inventory to view the items that you have equipped as well as the ones you have acquired. Here, you can also change your equipment.
  • Artifacts : There are three slots available that can be used to equip artifacts. This shows the three artifacts that you have equipped. On PC, press its designated number such as 1, 2, and 3 to activate it
  • Souls : Below the Artifacts tab is a Souls Bar, souls are resources that are collected from killing enemies with a “Soul” weapon or artifact. Souls are needed to activate certain skills like the Corrupted Beacon.
  • Health Bar : On the center of the UI is a large heart. This determines the hero’s HP
  • Potion : The potion is an unlimited healing item that is used to replenish your own health. This only heals a small amount and has a cooldown.
  • Map : Open the map to view a layout of the location you are currently exploring. This can be useful to check the number of available chests and secrets.
  • Roll : This is a dodge roll that you can use to execute a combat roll to avoid enemy attacks or to escape sticky situations. This has a 2.5 sec. cooldown and will cause your hero to move slowly until the cooldown is done.
  • Player Level : At the bottom of the Potion, Map, and Roll is the player level. This determines your current level and the purple bar indicates the amount of experience you have, and once it reaches the end, you’ll level up.
  • Arrows : This shows the number of arrows you have in your quiver. Apart from that, it will also indicate the type of quiver it changes from using certain Artifacts.
  • Emeralds : Emeralds are green gems which are the in-game’s currency. This determines the number of Emeralds you have collected which you can use to trade with the Blacksmith and Wandering Trader.

Gameplay & Exploration

  • In Minecraft Dungeons, there are two different types of map levels. The first one is story-driven which focuses on the main campaign where dungeons or areas have fixed layouts, while the other is a secret level that are unlocked via the main campaign or as you progress the game.
  • When players use the Map back at their camp to view the different locations, you’ll notice that each location has difficulty tiers. If you are up for a challenge, you can change the difficulty that increases the number of mobs encountered, as well as the damage inflicted. However, completing a high-difficulty tier also increases the chance of obtaining high power-level gear from drops and rewards for completion.
  • Before you start a quest, make sure to take a look at the location interface. You’ll find information such as gear that drops in the area, the difficulty of the quest, and the recommended power level. Those that are labeled with a question mark determines that there is a number of undiscovered equipment such as Weapons, Armor, and Artifacts. Players will need to replay locations in order to obtain these undiscovered items from drops and completion rewards.
  • Make sure to always check the map to find secret areas of a location and dungeons that may contain valuable loot.
  • If ever you are lost, follow the gold marker on the main screen to find your next objective.
  • As you explore, you’ll encounter caves, houses, and buildings. Make sure to explore inside to find chests, breakable objects that may contain loot, as well as secrets that you can discover.
  • During your exploration, you can open up the Map to view the number of chests and secrets available for the location you are in.
  • Killing wildlife such as cows, sheep, and pigs will occasionally drop items that can help you in your exploration, such as healing items.
  • Some players may miss this, but when you are firing your bow, you can hold down the right mouse button to charge up your bow that releases a strong shot.
  • Watch out for the mage type follower of the Arch-Illager. You’ll want to take them out first to stop them from buffing the rest of the mobs attacks.
  • The TNT crates that are dropped by mobs can be a useful item to kill a large group of enemies. Throw it at them and make sure to stay out of its range to avoid getting hit by the explosion.
  • Speaking of TNT crates, you can stack them up and carry multiple crates.
  • There is fall damage, so avoid jumping off tall ledges. And if ever you fall from ledges, you will respawn with less health.
  • You can use your potion at any given time, but there is a cooldown. Apart from that, mobs and animals drop healing items.
  • Use your dodge roll to get out of sticky situations! It can be useful to avoid a group of enemies that have you cornered, there is a short cooldown, but it’s better than nothing!

Your Equipment

  • After completing a mission, players will return to the Camp. There’s a chest that you can open near the Blacksmith which contains a random reward, such as Armor, Weapons, Artifacts, or Emeralds.
  • Trading with the Blacksmith and the Wandering Trader will grant a chance of obtaining new equipment which will depend on your current level.
  • In conjunction with trading, the Blacksmith may occasionally craft a unique Armor or Weapon. Just make sure you have enough Emeralds to pay him.
  • Your power level is determined by the average level of all your equipped gear. So make sure to take away or replace an item that you have that has a low level.
  • As you progress through the game, you’ll most likely obtain gear drops similar to what you already have. Some may be low level while some are rare types that have a high level. Don’t be afraid to “Salvage” any unwanted gear to obtain Emeralds.
  • Speaking of “Salvaging”, if, by any chance, you’ve spent Enchantment Points to unlock or upgrade Enchantments, you can reacquire the number of points you’ve used, and spend it on whichever gear you want by Salvaging it.
  • The effects of an Enchantment can stack as long as you have the same type of enchantment unlocked for the specific Armor or Weapon.

Minecraft Dungeons has a selection of levels for you to progress through in thegame While these missions are all available after you beat the game and play it on a higher difficulty, you may have missed out on some of the secret levels in thegame in the Soaked Swamp, you can unlock the Soggy Caves, which has numerous puzzles in it you need to solve to receive the obsidian chest at the end. For Pumpkin Pastures, you can unlock the secret level, Arch Haven.

Before you try to unlock this secret mission, make sure to complete the Soggy Caves before doing it. Some players have actually said they can not experience it if they do not first progress and complete Soggy Caves.

The location for the unlock differs. It can be on the right side of the map, on the left, and it can be better to the start of Pumpkin Pastures or closer to completion of it. Since these maps do change almost every time you play, not every player will have the very same map, therefore the location changes. for everybody, it does include the very same unlock entryway. It’s on a pirate ship.

When you find a block-like pirate ship with an entryway, you will know you found it. Enter the area and you’ll go down to the lower levels of the ship. The map is on the other side of the space, and when you run over to get a series of gates comeup You then have to fight a crowd ofenemies You can acquire the Arch Haven mission quickly after doing this if you make it through.

Minecraft Dungeons all levels – There are five hidden secret levels that you can play in Minecraft Dungeons. Continue reading to learn how to complete them.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Minecraft Dungeons is the latest spinoff of the popular series from Mojang. The game offers a few secret levels that players can uncover with some exploration and guidance. And while a few of these levels are easy to find, others are a bit complicated and may take up some time. So, let us take a look at all the secret levels available in Minecraft Dungeons and go over how you can actually unlock them.

You will find a total of five secret levels that you can find in Minecraft Dungeons. Here’s a list of all the hidden missions with location details and a description of how you can go about unlocking it.

Minecraft Dungeons all levels

1. Creepy Crypt

Location: Creeper Woods

Creepy Crypt is a place where you can find emeralds and other loots. You need to search around the area and look for a hidden path towards the left on the map. The exact location cannot be described mainly because the path generator is random. Once you reach a circular area, you need to follow the path that leads you towards a temple. Once you get there, enter inside and look for a green map to unlock the level.

2. Arch Haven

Location: Pumpkin Pastures

Arch Haven is a seaside village island whose map can be accessed within Pumpkin Pastures. You will get the map for the hidden level located inside a small pirate ship. To locate the map, you need to head to the bottom of the ship. You should see the map across the other side of the room. You need to go through the enemies to unlock this level.

3. Moo?

Unlocking the 'Moo?' can be a tricky one. The first step to unlock this level is beating the game with difficulty set to default. Once you have completed the campaign, you need to visit a dog's portrait which is close to a church near the Camp area. Behind the dog's picture, you will see a golden button that has ten runes on top. You need to track all the runes and go back to the button and interact with it to unlock this level.

4. Soggy Swamp

Location: Soggy Cave

The Soggy Cave is one of the most difficult spots to find. You need to head towards the second part of this area and start looking for dungeons towards the left on the map. Once you find a few ruins, you will know that you have come to the right cave. After you have found the cave, you need to complete the puzzles to unlock the level.

5. Underhalls

Location: Highblock Halls

This is a relatively easier level to unlock as compared to others. You need to visit the Highblock Halls and look for a set of stairs at in the main hall. Head down the steps where you will find two shields hanging on a blank wall. Once you find it, you need to interact with one of the shields to open a secret passage. This will unlock the Underhalls level.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Minecraft Dungeons has an array of levels for you to progress through in the game. While these missions are all available after you beat the game and play it on a higher difficulty, you may have missed some of the secret levels in the game. For example, in the Soggy Swamp, you can unlock the Soggy Caves, which has several puzzles in it you need to solve to receive the obsidian chest at the end. For Highblock Halls, you can unlock the secret level, Underhalls.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

All you have to do is progress through the first portion of the Highblock Halls level until you reach the first staircase. The staircase you want to find should have a large chandelier above it, with two carpets on the upper floor. Make your way down the staircase, and at the base to it should be a stone wall with two shields on the wall. The shield on the right can sometimes be red, but they’re typically black and white. Approach the shield hanging on the left side of the wall, interact with it, and open the stonewall at the base of the stairs.

Proceed inside, and the map for Underhalls is waiting for you. Grab it, and the mission will now be unlocked for you for the rest of the game. There are no tricks or traps associated with this secret level.

Unlike the previous secret missions in Minecraft Dungeons, this one does not seem to rotate around the map or randomly show up. You can go about it the same method almost every time. The interactable shield appears to show up each time the level loads up, making it extremely easy to add to your collection of secret levels.

The first thing you need to do is to set up a launch map. It is basically just a map with an abundant resource that you can make anything (silicon is the most important) to launch to a different map. My personal launch map is 233 and 66 near nuclear production complex

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

launch pad set up near core

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

launch pad set up near resource

Keep in mind you will never know if the resource is enough or not so just launch all the resources on the map. The lauched resources also come with some delay (around a few minute) so make sure you set up the launch pad (only one needed and the rest of the launch pad in the same map will follow) as soon as you land on the attack map. The most important resources are silicone, lead, coal (if you can't find any source of power), and titanium respectively. The rest are either not really used or the first loadout is enough.

Second, you can launch to the attack map and the first thing you always need to do is find any source of power. Even if you bring coal to your attack map, you need to find a source of power in the map so it can self-sustain the power level once you set up a different launched map. But if you can't that's okay.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Here I use coal from the core to make power

The third thing is you need to look at the enemy core, so you can plan your attack. There are 3 things you should look into, the walls, the turrets, and the enemy spawn in the wave.

For the walls, there are 2 types of walls you need to beware of. Some use plastanium wall or phase wall. Phase wall will be annoyingly hard to destroy as it will reflect normal bullet so your unit will get hurt. Plastanium in the other hand is blocking energy type of weapon so you should really avoid that kind of unit. In short, I recommend laser type unit for phase wall and normal bullet type for plastanium wall.

For the turret, some maps really put anything they had in anti air turret such as scatter and salvo. For this kind of map of course you will need to use ground type unit. In lower difficulty, you will only need T3 unit such as Quasar to do the job as it's a laser based unit with an energy shield which a normal bullet can't penetrate. For higher difficulty, there will be a meltdown and even foreshadow. For this map, you should use the almighty Corvus to do the job. All you need is a single Corvus to laser all the power the enemy had so their meltdown and foreshadow would be shut down.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

in this "extreme" difficulty, the enemy uses a phase wall with a low tier turret so I will use Quasar

Last is the enemy spawn. They can be categorized into 2 types, air and ground. Sometimes they will get mixed but some maps really love just one type of unit. If you can figure it out, then you can plan your defense against their enemy spawn.

The first thing you need to build after power is defense. My recommendation would be a cyclone with metaglass ammo as it is not really expensive and time consuming, but also not really weak for ground and air units. Keep an eye on your power source, some air units will target the power source first as sometimes it locates closer to the enemy core.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

This is my simple defense for the first wave as I still collect info about enemy spawn

Next is the unit factory. The basic plan is you need a T3 unit either for pushing or to support yourself. I recommend if you attack a lower difficulty map you just need a T3 unit like Quasar or Fortress.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

This is my basic T3 setup, notice the overdrive dome in the bottom increasing any block speed to 250%

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

You can add more than 1 factory stacked like this, notice how I use Quasars to build faster

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

You also can make payload conveyor as a temporary storage for unit limit

But if the enemy is a high difficulty, the first unit you should make is Mega, It's the best support unit in my opinion. It can heal and damage unit with its weapon and it has 260% build speed compared to gamma, so if you command 8 unit with a total of 9 (including yourself as Mega) then that would be 2340% build speed. That means if normally Tetrative Reconstructor has 144s build time, with 9 mega it will be around 7s, that alone is insane in addition to its become a "moving free mender" when you're not build anything.

While waiting for the Mega, you can build the cryofluid factory, you maybe need around 10 or more cryofluid mixers with 20+ tanks for storing it for later. So by the time you've done making your cryo factory, there will be enough Mega to build the Tetrative Reconstructor. If there still time for you to make units besides Mega, I'd recommend you to make Quasar to defend against enemy spawn. Don't forget to manage your power balance by turn off any unnecessary block beside the Tetrative Reconstructor.

After the Corvus is done, it's time to take revenge. But be careful as Corvus is slow in moving and attacking. The enemy can spawn air units that will bomb your Corvus and it will be hard to destroy them as you move slowly. That's why you should command a few Quassar just to guard the Corvus as Quassar can attack air units and have a shield perfect for guarding.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

This is how my base look like in a higher difficulty map, notice the power management for a fire in the steam generator

All Advancements / Achievements List (2021) Check Out The Best Shaders Here! Read this Minecraft 2021 guide on all the available advancements and achievements you can earn within the game! Get gameplay tips on how to complete and unlock them, & more.

Share this result

All Advancements / Achievements List (2021) | Minecraft .

Copy the link and share

Advancement – Minecraft Wiki

four advancements, “how did we get here?”, “voluntary exile”, “hero of the village”, and “arbalistic” are hidden advancements, meaning that they cannot be viewed by the player until they have been unlocked, regardless if any one of its child advancements (any advancement after it, including all branches) have been unlocked, which would normally …

Share this result

Advancement – Minecraft Wiki

Copy the link and share

Top Results For All Hidden Advancements In Minecraft​

Hidden Advancements: "For God's sake, why .

On the 11th of May, 2017, Mojang released an update for minecraft that included the new hidden advancement ” How did we get here?”, which is obtained by having all naturally occuring status effects applied on the player at once.

Share this result

Hidden Advancements: "For God's Sake, Why .

Copy the link and share

Advancements in Minecraft- List of Advancements & How to Earn

Get all the details on advancements in Minecraft including a List of the Advancements in Minecraft, How to earn, How to view, FAQS & More in this simple step-by-step guide.

Share this result

Advancements In Minecraft- List Of Advancements & How To Earn

Copy the link and share

Trending Searches

Minecraft guide: Full list of Achievements in 'the Nether .

Despite this, Mojang Studios actually added a lot of Advancements specific to the Nether Update. including all the Achievements for the Bedrock Edition plus an additional six more.

Share this result

Minecraft Guide: Full List Of Achievements In 'the Nether .

Copy the link and share

Achievement – Minecraft Wiki

Crossbow Achievements (trophies on PlayStation 4) are a way to gradually guide new players into Minecraft and give them challenges to complete. In Java Edition, a system of advancements accomplishes this instead. There are 118 achievements in Bedrock Edition. Achievements are tracked per user account. They are not tracked separately per world; achievements earned in one world apply to all .

Share this result

Achievement – Minecraft Wiki

Copy the link and share

Achievements | Minecraft Bedrock Wiki | Fandom

Achievements are an in-game mechanic that was added in Update 0.15.0.They are a way to gradually guide new Players into Minecraft and give them challenges to complete.. Obtaining. Achievements can be obtained by completing certain challenges in Survival Mode.These challenges need to be done in a world which has never been opened in Creative Mode, and has not had Cheats enabled.

Share this result

Achievements | Minecraft Bedrock Wiki | Fandom

Copy the link and share

Unhidden Advancements Minecraft Data Pack

Some advancements are hidden and that can be a little annoying. This data pack unhides all hidden advancements (Arbalistic, Voluntary Exile, Hero of the Village, How Did We Get Here) so you can see every advancement without completing them.

Minecraft Dungeons is loaded with hidden secrets that players often overlook. This guide will detail some of the best ones.

Minecraft Dungeons recently released for PC and Xbox One and fans are lapping up the change of pace from the main title, getting to experience their favorite block-style world but in the enjoyable new form of a dungeon crawler. The game has been positively received by fans and critics alike and there is plenty more to look forward to.

With the recent announcement that DLC will be releasing soon in the form of the Jungle Awakens content in July, it’s clear there will be much more for fans to explore in the near future. However, there are likely a number of things that many players have yet to discover about the base game.

10 Secret Level: Creepy Crypt

Minecraft Dungeons is full of secrets, in particular – secret levels. One of the entrances to a hidden level is located inside of Creeper Woods. Make sure you explore all path ends that lead to the west and when you see a stone wall with two Redstone bricks adorning it, you’ve reached your goal.

This is the entrance to the Creepy Crypt secret level and all you have to do is press the button on the ground beside the Redstone bricks in order to open the hidden doorway. Of course, being procedurally generated, the levels change every time, so just be sure to check those “dead ends.”

9 Elusive Piggy Bank

Quite possibly one of the fandom’s favorite additions to the franchise with the release of Minecraft Dungeons is the elusive Piggy Bank. This is a pig with a chest strapped to its back that has a rare chance of appearing in a level. It will be stationary until you get too close or attack it, at which point it will attempt to run away and can disappear entirely if not caught.

The Piggy Bank always drops emeralds for players but also has a chance of dropping some weapons or armor loot, so be sure to hunt this little piggy down.

8 Secret Level: Soggy Cave

Another secret level is hidden in Soggy Swamp, so prepare to get your boots wet. However, this level is going to be harder to get to than the last as it only appears under certain conditions. To make sure you’re not wasting your time, you need to open your map and check in the bottom left where it tells you how many secrets and chests are hidden in the level, as well as how many you have found.

The Soggy Cave entrance will only appear when there are two secrets to be found in the level and is generally found to the west of the map, normally in the latter part of the level. You’re looking for a stone staircase that leads down to a dungeon entrance.

7 Invisible Chests

The main goal with any dungeon crawler is the loot, of course. Now while you’re always guaranteed an awesome chest at the end of completing a level, there are more chests hidden throughout the levels for you to get your hands on. Some are in plain sight, some are hidden behind walls or trees, some ride on the back pigs, and others are completely invisible.

These invisible chests are the red chests (like the ones on Piggy Bank) and will only appear when you get close to them. These invisible chests don’t contribute to the chest count on the map overview. Happy hunting!

6 Secret Level: Arch Haven

The next secret level that you’ll want to track down is hidden in Pumpkin Pastures. You’re looking for a small ship that is anchored on the coast somewhere, usually found in the first half of the level. The ship has a doorway aboard, which when entered will unlock the Arch Haven level.

Due to the procedurally generated nature of the game, it can take a while to get a level map that contains the ship, but just keep trying. You’ll get there eventually.

5 Rare Diamond Sword

One of the most iconic and most coveted items within the Minecraft franchise is the diamond sword, so players assumed that this beauty would feature in Minecraft Dungeons. Of course, they’re not wrong, but many fans may have started to question its existence as it is a rare find.

There is a low chance of it dropping on the following levels: Creeper Woods, Creepy Crypt, and Pumpkin Pastures, regardless of difficulty. There is also a very small chance that it can be obtained via the Blacksmith in the camp.

4 Secret Level: Underhalls

The next secret stop on your adventure is hidden in Highblock Halls. Because this secret entrance spawns near the beginning of the level, it’s relatively easy to find as you spend less time grinding to find it, not to mention its fairly common spawn rate.

Continue through the level until you pass through the main hall and find a set of stairs, at the bottom of which you are looking for a set of two shields hanging on the wall. Interact with one of the shields to open up a secret passageway that will unlock the new Underhalls level.

3 Rare Iron Golem Companion

The Iron Golem companion is no secret, after all, there is a trophy/achievement tied to having summoned all three companions: the wolf, the llama, and the Iron Golem. The secret lies in how to get the Golem Kit, the item required to summon this stone guardian, with many players left feeling that they just aren’t lucky when it comes to the random loot.

The truth is, this is the hardest companion to obtain as it won’t ever appear in your first play-through, or even your second for that matter. You need to complete the game twice in order to unlock the Apocalypse mode and from then on, you can get hunting for the Iron Golem. You have a chance of finding the Golem Kit in Pumpkin Pastures while on Apocalypse difficulty mode. Good luck!

2 Secret Level: Cow Level

The secret of all secrets when it comes to Minecraft Dungeons is the secret cow level. Unlocking this area will likely be the most time-consuming chore you will undertake, as in order to reach it you have to collect nine runes, all of which are hidden inside the nine main missions.

To get to this level though you’ll need to complete the game on default difficulty first, after which you’ll find that the base camp has a newly accessible area in the south-east corner. Go across the piston pads and continue onwards looking for a path hidden by trees that goes south. This path leads to a church and inside you will find a wall with strange runes, the first of which is lit when you discover the church and the nine additional slots are left waiting. This is where you’ll need to deposit the runes you find.

1 Diablo Reference

The great thing about the secret cow level (called “Moo?”) is that its existence is a direct reference to the fan-favorite dungeon crawler Diablo 2. This super-secret level is full of angry Mooshroom cow enemies for you to destroy and at the end of the level, the Mooshroom Monstrosity boss awaits you.

This is a clever tribute delivered from a new dungeon crawler to a veteran franchise, as Diablo 2 also included a secret cow level. Though the first cow level appeared in Diablo 2, the concept of it actually began with Diablo when a fan rumor circulated about a secret cow level existing. Blizzard was so amused by this that the company included it in its next two Diablo titles.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

If you’ve been playing Minecraft Dungeons recently, you may have discovered that there are a couple of secret levels that can be uncovered in addition to the main story missions. Some of these levels are easy to find, while others can be a bit complicated. In this guide, we are going to go over how to unlock every Minecraft Dungeons secret level.

How to Unlock All Secret Levels in Minecraft Dungeons

In Minecraft Dungeons, players are no longer focused on crafting and gathering materials, but instead are busy exploring randomly generated dungeons. With a major focus on the main story mode, you’ll likely want to play through all of the Minecraft Dungeons’ secret levels so you can gather some extra items to help you through the main levels.

Related: How to Get a Pet Chicken

There are five secret levels in Minecraft Dungeons. In the list below, we’ve detailed each of the hidden missions, as well as their location and a brief description of how to unlock it.

You’ll find the map for the hidden level located on a pirate ship. Head to the bottom of the ship and look for the map on the other side of the room. Survive the horde of enemies to unlock the Arch Haven level.

Search around Creepy Crypt until you see a hidden path on the left side of your screen, it should lead to a circular area. Follow the path until you reach a temple and then press the button to enter. Once inside, locate the green map to unlock the Creepy Crypt level.

This one is tough. First, beat the game on default difficulty. Then visit a dog painting located by the church near camp. Track down all ten hidden rune locations and then head back to the church and interact with a special button to unlock the Moo? level.

Make your way to the second part of the Soggy Cave area and begin exploring the dungeons on the left side of your screen. You’ll know you’re in the right cave if you come across some ruins, if not, keep looking. When you’re in the right cave. Continue on and complete both of the puzzles to unlock the Soggy Cave level.

Look for a set of stairs at the beginning of the level. Head down the steps and look for a shield on the wall. When you find the shield, interact with the shield to open up a secret tunnel that will unlock the Underhalls level.

It’s worth mentioning that the levels in Minecraft Dungeons are randomly generated, which means that it’s tough to share the exact location of every secret level entrance. However, if you follow the table above, you should have a pretty good idea of what you’re looking for.

If you’re having trouble, it may be worth inviting some friends to your game and playing on split-screen so that you have multiple people looking for the entrances. Additionally, some are going to be easier to find than others. Specifically, the Moo? secret level is going to be the hardest to unlock because you have to beat the game and track down 10 hidden runes.

If you need more help with Minecraft Dungeons, be sure to check out some of our other guides listed below or check back to our homepage.

  • How Long is Minecraft Dungeons?
  • All Minecraft Dungeons Achievements
  • Is Minecraft Dungeons Coming to iOS and Android Devices?

Having trouble finding one of the secret levels? Give us a shout on Twitter or Facebook and we will try our best to help!

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

Minecraft Dungeons is a dungeon crawler-type game which has gained a large amount of popularity, Minecraft Dungeons is available on a variety of systems including PC, Nintendo Switch, Playstation 4 and Xbox One.

This large variety allows virtually any gamer to access this game, In Minecraft Dungeons, players Unite, Fight and Survive through the various dungeons.

Minecraft Dungeons recently released its first DLC, The Jungle Awakens, which offers new levels and even a secret level that can be unlocked for more loot!

The secret level is called the Lower Temple level. The first step to unlocking this level is to go to the Desert Temple level. On the Desert Temple level, you can unlock the Lower Temple level at any difficulty so players can play through this secret level at any difficulty.

The second step is to find the golden key and go to the locked door and open it. Going through the doorway, you’ll see a crossroads, and players should take the left path. Following the left path, you’ll end up going through the portal to another section of the level.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

After that, you’ll see four pillars branching away from the main hall, and after activating three of the four pillars, a draw bridge will rise in the main hall.

This bridge allows you to cross the gap and reach the scroll, which unlocks the Lower Temple secret mission.

How to unlock the difficulty of a minecraft map

The difference in difficulty changes what gear the player can receive, at Default the player items can range from Battlestaff, Shock Powder, Trickbow, and even an Iron Hide Amulet.

On Adventure difficulty, many of the items stay the same, but two new items are added. These items include the Ghost Cloak and Dual Crossbows.

If players complete the Lost Temple level at the highest difficulty, the items they can receive can range from all the weapons on the adventure difficulty with another item added, that item is the Katana.

This means that if players want the Katana, which has an overall power of 74, then they’ll need to complete the Lost Temple level on the Apocalypse difficulty.

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

The Amazon Echo is the flagship Alexa device and currently the only Echo model with a screen. It’s easily recognizable and has been featured in television and online content many times.

The Amazon Echo Show was introduced relatively recently. It retained all the features of the flagship Echo model, while adding a touchscreen and other functionalities to the table. This perfectly justifies the heftier price tag.

However, many users have complained about the incessant stream of tips and things to try that appear on the Echo Show’s screen around the clock. Let’s see what can be done about it.

Can You Remove the Tips?

The first thing that you need to make peace with when it comes to the Echo Show is that you’ll frequently see tips on the main screen. Essentially, the device will encourage you to try saying certain phrases which can be useful in the beginning, but you’ll grow out of it very soon.

So, how can you get rid of this? Unfortunately, you can’t. These tips are there to stay and have been somewhat of a controversy online. It’s a frustrating feature that Amazon is likely working on fixing.

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

Another annoying part of your Echo Show home screen is likely going to be the “Discover More with Alexa” bar. Fortunately, this feature can be easily turned off. Just swipe down from the top of the screen and tap the gear icon. From this menu, go to Home Screen, then Home Content, and you’ll see the Discovery option. Turn it off and you’ll no longer see the “Discover More with Alexa” bar.

From the Home Screen menu, go to Home Cards. From here, you’ll get to disable a lot of potentially unnecessary info and notifications that you may be receiving on your Echo Show. You can turn off Notifications, Upcoming Events, Drop In, Trending Topics, etc. Again, it would be nice to see a new entry called “Tips” or “Hints” here that you can turn off. Now, let’s see what else you can do to make your Echo Show experience better.

Connect the Calendar

You are probably using your phone’s calendar to stay organized. It has been doing a good job so far and your life has probably become much more structured since you’ve gotten serious about your calendar. However, having that exact calendar on your Echo Show device can boost your organization skills and make everything more accessible, merely because you’ll have Alexa by your side.

Importing the calendar is an easy process that takes a few minutes. Just swipe down from the upper area of the screen and tap the gear icon. Find the Calendar option and select it. Now, select the calendar that you’re using (Gmail, Outlook, Office 365, iCloud, etc.), enter the login info, and perform the two-factor authentication if prompted.

So, what benefits does it bring to the table? Well, if you can simply say “Alexa, what is my next appointment” and Alexa will tell you the first upcoming item on your calendar. Say “Alexa, what does my week look like,” and Alexa will describe the next 4 calendar items and ask you whether you’d like to hear more. Additionally, you can use voice commands to add calendar items, remove them, edit your entries, and more.

Customize the Home Screen Pictures

Echo Show cycles through stock background images by default. Some users prefer this, a depersonalized, although stylistic and inspirational photo collage on their Echo Show’s Home screen. However, if you want to add your own photos or album, you can do it via the Prime Photos website or using the Alexa app on your smartphone or tablet.

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

If you are subscribed to Prime Photos, simply create an album on it, open the Settings menu on the Echo Show device, go to Home Screen, Background, and tap Prime Photos. Alternatively, select Alexa app instead of Prime Photos from the menu. Then, run the Alexa app on your phone/tablet, go to Settings, and find Your Echo Show on the list of offered devices. Now, simply tap Home Screen Background and upload a photo from your phone.

A Voice Tip

For some reason, Amazon hasn’t made this part very obvious: if you are inside a task or a skill and want to get out, you can’t just press the “back” button. You need to say “Alexa, go home,” in order to do it. At no point does the Echo Show give you this tip. Also, you can say “Alexa, turn off the screen,” to make the screen go dark.

Echo Show Tips

These are some of the more basic Echo Show tips for you to make the most out of. Keep in mind that there is plenty more to learn about with the Echo Show.

Do you have some additional tips for Echo Show users? Are you experiencing any problems with it? How do you feel about being unable to turn off tips? Feel free to hit the comments section below.

There are times when it’s necessary to remove a device from Amazon Alexa, whether you’re troubleshooting a smart home device or upgrading to newer hardware. And this can be important — it not only removes clutter from your device list, but protects your data if you’re transferring a device to someone else. If you’re eager to remove a device from Alexa, you need to follow the steps below in the Alexa app for Android or iOS.

QUICK ANSWER

To remove a device from Alexa, open the Alexa app, tap the Devices tab, then find the device you're trying to remove. You can delete most devices by selecting the gear icon within their controls and then the trash can. However, to remove Echo/Alexa speakers and displays, you'll have to choose Deregister from a product's Device Settings page.

JUMP TO KEY SECTIONS

How to remove most non-Echo devices from Alexa

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

Before you begin, be sure that you’re at home, connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your devices, and have the latest version of the Alexa app on your phone or tablet. The experience is the same for Android and iOS. Once you’re ready, follow the steps below to remove a device from Alexa. This applies to most non-Echo devices, meaning things that aren’t Alexa-equipped speakers or displays.

  • Launch the Alexa app.
  • Open the Devices tab in the bottom right.
  • Select the category of device you want to remove from the list (e.g., Lights, Plugs, etc.).
  • Choose the specific device you want to remove.
  • Tap the gear icon in the upper right.
  • Tap the trash can icon in the upper right to remove a device. It may take a few seconds to disappear once you’ve confirmed your choice.

How to remove an Echo/Alexa speaker or display from your Alexa setup

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

There’s a slightly different procedure for removing an Echo/Alexa speaker or display from your setup, as they’re connected to Amazon services and remember various preferences. You need to delink and delete them from your account.

Prevent your Echo from listening in or saving your conversations

  • Shoreline Community College
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Amazon
    • Smart Home: Alexa & Amazon Echo

    What to Know

    • Press the microphone button on your Echo device to immediately stop Alexa from listening.
    • When the button or indicator light is red, it means Alexa is no longer listening.
    • Stop recordings being sent to Amazon: Settings in Alexa app > Alexa privacy > Manage your Alexa data > Don't Save recordings.

    This article explains how to stop Amazon Alexa from listening to you through your Echo devices, including instructions to disable the microphone temporarily and how to prevent Alexa from sending recordings to Amazon workers for analysis.

    Is Alexa Always Listening?

    Echo devices constantly monitor input from the microphone for the wake word. That means Alexa is effectively always listening to everything within range of the Echo microphone array. While that raises some issues regarding Alexa data privacy, it’s necessary to fix these devices’ core functionality. If it weren’t always listening, it wouldn’t be able to hear its wake word and respond to your commands.

    If you don’t want Alexa to listen in all the time, you can switch off the microphone on your Echo device. The problem with this option is it prevents you from using the Echo device. If you want to use it, you have to tap the microphone button again physically, say the device’s wake word and the command or question you want it to execute, and then press the mute button again.

    Does Alexa Record Conversations?

    Alexa regularly records your commands and uploads the audio files to Amazon for analysis, refining, and other purposes. It’s technically only supposed to do this with commands and questions following the wake word. Still, anyone who has used an Echo device for any amount of time will know Alexa tends to misinterpret random snippets of unrelated conversations as its wake word.

    While Alexa is always listening, it isn’t constantly recording, and it doesn't record conversations. However, it definitely can record conversations accidentally if it thinks it hears its wake word. By default, these snippets are uploaded to Amazon’s servers right alongside actual commands and questions.

    How to Stop Alexa From Listening

    The fastest way to stop Alexa from listening is to shut off the microphone. You have to do this manually on each Echo device you want to prevent from listening, and you can only reverse it manually. There is no voice command to disable an Echo’s microphone.

    Here’s how to stop Alexa from listening:

    Locate the microphone button on your Alexa device.

    Jeremy Laukkonen / Lifewire

    The button will look like a microphone with a strike through it or a circle with a strike through it.

    Press the microphone button.

    Verify a short tone plays, and the indicator light has turned red.

    Jeremy Laukkonen / Lifewire

    As long as the indicator light remains solid red, it means the microphone is off, and Alexa isn’t listening.

    Jeremy Laukkonen / Lifewire

    Most Echo devices have a circular indicator light on the top or base. Echo devices that have a screen will instead show a red line at the bottom of the screen.

    If you want to use your Alexa, press the microphone button so it is no longer red, say the wake word and command or question, then press the microphone button again.

    How to Stop Alexa From Uploading Conversations

    Suppose you want to use your Alexa without pushing the microphone button all the time, but you don’t like the idea of people listening to your commands, questions, and conversations. In that case, you can disable the upload function from within the Alexa app.

    Your Alexa doesn’t have the processing power to understand and respond to questions and commands independently. It records and uploads every question or command you pose to Amazon’s servers for processing. There is no way to prevent that. By performing the following steps, you will instruct Amazon to delete your recordings immediately after processing and never to provide them to human workers for analysis.

    Open the Alexa app, and tap More.

    Tap Settings.

    Tap Alexa Privacy.

    Tap Manage Your Alexa Data.

    Tap Choose how long to save recordings.

    Select Don’t save recordings and tap Confirm.

    Scroll down to the Help improve Alexa section, and switch the Use of voice recordings toggle to the off position.

    Tap TURN OFF.

    If you use Alexa to send messages, switch the toggle or toggles in the Use messages to improve transcription section off as well.

    Unfortunately, this feature can't be disabled, although many users have expressed annoyance about it. There are third-party tools that claim to solve the issue on Windows devices, but always be careful when downloading software.

    You can't get Alexa to completely ignore your kids, but you can set parental controls to stop your kids from making unauthorized purchases. In the Alexa app, tap More (three lines) > Settings > Account Settings > Voice Purchasing > enable Purchase Confirmation. Then, select Kids Skills Purchasing > turn on the Purchases Require Approval toggle.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Smart speakers with voice assistants built-in are extremely handy, whether you want to hear your appointments for the day, get a news update or control your smart home gadgets with your voice.

    But alongside these benefits come privacy concerns. After all, the smart speaker is listening for you to utter “Alexa” and records your request once you say the wake word so it can be processed and correctly responded to. Some of these recordings are shared with Amazon, which listens to and transcribes them, feeding back to Alexa so it can respond better to commands.

    If this makes you feel uneasy, then it’s time to change your Alexa privacy settings. From reviewing the recordings to adjust how long they’re kept for (if at all), here’s everything you need to know.

    How to review your voice recordings

    You can go back and listen to Alexa’s recordings of your requests at any point using the Alexa app. From the More menu, select Settings and Alexa Privacy. Now choose Review Voice History. You’ll see a list of all the recordings Alexa has made. Tap the drop down menu to the right of the recording to play it back and see the response Alexa issued.

    Depending how long you’ve had your Echo smart speakers, there may be a long list of recordings, but they can be filtered by date and device (if you have multiple Amazon smart speakers in your home) from the top of the screen. You can also give Alexa a thumbs up or thumbs down if it answered your request correctly, or use the trash can icon to delete the recording, from here too.

    Using the phrase “Alexa, what did I last say” with an Echo smart speaker or display will result in Alexa repeating what it thinks you said rather than replaying the recording. However, this only works within one minute of the last command.

    How to delete your voice recordings

    You can easily delete the most recent recording by saying “Alexa, delete what I just said”. This will remove any recordings made in the last ten minutes. Alternatively, “Alexa, delete what I said today” will remove all of the recordings from the same day and “Alexa, delete everything I’ve ever said” will purge your entire recording history.

    You can also use the Alexa app to delete your recordings. Once again from the More menu, select Settings and Alexa Privacy, followed by Review Voice History. You can open the individual recordings and use the trash can icon to delete the recording. Alternatively, select Delete All Recordings from the top of the screen under the filters. If you filter the recording by different durations, the Delete All option will change accordingly. Delete All Recordings from the Last Seven Days, for example.

    Choose how long your voice recordings are saved for

    The Alexa app also lets you assign a set period recording are saved for before they are deleted. Head to More, and then choose Settings followed by Alexa Privacy. Now select Manage Your Alexa Data. Choose from 18 months, three months or opt not to store any recordings, or to store everything until manually deleted. It’s worth noting that Amazon claims deleting recordings may degrade Alexa’s ability to understand and respond.

    Stop your recordings being used in Alexa development

    In the same section of the Alexa app, you can opt-out of having Amazon use your voice recordings to develop new features and improve Alexa’s speech recognition. Under the heading marked Help Improve Alexa, toggle the slider next to Use of Voice Recordings to the off position if you want to opt-out.

    If you use Alexa to send messages, these are also used by Amazon to improve transcription accuracy. If you want to opt-out of this programme too, use the slider under Use Messages to Improve Transcriptions. If you’ve got more than one user assigned to your Echo smart speakers, then you’ll need to use the slider for each person.

    How to mute Alexa

    Every Echo smart speaker or display has a mute button that stops Alexa listening to you by cutting the power to the microphone. When the Mute button – which has a symbol of a microphone with a line through it – has been pushed, Alexa’s status light glows red. However, you can’t currently ask Alexa to mute the microphone.

    How to delete Alexa’s smart home device history

    If you have any smart home gadgets in your property that are linked to your Amazon Echo smart speaker, Alexa will receive information from these devices. For example, it’ll know whether a smart plug is currently turned on or off, while it’ll have access to the current and set temperatures from any smart thermostats you have. It stores all this information but you can delete it from the Alexa app. Tap More, and then choose Settings followed by Alexa Privacy. Now select Manage Smart Home Device History and press Delete Smart Home Devices History.

    Revoke permissions from Alexa Skills

    Skills are third-party apps for Alexa that improves its capabilities – whether that’s interacting with different smart home devices, making lists or playing games with you. However, skills often require access to personal information such as your address, mobile number or email address.

    Still, if you change your mind and feel unhappy about these skills having that information, you can remove their access to it from the Alexa app. Select More, and then choose Settings followed by Alexa Privacy. Now choose Manage Skill Permissions.

    You’ll be presented with a list of different permission, eg Postcode, street address, mobile number etc. Press the drop-down menu to the right of these and then use the toggle to remove the permission.

    You can also remove a skill completely by asking Alexa to disable the skill or from the Alexa app. Select More, and then choose Skills & Games. Tap the skill you want to remove and then press Disable Skill.

    Carrie-Ann Skinner is Homes Editor at TechRadar, and has more than two decades of experience in both online and print journalism, with 13 years of that spent covering all-things tech. Carrie specializes in smart home devices such as smart plugs and smart lights, as well as large and small appliances including vacuum cleaners, air fryers, stand mixers, and coffee machines.

    When she’s not discovering the next must-have gadget for the home, Carrie can be found cooking up a storm in her kitchen, and is particularly passionate about baking, often rustling up tasty cakes and bread.

    We’ll show you all three ways to enable an Alexa skill on your Amazon Echo.

    Amazon Alexa is great by itself, but the service gets even better once you begin loading up skills onto it. But how do you enable Alexa skills, and what’s the best way to do it?

    Let’s explore the three main ways you can activate an Alexa skill.

    1. Activating Alexa Skills Via the App

    If you’d like to start browsing for skills from your phone, you can do so via the Alexa app for iOS or Android. You need this app to set up an Echo device, so the app should still be lurking on your phone since the installation. You may even have made Alexa your default Android voice assistant since then.

    Open up the app and tap on More at the bottom right, then tap on Skills & Games. You’ll see a bunch of skills pop up that you can browse through at your leisure.

    You can refine which skills you see via the tabs at the top. Discover gives you a handpicked selection of skills, whether it’s from the Alexa staff or the hottest new features for Alexa.

    If you have something in mind, Categories is an excellent place to start. This section lets you search skills depending on what they’re designed to do, such as games, productivity tools, and skills that will help you get into reading.

    Your Skills is where you can check out all the skills you’ve installed. If this is your first time installing skills with Alexa, this page will be a little sparse. However, as you begin loading up Alexa with skills, it will be worth returning here in the future to manage them.

    If you like the look of a skill, tap on it, then tap on Enable To Use.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    In a previous article, we explained how to connect your Spotify account to your Amazon Echo Dot smart speaker, as well as other Amazon smart devices. Well, in this article, we’ll be showing you how to do the opposite – how to disconnect your Spotify account from Alexa and its smart devices. There are many reasons any one would want to disconnect their Spotify account from Alexa and Amazon Echo devices; could be because you’ve previously connected to a different Amazon account, or they no longer use Spotify for music streaming. Whatever the reason is, here’s how to disconnect your Spotify account from Alexa and its Echo smart devices. You can do this via the Alexa app or via Spotify’s website.

    Disconnect Your Spotify Account From the Alexa App

    • Open the Alexa on your mobile app
    • Tap Settings.
    • Then, under Alexa Preferences, tap Music & Podcasts.
    • There, you will find a lists all music streaming services currently connected to your Alexa app (you will also find a Link New Service option to link another streaming account), find and tap Spotify.
    • Tap the Disable Skill button on the Spotify details page.
    • Finally, tap disable on the confirmation page.

    Disconnect Your Spotify Account From Spotify Web

    • From your preferred web browser on either Mac or a windows PC, navigate to Spotify’s website and log in with your Spotify account.
    • Tap on the Profile icon (with your name). Its at the top-right corner of your screen. Then select Account.
    • Scroll down to the bottom and tap Apps from the left side.
    • A list of all the apps with access to your Spotify account will be displayed, Find Alexa and then click Remove Access.

    There you have it. That’s how to disconnect your Soptify account from Alexa. However, if, at any point, you change your mind, here’s how to connect your Spotify back to Alexa. Also, you should check out how to change Alexa Wake Word and Voice

    With police asking Amazon to turn over data sent from an Alexa-powered Echo speaker, here’s how to manage your Alexa history and recordings.

    Worried that Alexa might be holding onto your conversations longer than it should? Amazon’s making it easier to delete conversations its voice-powered digital Echo speakers might have recorded — and you can do it all with the sound of your own voice.

    At the same time it announced a new series of Echo devices, Amazon also launched updates to its Alexa Privacy Hub that provides explanations on Alexa privacy controls as well as access to your settings. There are also brand new voice commands that give you immediate control over Alexa recordings.

    Fears about Alexa-based smart speakers sending private conversations are common. Amazon VP of public policy Brian Huseman confirmed expectations about how long the company keeps recordings, telling senator Chris Coons (D-DE) that “We retain customers’ voice recordings and transcripts until the customer chooses to delete them.”

    How to delete Alexa conversations with your voice

    If you really want to make sure that Alexa isn’t keeping a recording of what you’ve said, you can take advantage of a voice control that erases everything you’ve said that day. Say “Alexa, delete everything I said today,” and anything recorded between midnight and the moment you utter that command will be erased.

    You’ll have to opt into the feature to be able to delete conversations by voice. In the Alexa app, go to Settings, and select Alexa Account, then Alexa Privacy, and finally Review Voice History. From there, you can toggle on the “Enable Deletion by Voice” feature.

    You can also say, “Alexa, delete what I just said” to erase your last request to the voice assistant.

    How to turn on auto-delete for Alexa recordings

    You can arrange your Alexa history to delete automatically. In the Alexa app, go to Settings > Alexa Privacy > Manage Your Alexa Data. Under ‘Manage your voice recordings,’ you can use the ‘Automatically delete recordings’ toggle to make your recordings delete after 3 or 18 months.

    How to clear your Alexa history

    If you’re uncomfortable with the idea of leaving around old voice recordings, there’s an old-school way to clear the data on your Alexa devices, though it involves a bit of tapping. Before you start deleting, remember that you’re essentially wiping the AI’s specialized memory, as it’s retaining this information to better serve you.

    Still, here’s how to clear your Alexa history and delete recordings.

    Step 1: Open the Alexa app on your smartphone and tap the menu button to open the sidebar. Select Settings.

    Step 2: Select Alexa Privacy.

    Step 3: Select Review Voice History. Here you can enable and disable voice commands for deleting voice recordings, and see audio recordings retained by your device.

    Step 4: Select a recording.

    Step 5: Select Delete Selected Recordings. If you want to scrub Alexa clean of all recordings, tap Today, select All History and tap Delete All Recordings for All History.

    Or you could visit Amazon’s Content and Devices page to erase all of your recordings at once. From there, select Your Devices, click on the Alexa device you want to clean up and select Manage Voice Recordings. Select the option that allows you to delete everything.

    MORE: For more Alexa-related tips, tricks, and how-tos, check out our complete guide to Alexa.

    Henry is a senior editor at Tom’s Guide covering streaming media, laptops and all things Apple, reviewing devices and services for the past seven years. Prior to joining Tom’s Guide, he reviewed software and hardware for TechRadar Pro, and interviewed artists for Patek Philippe International Magazine. He’s also covered the wild world of professional wrestling for Cageside Seats, interviewing athletes and other industry veterans.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Alexa skills are kind of like apps for your Amazon Echo. Downloading new Alexa skills allows you to expand the voice commands recognized by your smart speaker. In fact, there are more than 60,000 Alexa skills that an Amazon Echo can learn in the US alone. With so many skills, it can be hard to find the right one for you. To help you decide, we’ve picked the 15+ best Alexa skills for 2020.

    Music and Audio Skills

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Your Amazon Echo can play music from your favorite streaming services such as Spotify, Amazon Music, Apple Music, and Pandora. If you want to know how to play music from another service, check out our guide on how to play Apple Music on Alexa. However, it’s worth noting that your smart speaker also has many other music and audio skills that you should consider enabling.

    Sleep and Relaxation Sounds – Do you have a hard time sleeping at night? If you need white noise to lull you to sleep, this skill has over 125 sounds to choose from.

    TED Talks – This skill gives you access to a library of inspiring lectures from TED Talks. You can choose to play the latest talks or explore them by topic or speaker.

    NPR – With this skill enabled, you will have access to live radio from a network of NPR member stations. It’s a wonderful choice for anyone who wants to hear both local and international news. The skill lets you browse by location, change stations, or play any other NPR program.

    Skills for Self-Care and Improvement

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Get Me Up If you find it hard to get up in the morning, this fun Alexa skill will be a lifesaver. It’s more than just an alarm. Consider it a nagging robot that wants nothing but the best for you. It will not stop until you actually get up and do something productive with your day.

    My Morning – Once you finally get out of bed, this Alexa skill will help you start your day on the right foot. It will guide you through a five-minute meditation that includes affirmation statements, visualizing your day, stating what you’re grateful for, and saying what your priorities are for the day.

    Fitbit – Keep your fitness and health goals by enabling Fitbit on Alexa. This skill tells your progress and gets you motivated throughout the day.

    7-Minute Workout – With this skill enabled, you won’t need a lot of time to exercise. The 7-Minute Workout skill lets you choose between a low-impact, standard, or advanced workout. You can also choose to target specific muscle groups. And, to help you keep track of your progress, you will also receive weekly and monthly performance summaries.

    Make Me Smart – This cool Alexa skill gives you nuggets of information from a wide range of categories, including pop culture, current events, tech, and more. Just say, “Alexa, make me smart,” and you’ll be inundated with useful information. This skill is a great way to keep up to date in today’s fast-paced world!

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Best Alexa Skills for the Kitchen

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Meal Idea This incredibly useful Alexa skill gives you basic recipes for everyday cooking. Most of the recipes use ingredients that you likely already have in your pantry or refrigerator, making food preparation much easier.

    OurGroceries – This skill requires you to download the OurGroceries app and set up an account. Once you do, this skill helps you add items to your lists, so you don’t forget a thing when it’s time to go shopping. The lists you create are then synchronized on the smartphones in your household. It also keeps track of recipes, barcodes, and photos of products.

    Best Alexa Skills for Kids

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Chompers – Do you have a hard time getting your kids to brush their teeth? That’s where the Chompers skill comes in! This Alexa skill makes the whole dental hygiene experience more entertaining for your kids. It tells jokes, plays silly music, and, best of all, tells your kids about proper brushing techniques.

    Amazon Storytime This Alexa skill reads a story to your kids from Amazon’s own selection of children’s books. The stories are perfect for kids ages 5-12. There are several categories to choose from, including silly, family, friends, and others.

    Sesame Street Sesame Street is a timeless show to entertain and teach your children. And, in the age of smart speakers, it also happens to be one of the best Alexa skills you can get. When you add this skill, your kids will be able to speak and interact with Elmo. How fun!

    Best Alexa Skills for Seniors

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Ask My Buddy This skill lets you ask for assistance with just a simple voice command. When you sign up for an Ask My Buddy account, you will be asked to create a Personal Alert Network of close friends and family. Then, if you need assistance, you just say “Alexa, Ask My Buddy to send help,” and an alert will be sent to all the phone numbers on your network.

    Phone Finder – For elderly Amazon Echo users who often need assistance in locating their mobile phones, this skill will be a godsend. Once enabled, this skill will help you locate your phone when you misplace it. Your device will ring even if it is on silent.

    Mastermind This skill has several features that let you communicate or get things done hands-free. It can be used to send text messages and emails. It can also make phone calls, share your location, do internet searches, launch maps, access schedules, and much more.

    Your Amazon Echo can do so much more, especially when connected with other smart devices in your home. If you want to know more, check out our previous article about other cool things that you can do with Alexa.

    Changing these four settings will help parents sleep at night.

    Getting a new Amazon Echo or other Alexa-enabled smart speaker can be exciting: You can now shop, stream music, order pizza, call friends, play games and call an Uber without lifting a finger. But what about the kids?

    You never know what a child might get up to with your tech, and they can much more easily hijack your smart speaker than they could a password-protected phone or tablet. Plus, how can you protect your child’s privacy, and make sure they’re not distracted from their homework or chores?

    Sure, you could always buy an Echo Dot Kids Edition, or enable FreeTime on another Echo device. But these features set Alexa to treat anyone it interacts with as a child: It tells jokes and stories, and answers questions, with a kid-friendly and educational tone.

    If you’d prefer to stick with the adult Alexa, never fear. There are still several settings you can change to make your grown-up device safe for kids to use, whether you have an Echo, Echo Plus, Echo Dot, Echo Spot or Echo Show. Here are the most important things to do to kid-proof your Echo.

    1. Turn off Voice Purchasing (or set a code).

    The worst thing your kid can do with Alexa is empty your bank account when you’re not looking. If any children will be near your smart speaker, it’s important to turn off Voice Purchasing.

    To do so, click the menu in the top left corner and select “Settings.” Then, select “Alexa Account,” and then toggle “Purchase by Voice” off.

    If you want to leave Voice Purchasing on, you can also set a four-digit voice code on this page, which Alexa will then ask for to confirm future purchases.

    2. Turn on the Explicit Filter.

    You never know what music your kid might stumble across on the Internet, even when using Alexa. Setting an Explicit Filter will block Alexa from playing any songs that contain explicit words or phrases. It will also prevent your kid from streaming iHeartRadio, TuneIn, SiriusXM, Gimme Radio and Deezer.

    To turn the filter on, open Settings, select Music , and toggle on the Explicit Filter. You can also say “Alexa, block explicit songs.” However, you’ll want to toggle Voice Deactivation to “off” so that your kid can’t tell Alexa to get rid of the filter.

    3. Turn off Drop-In (or restrict it).

    Drop-In allows a user to pop in, unsolicited, to a video call on another user’s Echo Spot or Echo Show. It’s one thing to have friends surprise you in your living room, but probably not a good idea to have people, no matter how familiar, dropping in on unsuspecting children.

    It’s a good idea to either disable Drop-In or set it to only work with other Echo devices in your household. To toggle both settings, open “Settings” and “Device Settings,” select your Alexa device and select “Communications,” then scroll down to tap “Drop In.” toggle Drop In to “Off” or “My Household.”

    4. Schedule “Do Not Disturb Mode.”

    Alexa can be fun, but alerts for your calls, messages, and reminders reverberating throughout your house at night could be distracting, or spooky for your kids. Do Not Disturb mode can temporarily block calling and messaging alerts (as well as Drop In, if you have it enabled).

    You can schedule Alexa to enter Do Not Disturb mode at the times when your kid is sleeping or doing homework. To do so, go to Settings and Device Settings, select your device, select Do Not Disturb, and toggle the feature on. Then, toggle “Scheduled,” and input the times when you’d like Do Not Disturb to start and end. This schedule will repeat daily until you turn it off.

    MORE: For more Alexa-related tips, tricks, and how-tos, check out our complete guide to Alexa.

    Monica Chin is a writer at The Verge, covering computers. Previously, she was a staff writer for Tom’s Guide, where she wrote about everything from artificial intelligence to social media and the internet of things to. She had a particular focus on smart home, reviewing multiple devices. In her downtime, you can usually find her at poetry slams, attempting to exercise, or yelling at people on Twitter.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    You may not know this, but Alexa keeps a record of all the commands you’ve asked it. These transcripts date all the way back to your first command, unless you erase them.

    While Amazon has made many public assurances of the privacy of your information on Alexa, there have been some mishaps involving these records.

    If you have any concerns about the existence of your voice records, you can delete these transcripts.

    There are three different ways to do so, depending on whether you want to use your app, the Amazon website, or your Echo.

    Check out the products mentioned in this article:

    MacBook Pro (From $1,099.99 at Best Buy)

    Lenovo IdeaPad 130 (From $299.99 at Best Buy)

    iPhone 11 (From $699.99 at Best Buy)

    Samsung Galaxy S10 (From $699.99 at Best Buy)

    Amazon Echo 3rd Gen (From $99.99 at Amazon)

    How to delete your Alexa history using the Alexa app

    1. Open the Alexa app on your iPhone or Android.

    2. Tap on the three lines in the top-left corner to pull up the sidebar.

    3. Tap on “Settings” at the bottom of the sidebar.

    4. Scroll down to and tap on “Alexa Privacy.”

    5. Tap on “Review Voice History.”

    6. Tap on “Date Range” to delete recordings.

    7. In the dropdown, scroll down to the time frame. Whatever you select will delete all transcripts within that range.

    How to delete your Alexa history using your Alexa-enabled device

    1. Open the Alexa app on your mobile device and tap “Settings” from the sidebar menu.

    2. Tap “Alexa Privacy” and then “Review Voice History.”

    3. Tap on the toggle to the right of “Enable deletion by voice” so you can delete recordings using your Alexa-enabled device, such as the Echo.

    4. A pop-up will inform you that anybody with access to your device can now delete your recordings. Tap on “Enable.”

    You can then ask your Echo “Alexa, delete everything I’ve said today.” Alexa will ask you to confirm before doing so.

    How to delete your Alexa history using the Amazon website

    1. Pull up https://www.amazon.com/alexaprivacysettings on your browser on your Mac or PC.

    2. Click on “Devices.”

    3. Click on your Echo.

    4. Click on “Delete voice recordings” under the Echo menu.

    5. A pop-up will again ask you to confirm the deletion of your voice recordings.

    6. Click on “Delete” again and all of your recordings will be deleted.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    What would happen if you said to your Amazon Echo: “Alexa, open the ‘Wait Wait Quiz’!” Why, you’d hear the voice of NPR’s legendary Bill Curtis introducing the weekly quiz based off, wait wait… don’t tell me, the beloved weekly news game show heard on radio stations (and podcasts) across the country.

    That is, that’s what would happen if you’d added the “Wait Wait Quiz” skill to Alexa.

    From checking the drive time to your office to lowering the smart light bulbs in your bedroom or playing your favorite song or podcast, there are thousands upon thousands of “skills” you can add to your Alexa-enabled devices, like the Amazon Echo, creating a user experience customized just for you.

    Alexa skills are not only convenient and fun, but also quite easy to add.

    Here are the three ways to add skills to Alexa.

    Check out the products mentioned in this article:

    Amazon Echo (From 99.99 at Amazon)

    MacBook Pro (From $1,299.99 at Best Buy)

    Lenovo IdeaPad 130 (From $299.99 at Best Buy)

    iPhone 11 (From $699.99 at Best Buy)

    Samsung Galaxy S10 (From $899.99 at Best Buy)

    How to add skills to Alexa using your computer

    1. Sign into your Amazon account and navigate to the Alexa Skills page on your Mac or PC.

    2. Search for a skill using the search bar at the top of your screen, browse the editor’s picks, or search via category in the left hand column.

    3. Click on the skill you want to add, then click the button that says “Enable” on the next page.

    How to add skills to Alexa using your mobile device

    1. Open the Alexa app on your iPhone or Android and tap the menu icon at the top-left.

    2. Tap “Skills & Games” in the menu.

    3. Tap the magnifying glass icon to search for the skill you want.

    4. Select the skill, then tap “ENABLE TO USE.”

    How to add skills to Alexa using your Amazon Echo

    While near your Amazon Echo, say “Alexa, enable…” and then state the name of the skill to be added. Like “Alexa, enable the ‘Wait Wait Quiz.'”

    Here we are again discussing the new hyper nugget, and that’s the most famous “Alexa.” This voice response echo is not new in the tech world but if you’re coming across it for the first time, don’t worry about a thing as I will brief you on this hyper-tech voice responder.

    Talking about this nugget, Alexa is known to be one of the most significant Amazon inventions presently connected with some number of web services to make a higher tech intelligence. Alexa acts as a manservant (maid per se) that can carry out any instructed task/duties. This shouldn’t scare you away from its cold. Every Alexa-enabled device is a plus to have in your home and, with a little tuning, it proves to be a very awesome amigo.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Most of the Alexa skills are not placed on default mode, merely saying that to get other skills on and going you will have to follow the required and proper activation steps before using each one for the very first time.

    How to Startup Alexa’s Commands / Skill

    To get started all you need to do is follow up the voice prompt instructions. While other of the commands required to be tuned in via the Alexa app or directly from the Amazon’s website. To start up this follow the prompts below:

    • Search for the skill’s name and then select the Enable button.
    • To do this through the Alexa app, you can simply do that by selecting the main menu button and choose the Skills option. From here you can browse Alexa skills by criteria/categories. You can also search for skills by keyword or name through this same interface.
    • I prefer using Amazon’s website instead of the designated app; you have to be logged into the account that is associated with your Alexa-enabled device.
    • Next, click on the drop-down menu and choose Alexa Skills. From here you can search for skills by keyword or name. You’ll also be taken to the Alexa Skills section of the website after performing your initial search.
    • Once you click the Enable button associated with a particular skill it will then be activated on all of your Alexa-enabled devices, assuming that you’ve registered them with the same Amazon account, and will be ready for use.

    You’ll notice in the lists below that many Alexa skills are called by using trigger words like open, start, play and ask.

    • Must Read:How To Update Amazon Echo Device Software

    The Bartender

    Alexa, ask the bartender to pick a drink: this command is for cocktail lovers which provides you with recipes and information on how to get it done with the available products.

    News, Traffic and Weather Skills

    While saying Alexa, what’s the weather? It will return the current conditions in your area, the majority of news and weather information disseminated by Alexa is done through Flash Briefings. When the drop-down menu appears, tap the Settings option.

    The Scripture (Bible)

    Here you say the command; Alexa, ask the Bible App for the day’s verse: This command reads the verse of the day out for you. Better still you can get it customized to a particular book in the Bible.

    • Must Read:How To Delete All Alexa Voice Recordings at Once

    Game Skills

    Although Alexa is operated strictly by voice there are some pretty cool games available for you to play such as “Yes Sire”: Though this game is not suitable for all ages due to its violent exhibitions and content materials.

    Linguistics

    The skills below are designed to help you with translations from an original language to another: You can boot up the command with Alexa, ask translated to say am coming in French: This translated features 36 other languages outside of English. But for more effectiveness and functionality your origin language must be English.

    Fitness

    Your Alexa-enabled device can also function as a fitness coach, simply say this command; Alexa, start seven minutes work-out. This skill takes you through some series of exercises for fit keeping and health status.

    Night Relaxation Sounds

    These Alexa skills may not fit into one of the categories above, but this one is perfect in its role. Say the command Alexa, open sleep sounds. This includes standard sounds like storms, whispers attached with lots of quality sensible and sweet noise that play on a loop. But this command is majorly used during your night rest.

    • Must Read:List of Top 10 Best Soundbars That Work With Alexa

    Account Details

    This skill helps you in verifying your bank details and other valid informations about your account. Here is the command; Alexa, ask capital one what’s my account balance: as earlier said it enables you to transacts, make credit card payments and whole lots of transactions via voice.

    Wow. Impressive skills Alexa got here, well I just decided to drop down some crucial commands that can be very much useful to us during our daily routines. Feel free share this article with your world for I believe someone out there is in need of this information.

    Don’t forget to comment or remind us of not listed commands which you stumbled on and you’ve got 100% liberty to surf our various categories for more.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Unless you’ve been living under a rock for the past decade, you’ve definitely heard of Amazon Echo. It’s a smart home app that you use to communicate with connected smart devices. Amazon Echo Show is an upgraded feature that is, in essence, Amazon Echo, but with a decent-sized screen. Of course, this video and touch function comes additional to all the functionalities that we’re used to seeing on Amazon Echo.

    The Amazon Echo Show may be more expensive than your regular Echo, but the added capabilities are definitely worth the price tag.

    Design

    The first awesome thing that Amazon did with Echo Show is put the speakers on the back. This means that most of the Echo Show device is, well, the screen. Not only does this look great, but it makes the device more compact and easier to fit anywhere.

    The device has a DC power port and a microUSB port, with volume controls and a privacy button on the back. Four of the eight mics are placed in the upper front side of Echo Show, as is the camera device.

    Essentially, it looks like a thicker tablet device. The screen is large enough to ensure maximum visual and ergonomic comfort. The screen features adaptive brightness, 1,280 x 800 resolution, white balance/contrast settings, and many other great features.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Alexa

    So, the touchscreen option means that there’s no need for Alexa, right? Wrong. Like any other Amazon device, Echo Show relies on Alexa for the most part. Voice is still the primary means of communication with Echo Show and the screen is just an added bonus.

    The whole setup process is as simple as it gets, with Alexa taking care of all the heavy lifting, while you’re left comfortably pronouncing words and doing what Alexa tells you to do.

    Echo Show adds a very important series of Amazon devices to the table. Given its screen accessibility, you can now pair the new Echo device with Amazon camera devices, smart doorbells, etc. Again, the touchscreen is responsible for the heftier price tag, but it’s definitely well-worth the outlay. The screen for an Amazon Echo device was the only thing that was missing.

    Touchscreen

    You’ll be happy to know that there are no ads on Echo Show devices. And it’s a good thing, as ads showing up when the device isn’t being used would be incredibly frustrating. Instead, when you aren’t interacting with the device, Echo Show cycles through trending stories. Stories are essentially pictures with captions, which may be something that you’ll like.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    However, for some people, these things are almost as annoying as ads, so they’ll want to disable them. Naturally, this can easily be done from the settings screen. However, the same screen can be used to enable more home screen content than may actually be to your liking. For instance, you can set sports schedules/scores, upcoming events, Alexa skills notifications, and much, much more. When it comes to adjustability, Echo Show is probably the most tweakable device from Amazon.

    Still, despite the fact that the touchscreen performs amazingly, it’s clear that Amazon has intended the Echo Show device to be ‘Echo’ first and ‘Show second’. This is why the list of Alexa’s skills isn’t accessible by touch. This may seem frustrating, but Amazon has carefully considered which features don’t require a touch alternative.

    On the other hand, the Echo Show device does come equipped with a web browser, which is a very cool addition, indeed. You can either choose Firefox or Amazon’s Silk and, yes, you can use the virtual keyboard and the voice for searching stuff.

    Voice

    Thanks to the decent screen size, YouTube finally makes sense on an Amazon device. That being said, you can’t directly voice-search on YouTube, you have to use the browser. This isn’t Amazon’s fault, though. However, direct voice search is available for Vevo music. On the other hand, Netflix is inaccessible in this respect, so that’s a bummer.

    Amazon Echo Show

    All in all, Amazon Echo Show is a brilliant innovation of a device, especially compared to the regular Echo unit. Yes, the price tag is quite hefty, but when you take into account how responsive and generally well-thought-out the screen is, you won’t really be sorry for investing more.

    Have you tried Amazon Echo Show? How do you think it compares to Amazon Echo? Are you planning to buy one? Feel free to join in on the discussion in the comments section below and don’t refrain from asking any questions or adding any tips you may have.

    Amazon’s Alexa keeps records of what you say to her. Everyone knows this, and in fact, agrees to it when you agree to the terms of service. The Echo uses its recordings to help it better recognize your individual speech patterns.

    Amazon claims not to use the information for marketing purposes, but many users are skeptical—especially after the Facebook data fiasco last year.

    The good news is that you don’t have to throw out your Alexa in the name of privacy. You can delete your Alexa information.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    How to Delete Your Echo History

    You can go into the Alexa app and look at previous requests to the hardware, but it can be hard to know what else is heard and recorded.

    The Echo is always on, and this has been proven more than once when judges demanded Amazon turn over Echo recordings to help in criminal proceedings. If nothing else, that makes it clear the Echo hears more than you think.

    There are options for stopping the Echo from listening all the time, but those require unplugging the device or purchasing a peripheral accessory. In the mean time, if you want to clear out its history, here’s how.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    1. Open the Amazon Alexa app on your phone.

    2. Press the Menu button in the top-left corner and go to Settings.

    3. From Settings, choose Alexa Account and then History.

    4. Select the recording you want to delete.

    If you feel that little sense of dread creeping up, you’re right: to delete everything, you have a lot of tapping to do. However, there is a way to delete everything all at one time.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    1. Go to your Amazon Device page from Amazon’s website.

    2. Choose Devices from the navigation bar.

    3. Press the menu button to the left of the device you want to select.

    4. Press Delete Voice Recordings. This will clear all recordings on that device. Remember, this is a permanent decision; you can’t undo the deletion if you change your mind later.

    Deleting this information clears it from your device, but there’s no way to know if Amazon keeps a recording on their servers or not. If you’re concerned about personal privacy and want to take whatever steps you can to protect your data, deleting your Amazon recordings is a good start.

    Another step you can take on the same page is to click on Alexa Privacy.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Go ahead and click on Review Voice History and then choose All History from the drop down. You’ll now see all your command history from all your devices here. Click Delete All Recordings for All History to delete all of your voice history.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    If you want to limit how much personal information your devices gather about you, pay attention to your apps. Smartphone apps should only gather the necessary information to function and nothing more.

    If you feel like one of your apps is gathering more than it needs to, find an alternative or limit the data it uses.

    Patrick is an Atlanta-based technology writer with a background in programming and smart home technology. When he isn’t writing, nose to the grindstone, he can be found keeping up with the latest developments in the tech world and upping his coffee game. Read Patrick’s Full Bio

    You have to be careful what you say to Alexa. Here’s how to keep your voice-enabled devices secure.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    If there’s anything consumers have learned in recent years, it’s that everything — even devices or institutions we believe to be secure — can be hacked. With the explosion of Internet of Things (IoT) devices in millions of households across America, there are many more opportunities for our personal information to be collected, shared and stolen without our knowledge.

    According to a report from Consumer Intelligence Research Partners, there are more than 50 million Amazon Echo devices installed in the U.S. Alexa is the most ubiquitous digital assistant, but many users don’t know what happens to their data when they ask Alexa to read them a recipe or check their bank balance.

    • The best smart home devices to make your life easier

    Amazon has repeatedly denied that Alexa-enabled devices are recording at all times, but the devices are always listening for the wake word (“Alexa” is one of several options) and will record and store what is said once Alexa is activated. Recordings capture a fraction of a second before the wake word is spoken, and end when the user request has been processed.

    Smart assistants’ hearing is still far from perfect, and Alexa’s recent spate of random laughter is a good example of voice commands gone awry. Users reported that their Alexa-enabled devices laughed unprompted, which Amazon attributed to phrases that sounded similar to “Alexa, laugh” even when users didn’t say the wake word.

    Does Alexa record private conversations?

    There are words that sound similar enough to “Alexa” that it’s possible the device will pick up fragments of private conversations that are not intended to be a command, said Pam Dixon, executive director of the World Privacy Forum, a nonprofit, public interest research group.

    “The problem comes when people are not aware that recordings are stored until you delete them,” she says. “People should think about what they are asking their voice assistants and know that they can delete that information.”

    According to an Amazon spokeswoman, Alexa recordings are stored securely on the Amazon Web Services cloud, and the company does not release customer information without a “valid and binding legal demand properly served on us.”

    In fact, Amazon reportedly refused to comply with a warrant for data from an Echo that police in Bentonville, Arkansas, believed to be evidence in a murder case.

    Dixon notes that Amazon’s privacy policy is “pretty transparent” and easily accessible on both desktop and mobile, but what will likely surprise users most is how much of their own voices they’ll hear if they listen to what their Alexa-enabled devices have recorded and stored.

    “I really don’t think these devices are listening and sending that data off to third parties all the time, but from reviewing my own recordings, there was lot more than I anticipated in there,” Dixon said.

    If you’re concerned about the privacy and security of your personal information, there are a few steps you can take to secure your Alexa-enabled device.

    Protect your home network

    Your smart-home devices are only as secure as the network they connect to. Start by changing the default name and password for your wireless network — don’t include identifying information in either — and enable the Wi-Fi Protected Access II (WPA2) protocol on your router.

    If possible, create one Wi-Fi network for your smart-home devices and another for devices you use to bank, shop or browse, and set up a firewall to restrict what — and who — can connect. Regularly check for and install firmware updates on all of your gadgets, including Alexa devices.

    Change the Alexa wake word

    The first step Dixon recommends users take on their Alexa-enabled devices is to change the word that activates recording.

    For now, you can use “Amazon,” “Computer” or “Echo” instead. Choose the word that you’re least likely to use in everyday conversation, so Alexa will record only if you speak directly to it.

    It’s important to remember that Alexa-enabled devices may be able to pick up strangers’ voices through closed windows and doors, Dixon adds. You can also turn off the device’s microphone to stop it from listening entirely.

    Strengthen your Amazon password

    Anyone with access to your Amazon account can listen to, share or delete your Alexa voice-recording history on the Manage Your Content and Devices dashboard. This includes family members who order items under the same username, but your information might also be vulnerable to hackers who obtain your Amazon password.

    The commands you give Alexa — arming your security system, requesting directions and commute times, or calling friends — can provide malicious actors with valuable information about your daily routine, which can put your personal safety, and that of your home and family, at risk. Just as you would with any other login, follow good password hygiene recommendations.

    Delete old Alexa recordings, especially those with sensitive information

    While asking Alexa to set a timer or play cat noises is fairly innocuous, saved recordings that include sensitive health, legal or financial information are less so.

    Dixon says most users don’t think about the consequences of having their conversations or requests stored indefinitely where others can access them. Recordings may resurface in divorce or child- custody cases, for example.

    “If you have any kind of questions or any kind of misgivings about having recordings around, just delete them,” Dixon said. “The idea is just like clearing the web history in a web browser.”

    To listen to and delete stored recordings, open Settings > History in the Alexa app, or use the dashboard at Amazon.com. Recordings will remain on the Amazon cloud forever until you remove them.

    Deleting all old recordings can degrade Alexa’s performance slightly because the device uses your history to improve responses over time, and it will have to relearn patterns if information is lost.

    If you don’t want to mass-delete all recordings about local weather or music requests, you can selectively remove more sensitive material. You can also make sure that your Alexa device isn’t being used to test new features, which Amazon employees or contractors are more likely to listen to.

    Read third-party Alexa skill privacy policies

    Third-party Alexa skills, of which there are tens of thousands, may also collect users’ personal information. Amazon requires developers of these skills to provide links to their privacy policies on the skill detail pages, but consumers are responsible for digging through each to understand how data is collected, used and stored.

    “Everyone is very worried about having any kind of a data breach or leak on these home devices,” Dixon says. “No company right now wants to have a privacy issue — caution is the byword going forward.”

    Alexa’s full suite of more than 100,000 Skills is a powerful platform, but there are times when those Alexa Skills are not working. The server that powers the Skill might have a hiccup, or there may be a problem with the way the Skill is implemented within your smart home.

    If you find an Alexa Skill that doesn’t work or perform as intended, here are a few fixes to try.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    1. Make Sure Alexa is Connected to WiFi

    The Amazon Echo needs WiFi to work correctly. If your device is not connected to WiFi, then Amazon Skills won’t work because Amazon can’t process your voice command.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    2. Ensure You’re Using the Correct Phrase

    Many Alexa Skills have specific activation phrases. If you find an Alexa Skill is not working as you expect, make sure you’re using the correct activation phrase. For example, the Food Network Kitchen skill can be activated in three separate ways:

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    • “Alexa, open Food Network Kitchen.”
    • “Alexa, show me cooking classes from Food Network Kitchen.”
    • “Alexa, show my saved recipes from Food Network Kitchen.”

    3. Check If the Skill Needs Parental Permission

    Some Alexa Skills can’t be activated without parental permission. If you’re using a Skill and it asks for parental permission, you’ll have to enable it from your home screen. This is particularly true with regard to child-focused Skills.

    4. Enable the Skill

    In some instances, the Skill might have been disabled. When this happens, you’ll need to re-enable the Skill from within the Skills menu.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    5. Re-Install the Skill

    If you have a Skill that has worked for the most part but suddenly stopped working, an error may have occurred that can be fixed by disabling the Skill and re-enabling it. When you disable a Skill, it unlinks it from your account. Enable the Skill and re-link it. Doing this should correct most issues.

    6. Verify Your Device Is on the Correct Profile

    If there are multiple profiles within an Amazon account, each profile may utilize different Skills. If you find that a device isn’t responding when you try to activate a Skill, make sure you’re using the correct profile.

    7. Re-Enable the Device

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Many Amazon Skills are linked to specific devices. If a Skill is unresponsive, go into the Devices menu of your Alexa app and disable and re-enable the relevant device.

    8. Reinstall the Device

    If disabling the device doesn’t work, remove it from your account entirely. You can do this by opening the device settings and tapping the trash can in the top-right corner of the screen. Once you remove the device, you’ll need to re-add it to your Amazon account. A fresh installation will often correct issues that arise.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    9. Force a Firmware Update

    Some Alexa Skills might not be available until the Echo hardware undergoes a firmware update. While any connected device will periodically check for updates automatically, you can force a firmware update to bring your Echo in-line with the firmware version it should have.

    To do this, press the mute button on your Echo. It will take anywhere from only a few minutes to as long as half an hour, but Alexa will announce she needs to perform an update. Once this is complete, the hardware will restart and will no longer be muted. Of course, this only works when firmware updates are available.

    10. Make Sure You Complete the Skill

    Alexa Skills can be custom-made through the Skill Blueprint system. However, it is possible to make a Skill without updating your account and adding it to your list of active Skills. If your Skill is custom made and doesn’t work, make sure it has actually been completed within the system.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    11. Create a Voice Profile

    Some people might encounter a more perplexing issue: Alexa may not seem to understand what they’re saying. If this happens, you can train Alexa to recognize your voice. Go to Settings > Account Settings > Recognized Voices > Manage Voice Profile.

    From this screen, you can choose to have Alexa personalize your skills or delete your voice profile. You can also tap Match voice profiles to speak a series of phrases that Alexa will use to better match your voice when you speak. This allows Alexa to understand you better.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Alexa Skills are one of the features that set Alexa apart from the competition. The vast library of Skills and the easy-to-use Skills Blueprint allows for almost unlimited creativity in how you control your smart home and your life. The only obstacle is when these Alexa Skills stop working.

    Just try any one of these 11 tricks to get your Skills back in working order. At least one of these options should get your Alexa back on track.

    Patrick is an Atlanta-based technology writer with a background in programming and smart home technology. When he isn’t writing, nose to the grindstone, he can be found keeping up with the latest developments in the tech world and upping his coffee game. Read Patrick’s Full Bio

    Recent news reports in the last week revealed that Amazon has thousands of workers listening to Amazon Echo aka Alexa voice assistant recordings. That is a bit unnerving, however, this post will share several ways, including a serious DIY project, to increase your privacy.

    MUENSTER – JANUARY 27, 2018: White Amazon Echo Plus, Alexa Voice Service activated recognition . [+] system photographed on wooden table in living room.

    I’m going to cut right to the chase here:

    1. The first method of silencing most voice assistant devices is via the manual, physical button. Some of us don’t read the manual and are unaware that there are manual overrides. On Amazon Echo, when you press the microphone button, the external ring glows red (Lord of the Rings metaphor?) and the device is not capable of listening (or at least that’s what we think). Google Home has a button on the side and the four dots on the top light up when disabled, plus it verbally tells you mic is on or off as you press the button (Echo does not).

    Also, there are reports that you can mute both the Google Home and Apple HomePod with a simple voice command of “mute the microphone” or “stop listening.” I do not have an Apple HomePod, but the Google Home simply responds to tell you where the button is on the unit and to press it. I found no such voice convenience in the Amazon Echo settings, but it would be nice.

    UPDATE: I was testing different privacy settings when I first wrote the post and am now including this one.

    2. Regarding the news of Amazon employees listening in to your Amazon requests and interactions, there is a setting (most things for Alexa are managed via the app and it is the same here) under Alexa Privacy.

    Alexa Privacy Settings to Off _No More Alexa Listening

    Screenshot Alexa Listening No More by TJ McCue

    • In the Alexa App, Tap the menu button (three lines in the upper left of the screen)
    • The top item in settings is “Alexa Account” then scroll to the bottom and select “Alexa Privacy.”
    • You will now see a blue banner saying that Amazon values your trust, yada yada, scroll down to “Manage How Your Data Improves Alexa”.
    • Toggle the next three items, that are on by default (Umm, if you valued my trust, why didn’t you leave these off to start and ask me to opt-in?), to the OFF position. On my Android, it shows as gray when off and little white button to the left. When on, background changes to blue, and dot to right. It will then warn you that “new features” may not work properly if you do this.

    3. On the Echo, your household and your contacts may be able to “Drop In” and start a conversation, like a phone call, via two Echo devices. However, it is believed to be only by permission. Some experts have suggested that a connection, as in a fellow Echo owner you have in your contact list, could just listen in on your home conversations. To be doubly sure, go to Communications in your Alexa App and adjust the “Drop In” setting to “My Household” or Off.

    4. This is the most radical way (and one I love) to disable your Amazon Echo or Google Home microphone that I have found: Project Alias. This is a total DIY hack that I first saw on Hackaday . It takes a bit of electronics chops and patience, but numerous people have tried it. In essence, the project uses a little speaker that generates white noise that is stopped by a wake word that then allows your Alexa or Google Home command to be heard. So if someone was listening in, all they would hear is white noise. There is reportedly a commercialized version shared in the Hackaday comments. I expect to see more of these devices in the near future.

    Hackaday Project Alias White Noise for Amazon Echo Google Home

    Image Used With Permission from Hackaday

    There are mixed results with people doing this project; I’d guess based on operator skill. I know my U.S. Air Force electronics and soldering skills are might rusty. But the creator of Project Alias wrote a detailed Instructable and provides GitHub files for those who are ready to give it a try. You need a Raspberry Pi Model 3 A+ (roughly $25), access to a 3D Printer, and a few other items. I haven’t tried yet, but I’m working up the courage.

    By the way, if you are interested in DIY electronics and various DIY hacks like these, you should check out the 2019 Hackaday Prize which offers some big and small prizes for creating a project like the Alias (although that was not a previous contest entry).

    Okay, back to the news that brought about this post. According to Bloomberg , “Amazon.com Inc. employs thousands of people around the world to help improve the Alexa digital assistant powering its line of Echo speakers. The team listens to voice recordings captured in Echo owners’ homes and offices. The recordings are transcribed, annotated and then fed back into the software as part of an effort to eliminate gaps in Alexa’s understanding of human speech and help it better respond to commands.”

    Before you go all Minority Report on me, some of this listening is simply meant to improve the product and only happens once you’ve asked Alexa to do something. To give us all a reality check, the Google Home, Apple’s Siri, Android smartphone Google Assistant, Facebook, and a host of others have been given express permission, via their terms of service, to listen in a variety of ways. Completely unplugging is not easy (see Kashmir Hill’s experience below). No doubt, there are glitches and errors that make some of this even more, well, creepy and spy-like.

    Let me close with this: We have some degree of control over our privacy, despite a variety of articles crying foul. We decide what we let into our homes, or in our pockets with a smartphone. Indeed, we have expectations that big companies like Facebook, Google, Amazon, Apple are not going to betray our trust. In some areas, they have and we need to hold them to account. My hope is that more devices and apps will give us greater control of our data and settings to main our privacy with and on devices. Until then, there’s always the off button, but I know that’s limited for now, too. I’m finding myself thinking like Kim in her piece below. Feel free to share privacy ideas with me as I explore other apps and options and settings.

    Here are three excellent articles to give you some privacy thoughts to chew on:

    This piece on Digital Trends by Kim Wetzel is worthwhile to read if you’re wondering what all this privacy stuff means and is a great reminder of what we allow in our acceptance of technology: Amazon workers listening to Alexa recordings isn’t a big deal. Here’s why .

    Here’s The Shocking Reality Of Completely Blocking Google From Your Life by Jason Evangelho here at Forbes (but the post is about Kashmir Hill’s unplugging from the Big 4).

    I’ve been giving this a whole lot of thought and I’m still keeping my Alexa. Here are my more in-depth thoughts on that on Medium: Amazon Echo Alexa Is Kinda Creepy But I Still Love It.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    I had my Echo show for a while now I find it incredibly beneficial especially since it’s connected to all my smart home devices such as camera, ring doorbell..etc. But the biggest issue I find with the Echo Show is the Home screen is cluttered with ads, suggestions, and many other distracting images or text.

    Below is a step by step guide to removing unwanted ads, suggestions and other unwanted features from the home screen.

    How To Turn Off Rotating Ads On Your Echo Show 5, Echo Show 8 & Echo Show:

    • First in your Echo home page simply swipe down click on settings
    • Select Home & Clock then ->Home Content
    • Inside “Home Content” you will find everything that is displaying in your home screen contains a Blue Check, simply disable the blue check for items you don’t want to appear on your home screen
    • Turning Everything off will remove all the clutter from your Home Screen except for the Time, Date, & Temperature.
    • Rotate Continuously
    • Discovery
    • Game Schedule
    • Game Score
    • Notifications
    • Shared With You
    • Trending Topics

    This will clear up most clutter from your home page, however, the “Alexa Try” notification cannot be removed and is a permanent part of the Echo show.

    How To Customize Your Echo Show Home Screen:

    (Out of all the Echo show’s The Echo Show 5 is by far the most customizable). So there will be limitations in terms of customizations if you are using the Echo Show 8 or Echo Show.

    Customize Echo Show 5 Home Screen

    • Swipe down on the Echo show screen
    • Select Settings ->Home & Clock ->Clock
    • Modern
    • Playful
    • Photography
    • Classic
    • Go to Background depending on your preference select Alexa App Photo’s or Amazon Photo’s

    Customize Echo Show Home Screen (2nd Gen)

    • Swipe down the Echo show screen
    • Select Settings then tap on Wallpaper & Clock
    • And from there you will be able to select the type you prefer

    How to Use Echo Show As A Digital Picture Frame:

    One of the best ways is to simply download the Amazon Photos App. Once you Log in you will be asked for permission to access your photos once you select yes all your photos will be uploaded to the Amazon Photos app and simply log into the App on your Echo show and all your pictures should be in there. Now you should be able to set these photos to scroll through your home screen.

    How To Get The Most Out Of Your Echo Show (Hidden benefits):

    Make Your Echo Show Portable

    There are several power banks available in the market such as the RAVPower 20100 mAh that allows you to make your Echo Show portable. This means you can bring your Echo Show outdoors with you, or just walk around the house and move it around without having to constantly go to the same place in your home to communicate or use your Echo show.

    Use Drop In Calls

    Drop-in calls work with echo show, Echo Dot and Echo and what it does is allows you to drop in unannounced into someone else Echo device without having to call or have the other person pickup. It automatically allows you to communicate with someone through video & voice. All that is required to set this up is to grant access to someone to be able to drop in calls to your device and that’s it they will be able to drop in and communicate with you at any time. There is a do not disturb feature available which prevents the person from dropping in at a specific time you select.

    Connect Your Security Cameras to Your Echo Show

    Linking your security camera’s to your Echo Show makes it incredibly convenient to monitor your camera’s all you need to do is ask Alexa to “show the front door”, and it will instantly show up on your Echo Show.

    Benefits Of The Echo Show:

    The fact that the Echo Show has a screen makes it incredibly useful with a bunch of features that you won’t get with the Echo or Echo Dot.

    Use Echo Show as a photo album: This is one of my favorite features of the Amazon Echo Show the reason being is an average digital nonsmart Photo album can cost around $100 or more.

    Tap To Alexa: Tap to Alexa allows you to communicate with Alexa by simply tapping the commands on the screen you’re able to customize and add your own commands. The benefit to this is if you are in a quiet environment and everyone is asleep in your home or you’re just tired of speaking to Alexa then simply tap and your good to go.

    Browse the web: The Echo show allows you to browse the web, watch youtube videos, Amazon prime and much more.

    Frequently Asked Questions:

    Can I watch videos on the Echo Show?

    Yes, you will be able to watch videos from youtube and Amazon Prime. However other streaming services such as Netflix won’t work on the Echo show but this feature might work in the future.

    Can I use the Echo Show’s camera to take pictures?

    Yes, you will b able to take pictures with the Echo Show’s camera and all your photos will be saved in the default Photo Booth app.

    Final Thoughts

    So there you have it, decluttering you Amazon Echo Show does make for a much better user experience. Rotating ads and suggestions over time do become very distracting, the good news is that they can be shut off very easily.

    The Echo show is very customizable so you can adjust the screen background to your liking set different types of moods such as night or day mode as well as use the Echo Show as a digital picture frame.

    The Echo show does also make it easier to control and monitor your smart home the fact that the Echo Show has a screen allows you to view your smart camera’s by simply asking Alexa, you will also be able to monitor and control your other smart devices with your Echo show, for example, your smart thermostat.

    Recent Posts

    Many Disney+ subscribers are wondering why they aren’t able to watch the one movie in the Marvel Cinematic Universe featuring the Hulk. There is, of course, the 2003 production of Hulk directed by.

    Apple products are covered by Apple’s ironclad warranties that include both AppleCare+ and AppleCare+ with Theft and Loss. These warranties include round-the-clock tech support, same-day service.

    Looking to donate or sell your Amazon Echo Show? Before your transaction, you’ll want to make sure you factory reset and deregister the device. A factory reset ensures all of your Amazon account settings are erased from the device, so your Show’s new recipient can input their own Amazon credentials and set up the smart display for themselves. Fortunately, the process of resetting your Show 5 or Show 8 is fairly easy, and there are a few ways to perform the task. Let’s walk through each method.

    Have a regular Echo speaker? Check out our guide on how to reset both a standard Echo or Echo Dot.

    Resetting from the Echo Show menus

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    To begin, you can either say, “Alexa, go to settings,” or swipe down from the top of the home screen. Tap Settings from the list of options, then tap Device Options. If this is a second-generation Echo Show, select Reset to Factory Defaults, but Retain Smart Home Device Connections. For a first-gen Echo Show, tap Reset to Factory Defaults. Either option will erase all personal data from the device and de-register the Echo Show from your Amazon account.

    Resetting with Echo Show buttons

    You can also factory reset your Show by pressing and holding both the Mute and Volume Down buttons at the same time. After about 15 seconds, you should see the Amazon boot logo. This confirms your Show has completed the reset process. You can confirm the device was deleted from your account by checking in your Alexa app.

    Open the app, tap Devices (located at the bottom of the home screen), then tap Echo & Alexa. You’ll see a list of all your home’s Amazon devices and their assigned groups. Your Echo Show device should be missing from this list.

    Resetting with the Alexa app

    If you’d prefer to reset your Echo Show using the Alexa app, you can do that as well. Fire up the app, tap Devices, then tap Echo & Alexa. Locate your Echo Show and select it from the list of devices. Then, scroll down to the Registered To tab and tap Deregister.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    You’ll be asked to confirm your reset. Tap Deregister to remove the Echo Show from your account (or Cancel if you chose the prompt by accident).

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Amazon’s home connected devices, Echo and Dot, are hugely popular and sit prominently in millions of homes across the U.S. If you know anything about Alexa, the Echo and Dot’s connected digital assistant, you know that it can order stuff for you on Amazon, which is really convenient.

    Recently, news got around about a child making a large purchase on Amazon thanks to some help from Alexa. The story was reported by a San Diego-based morning news program, which included the little girl and her mother saying, “Alexa, buy me a dollhouse,” among other things. This prompted at least a handful of accidental Alexa triggers across the San Diego area.

    I watched the news clip myself, and sure enough, Alexa on my Amazon Dot thought I was trying to order a dollhouse . twice. Don’t worry, though. Alexa is set up to ask you to confirm your purchase before continuing. So, when Alexa heard the news report and thought I wanted to order a dollhouse, it told me what the most popular one on Amazon is and asked me if I want to buy it. It didn’t just automatically order it.

    That’s not to say that, if you weren’t home and your TV set was on, it might not accidentally confirm an order heard on a commercial. All Alexa needs to mis-hear is the word “yes.”

    There are a couple of ways you can stop Alexa from ordering stuff without your permission, which is also useful if you have someone in your house (like a resourceful child) that wants to buy something without asking first.

    How to disable purchases via Alexa

    If you don’t want the convenience of being able to purchase items from Amazon using Alexa, you can disable it entirely.

    1. Launch the Alexa app.
    2. Tap the Menu tab in the upper left corner.

    Tap Settings.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Toggle the switch for voice purchasing off.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    When disabled, no one will be able to purchase items from Amazon using Alexa on Echo or Dot.

    How to add a passcode to purchases via Alexa

    If you like being able to make Amazon purchases with help from Alexa, but want to make sure purchases are intentional and with your permission, you can set up a four-digit passcode.

    1. Launch the Alexa app.
    2. Tap the Menu tab in the upper left corner.

    Tap Settings.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Tap Save Changes.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    When you have a passcode set up, you can make it all the way through the steps of purchasing an item, but when you confirm that you want to buy an item, Alexa will say, “Tell me your voice code.” Without it, you can’t complete the purchase.

    Do you have a funny Alexa story?

    Do you have an Echo or Dot in your household? Have you accidentally triggered Alexa? Tell us some funny things that have happened to you.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    These are the 10 best Kirby games of all time

    Kirby has been around for over 30 years now and he’s been in over 30 video games as well. After analyzing his adventures, we’ve determined which ones are the best of the best.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Betas never stop: The third beta for watchOS 8.6 is out now!

    The third beta of watchOS 8.6 is now available to developers.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Review: Twelve South’s Curve Riser elevates your iMac a bit too much

    If you’re looking for a monitor riser for your iMac or Apple Studio Display, the Twelve South Curve Riser is likely one to avoid.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Secure your home, and add a little Alexa magic with these smart locks

    If you’re looking for smart locks that work with Alexa, you’ve come to the right place. These items will help you secure your home by simply using your voice.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Looking for the latest tech? Amazon has a new Echo with premium sound, smart home hub and Alexa.

    2. Turn off Voice Purchasing or set up a PIN code for purchases

    “Alexa, buy more laundry detergent.” This is a pretty nifty trick, and it’s a major draw for people who like to shop for household items online. This may feel like one of its most futuristic features. But a single security breach could cost you dearly.

    You can turn off the Echo’s Voice Purchasing option off and use Amazon’s app or website to shop. To turn it off, open your Alexa app, tap Settings > Account Settings > Voice Purchasing then toggle Voice Purchasing to Off.

    If you still want the convenience (and the sci-fi vibe) of Echo voice purchasing, set up a PIN code to avoid unauthorized purchases. To set it up, go to the same Voice Purchasing settings page on your Alexa app, toggle Voice Purchasing to On, then tap Purchase Confirmation > Voice Code. This will prompt you to enter a four-digit PIN.

    Now, the four-digit code has to be spoken out to complete a purchase on your Echo. That said, anyone can simply listen in and reuse your code so having a voice purchasing PIN is not fool-proof.

    3. Switch off the Echo Show camera

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    If you haven’t seen it, the Echo Show is a mini-interactive TV screen with additional touchscreen controls. The Show includes everything you loved about your speaker, plus transcribed song lyrics, surveillance footage of the baby’s room and video calls.

    Video calling is an exciting tool, but many people find the camera to be as anxiety-inducing as microphones. What does the camera see? Is it watching all day and night? How do you know if it’s been hacked? Many people put tape over the webcams on their laptops and they may feel compelled to do the same with their Echo Shows.

    Luckily, the device’s camera and mics are very easy to turn off. There’s a button on the top of the Show that controls inputs. Just press it off, and both cameras and mics shut off. The front LED will also turn red, signifying the inputs have been successfully shut down. You can still use the touchscreen without a hitch.

    By clicking our links, you’re supporting our research. As an Amazon Associate, we earn a small commission from qualifying purchases. Recommendations are not part of any business incentives.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    If you need to edit or remove a contact from Alexa you will need to go to the Alexa app on your device.

    Update: this functionality was disabled by Alexa in a recent update, so you are no longer able to delete contacts from Alexa.

    Update 2: we have just launched an Alexa Skill – Your Contacts News reading you the latest news affecting your contacts and their companies!

    The skill give you the perfect excuse to reach out to a friend or acquittance to ensure you build and maintain contact and rapport: congratulate them on their recent acquisition, or take a jab at their newly announced dress-code policy!

    It takes 3 easy steps to setup:

      and sign-up to Covve, available for both Android and iOS
    1. Enable the Alexa skill Your Contacts News
    2. Authenticate (login) with Covve and you are done – just ask Alexa to “Open my contacts news”, and you will get the 5 most recent news stories affecting your contacts and their companies.

    Covve’s AI-powered News Engine scans more than 150 news sources, reads the articles and understands what companies they are referring to, what the key message of the article is, how important it is to the company and which of your contacts are affected by it.

    How you could previously remove contacts from Alexa – not available since a recent Alexa update:

    Open the Alexa app. Go to Conversations tab in your Alexa account.

    Click on the contacts icon in Alexa. It will show you all of the contacts that you have.

    Locate the contact that you wish to delete and select that contact and then click on the delete or block button.

    Originally, Echo devices were intended to feature audio control only, allowing you, the user, to instruct Alexa to do whatever you want it to do. That’s until the introduction of the Echo Show, which you could describe as the tablet version of the Amazon Echo.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    The Echo Show lineup is a little different from other Alexa devices, with more customization options and a screen to display the weather, give you recipes, and display your favorite photos. If you have an Echo Show, keep reading to learn how to remove photos.

    How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    How to Remove Photos from Echo Show

    The Echo Show is capable of syncing personal photos with a few services. For example, you can link your Prime Photos account, your Facebook account, or upload photos from your phone. If you choose to link your Facebook or your Prime Photos accounts you can see daily photos from years past. No matter where Alexa is getting your photos from, you can easily remove them.

    For all of its customization options, perhaps you don’t want to showcase your personal photos for everyone to see. If that’s the case, follow these steps to remove your photos from your Echo Show:

    1. Open the Alexa app on your smartphone or tablet. Tap on Devices at the bottom.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    2. Tap on Echo & Alexa.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    3. Now, tap on your Echo Show in the list.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    4. Tap on Photo Display.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    5. Toggle the options off next to Daily Memories and This Day. These options show you photos from your Prime Photos account if you’ve enabled the feature.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    6. Tap on Uploaded Photos.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    7. Tap the checkmark next to any photos you’d like to remove from your Show’s display.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    8. If you’d like to disable the Uploaded Photos function altogether, tap the toggle switch in the upper right-hand corner.
      How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Now, the photo or photos you don’t want to see on your Echo Show will no longer appear.

    More Background Options

    Perhaps you don’t want your personal photos displayed on your Echo Show. Or, you may want to change them up. Whatever your home screen goals, we’ll discuss photo alternatives in this section.

    Home Screen Background

    Like any touchscreen device, you can set a new background for your Echo Show. In fact, you can personalize the entire on-screen visual experience to a greater extent than you might think.

    1. To change the appearance of the home screen, just swipe downwards from the top of the screen and then tap the gear icon (settings).
    2. Navigate to Clock & Photo Display in this menu and then tap Clock.
    3. Select one of the available options. If you want to display your photos, tap on Amazon Photos, Facebook, or Photo from your phone.

    Adding Home Cards

    What is Amazon Home Cards anyway? Android phone and tablet users may see a resemblance to widgets. Essentially, the Echo Show is equipped with more useful features than the mere clock and background. With Home Cards, you can display Messaging, Reminders, Notifications, Upcoming Events, Trending Topics, Weather, Drop-In, and other features on your home screen.

    You can set these to shuffle continuously (the clock will no longer show up all the time) or to pop up whenever a notification arrives. Go to the settings screen again (gear icon), followed by Home & Clock, and look for the Home Cards feature on the list. From this menu, you can choose which cards you’d like to see and how you’d like them displayed (continuously or based on notifications).

    Night Mode

    Nighttime Mode dims the display of your Echo Show and filters out the notifications so that it won’t bother you (You could be sleeping or engaging in another bedroom activity, who knows?). Nighttime Mode is activated from the Home & Clock menu.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    If you have more questions about your Echo Show, keep reading!

    How do I make my photos full screen on the Echo Show?

    You may notice that some photos are full screen and others show a smaller image with blurred edges. Fortunately, you can fix this and you don’t need the Alexa app to do it. Head over to your Echo Show device and follow these steps:

    1. Swipe down from the top of the screen and tap on the Settings cog.

    2. Tap on Display.

    3. Tap on Photo Slideshow.

    4. Tap on Cropping.

    Now you can choose No Cropping, Smart Cropping, or Crop All.

    How do I add photos from my phone?

    If you’ve removed the unwanted photos and want to add new ones, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Alexa App and tap on Devices. Then, tap on Echo & Alexa.

    2. Tap on your Echo Show device. Then, scroll down to the Photos option.

    3. Tap on Uploaded Photos.

    4. Tap the + sign and add the photos from your camera roll.

    Now, you can select photos from your phone’s camera roll.

    Personalizing Your Echo Show

    As you can see, personalizing an Echo Show device is fairly simple and straightforward. Choose the clock display, the background photo, the desired Home Cards, the way you want them displayed, and toggle Nighttime Mode on or off for the ideal Echo Show user experience.

    How have you personalized your Echo Show experience? Which are your favorite Home Cards? Have you experienced any problems along the way? Share with the community in the comments section below.

    Instead of leaving your computer on all the time to run My Media, many users are buying $30 Raspberry Pi’s to run on My Media on. It’s really easy to install My Media on the Pi and you can always index media stored on a NAS, on other external storage or on the Pi itself.

    Please ensure you have added (and linked) the My Media Skill using the Amazon Alexa Companion app before installing the My Media server app.

    You can either install My Media for Alexa via the Raspberry Pi GUI or via an ssh terminal session to your Pi. Separate instructions are provided below:

    After installing using either method, please follow the instructions at the end of this guide to finish configuration.

    Method 1: Installing via the Raspberry Pi GUI

    1. Open the built in Chromium web browser: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    2. Download the latest Raspberry Pi version of My Media by clicking here: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    3. You may get asked whether you want to keep the download file. Choose ‘Keep’: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    4. Once the download is complete, find it in the download bar of the browser and select ‘Show In Folder’: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    5. Right-click the downloaded ‘deb’ file and click ‘Install Package’: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    6. Confirm you want to install the My Media for Alexa package: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    7. Enter your Raspberry Pi password when prompted (the default password for the pi is ‘raspberry’): How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    8. Wait for installation to complete: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    9. Once the installation window disappears, go back to the web browser and navigate to http://localhost:52051. The My Media Web Console will open and allow you to complete installation: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Now please follow the instructions at the end of this guide to finish configuration.

    Method 2: Installation via terminal

    1. Enable SSH access on your Pi by following these instructions
    2. SSH to your box from your normal computer, eg by using putty or another ssh client
    3. Copy and paste these commands into your SSH terminal to download the My Media installation files: The console should look like this: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echoIf you receive an error message stating that “The certificate of xxxxxxx is not trusted”, please execute this command first:
    4. If download is successful, copy and paste this command into your SSH terminal to install the My Media package: The console should look like this: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

    Now please follow the next set of instructions to finish configuration.

    Configuring My Media for Alexa

    1. Ensure the My Media Web Console is open (the last step of each installation method above), and then click the ‘Next’ button on the Welcome screen: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    2. You now need to link your My Media for Alexa install with the Amazon account you use with your Echo device. Enter your Amazon Email address and password when prompted: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    3. Once paired, you will be returned to the My Media Web Console. You’ll be asked if you want to download sample media – you can say Yes or No: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    4. The next step is to add your media, click the ‘Watch Folders’ menu option on the left hand side of the Console: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    5. Click ‘Add Folder’: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    6. Navigate the folder structure on your device to find the media, for example /home/pi/Music. This can also be a NAS location if you have mounted your NAS drive: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    7. My Media for Alexa will index your media and show that it is now ready for Serving to Alexa: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    8. You should now be able to see your media in the various views of the My Media Web Console, eg the Album view: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo
    9. Now try playing your music by saying for example, “Alexa, open My Media” or click here to see the other commands you can use.

    Uninstalling My Media for Alexa

    1. Open a terminal on your Raspberry Pi, either by using the GUI or using ssh
    2. Copy and paste this commands into your terminal to uninstall My Media: The console should look like this: How to uninstall alexa skills from your amazon echo

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Tagging can be used to distinguish between a simple and powerful notes app. To take advantage of this useful feature, note-taking apps used to require you to use a third-party app (often one that was expensive).

Apple’s iOS 15 and macOS Monterey have added a tagging function to Apple Notes. This is our recommendation for the best iPhone notes app. With a single tap, you can tag any note with a hashtag to find all notes that match the hashtag.

This is a welcome change for someone who relies on Apple Notes to take all his notes. You can organize your notes with tags in a way that a traditional folder system can’t. However, you can also create smart folders using the Notes app that can display notes from multiple tags. Here are the steps to get you started.

How to tag Apple Notes notes

To tag a note, you only need to add one word (or at least omit the spaces) followed by a hashtag (#). This can be done in any part of the text or in the title.

Let’s suppose you want to tag a task as #todo. In the note, enter “#todo”. This will create a new hashtag. This can be repeated for all of your important notes. A hashtag active will be highlighted in yellow.

How to locate tagged notes in Apple Notes

The section for tagged notes is strangely hidden. To access the Folders screen, open the Notes app and hit the “Folders” button in the upper-left corner. Scroll down to the bottom to locate the “Tags” section.

To see all tags, you can select the “All Tags” option. To view all notes associated with a tag, you can choose a specific tag. After you have selected a tag, a carousel will appear at the top that displays all of your tags. Here you can select multiple tags.

You can also search for tagged notes using a hashtag. This is a faster way to locate the notes you are looking for.

How to organize Apple Notes tagged notes in a smart file

Let’s suppose you need an easy way for all of your work notes to be accessible. You can group them in a smart folder that uses the tagging system.

A smart folder’s beauty is its ability to automatically update. It will automatically update the folder with new tags once you have defined that it should contain notes from specific tags (you can choose as many as you want).

Open the Notes app on the iPhone or iPad. Tap the “Folders” button in the upper-left corner to get started. Click the New Folder button at the bottom-left corner and select the “New Smart Folder”. Give the folder a name and select the tags you want to add, then tap “Done.”

All associated notes will now be displayed in one view. You can edit the smart folder tags later by tapping the three-dotted menu button at the top.

How to delete tags in Apple Notes and smart folders

Apple Notes does not provide an easy way to delete tags. They are automatically populated. You can delete all associated notes or manually remove a tag from any notes if you don’t wish to see it anymore.

But it is easy to delete a smart folder: To delete a smart folder, simply swipe left on the screen and tap the Delete icon. It won’t delete any notes within it. Only the folder grouping.

Notes has become a useful app in iOS, and iOS and iPadOS 15 is bringing about new features that will forever change the way you create notes.

Image: CNET.com

iOS 15 brings about a new way to use notes on iPhones with organizational features like tags and a new collaborator view that features mentions and an activity view to keep track of collaborative changes. On iPadOS 15, use Apple Pencil to take notes anywhere with a new Quick Note feature that will display a modal window in any iPadOS app to quickly add to an existing note or create a new one using a simple gesture with your Apple Pencil or finger.

Mobility must-reads

  • Android 13: The best features to expect
  • Best password managers for Mac and iOS
  • Mobile malware is on the rise: Know how to protect yourself from a virus or stolen data
  • 6 easy tips for cleaning up your inbox (TechRepublic Premium)

Notes is gaining many new features that make it useful for more than just quick ideas and things to remember: You can collaborate in new ways and do things not possible in even third party apps with the Apple Pencil.

Continue reading to learn about the ways you can take your Notes usage to the next level with iOS and iPadOS 15.

How to use Quick Note to annotate notes anywhere in iPadOS

Quick Note is a new feature on iPadOS only that allows you to create a note from within any app across iPadOS, or even on the Home Screen on iPadOS. You can do this using a quick gesture that utilizes either your finger or the Apple Pencil.

To use this feature, follow these steps:

  1. On iPadOS with your finger or Apple Pencil, swipe up from the bottom right of the iPad.
  2. A new window will appear where you can draw with the Apple Pencil or type with the keyboard.
  3. Tap Done when you are finished annotating your note (Figure A).

Figure A

The Quick Note feature gives you access to a new note anywhere in iPadOS, even in third-party apps. Create the note with an Apple Pencil or your iPad’s keyboard.
Image: Cory Bohon/TechRepublic

Once you dismiss the Notes window by tapping Done, you can bring it back up with the same note by swiping back up from the bottom right of the iPad. This allows you to keep working on the same note easily. Tap the Compose button to create a new note instead when the window appears if you need a new note.

Figure B

The notes created with Quick Note are available from a new folder in Notes called Quick Notes.
Image: Cory Bohon/TechRepublic

Notes created like this are placed into a new “Quick Notes” folder (Figure B) that’s available in the Folders section of the Notes app on all devices. These notes can be expanded on from there and moved into the regular Notes folders or trashed.

How to use tags in Notes

Another new feature in iOS 15 available to all Notes users across all devices is the ability to use hashtags to organize notes. This feature is similar to the tagging feature found in Reminders.

Figure C

Tags can be placed anywhere inside of notes and can then be filtered or searched in the Folders section of the Notes app.
Image: Cory Bohon/TechRepublic

To use hashtags, simply type a “#” symbol, then the word you’d like to turn into a tag. When you press space afterward, it will turn it into a searchable and filterable tag. You can filter notes from the main Folders view at the bottom where a new “Tags” area can be found. Tap on a tag in this view to show only notes that have that tag inside of it (Figure C).

How to use mentions in shared Notes

If you have shared a note, then you can now mention someone directly in the note itself (think for commenting on a particular section that needs input from someone). To do this, you simply need to type the “@” symbol into the note, then the first or last name of the person. Pressing Space will autocomplete it to the person’s name in the note and they will be alerted to the mention in the note.

How to use Activity View to see updates to shared notes

Notes have been undergoing changes throughout the previous few releases to expand on the collaboration features in the app. iOS 15 is bringing another change to Note collaboration: The ability to view the activity for a particular note and changes that everyone who’s invited to the note have made.

Figure D

The activity view in Notes now makes collaborating on a note much easier because you can see the changes that each invited user has made to the note.
Image: Cory Bohon/TechRepublic

To view the Note activity, tap on the sharing button in the tool bar, then tap on “Show All Activity.” A new sidebar will appear that will display all of the most recent activity and changes that each user has made to the note (Figure D). Tap on the activity listed there to highlight the changes that the user made to the note.

Editor’s note: This post relates to iOS 15, Apple’s announced but not-yet-released version of iOS. iOS is expected to be released in early fall 2021. For more information on the release schedule and to learn how to download the betas, read our iOS 15 cheat sheet.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Tech News You Can Use Newsletter

We deliver the top business tech news stories about the companies, the people, and the products revolutionizing the planet.

В приложении «Заметки» можно быстро записать идеи или упорядочить информацию с помощью контрольных списков, изображений, веб-ссылок, отсканированных документов, рукописных заметок и зарисовок.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Создание и форматирование новой заметки

Siri. Скажите, например: «Создай новую заметку». Узнайте, как давать команды Siri.

Также можно выполнить следующие действия.

Коснитесь кнопки и введите текст.

Первая строчка заметки станет ее заголовком.

Чтобы изменить форматирование, коснитесь кнопки .

Вы можете применить стиль заголовка, жирный шрифт и курсив, маркированный или нумерованный список и другие стили.

Чтобы сохранить заметку, коснитесь «Готово».

Совет. Чтобы выбрать стиль по умолчанию, который должен использоваться для первой строки всех новых заметок, откройте «Настройки» > «Заметки» > «Первая строка заметки».

Добавление контрольного списка

В заметке коснитесь и выполните любое из описанных ниже действий.

Добавление пунктов в список. Введите текст, а затем коснитесь клавиши Return, чтобы ввести следующий пункт.

Увеличение или уменьшение отступа. Смахните вправо или влево по пункту.

Отметка пункта как завершенного. Коснитесь пустого кружка рядом с пунктом, чтобы добавить галочку.

Изменение положения пункта в списке. Коснитесь и удерживайте пустой кружок или галочку рядом с пунктом, а затем перетяните пункт в новое место списка.

Управление пунктами в списке. Коснитесь списка, чтобы отобразить меню, коснитесь кнопки , коснитесь «Контрольный список», а затем коснитесь «Отметить все», «Снять все флажки», «Удалить отмеченные» или «Перемещать отмеченные вниз».

Для автоматического перемещения отмеченных пунктов вниз во всех Ваших заметках откройте «Настройки» > «Заметки» > «Сортировать отмеченные элементы», затем коснитесь параметра «Автоматически».

Добавление или редактирование таблицы

В заметке коснитесь кнопки и выполните любое из описанных ниже действий.

Введите текст. Коснитесь ячейки, а затем введите текст. Чтобы добавить еще одну текстовую строку в ячейке, коснитесь клавиши Shift и удерживайте ее, а затем коснитесь «Далее».

Перейдите к следующей ячейке. Коснитесь «Далее». Когда достигните последней ячейки, коснитесь «Далее», чтобы добавить новую строку.

Выберите формат строки или столбца. Коснитесь манипулятора выбора строки или столбца, а затем выберите стиль, например, жирный шрифт, курсив, подчеркивание или зачеркивание.

Добавьте или удалите строку или столбец. Коснитесь манипулятора выбора строки или столбца и выберите нужное действие.

Переместите строку или столбец. Коснитесь и удерживайте манипулятор выбора строки или столбца, затем перетяните его в новое место.

Просмотрите другие столбцы. Если таблица шире Вашего экрана, смахните по таблице вправо или влево, чтобы просмотреть все столбцы.

Чтобы отменить формат таблицы и преобразовать ее содержимое в текст, коснитесь ячейки таблицы, коснитесь кнопки и выберите «Преобразовать в текст».

Выполнение действия с адресами, номерами телефонов, датами и многим другим

В заметках под текстом, распознаваемым как адрес, адрес электронной почты, номер телефона, дата или другой тип данных, появляется желтое подчеркивание. Коснитесь подчеркнутого текста для выполнения действия с ним. Например, можно просмотреть адрес в приложении «Карты», написать электронное письмо, совершить телефонный вызов или добавить событие календаря.

Примечание. Обнаружение даты доступно, если в качестве языка системы iPhone в меню «Настройки» > «Основные» > «Язык и регион» установлен поддерживаемый язык. См. информацию на веб-сайте Доступность функций iOS и iPadOS.

В приложении «Заметки» можно искать по всем заметкам текст, введенный с клавиатуры и написанный от руки, а также объекты, расположенные на изображениях и текст в отсканированных документах. Вы также можете упорядочить заметки в папки и закрепить важные заметки в верхней части списка.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Создание, переименование, перемещение или удаление папки или подпапки

В списке папок выполните любое из описанных ниже действий.

Создание папки. Коснитесь , выберите учетную запись (если у Вас их несколько), коснитесь «Новая папка», затем введите название.

Создание подпапки. Коснитесь и удерживайте папку, а затем перетяните ее на другую папку.

Переименование папки. Коснитесь папки и удерживайте ее, коснитесь «Переименовать», затем введите новое название.

Перемещение папки. Смахните влево по папке, коснитесь кнопки , а затем выберите новое место. Можно также коснуться и удерживать папку, а затем перетянуть ее в новое место. Папка становится подпапкой, если перетянуть ее в другую папку.

Удаление папки. Смахните влево по папке, затем коснитесь кнопки . Или коснитесь и удерживайте папку, а затем коснитесь «Удалить».

Если Вы передумали, откройте папку «Недавно удаленные» и восстановите заметки.

Изменение режима просмотра папки и сортировка, перемещение, закрепление и удаление заметок

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

В списке заметок выполните любое из описанных ниже действий.

Изменение режима просмотра папки. Коснитесь кнопки , затем выберите «См. как видео» или «Просмотреть в виде списка».

Изменение порядка сортировки объектов в папке. Коснитесь , коснитесь «Сортировка», затем выберите «По дате изменения», «По дате создания» или «По названию». Чтобы выбрать способ сортировки по умолчанию для всех папок, откройте «Настройки» > «Заметки» > «Сортировка».

Перемещение заметки в другую папку. Смахните влево по заметке, затем коснитесь кнопки . Или коснитесь и удерживайте заметку, коснитесь «Переместить», а затем выберите папку.

Закрепление важной заметки в верхней части списка. Коснитесь и удерживайте заметку, а затем коснитесь «Закрепить заметку». Можно также смахнуть вправо по заметке и коснуться значка булавки.

Удаление заметки. Смахните влево по заметке и коснитесь кнопки . Или коснитесь и удерживайте заметку, а затем коснитесь «Удалить».

Если Вы передумали, откройте папку «Недавно удаленные» и восстановите заметку.

Поиск заметок

Можно искать теги, текст, введенный с клавиатуры и написанный от руки, а также объекты, расположенные на изображениях и текст в отсканированных документах.

Смахните вниз по списку заметок, чтобы отобразить поле поиска.

Коснитесь поля поиска и введите поисковый запрос. Можно также выбрать предлагаемый поисковый запрос, например «Заметки с рисунками», а затем ввести дополнительный текст для уточнения поиска.

Если заметка защищена паролем, то в результатах поиска отображается только ее заголовок. Область поиска включает рукописный текст (на поддерживаемых языках), фотографии и отсканированные документы.

Поиск текста, введенного с клавиатуры или написанного от руки, в заметке.

Откройте заметку, в которой хотите выполнить поиск.

Коснитесь кнопки , затем коснитесь «Найти в заметке».

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Of all the apps that are on our phones, the Notes app is frequently our default app to use. Most of my clients have used the Notes app to capture thoughts, ideas, information and passwords. There is tons of information in this app. However we can add a level of organization to using Notes app that will give it more function and organization. There are many ways to use this app for lists, routines and notes. Here is how I use the Notes app.

General information about Notes app

  • As you enter the first line, that line because the name of the list. It is in bold font for this reason.
  • Notes app has a search function and you can find your list this way with the name of the list on the top line.
  • Notes app is cloud based and can be accessed by all your devices for free.
  • Note app can be shared with others to create and use lists together.
  • Notes can be printed, shared by email or text, and locked for privacy.
  • Photos can be pasted into individual notes or as a note.
  • If you press lightly inside a note, a pop up with font options appears.

Lists

The Notes app is easy to use for lists. Add lists would you like to have with you all the time. General lists include shopping, grocery, kids’ clothing and shoe sizes, Christmas list, air filter dimensions, medication list or any list you want to reference while out shopping, at a meeting, at a doctor’s office or away from home base. The lists I use most frequently are for business. There is a consignment list for that three month time, action lists for particular clients and a list of favorite products I share frequently with clients.

Routines and Reminders

Notes app can be a daily routines and reminders list with check lists. Add a list of routines with a check circle starting each item of your list. (Find that check circle on the bottom right of your device while working in the Notes app.) Create the list of what you want your routine to include or a series of reminders for a specific task. As you check off, you won’t forget tasks. Un-check the circles at the end of your work or when you have completed this series of routines. Repeat and use again and again.

Notes

Depending on your typing ability, Notes app is a great choice to take notes during for personal reference, during meetings and to capture ideas.

  • Notes app can be used to reference materials of all types. Gathering information and consolidating it can be done here. Be sure you add a title as the top line to find your information. My clients are information seekers and like to have access to this.
  • Meeting notes are easy to find and review. When I meet with clients, I listen, take notes in this app and share these with clients. At the top of the note I add the name, date and session number of our meeting. It helps us track our actions and remain accountable to planning.
  • Wonder where to keep your big ideas? It’s here within this app. I love that as you add information, the cloud keeps this updated.
  • Each year I highlight my big accomplishments. The list is named 2020 Highlights. I add to this list throughout the year and check it at the end of the year. It’s fun to see this from previous years too.

Over the years as I have used the Notes app more strategically. The more I use it, the more I love it!

iOS Notes App : It’s that easy to organize your notes

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

headings and sorting

Even a heading can provide a certain overview in the note list. Apple’s note app takes the first line as the heading. To make the importance clear, you can specify in “Settings > Notes > New note starts with” that the first line is written in “Title” or “Heading” format, while the following lines are then formatted as plain text.

Once you are in “Settings > Notes”, you can also set under “Sort by” whether the display order is sorted by “Date modified”, “Date created” or “Title”. Of course, each of these settings has its advantages and disadvantages, so we cannot give you a clear recommendation here.

create folder

You can also create folders in the app itself, thereby separating different subject areas. For example, separate work notes from your holiday checklist or private notes. You can easily create a new folder by tapping on the “

pro tip: You can also move notes to another folder later. To do this, tap on “Edit” within the folder and select the notes to be moved. Then tap on “Move” and select the destination folder. Finished.

Today’s apps, services and hardware make it easy to jot, sketch and save the things that inspire you.

Send any friend a story

As a subscriber, you have 10 gift articles to give each month. Anyone can read what you share.

Give this article

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

The need to take notes goes back through centuries of human history. It’s no wonder, then, that even the earliest desktop systems in the 1980s included a basic “notepad” program. But digital note-taking tools have been improving rapidly. Far beyond simple typed text, you can now save photos, audio and video clips, web links, sketches and more — all on your smartphone.

Whether the task is making a simple grocery list or organizing a complex projects like a home renovation, there is a note-taking program for you. Here’s how to sort through the options and get started.

Step 1: Sample Google Keep or Apple Notes

New to digital note-taking? You can ease into it with a freebie from Google or Apple.

Google offers Google Keep. If you’re on the Apple side of the fence, you have the Notes app for iOS, as well as a desktop version for Macs and online in iCloud.com. With both , you can retrieve your files on any device — as long as you are online, logged in to your user account with the company and set to sync.

Step 2: Add Text, and More

Google Keep and Apple’s Notes apps easily handle basic text input, but can do so much more, too — like saving images and web links into your notes, which can be helpful for detailed projects like a kitchen remodel or genealogical research. Each app has a text search function , so you can quickly round up all the websites and notes you’ve saved that contain your keywords, like “chicken” or “turkey” when you’re trying to find a specific poultry recipe.

With Google Keep, you can organize notes with labels and colors. Labels, like “Work” or “Personal,” help organize notes you take for different parts of your life. Color-coding your notes makes it easier to visually recognize and group them on screen — for instance, the notes on all the hotels you’ve researched for a vacation could be blue and the potential restaurants to visit orange.

You can also capture nearby audio within a note, or record a voice memo and have it automatically transcribed. For photos containing signs and words, use the Grab Image Text command; Keep’s optical-character recognition technology converts text in images into editable, searchable type.

Apple’s Notes app has a few tricks of its own, like quick formatting for checklists. You can also make a new note and tap the encircled plus (+) button in the tool bar to see a menu with a command for scanning a document into a note with the device’s camera. The same menu has additional options for importing or snapping a photo, or adding a sketch.

To learn all the features for each app, check out the online guides for Google Keep and Apple’s Notes.

Step 3: Try Out Other Apps

Don’t care for the manufacturer’s software? You have plenty of third-party programs in the app stores. Microsoft’s OneNote app, part of its Office software suite, is popular and available for Android and iOS.

Other apps include Evernote, which offers features like note templates, a Web Clipper tool for saving pages from a browser and the ability to search handwritten notes. It has been around since 2008 and has free limited and full subscription plans , with apps for Android, iOS, Mac and Windows. Bear (free and subscription plans for iOS and Mac) uses elegant typography and text-formatting shortcuts in its notes. The very basic but free Simplenote (Android, iOS, Windows, Mac and Linux) is also among the many alternatives.

Step 4: Go Back to ‘Paper’

If you don’t want to ditch the pen and paper entirely, no problem. You can still organize those notes with digital tools.

Several products help move your physical notes to the digital world. Many are aimed at visual professionals (and can cost around $200), like the notebook maker Moleskine’s Smart Writing System, which uses a traditional notebook and special pen to capture your handiwork and cloud-syncs it all to a tablet. Smartpens, like those from LiveScribe and NeoLAB, and Wacom’s Bamboo smartpads also digitize handwriting and sketches from paper.

Less expensive tools include the Rocketbook line of paperlike notebooks (starting at $16), with a free app that scans the pages to a variety of cloud services.

On a budget but still want to digitize your scribbles as a backup? Pick up a cheap paper notebook for a buck or two at the drugstore and use your phone’s camera to snap and store page pictures.

Whichever note-taking method you use, the online backup function keeps your collection safe, with tools to search and sort it. After all, making all those notes won’t do you any good if you can’t find them later.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

The iPad is a visual tool. And with its retina display, it’s meant to be seen with great visuals. Apple didn’t add this spectacular display so that we could read; they added it so we could view it. So why type your notes in plain text?

That’s all you will get with the built-in Notes app provided with iOS, just plain text. While that does serve the purpose, the iPad can do so much more than just allow you to view plain text, so why not use it that way? The following is a list of six apps that will help you organize your thoughts with visual notes on an iPad.

1. Curator – Visual Notes

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Curator lays out your thoughts in blocks. It is narrow to a certain extent, as it only allows for a five-by-five grid and only works in portrait mode. It is so visual that the best way to utilize the features of the app is to organize something such as a Christmas wish list or an article with lots of research. It’s best with websites and photos and limited text. Simple to use, working with drag and drop in your visual notes allows you to manipulate your ideas and thoughts into place.

2. Penultimate

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

The best part about Penultimate is that it’s part of the Evernote app family, allowing it to sync with your Evernote account. This means you will have your notes on all your devices, as Evernote can be accessed from your computer or your iOS device. It will work in both portrait and landscape mode, yet the “notebook paper” background does not move to landscape, so notes need to be written on a blank page or graph paper if you’re looking for landscape. Additionally entire sections can be moved with copy and paste around the page or even between pages. Penultimate will also work with a search command on your handwriting, but will not work with mine, meaning my handwriting must be really bad. You can add photos along with handwriting and drawings as well.

3. Springpad

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

What makes Springpad unique is that it can save several different types of items, and not just notes, photos, and links, but also television shows, movies, books, music, recipes, checklists, and more. You can build different notebooks that hold different items. One of them could hold the movies and TVs that you want to remember to watch. Another can hold your recipes and shopping lists. Another can hold your notes for a meeting along with links to websites to look up when the meeting is complete. If you save a product, a movie, recipe, or similar, it will look it up for you and will give you reviews of the movie, as many recipes as it can find for a certain food item, or tell you where you can buy the product you are desiring. You can also make your “Springs” public or private and follow others’ Springs as well, much like Pinterest.

4. Sticky Notes for iPad and iPhone

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

It’s sticky notes for the digital age. At first glance it might seem like the old Sticky Notes app on Mac, but it’s much more versatile for working with those visual notes. You can have different notebooks and can fill them with both notes and pictures. Instead of having a yellow post-it note that will stick to most surfaces, you can have notes on different colored “paper” and with different fonts and colored “inks.” It’s a simple app, but sometimes that’s all you need.

5. Popplet Lite

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Popplets are like square bubbles. You can build a whole thought process with popplets. New popplets can be added and connected in any direction to follow your thoughts. You can add text, images, or drawings and change colors of the Popplets, as well as change the size and orientation of the type. There are more options in the paid version, but at the very least this free version gives you the option of trying the app for awhile before having to purchase it.

6. SimpleMind+

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

SimpleMind+ is much like Popplet, but more involved. Unlike Popplet, though, it doesn’t have the control of font size and orientation. Drawing another comparison to Popplet, to get more features, you have to buy the full version. These features are as mundane as color choice and as necessary as the option to add photos. There is also a desktop version for both Mac and Windows that allows you to view and edit your visual notes on all platforms. The free version is still very usable, but if you want the better features, you can always try before you buy.

Conclusion

There are so many different note-taking apps for iOS. There’s not reason to narrow yourself own to just one app that you keep on your iPad. Keep as many as you need for taking notes, whether they are visual notes or more straight text. These six apps laid out above are great choices for your visual notes depending on your need.

These free note apps bring something unique to the table to help you jot down your ideas.

Your smartphone and computer have replaced all paper notepads. But the right note-taking app is all about which unique features you are looking for.

In the world of note-taking apps, the debate usually boils down to OneNote vs. Evernote. But both of those might be overkill for you, or just not the right system. These other free note apps bring something unique to the table, like a chat-like interface, a visual spatial system, and speed.

1. InstaNote (Android, iOS): Chat-Like Note Taking App With Threads and Reminders

InstaNote is a note-taking app for the WhatsApp and WeChat generation. The interface reminds you of an instant messaging app, where you add each note like you were sending a text message. Think of it as a chat app where you talk to yourself. But hold on, there’s more.

Dig a little deep and you’ll be surprised to see how the app is packed with features. You can add a note in text, or record a voice note. These voice notes can be tagged with a simple caption to search for them later. You can also scribble notes on a whiteboard, add images from your phone, or add files. And all of this can be searched later, with neat filters to quickly find the correct note.

InstaNote also includes reminders, which you can set up as a one-time or recurring alarm. Star notes to save them as favorites so they’re easy to access.

You can also create Rooms to share notes with friends, inviting them via their email. InstaNote requires you to register to use it, but the open-source app is free and has no restrictions.

It might seem like a gimmicky app at first glance, but it’s actually one of the most feature-rich free note-taking apps we’ve seen. It’s worth checking out if you like to write short notes to yourself regularly.

Download: InstaNote for Android | iOS (Free)

2. Nute (Web): Minimalist Browser Tool to Write Notes Quickly

Nute is a progressive web app (PWA) for simple, minimalist note-taking. It’s a blank page where you can start typing immediately. The app will save anything you type in your browser cache, retaining it even after you close the app. Be careful of clearing the cache, you might lose your data.

The lightweight PWA loads quickly and is one of those nifty no-signup websites for everyday use. It has no ads and no trackers, and the developer says it will always remain free. Since all data is saved locally and there’s no registration, it doesn’t sync across devices.

Nute has no rich-text formatting or hyperlinks. It’s a simple text editor, like the Notepad app in Windows. The only difference is it runs out of your browser, and always saves anything you type in it. And yes, you can download all of Nute’s contents as a TXT file any time.

3. Nototo (Web): Visual Notes Arranged Like a Desktop

Nototo says that humans have incredible visual-spatial memory. Where the usual Notes apps puts everything into lists, Nototo expands it into a virtual space like a desktop. Add your notes into clusters, and arrange them how they make sense to your eye.

The founding stones are Note Blocks, which appear like text files on your computer. You can move them around, resize them, and give each a different color. These blocks go into Terrains, which is Nototo’s version of Categories. Each terrain has “mountains” as its boundaries, for a visual representation of a data set.

You can move these terrains and blocks, resize them, expand them, and manipulate them however you see fit. The idea is to create notes in a visual way that makes sense to you, without worrying about space constraints. Over time, you might find yourself remembering things better, and be able to locate data quicker.

Take a look at Nototo’s example of Helicopter Prison Escapes to know what can be achieved with this new system of notes.

4. Teria (Android, iOS): Simple and Efficient Note-Taking With Unique Features

Tiny things can make a big impact in how you use an app. Teria seems like any other note-taking app on the surface, but it does one little thing differently. Every time you start the app, it automatically creates a new note, ready for you to write in. And this makes a huge difference.

See, every time you start your Notes app, you are most likely looking to write a new note. Rarely are you trying to add to an existing note. By reducing a tap, Teria makes note-taking faster and more seamless, maximizing your efficiency. It’s such a simple little feature, but it alone is a reason to use the app.

Teria offers a few other unique features. It includes a built-in Streak mode, to create a habit of writing a note every day. Apart from list view, you can also view notes in a Calendar by creation date, which isn’t something any other notes app comes with.

The rich text editor offers the ability to add bold, underline, italics, and other formatting to any words. It also includes full-text search, which means all of the notes are searched rather than just their titles.

And it’s customizable. You can switch off the streak mode. You can set how many words count for a streak note. And in case you don’t want it to automatically create a new note on start, you can switch that off too.

Download: Teria for Android | iOS (Free)

5. The Zettelkasten Method (Web): Learn the Trendy Old-School Notes System

Prolific writer Niklas Luhmann authored 70 books in 30 years thanks to a note-taking system now called the Zettelkasten Method. It has become popular among productivity experts recently, and a few blog posts explain it well. Read:

  • How to use Zettelkasten to boost your creativity and productivity by Zapier
  • The Zettelkasten Method by Less Wrong
  • Stop Taking Regular Notes, Use a Zettelkasten Instead by Eugene Yan

A zettel, or half a sheet of paper, was Luhmann’s preferred tool to take notes. The idea behind each note was that it should fit into that sheet, and so you should set some personal limit for your digital notes. But the key lies in numbering these notes in an organic way.

The organic numbering allows for smartly interlinking the notes, so that each topic can be thought of in non-serial order, but later indexed intelligibly. Also, any note can cross-reference another note in the system, allowing for ideas to merge or sprout new off-shoots.

The Zapier post is a good introduction to the method, while Less Wrong’s explanation is the most detailed. Read all three articles to get a better idea of what the system is all about.

Once you understand the Zettelkasten Method, you can try applying it in any note-taking app like Evernote, OneNote, Google Keep, or SimpleNote. Some developers are creating specialized apps to take advantage of such interlinked notes. The most popular one is Roam Research, but it’s a paid note-taking app. For a free app, start with Zettlr.

Lightweight Note Apps

If these apps aren’t the right fit for you, you don’t have to go scurrying back to OneNote or Evernote. There are plenty of other lightweight alternative note-taking apps, and most of them are free. Check out SimpleNote or Turtl, they might be just what you need.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

From taking notes with siri, to scanning and saving your receipts, to locking passwords with your face – Apple’s Notes app is PACKED with features you might not know about, but are bound to make your life easier and save you time. So open your notes app in preparation for this video, beause you are gonna want to remember what I tell you. THIS is how to use Apple Notes properly

You can actually take a new note while driving, multitasking, or if you just want to go handsfree! Simply say “Hey Siri, make a note “

If you select a folder, and swipe left on an existing note, by tapping the ‘lock’ icon, you can enable either Face ID, thumbprint, or a password to hide the contents of that note. This is an especially good feature to have if you store all your passwords here like me. If I make a new password for a platform, I can quickly and securely chuck my login into my passwords folder in a few seconds. Never loose a password again! Yew!

After editing or reviewing said note, tap the lock icon in the top right corner to relock it. If you do have multiple of these types of notes in a folder, just tap the ‘lock now’ icon at the bottom of the screen to quickly re-lock all those secrets. Boom, youre a ninja.

If you want to create a subfolder, just tap ‘New Folder’, give it a name, then hold down on it and drop it ontop of another folder. Tapping the new little grey arrow on right of the mother folder allows you to expand, or contract subfolders (for those of you who like to keep it nice and clean) *wink!*

You can also turn a normal folder into a subfolder by swiping left and tapping the – you guessed it- folder icon.

Tap the checklist tick icon before typing to begin the checklist format. swiping the individual checkpoint to the right will indent it, and if you hold down the circle of a point, you can drag it to a new place in the list. If you do already have text, highlighting it all and tapping the checklist icon will also put each new line in this format.

By holding down on a note, and tapping ‘pin note’ you can pin it to the top of your list within a folder. This is expecially useful if you require constant access to that particular note that week. Quick and easy.

Now you can share individual notes, or give others access to edit/view them. To share, open the chosen note and touch the box/arrow icon in the top right, this will give you your standard sharing options. Keep in mind with this though that only Airdropping will keep the different text sizes and fonts. Everything else will default to plain body text.

By ADDING people to your note however, all formatting will be the same, and the recipient will just be abe to access your note. This is great for shopping lists with your partner, constatly updating shared checklists, or even having somone review your writing. Access to notes can be given by touching the ‘plus profile’ icon on the top right of an open note, selecting a permission level, and then the platform you want to share it on. The recipient will receive a clean little, note bubble. when they click it, it will open as a new note in their notes app. Apple lets you know which notes have been shared by popping a little ‘profile’ icon next to the title. Very nice.

My Personal favourite. In a new note, if tap the camera icon, you can either take a photo, insert a photo, or scan a doc. Just hold it your device over a document, it will recognise the paper and automatically line up the edges. Tap save… give it a name… and hit done. If you don’t name it, Apple will usually just read the largest text use that as its title. The doc will automatically be converted to a PDF for easy export.

To export it, just hold it down and tap share… (go to receipts folder) If you want to store multiple scans in a note, like for example, all your receipts, this feature is PERFECT… though I recommend changing the image sizes to small for quickly sifting through. Just hold hold down on the scan again, and tap ‘small images’. Boom, easy scrolling!

As long as your printer is connected to the same wifi as your phone and is airprint compatible, you can turn any note into a hard copy in seconds. Just tap the note you want, tap share icon, scroll down and tap print.

If you jot notes down on your pc, but maybe use a different note app then you will love this. If you create all your iphone notes under the icloud location, you can access and add to them on your pc. You just need to google icloud, login, and save the URL to you taskbar. Now every note you take on your pc here will sync to your phone and vice versa! Pfft, who needs a mac.

If you would prefer a gallery view of all the notes within a folder, just pull down to reveal the gallery icon, and tap it. Very fancy.

If you just want to find a note quickly, tap on ‘All iCloud’, pull down to reveal the search bar, and enter your title or keyword. This feature is speedy and super accurate. It also gives you specific search filters. Of couse you could always just do a home screen search, but its good to know anyway. If I am ever returning something to a store and need my receipt quickly, I usually just search the name of the scanned doc in my home screen search and bring it up in a second.

Some of you might already know this, but if if you are the type who has creative or busy thoughts while laying in bed at night, and uses notes app to jot them down, then this can save you being blasted in the face by the white screen. apart from having your brightness on low, head to settings, display and brightness, and under appearance, touch ‘dark mode’. This will blacken the backround of notes app, but also change the backround of most of your defualt apple apps. Worth trying out.

This isn’t really a hidden feature, but it has worked really well for me and I wanted to share it. By adding an emoj in the title of my initial folders, I am able to navigate faster to my desired note, and also make the app a little more fun and personalised. Using caps for the titles of all my initial folders also helps prevent all the text from blending together.

If you turn off screen lock and turn your device sideways, it makes for a bit of a different app experience. Definetely worth trying out.

If youre using safari and find a webpage you want to save and maybe jot some thoughts down around… you can tap the share icon and then notes. This promt allows you to save that webpage as new note in an existing folder, and add some text to the note. Sweet!

If you need to scan a document or make a note in the moment, even from your lock screen, this is the fastest way. Jump into settings, control center, customise control, tap plus on the note option, and position it where you want within your control panel. Now once you swipe down on your phone, you can either tap the note icon to quickly make a new note, or hold it down for more options…. LIKE SCANNING. This works great for straight after you buy something and need to scan the receipt before you forget.

Anyway, you just became a pro notes user. Well done! But you know what is even more useful than notes?

Notes is a super-simple app on your iPhone that you can use to make lists, jot down ideas, and record anything you’d normally scribble down on a sticky pad or cocktail napkin. Notes you create are stored on your iPhone and, optionally, synced with your computer and other iOS devices through iCloud, Gmail, or another IMAP account, through Microsoft Exchange 2010 or later.

To get started, open the Notes app. The main Notes screen shows a list of any notes already saved in Notes.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

You may see one or more notes listed even if you hadn’t previously created a single note using the Notes app. That’s because Notes can also come from email accounts set up on your iPhone for which you’ve turned on Notes.

Creating a new note

Tap the New button to create a new note. The keyboard appears, ready to capture your every thought or idea. Type the things you want to remember or tap the Dictate button and speak your mind. Tap Done to save your note and hide the keyboard. Tap Back to return to the Notes list.

Turning your iPhone sideways displays the landscape mode keyboard, which can help increase your typing speed and accuracy — although it does decrease the number of lines you see as you write your note.

If the wider keyboard doesn’t appear when you turn your iPhone sideways, flick up from the bottom of the screen to open the Control Center, and then tap the Portrait Orientation Lock button to unlock the Portrait Orientation Lock feature and flick down to close the Control Center.

Press and hold the Home button to activate Siri. When Siri is ready, just say, “Create a note,” and when asked, dictate your note. If your iPhone is connected to a power source and you turned voice activation on in the General settings of the Settings app, you can also say “Hey, Siri” to get Siri’s attention.

Searching and managing your Notes list

Notes are listed in chronological order, with the newest note appearing at the top of the list, and the least recently modified note relegated to the bottom of the list. Notes titles are automatically generated based on each note’s first line; if you enter a return in the first line, only the word(s) before the return appear in the title — you see more of the note title in landscape view.

When viewing the Notes list, you can do the following:

Swipe left across a note title to display the Delete button, and then tap Delete to delete the note. If you swipe by mistake, just tap Cancel at the top right of the screen.

Tap a note to view, edit, share, or delete the note.

When viewing a list of notes, tap the Status bar at the top of iPhone’s screen or drag your finger down the list to reveal the Search field, and then type in the first few characters of whatever you’re looking for. Note contents are searched and the titles of any notes containing matches to your search criteria are displayed; tap the note title to view that note.

If you’ve selected Notes in the Settings app by tapping General and then tapping Spotlight Search, any searches you perform from the Spotlight Search Home screen will search in Notes, too.

Browsing, editing, deleting, and emailing Notes

Notes you create can contain regular and accented letters, numbers, and symbols (in other words, any of the alphanumerical stuff you can type with the keyboard), as well as images you save in Photos.

When viewing a note, you can do the following:

To add more text or edit a note, tap where you want to begin typing or editing; the keyboard appears and you can then type or edit to your heart’s content.

Tap a second time to see the formatting menu and do the following:

Tap Select or Select All to highlight the text you want to edit. After you select text, the menu gives you editing options.

Tap Insert Photo to open Photos; tap the photo you want to insert in your Note, and then tap Choose. Notes reopens and you see the image in your note.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Shake your iPhone to display the Undo message; tap Undo to, well, undo what you just did. Shake again to display the Redo option and tap Redo to redo what you undid.

Tap Back at the top of the screen to return to the Notes list.

Tap the Delete button (the trashcan) to delete your note.

Tap the Share button to open the Share Sheet, and then tap the method you want to use to share your note — AirDrop, Message, Mail, Copy, or Print.

The Notes app is a terrific tool that you can sync with your iOS device and your Mac. One useful feature is the ability to create checklists. This makes Notes handy for to-dos, shopping lists, project tasks, gift lists, and more.

Along with checklist feature is a convenient setting. You can automatically sort completed items in your Notes checklists. So whenever you check the circle to cross an item off your list, it moves right to the bottom. This is helpful for seeing your remaining items at the top of the checklist, waiting for you to complete them.

Here’s how to enable the automatic sorting for Notes checklists on iPhone, iPad, and Mac.

Automatic sorting in Notes on iPhone and iPad

To enable automatic sorting for Notes on iOS, you’ll head to the Settings app and pick Notes.

1) In the Notes settings, tap Sort Checked Items.

2) Select Automatically.

3) Tap the Notes arrow at the top to exit.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Although you may sync your Notes between iPhone, iPad, and Mac, this setting is device-specific. So you can use automatic sorting on iPhone but sort manually on iPad or Mac if you like.

Automatic sorting in Notes on Mac

On your Mac, you’ll open the Notes app and its Preferences to enable automatic sorting.

In Notes, click Notes > Preferences from the menu bar. Then, tick the box for Automatically sort checked items.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Close the Notes Preferences and give it a test!

Since the setting is a simple checkbox, you can always turn it off later if you prefer to see your checklist items in the order you place them.

Do more with Notes

For other ways to make lists in the Notes app work better for you, check out these additional how-tos.

Wrapping it up

Moving items you complete in a checklist to the bottom keeps those you still need to do right at the top. This helps you see them clearly and not mixed in with those already done and out of the way. So enabling Notes to automatically sort completed items is a useful setting.

Have you started using Notes for checklists? What do you use them for; shopping, tasks, or something else? Share your thoughts!

Perhaps, you know how important it is to take notes regularly. And you make an effort to capture ideas every day. You also spend time recording your thoughts. But, you’re having trouble finding the best note-taking app.

If you’re a writer, you need note-taking apps you can depend on. This way, you can spend more time developing your ideas and less time waiting for inspiration to arrive.

This updated article features the best digital note-taking apps and tools for all types of operating systems and platforms. At the end, I’ve also got a free bonus which will help you proofread and edit your notes faster.

Apps We Recommend

1. Simplenote

Pricing: Free

Simplenote is used to capture digital notes

Simplenote is a free note capturing app with a cult following. There are Simplenote apps for Windows, Mac, iOS, and Android. You can also access Simplenote through a web app.

Simplenote is geared towards those who want to capture and organize text notes. Unfortunately, you can’t keep or store webpages and clippings in Simplenote.

To be honest, I like that about Simplenote.

It also plays nicely with the popular long-form writing application, Scrivener.

Previously, I used Simplenote to capture digital notes and ideas for articles on the go on my phone. You can categorize your notes using tags, and these tags make it easy to organize and find notes later on.

It also plays nicely with Notational Velocity for OS X, and it is great for taking notes at meetings (if you have internet access).

  • Minimalist
  • Widely supported
  • Can’t capture webpages
  • Not much use for those who work with multimedia

Tip: If you have an idea for a blog article, use the @blog tag to arrange and find these ideas later.

2. Evernote

Pricing: From free to $14.99 per month

It’s an “everything bucket.”

Evernote is one of the more popular cross-platform note-taking apps available today.

The logo for Evernote is an elephant for a reason. It’s an “everything bucket” in that you can capture, organize and store almost any type of digital note with your phone, web browser, or desktop client.

Evernote has apps for Android and iOS as well as desktop apps for Windows and OS X. You can also access it through a web browser and use several different browser extensions to capture snippets of web pages for your notebooks.

When I first wrote this article, I relied primarily on Simplenote. Then, a few years ago, I migrated all my notes from my paper systems and Simplenote into Evernote and added PDFs and pictures.

I capture ideas for articles I want to write, I “swipe” articles by others that I want to reference later on, and I even store audio recordings and photo notes in Evernote.

I subscribe to numerous blogs, and when these bloggers send me free content, I store these giveaways in Evernote too. This way, my desktop, and email aren’t cluttered, and I can find this content easily.

A few years ago, I attended a Photoshop course, where the lecturer shared an Evernote workbook of useful articles and images with the class. This is an excellent way to take advantage of Evernote’s free multimedia features and share them with others.

I’m happy to pay for Evernote as it’s a powerful digital note-taking app. A free version is available. The premium version starts at $7.99 per month.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Just don’t think of a Notes table as a spreadsheet because it’s not going to add up figures or alphabetize a list. We’ve got Numbers for that. Still, the new feature adds a little flexibility that Notes didn’t have before.

Here’s how tables work in Notes in macOS High Sierra.

How to create a table in Notes

If only a new table was this easy to come by in real life, we’d never have to spend a day at IKEA again.

  1. Launch Notes from the dock or Finder.
  2. Click the Table button in the toolbar. It looks like a table: two columns of three rows. Alternatively, choose Format > Table if, for example, your Notes window is so narrow that you don’t see the Table button in the toolbar.
  3. Start typing in the first box.
  4. Click Tab to navigate between boxes as you type, or click on a new box.

Click Return as you’re typing to move to the next row.

How to add more columns and rows to your table

The default table is two columns by two rows, but you aren’t limited to that.

  1. Launch Notes on your Mac and navigate to the note you want to manipulate or create a new one.
  2. Place the cursor in the last row and press Return to create a new row.
  3. Put your cursor in any cell, and when the ellipses button appears at the top of the column, click it to create a new column.
  4. Click the downward arrow that appears at the top right of the column.

Click Add Column Before, Add Column After, or Delete Column in the pop-up that appears.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

How to rearrange rows or columns

Notes makes it easy to drag columns or rows around, too. Unlike a true spreadsheet, you can’t sort your table’s data, rearranging the rows alphabetically or numerically, for example. (So if you have a lot of data, a spreadsheet is still better.) But you can slide them into new positions yourself.

  1. Launch Notes and navigate to a Note with a table or create a new one.
  2. Click to place the cursor in a cell in the row or column you want to move. A little ellipses button will appear to the left of the row, and above the column.
  3. Click and hold one of those ellipses buttons to release the row or column from its position.
  4. Drag the row or column to a new position. The other rows and columns will jump out of its way.

Let go to place the row or column in its new place.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

How to remove columns from a table

Easy come, easy go.

  1. Launch Notes and find a Note with a table in it or create a new one.
  2. Place your cursor in any cell in the column you want to remove.
  3. Click the ellipses button that appears at the top of the column. This highlights the column in yellow and makes a downward arrow appear at the top right of the yellow box.
  4. Click the arrow at the top right of the yellow box.

Click Delete Column from the pop-up menu.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

How to convert text to a table

If you’re working on a list in Notes, it’s easy to turn that into a table.

  1. Launch Notes on your Mac and find a Note or create a new one.
  2. Select one or more lines of text. The shorter the better; a list works best.

Click the Table button in the toolbar, or choose Format > Table in the menu bar at the top of the screen. A table is created with your selection in the first column. You can fill in the second column yourself.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Alternatively, you can paste text into an empty column of cells. If the text in your clipboard takes up more than one line, each line will appear in a new row in the table.

How to convert a table into plain text

If you decide your table’s no longer needed, you can still keep the text inside.

  1. Launch Notes on your Mac. Create a table or find a note with one in it.
  2. Click to place your cursor anywhere in the table.
  3. Click the Table button in the toolbar.

Click the Convert to Text option that appears. Alternatively, choose Format > Convert to Text from the menu bar.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

How to format text inside your tables

Your formatting options are slightly reduced, but here’s what you can do.

  1. Launch Notes.
  2. Call up the Fonts window by pressing command-T on your keyboard.
  3. Use the Fonts window to change the selected text’s font, typeface, size, and color. Regular keyboard shortcuts work too. For example, bold text with command-B.
  4. Italicize text with command + I.

Add a link by selecting text and pressing command-K. You can link up just some of the words in a cell or all of them.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

How to delete multiple cells’ contents

You can clear out big chunks of your table at once.

  1. Launch Notes and find a note with a table or create a new one.
  2. Click a cell and drag it across the table. This creates a selection that will be outlined in orange.

Right-click the section outlined in orange and click Delete Cell Contents.

Think of Evernote as the engine that helps keep your world running.

If you peeled back the hood, you’d be surprised to see that there is the capability to create an engine that is reliable and trusty (like a Ford), or super sporty (like a Ferrari).

But, how exactly do you get that engine working?

No matter which ‘engine’ you desire, the important thing to remember is that the system should reflect your needs. A family of four won’t be needing that sports car as much as they would a minivan or an SUV. It’s the same in Evernote: you want to figure out what your challenges are, and then decide which organizational system will best help get things done productively.

Organization has always been a hot topic on our blog, social channels, and forum. Since the power of Evernote is its flexibility, arguments over which system is best won’t go away anytime soon. For all the unique people who use our product, there are limitless ways to harness it.

From stacks to tags to no system at all, here is a roundup of some of our favorite organizational methods.

1. Search

Setup Difficulty Level: Easy

Maintenance Level: Easy

One of the biggest dangers when adopting an organizational system is overthinking things. What do you capture? How do you categorize content? How will you find it later?

Theoretically, you don’t need to organize at all. You could create a limitless number of notes and rely on Evernote’s powerful search to find any content within them, even text in attached files like PDFs.

Relying on search as your organizational structure also allows you to import a ton of content from outside of Evernote without worrying about which notebooks or tags to use. You can capture content with our web clipper, send emails directly into Evernote, or even invoke apps to smartly capture content for you like IFTTT, Zapier, or Scannable.

2. Tags

Setup Difficulty Level: Moderate

Maintenance Level: Moderate

To tag, or not. That is (very) often the question. Tags can be the basis of a robust productivity worfklow, and they have many champions. Michael Hyatt and Thomas Honeyman immediately come to mind. Both have written very extensively about how and why they use tags.

The biggest factor is that tags help build a foundation tailored to their specific workflows. For Michael Hyatt, nested tags provide a necessary structure that keeps his filing system on task and efficient.

Social media guru Bryan Kramer views tags as a powerful way to archive information and quickly find it later in an effort to build his personal brand:

True, tagging may initially seem a like bit of a chore. However, you don’t need to tag every [note]. Just the really important ones that will allow you to archive your information for an easier search later on. And if you happen to use to wrong tag, no sweat. Evernote has a forgiving organization system that allows you to recall your last search and even cross reference details.

Resources & Guides on Evernote Tagging:

3. Notebook Stacks

Setup Difficulty Level: Moderate

Maintenance Level: Easy

If notes are the fundamental element of your content, then you want to be able to structure them in a way that suits your needs. One of the best ways is the power of notebook stacks .

As Evernote productivity consultant Stacey Harmon notes, stacks are the building blocks to success within Evernote:

Notebooks and stacks… provide human friendly organization to your data in Evernote. You can visually group notes and projects together in any way that suits you. Think of notebooks as manilla folders, and stacks as filing cabinet drawers.

Harmon also emphasizes that it’s vital to embrace finding a system that works for you. Evernote is flexible enough that you can settle on a framework for organizing, and if you don’t like it, it’s relatively simple to adopt a new strategy quickly.

“Don’t be afraid to create notebooks and stacks and organize them any way you like,” Harmon says. “It is not difficult to change your notebook and stack structure. Once data is in Evernote, it is very easy to move around [you just need to learn how]. Most users go through several iterations of their notebook and stack structure over time. What you keep in Evernote evolves. How you conduct business evolves.”

No matter how your business does, your notebooks and stacks can evolve right with you.

Resources and articles:

4. Note Titles

Setup Difficulty Level: Challenging

Maintenance Level: Moderate

You can also use the titles of your notes themselves to create an organizational system that’s as flexible as your imagination allows.

Author Jamie Todd Rubin prefers to create naming conventions that are not redundant and help him use search in a more powerful way. For example, he set up a naming structure that helps him understand what books he has read in a given time.

I keep track of all of my reading in Evernote. I like knowing when I started reading something and when I finished reading something. (I have a whole collection of scripts that pulls interesting analytics from this data.) If I wanted to see the list of things I’ve read by Stephen King, for instance, I could run a simple search that looks like this:

Naming conventions can also be used to organize notes within notebooks. To take advantage of this trick, it helps to know:

  1. Special characters ( .,_,@#!) will sort before numbers.
  2. Numbers (0 – 9) will sort after characters and punctuation but before alphabetical characters.

Resources and articles:

What’s your favorite way to organize notes? Let us know in the comments.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Modular productivity apps are getting more and more popular these days.

*Affiliate links used

We use and love Notion, but many people are starting to try out more modern forms of note-taking, ones that resemble Notion’s open nature, but provide you with a richer note-taking experience.

One of those is Roam Research .

Today we’re going to share all you need to know about Roam and how to get started with the application.

🧠 What is Roam Research?

Roam is an “note-taking application for networked thought” specifically designed to help you connect your thoughts and group them together in related bits of information, without having to copy and paste links. A little like you would with your own brain.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

A key aspect of the app is that links are “bi-directional”, meaning that you can move back and forth between your ideas in a fluid way.

Even with the lack of a folders/notebook system, you can still create hierarchy inside the notes, but each page belongs to itself, solving the issue sometimes encountered with apps like Evernote or Notion that make us decide where to place your notes.

📊 What Features make Roam special?

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Notes: Creating a new note is quite simple, you can either go on the left sidebar and click the + symbol next to All Pages or simply type the title of the page in the search bar at the top of the page. Using the / command you’ll have a list of all the kind of elements you can add to a note.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Sidebar: while you work on your main note, you can also open another one in the sidebar (Shift-Click on a tag or title). This is very useful especially if you’re doing some research and you need to look at multiple things at once.

Daily Notes: this is where you can easily keep your random notes and plan your day, a new page is automatically created every day. Clicking the daily notes link in the left sidebar opens for you a log of all the daily pages organized by date.

Graph Overview: this feature can be used as a connector to get a bird’s eye view of all your pages and how they are interlinked. You can zoom in and out according to your needs.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

👋🏼 How does Roam Compare to Notion and others?

Roam is a fairly new application and it has been often compared to Notion for its ability to help you create personal wikis and the way you can add elements to your notes (such as blocks, embeds, todo’s, and so on).

Notion is fundamentally different to Roam. Roam provides a note-taking experience that connects notes together, whilst Notion offers more of an open canvas approach that allows for any form of work – more tailored towards project management tool.s

However, Roam can be better compared with the likes of other outliner apps like Workflowy and Dynalist, even if it takes nesting to a whole new level going even further with some unique features like the graph overview and the bi-directional linking.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

When I was a novice writer, I chafed at the idea of using an outline. I was certain organizing my thoughts in advance would stifle my creativity and make my writing stiff and uninspired. After all, how can serendipity happen if you’ve got everything planned?

But then I started creating content for a living, and I needed to turn out several polished articles every week. I write at least 240,000 words per year to earn my keep. That’s only about half of War and Peace, but it still feels like a lot. I try to write quickly so I’m not still awake toiling away at the keyboard at 1 a.m. with a cup of tea and a couple of graham crackers. (1 a.m. graham cracker calories do seem to count, by the way.)

I discovered that it was taking me a long time to finish my articles because, when my creative mind was unfettered, I had a tendency to ramble in a chaotic stream of consciousness that I would then have to go back and structure in order for it to make sense. Not only that, but I would over-research. I’d wind up with a thousand words before I realized I was only one third of the way through my article. I’d have to go back, refocus, trim down, and sometimes even start over.

And so, I started outlining. And it saved me. Not only from sleep deprivation, but from graham-cracker weight gain. Here’s my step-by-step process. And it works!

1 Do some reconnaissance reading.

Unless I know my topic inside and out, I start with a little reconnaissance reading. I head to Google and look at what others have written on my topic. I try to think of new and interesting ways to address it. I look for an angle.

The easiest way to find an angle is to look for knowledge gaps in the articles you scan. Let’s use this article as an example. I searched to see what others had written on the topic of how to write an outline. I found a lot on the basics of structure, but not much about how to actually use outlines to improve the organization of your writing. Voila! An angle!

As you’re reading, take notes when you see interesting research or quotes you might want to share. Note the URLs, too, so you can reference them with links in your article. I keep my notes in a Google Doc on the same page where I’m eventually going to create my outline and write my article. Having all the information in one place will allow you to write faster when the time comes.

2 Write down your objective.

Now that you’ve figured out an angle, it’s helpful to write down an objective. What do you want the reader to understand by the end of this article? Put some thought into your objective and see if you can write it in one sentence. My objective for this article was:

Everything you write should support your objective. An objective will help you stay focused and prevent you from drifting off on tangents.

3 Create a list of all the main points you want to make.

I often begin this step while I’m doing my recon reading and ideas are popping into my head. This can be a quick brainstorming process. Don’t invest a lot of energy in organizing just yet. You’ll get to that in the next step.

4 Organize, revise, and eliminate.

Now it’s time to organize the list of points. Figure out the structure of your article. Will it work well as numbered how-to steps? A listicle? In standard essay format?

Take a look at the points you’ve jotted down and begin putting them into a logical order. Cross-check each point to make certain that it’s relevant to your objective. If you’ve strayed off the path and included extra information that doesn’t really fit the scope of your article, eliminate it.

You may come across a few things that don’t quite fit into your article as their own sections, but seem important to mention nonetheless. Those elements make great sidebars. In this article, you’ll see them used as tips. Pretty nifty, huh?

As you revise, start putting your outline into a standard format. You don’t have to be too formal about this process, just organize everything into a bulleted or numbered list. (If you want to be traditional, use Roman numerals. I think they make my outlines look fancy.) Include topic segments. Under each topic segment, indent and include the points you’ll discuss in each paragraph. You don’t have to get too granular here—all you’re looking for is enough information to help you remember where you’re going and keep you organized and on track. My outline for this article looked like this:

B. Becoming a professional writer made me change my tune

C. Outlining brings structure to chaos

II. Do some recon reading

A. Look for angle, ways the topic has not been covered

B. Take notes while you’re reading/record URLs

C. Don’t go too far down the research rabbit hole

III. Make a quick list of the points you want to make

IV. Organize the list into a formal outline

A. Get rid of anything that doesn’t support objective

1. Save extra stuff in a clip file for future use

B. Some extra stuff is worth keeping as tips/sidebars

C. Demonstrate standard outline format

An outline isn’t a prison—it’s there to guide you, not control you. You can take conscious detours, or change things around as you write. Outlines are just guidelines, so they shouldn’t feel restrictive. And yet, you’ll be surprised how the simple act of creating one will give your articles more structure and keep them focused and on-point. You’ll write with more clarity, and you’ll do it all faster and more efficiently. Outlines for the win!

Wanna be productive in taking notes? Learn how to use OneNote in a more productive way. You have lot of apps and tools to choose when it comes to taking notes and saving information. OneNote however, stands out top among other note-taking apps for its incredible flexibility, colorful GUI, and exceptional feature Taking Notes Become more fun and creative lets know how.

How To Use OneNote In a Productive Way

I am using plain text files or paper notebooks or powerful tools like Evernote. But no matter what I use, I always come back to OneNote. If you haven’t given it a just try it.

OneNote has been in Microsoft portfolio for a dozen years as part of the Microsoft Office suite. Still the app has long been probably the most underrated app in Microsoft’s. couple of years ago the app was part of paid app but recently Microsoft makes that app free and lunch that in major platform like Windows, ios, Android.

If you Feel limited by simple notes apps and always tend to think visually. You’ll like OneNote’s free-form notes canvas, which lets you add any kind of content—including tables, audio, videos, image, files—anywhere on the page.

If your fond of sketching out ideas then its ink tools will let you draw this via Trackpad, Mouse, Stylus even your Finger too.

If you are working hardcore research then it’s help you more organized

In simple term it digital notebook let you take note in your way.

How To Use OneNote (tutorial by Techyuga)

Step1: First you need download the OneNote from Microsoft Store or Website, also you can download it from App Store and Play store for iOS and Android Device.

Note: You’ll need a Microsoft account to use OneNote since your notebooks and notes will be stored on Microsoft’s free cloud service, OneDrive. If you are an Office 365 subscriber, however, you can store your notebooks anywhere on your hard drive.

Step2: The Home Page Will Look like this

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Step 3: Sections help you group information in each notebook with colorful tabs for example, if you have a notebook for a specific project, you could create sections for each phase of the project

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Notes: OneNote gives you 16 colors to choose from for those section tabs

Step 4: Pages Unlike typical notes apps that work like word processors, on its pages, you can place and drag content around anywhere on the page: checklists next to photos, text boxes side by side, audio recordings next to your notes, and so on.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Step 5: Draw option let you implement your imagination and creativity.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Note: On iOS, you can use 3D Touch to quickly add a new note or take a photo

To do list

Notebook/section/page approach to notes, but you can get even more granularity by using tags. Tags are good for relating notes that exist across different sections.

It comes with a bunch of default tags (e.g. Important, To-Do, etc.) but you can create as many Custom Tags as you want. Make good use of this because it’s a lot more handy than you might first expect.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Quick Access Toolbar

At the very top of the OneNote window along the title bar, if you look to the left, you’ll see a handful of shortcut buttons. These make up the Quick Access Toolbar, and the best part is that you can customize which buttons show up on it.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Interlink

Another best organizational feature is the ability to create Internal Links, or clickable links that take you to other notebooks, sections, and pages. The larger your notebooks and the more notes you have, the more useful this feature becomes.

To create a link, just right-click on any tab — whether notebook, section, or page — and select the Copy Link option. Now all you have to do is paste it somewhere

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Embed anything in OneNote

You can embed all sorts of content in it and make that content searchable or convert it to a different format. For example, from the Insert menu, you can:

Record When You Can’t Write

One of my favorite features in OneNote is the ability to add more than just text. You can also add recordings – either audio or video!

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Embed live video or clips:Insert YouTube videos, Google Maps via Microsoft Sway, 3D sketches from Sketchfab, animated GIFs

Share You OneNote:

If you want to collaborate on OneNote and projects with others, it’s help you do that also. You can share shopping lists or other project activity with other, reference material with your team, and pretty much anything else you store in it.

Make sure your notebooks are synced to your OneDrive account if you want to share them with others via email or any file sharing medium.

Extended feature:

You can use OneNote to integrate with other service for your business

For example, you integrate with Zapier.

I hope, above article will help you in learning how to use OneNote in a more productive way. For More complete tech tips you can check our blogs

There is no single way to effectively organize a classroom.

The big idea behind organization is systematic accessibility. When there is a clear system that allows the parts of that system to be accessible to those who need it, that’s organization. Indicators of organization may might be outward orderliness and neat and tidy packaging, but it’s possible for organization to tend towards clinical aesthetics, where things are difficult to find and use, but boy doesn’t it all look lovely?

Because organization is a subjective idea, what works for one teacher may not work for another. With that in mind, we’ve collected what we see as essential apps for the organized teacher and organized classroom.

These are apps that allow teachers to store files, manage class rosters, share student work, and more. (This might be a good time to recommend tagging your curriculum as well.)

18 Essential Organization Apps For Teachers

This app can help you organize: You undoubtedly know what Google Drive is useful for as a teacher. If it actually helps you organize your teaching depends on how you use it–and how consistently you use it. But in today’s classroom, it’s may be the best general organizational tool available. And it’s free, to boot.

This app can help you organize: How you share student work with parents and their support system at home

3. Remind

This app can help you organize: How you communicate with students and their families

4. Pocket

This app can help you organize: The reading materials you find on the internet–either to share with students or read later for yourself

5. Trello or Slack

These apps can help you organize: professional growth plans, PD hours, project-based learning, PLC meeting notes, etc.

6. Amazon

This app can help you: though not technically an ‘app,’ Amazon can be a useful way to create ‘wishlists’ for classroom needs–either to share with others helping to fund that list or to curate and organize ‘stuff’ you think can help your students learn (books, robotics, art supplies, science lab kits, etc.) The links above is an affiliate link.

7. Alora

This app can help you: keep and track attendance

This app can help you organize: All of your notes and other digital ‘snippets’ from your teaching, reflections on your teaching, concept mapping from reading or conferences, and so on.

This app can help you organize: Your teaching, in general including logging students’ attendance, add behavior notes for students, record student grades, and create student-level reporting.

This app can help you organize: How you grade and share assessment results on multiple-choice tests

11. Edmodo

This app can help you organize: How you gather and communicate with classes and colleagues online

12. Canva

This app can help you organize: Your graphic design, worksheets, bulletin board material, schedules, rosters–anything ‘teaching stuff’ you created yourself

13. Spark

This app can help you organize: Your email

This app can help you organize: General organization of your classroom online

This app can help you organize: Like Google Drive, you either already use Pinterest or have a reason you don’t. But a collection of organizational apps for teachers wouldn’t be complete without what may be the most popular app for collection and organizing on the internet today.

This app can help you organize: Student videos about learning topics

17. Apple Notes or Google Keep or Evernote

These apps help you organize: Quick-access ideas, to-do lists, and notes

This app can help you organize: Websites you depend on for your teaching and professional growth as a teacher

There might be affiliate links on this page, which means we get a small commission of anything you buy. As an Amazon Associate we earn from qualifying purchases. Please do your own research before making any online purchase.

Are you looking for the best journaling app to record all your thoughts, memories, and ideas this year?

Pen-and-paper journaling has its benefits, but digital journals have the advantage of being more convenient and possessing additional capacity for multimedia storage.

Journaling apps in your smartphone or tablet allow you to record your thoughts while on the go. You don’t even have to worry about bringing along the right pen for your journaling.

Furthermore, these apps have the capacity to hold hundreds (or even thousands) of multimedia files, such as video clips and photographs, to help you relive special moments.

Read on to discover the standout features that make the 11 apps you’ll find in this post worth checking out.

What You Will Learn

Best Journal & Diary Apps to Track Your Daily Thoughts

1. Momento

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

If you want to consolidate your life memories from different social media platforms into a single space, you might want to try this app.

All of your posts from Twitter, Instagram, and other social media sites can be brought together in one place. You can even include your past Uber transactions and saved playlists in Spotify.

In addition to providing an archive of your social media activities, this app also allows you to create a private journal. Simply type in your entry for the day in rich text format, then add photos, create some tags, and add a location.

Not sure what to write? You can set the app to send pre-set writing prompts, such as “How was your day?” to get you in the journaling mood.

If you want to relive special memories, the app groups posts from all your linked social media accounts and your journal in a consolidated timeline.

The free version allows linking of up to three social media accounts. Meanwhile, the premium version has an unlimited linking feature. For privacy, the premium service has a passcode and TouchID feature.

The app is free to download, with an option to upgrade to premium starting at $2.49 per month. In-app purchases such as multiple photos and the lock code cost $1.99 and $0.99, respectively.

One of the more prominent changes introduced in iOS 14, and one that is generating a lot of interest, is the addition of widgets that can be added to any page. There are all sorts of weird and useful things you can do with them (especially if you’re willing to play around with apps such as Shortcuts and Widgetsmith). To begin, here’s how to add an existing widget to your home screen:

  • Touch and hold an empty area on your screen until your apps jiggle and show minus symbols
  • Tap the plus sign in the upper-left corner, and you’ll bring up a menu of existing widgets

Touch and hold your screen and tap the plus sign.

You’ll get a selection of widgets to choose from.

  • Tap on the widget you want to add. Swipe left and right to choose the widget’s size and shape.
  • Tap “Add Widget”
  • Once you’ve added the widget, tap anywhere on the home screen to go out of edit mode

Swipe sideways to choose the size and shape you want.

Long press on a widget to remove it.

Note that the first time you tap the new widget, you may be asked to adjust its features (for example, to tell a weather widget what you want it to report).

To move the widget around the screen or to another screen, just long-press it until it starts to shake and then move it where you want it. If you want to get rid of the widget, long-press to bring up a remove option.

But wait — there’s more:

Create a widget stack

You can create a stack of widgets if you want to save space or if there’s one widget you’ll only want to use occasionally.

To create a stack:

  • Select a widget for your home screen as described above and place it where you want it. Select the next widget you want to stack (you can stack as many as 10) and save it to your home screen
  • Long press the widget so that you can move it around the screen, and place it on top of the first. Note that the widget must be the same size and shape; you can’t, say, place a small widget on a medium-sized one.

To see each widget in your stack, swipe up or down on the top widget and the next one will be revealed.

You can stack your widgets (notice the dots at the right side of the stack).

Long press on a stack to edit it.

If you want to change the position of or remove any of the apps in the stack:

  • Long press the stack and select “Edit Stack”
  • Press the three lines to the side of each app to change its position in the stack
  • To remove the app, swipe it to the left

Create a Smart Stack

Apple has also created a feature it calls a “Smart Stack,” which will automatically choose which widget should be on top depending on your location, what time it is, or what you most often look at.

iOS 14 comes with a pre-built Smart Stack made up of a group of selected apps. You add that stack the same way you’d add any widget:

  • Long press on your home screen and tap the plus icon in the upper-left corner
  • Scroll down until you see the widget called “Smart Stack”
  • As with the other widgets, scroll sideways to choose the size you want, and then tap “Add Widget”

Choose the “Smart Stack” widget like you would any widget.

“Smart Rotate” turns almost any stack into a Smart Stack.

Once you’ve added it, you can change the order of the included apps or remove the ones you don’t want, the same way you’d remove any stacked apps. Or if you want to start from scratch, you can create your own Smart Stack:

  • Long press any stack you’ve created and select “Edit Stack”
  • Toggle “Smart Rotate” on

Use widgets on iPads

You can also use widgets (and widget stacks) on iPads — however, they can only be placed in the Today view on the left side of the left-most screen. Otherwise, the process for adding and stacking widgets is the same as on the iPhone — as is the process for creating Smart Stacks.

If you want to keep your widgets in view no matter which screen you’re on, you can.

  • Press and hold an empty area in the Today View
  • When you see “Keep On Home Screen,” toggle it on

Meanwhile, if you want to start creating your own widgets or find out what you can do with the new App Library, check out these articles:

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Is your mind a jumble of never-ending ideas, thoughts, and plans? Mine certainly is most of the time, which is why I like using mind mapping apps on my iPad and iPhone to keep track of everything.

Mind maps are diagrams that make it easier to see the connections between different pieces of information and visualize your ideas. They have innumerable uses for organizing, planning, and implanting all kinds of projects.

However, they can be time-consuming to draw manually, which is why I’ve found some mind mapping tools that make the process much quicker. An added advantage is that they are easier to edit, customize, save, and share. Here’re some of the best ones across the iOS App Store.

1. SimpleMind: Best mind mapping app for students

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Simple Mind will stimulate your creativity with its free canvas layout, where you can start a node anywhere to build your mind map. Nodes do not necessarily have to be attached to a parent node either, so you can take your time constructing ideas.

Further, it supports many types of attachments such as documents, links, images, audio notes, and even videos.

One unique feature is its capability to create maps from PDF files, saving a lot of time. This makes it one of the best mind mapping apps for students. I appreciate the built-in support for varied cloud services, including Dropbox, OneDrive, Google Drive, Nextcloud, and iCloud.

Moreover, there are no ads even in the free version, allowing you to use it without distractions. However, you will need a paid subscription to store your work in the cloud.

Flagis is a simple universal solution for managing everything important to you.

Simply organize your tasks to a unique structured view according to your mind map and get the opportunity to send tasks to others with clear feedback.

It’s easy, intuitive and well-arranged.

Get your own reliable personal assistant!

Use Flagis to:
– Stay organized from all your devices – phone, tablet, laptop or computer.
– Manage all your tasks and notes in one place.
– Enter and organize tasks the moment they pop into your head.
– Create your own unique structured view to suit your needs and according to your mind map.
– Get quick entry and easy search for each task.
– Get the possibility to have one task in multiple categories.
– Easy filtering to display only the task you need.
– Write comments and chat with other people in every task.
– Upload files like documents, photos, videos, etc. to every task.
– Set due dates and reminders to meet your deadlines and never forget a thing.
– Send a task with clear feedback. The receiver of the task has the option to accept or to reject the task.
– Keep track of your workload and progress.
– Create tasks and notes on the go.
– View your to-dos in one list.
– Access your tasks and notes anytime, anyplace, anywhere.

Flagis enables you to be efficient and get more free time to enjoy your life!

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

While the Voice Memos app gives you a great way to capture notes with dictation, the app has been lacking in ways to organize it. This has been especially disappointing for those who use the app often and have many recordings.

Luckily with iOS 14, iPadOS 14, and macOS Big Sur, Apple made some updates to Voice Memos and one of the improvements is the ability to use folders. This means you don’t have to rely solely on a naming convention to keep your recordings organized.

Here’s how to create folders and file your recordings in Voice Memos.

Organize recordings in Voice Memos

Create a folder in Voice Memos

Creating a folder in Voice Memos is super easy on iPhone and iPad. Once you do, you can start moving your recordings to your folders. Open Voice Memos on your iOS device and then do the following.

1) On iPhone, tap the arrow on the top left and on iPad and Mac, tap or click the sidebar button.

2) Here, you’ll see All Recordings. You could call this the main folder that contains, well, all of your recordings.

3) At the bottom, tap or click the New Folder icon.

4) Give your folder a name and hit Save.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Your new folder will show up in the My Folders section of the menu. You can continue creating new folders the same way or jump into moving your recordings.

Move a group of recordings to a folder

To get a head start on organizing your Voice Memos, you can move them to folders in bulk on iPhone and iPad.

1) Tap Edit at the top of your recordings list.

2) Select the recordings you want to file and tap Move at the bottom.

3) Pick a folder and you’re set.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Individual and new recordings

If you want to move an individual recording on iOS, swipe from right to left, tap the folder icon, and pick the folder. On Mac, drag a recording to the folder.

For new recordings, you can select a folder and then record your memo. This way, your new recording will already be in the folder you want.

Edit folders in Voice Memos

You can rename, delete, and rearrange your folders in Voice Memos. Head to the folder list using the arrow on iPhone or sidebar button on iPad and tap Edit at the top. Then, do one of the following.

To rename a folder, tap the actions icon (three dots) and select Rename. Type in the new name and tap Save.

To delete a folder, tap the minus sign and then the trash can or tap the actions icon and select Delete.

To rearrange folders, tap and drag using the three lines to the right of the folder, then release.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

On Mac, right-click a folder and pick Rename Folder or Delete Folder. To rearrange folders, just drag and drop them in the order you wish.

How to use apple’s new notes app to organize your thoughts

Wrapping it up

The ability to create folders to organize recordings in Voice Memos is a wonderful and overdue feature. So if you didn’t use the app before because of its lack of organization options, will you use it now? Let us know!

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

Knowing how you use your network is an important asset. However, this easier said than done, as you will need to assess several components of the network. While this is a complex task, having a clear picture of bandwidth usage is simple. Today, we see how to use bmon to project real-time charts of your network usage in Linux. This is similar to what you see in the task manager on Windows, just more powerful.

What is bmon?

Bmon is a free tool that allows you to plot your network statistics on-screen. It works in the terminal and creates nice charts of your bandwidth, real-time. Thus, it is a great tool when it comes to troubleshooting network problems. Besides merely learning how to use it, we will also see some common use cases.

Getting bmon

Use your package manager to get bmon, it is just a single package. For example, on Ubuntu we used sudo apt-get install bmon . You can also use yum on the Red Hat family, or dnf on Fedora 22+. This will install bmon, and now you can simply run it by typing bmon. However, before we do that, it is better to generate some traffic to grow our bandwidth usage.

How to use bmon

Create some traffic

This step is optional but recommended. You don’t want to see a flat chart, right? Thus, we first need to generate some network traffic. You can go the easy route, watching a video on YouTube, or downloading something. However, this is not always possible, not to mention it isn’t professional. Instead, you can opt for a bandwidth test software like iperf. This tool allows you to generate traffic according to your specifications, and you can install it as quick as sudo apt-get install iperf3 .

Then, you can run iperf3 -s on a terminal, and iperf3 -c localhost -t 100 on another terminal to test connection to the loopback interface for 100 seconds. This is probably the shortest explanation of iperf you could find, but if you want to learn more we got you covered. Just check our iperf3 tutorial.

Reading bmon charts

Once you have some traffic going, open a terminal (yet another if you were using iperf3) and type bmon . You will see something like this:

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

Bmon charts.

As you can see, we have a main area in the center showing two charts: the bandwidth received (RX, in green), and the bandwidth transmitted (TX, in red). Just above that, we have three boxes:

  • In the interfaces box, you can select which network interface to see the charts for. You can scroll using up and down arrows. In this example, we are watching charts for the loopback interface ( lo ).
  • The next box gives you information about the received traffic (RX). You see the received traffic for all interfaces in bits per second and packets per second.
  • Finally, the rightmost box shows the same information about the RX box, but for transmitted traffic (TX).

You can also see additional information by pressing d , or add more charts with < . You can remove the charts you added with > . Additional charts will show information about errors, collisions, and other network problems. Since we are testing a loopback, we don’t expect any.

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

Bmon charts with more information, including errors.

Once you are done, you can quit by pressing q .

Summary

Bmon is a powerful tool in the Linux prompt to monitor bandwidth usage and errors. Install the bmon package with your package manager, then simply run bmon . Use d , < and > to show or hide information and charts, up and down arrow to select the interface to see charts for. To quit, just hit q .

With bmon in your toolkit, you are ready to do the nasty troubleshooting sometimes required to network engineers. Try it and let me know what do you think about this simple, yet awesome, software.

Maintaining a network also means maintaining its bandwidth. Bandwidth leak will lead the network users to complain and may impact to slow response from applications. On Linux system, we can use a tool called bmon to monitor the bandwidth in real-time.

What is bmon

Bmon or Bandwidth Monitoring is a tool that intended for debugging and monitor bandwidth in real-time access. This tool is capable to retrieving statistics from various input modules. It provides various output methods including a curses-based interface.

Installation

On my Zorin OS which based on Ubuntu 13.04, I can install it by typing :

This will install bmon instantly. But bmon version on this Ubuntu 13.04 is 2.0.103. While the latest version at the time this article is written is version 3.1.

In this article, we will use the latest version. This version only available in tar.gz format. Here are the steps to install it.

1. Download the latest version from Carisma website

2. Extract it

3. Go to the extracted folder

4. Compile and install bmon

Error messages :

If you have some errors that we had, this may help you.

Please note that we are using Ubuntu-based distribution. This steps might be different with other Linux distribution.

No CONFUSE library

To solve this error, install libconfuse library.

No LIBNL library

To solve those errors, install LIBNL library.

More detail about LIBNL library can be found at bmon website: http://www.carisma.slowglass.com/

Run bmon

After bmon installed, we can run bmon by typing bmon in the terminal.

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

With no option, bmon will run in default curses mode. Bmon graph is divided into some parts.

  • The first row shows us the available interfaces, receive transmit and transfer transmit. This rows is represented by l letter which mean list view.
  • The second row is graphical statistics. If the graph is not showing, you can press g button.
  • The third row shows us the detailed statistics of receive and transfer activity.
  • And the fourth row shows us the additional information.

To get some help on how to operate bmon, press question mark button (?).

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

We also can run bmon with options. Here are some options for bmon.

Set input modules

bmon has some input modules. There are netlink, proc, dummy and null.
To define it by yourself, we can use -i option. For example, if we want to use input from /proc/net/dev file, we can type :

Set output modules

bmon has some output modules. There are curses, ascii, format and null. By default, bmon will use curses as the output. If we want to use ascii output, we can type :

To get help about ascii modules, type :

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

Set specific interface to display

To do this, we can use -p option.

With this option, bmon will only list the eth0 interface. If you put eth*, then will list all interface with pattern eth0, eth1 until ethX.

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

Set read interval

By default, bmon will statistics every 1 seconds. If we want to change it, we can use -r option. Say we want to change it into 10 seconds, we can run bmon with :

Conclusion

bmon can be a handy tool for debugging and monitor bandwidth in realtime mode. This program is light and easy to use. As usual, we can always type man bmon or bmon –help to display its manual page and explore it more detail.

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

In a past article we discussed running an internet speed test from the Linux command line. That is great for testing your internet speeds. But, what if you wanted to monitor the bandwidth usage of an internal connection? Enter bmon, a light weight real-time command line bandwidth monitoring tool.

The bmon utility is a tool that provides network interface utilization information on the command line, but in a very familiar way. The bmon utility is widely available, simple to install, and easy to get started. Let’s dive in.

In this view you there are several rows (panes) of data.

1st row: This is the element list which shows all the interfaces that you can monitor and their current RX/TX utilization. You can use the up and down arrows to navigate to the desired interface.

2nd row: A graphical representation of the interface attributes. By default it shows the RX (received) and TX (transmitted) packets. The graphs can be toggled on or off by hitting g . Additionally, you can use the left and right arrows to toggle the attribute to be displayed.

3rd row: The detailed statistics pane. It shows you all the detailed information your system keeps on the selected network interface. You can toggle the detailed statistics by hitting the d key.

4th row: This is the additional information pane and shows you some more information about the configuration of the interface. You can toggle this on or off by hitting the i key.

At any time you can hit the ? to bring up the quick reference (seen below).

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

To exit the interface you can hit the q key.

Using BMON Options

There are several options and input/output modules that really make bmon a robust bandwidth monitoring utility. In this section we will outline some of the most common options.

Use Specific Interface at Start Up

You most likely want to monitor a specific interface when you open the utility. Instead of toggling through to find the interface you want, you can use the -p option and specify it on the command line. Here we are telling bmon to monitor the eno1 interface.

Set User Defined Read Interval

The default update, or read, interval is one second. You can change this to whatever you desire. Simply pass the -r switch followed by the desired interval in seconds. For example, to use a five second read interval, the command would look like this:

You can decimal representations for half intervals or intervals less than a second. For example, use .5 to update the interface every half second.

Set User Defined Rate Interval

The rate interval is the time period in seconds taken into account for the rate calculations. The default value is 30 seconds. You can set a custom rate interval by using the -R option like so:

Show All, Including Disabled, Interfaces

Using the -a option will show all elements (interfaces), including those that are disabled.

Using BMON Input and Output Modules

The bmon utility comes with several pre-configured input and output modules.

Listing Available Modules

You can list the available modules by calling the -i (input) and -o (output) options followed by the list argument.

Modules Descriptions

Here is a brief description of each module.

Input Modules

  • netlink – Provides stats about traffic control qdiscs and classes.
  • proc – Provides stats using the proc filesystem.
  • dummy – Generates static or randomized input for testing purposes.
  • null – Provides no stats / disable interface collection

Output Modules

  • curses – Default view as seen above
  • ascii – Prints highly configurable diagrams and lists to standard output.
  • format – Provides ability to format ascii output for scripting.
  • null – Disables primary output

For more in-depth information, please use the links in the resources section.

Specifying Input Modules

To select an input module you can issue the -i option followed by the desired module name. For example to use the proc input module:

Specifying Output Modules

Conversely, to specify a desired output module you can use the -o option. Here is an example using the ascii output module.

Conclusion

Bmon is a very powerful bandwidth monitoring tool. It has many options and configurations that are outside the scope of this tutorial. If you are interested in advanced usage of bmon, we suggest you read the detailed man pages and documentation available on it’s Github project page.

This post mentions some linux command line tools that can be used to monitor the network usage.

These tools monitor the traffic flowing through network interfaces and measure the speed at which data is currently being transferred. Incoming and outgoing traffic is shown separately.

Some of the commands, show the bandwidth used by individual processes. This makes it easy to detect a process that is overusing network bandwidth.

The tools have different mechanisms of generating the traffic report.

Some of the tools like nload read the “/proc/net/dev” file to get traffic stats, whereas some tools use the pcap library to capture all packets and then calculate the total size to estimate the traffic load.

Here is a list of the commands, sorted by their features.

Now lets take a look at each of the commands and how to use them to monitor network usage:

1. Nload

Nload is a commandline tool that allows users to monitor the incoming and outgoing traffic separately.

It also draws out a graph to indicate the same, the scale of which can be adjusted. Easy and simple to use, and does not support many options.

So if you just need to take a quick look at the total bandwidth usage without details of individual processes, then nload will be handy.

How to use bmon to monitor network bandwidth on linux

2. iftop

Iftop measures the data flowing t